IP Telephony

Contact Centers

Mobility

Services
Communication Server
Integral 55 / Integral 55 LX

Avaya-Tenovis GmbH & Co. KG

Kleyerstraße 94
60326 Frankfurt am Main
Telefon 0 800 266 - 10 00
Fax 0 800 266 - 12 19 Operating instructions
[email protected]
© 2005 All rights reserved for Avaya Inc. and Tenovis GmbH & Co. KG.
4.999.000.000 · 00/00/03 · T3 · de · es · gb · fr · it · nl · avaya.tenovis.de
Service Manual CSI55 LX

2 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 Service Manual CSI55 LX

Contents

1 About this Manual 14

2 Important notes 15
2.1 Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.2 Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.3 Delivery and transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.4 Protective earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.5 Required Servicing Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.6 Connections to V.24 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.7 EU Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

3 Product overview 20
3.1 Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.1.1 Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.1.2 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.1.3 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.1.4 Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3.2 Expansion options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3.2.1 Standing casing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
3.2.2 19” cabinets - 19” frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.3 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.3.1 Other weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
3.3.2 Reliability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.3.3 traffic capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

4 Modules 32
4.1 Single and twin module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
4.1.1 Procedure for Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
4.1.2 Board slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
4.1.3 General information on boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4.1.4 Access to the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
4.1.5 Inserting the Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
4.1.6 Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4.1.7 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
4.1.8 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
4.2 ICS (multi-module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

CSI55 LX 07/2006 3
Service Manual CSI55 LX

4.2.1 Rack and assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

4.2.2 Doubling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
4.2.3 General information on boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
4.2.4 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
4.2.5 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
4.3 B3 module (multi-module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
4.3.1 Board slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
4.3.2 General information on boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4.3.3 Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
4.3.4 Doubling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
4.3.5 Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
4.3.6 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

5 19” cabinets and cooling 59

5.1 Standing casing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
5.1.1 Cable routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
5.2 33HU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
5.3 42HU 500mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
5.4 42HU 730mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
5.5 42HU-can be disassembled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
5.6 Overview of components (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
5.7 Overview of components (2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
5.8 Selection of cabinets for installation of the Integral 55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
5.9 Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
5.9.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
5.9.2 Intrinsic convection, heat transmission through the cabinet surface . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
5.9.3 Intrinsic convection with issue of the hot air from inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
5.9.4 Forced convection, direct heat exchange using fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
5.9.5 Thermal offtake by cooling device: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
5.9.6 Forced circulation due to heat exchanger (air/air) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
5.9.7 Calculation formula for the effective cabinet surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
5.9.8 Flow chart: Air conditioning in a 19”cabinet for the installation of I55 . . . . . . . . . . . 90
5.10 Universal installation aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
5.11 Integral- Com- Center- ICC- V 01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
5.12 Integral- Com- Center- ICC- V 33 F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
5.13 Integral- Com- Center- ICC- V 02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

6 Power supply 94

4 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 Service Manual CSI55 LX

6.1 19”rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
6.1.1 PS350 Adaption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
6.1.2 FPE in cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
6.2 B3 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
6.2.1 Fuse Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
6.2.2 FPE in B3 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
6.3 PSL55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
6.4 PS280A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
6.5 PS350A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
6.6 ISPS (IMTU Supplementary Power Supply) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
6.6.1 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
6.7 Uninterrupted Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
6.7.1 Online UPS systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
6.7.2 Line-Interactive UPS systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
6.7.3 Supplementary components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
6.7.4 Explanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
6.7.5 Installation and service concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
6.7.6 Earthing measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
6.8 Earthing concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
6.8.1 General Requirements and Explanations for the Decision-Making Diagram . . . . . . . 137
6.8.2 Explanations for the terms SELV, TNV1, TNV2 and TNV3: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
6.8.3 Annex 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
6.8.4 Annex 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
6.8.5 Annex 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
6.8.6 Annex 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
6.8.7 Annex 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
6.8.8 Annex 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
6.9 Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

7 Doubling 143
7.1 Doubling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
7.2 Single module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
7.2.1 doubling PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
7.2.2 doubling CF* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
7.2.3 doubling *CB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
7.3 Twin module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
7.3.1 doubling PS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

CSI55 LX 07/2006 5
Service Manual CSI55 LX

7.3.2 doubling CF* (within a module) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

7.3.3 doubling *CB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
7.4 Multi-module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
7.4.1 Interconnected systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
7.4.2 MLB (Module Link Board) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
7.4.3 ISMx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
7.4.4 ICF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
7.4.5 IVZ on *CB boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
7.4.6 IVZ on separate *CB boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
7.4.7 Doubling of the PS in the B3 module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
7.4.8 Complete doubling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

8 Boards 156
8.1 General Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
8.2 Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
8.3 Block diagram of R1 rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
8.4 Control, Central Functions and Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
8.4.1 ACB/ACB1 Advanced Computer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
8.4.2 ASM3 Announcement Module 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
8.4.3 CBI1A3 CBus Interface 1 Adapter Version 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
8.4.4 CF22 Central Functions 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
8.4.5 CF2E Central Functions 2E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
8.4.6 CFIML Central Functions Inter Module Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
8.4.7 CL2M Clock 2 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
8.4.8 CL2ME Clock 2 Module Extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
8.4.9 DSPF Digital Signal Processing Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
8.4.10 EOCPF Electrical Optical Converter Plastic Fibre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
8.4.11 EOCSM/MM Electrical Optical Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
8.4.12 HSCB High Speed Computer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
8.4.13 ICF IMTU Central Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
8.4.14 ISMx Switching Matrix x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
8.4.15 MLB Module Link Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
8.4.16 MLBIML Module Link Board, Inter Module Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
8.4.17 R1RC Rack Connector for I55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
8.4.18 V24I/NI Insulated/Non-Insulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
8.4.19 V24M Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
8.5 Connector technology and signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

6 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 Service Manual CSI55 LX

8.5.1 ACB/ACB1 Advanced Computer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

8.5.2 AEV24B adapter Ethernet / V24 B module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
8.5.3 ASCxx Analogue Subscriber Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
8.5.4 AV24B Adapter V24 B Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
8.5.5 CA Cable Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
8.5.6 CA1B cable adapter 1 for B modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
8.5.7 CA2B cable adapter 2 for B modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
8.5.8 CA3B cable adapter 3 for B modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
8.5.9 CA3B/T cable adapter 3 for B modules TAREF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
8.5.10 CA4B cable adapter 4 for B modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
8.5.11 CA5B cable adapter 5 for B modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
8.5.12 CA6B cable adapter 6 for B modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
8.5.13 CAIB Cable Adapter I for B Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
8.5.14 CARUB Cable Adapter Russia B modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
8.5.15 CF22 Central Functions 22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
8.5.16 CF2E Central Functions 2E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
8.5.17 EDU Error Display Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
8.5.18 EES0B Emergency Extension Switch S0 B Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
8.5.19 EESS0 Emergency Extension Switch S0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
8.5.20 EESxB emergency extension switch B module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
8.5.21 ESBx External Signalling B Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
8.5.22 HSCB High Speed Computer Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
8.5.23 ICF IMTU Central Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
8.5.24 OFA2B/OFAS Optical Fibre Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
8.5.25 TER Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
8.6 Analog interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
8.6.1 ABSM Analog Subscriber Submodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
8.6.2 ABSM1 Analog Subscriber Submodule 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
8.6.3 ACSM Alternating Current Signalling Submodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
8.6.4 ADM Analog Digital Mixboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
8.6.5 ALSM Active Loop Submodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
8.6.6 ALSMF Active Loop Submodule France . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
8.6.7 ALSMH Active Loop Submodule Hong Kong . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
8.6.8 ASC2 Analog Subscriber Circuit 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
8.6.9 ASC21 Analog Subscriber Circuit 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
8.6.10 ASCxx Analogue Subscriber Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
8.6.11 ATA Analog Trunk Interface A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

CSI55 LX 07/2006 7
Service Manual CSI55 LX

8.6.12 ATA2 Analog Trunk Interface A2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

8.6.13 ATB Analog Trunk Interface B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
8.6.14 ATC Analog Trunk Interface C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
8.6.15 ATLC Analog TIE Line Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
8.6.16 DDID Direct Dialling Inward Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
8.6.17 JPAT JISCOS Public Analog Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
8.6.18 PLSM Passive Loop Sub Modul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
8.6.19 SIGA Signalling Unit A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
8.6.20 SIGB Signalling Unit B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
8.6.21 SIGC Signalling Unit C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
8.6.22 SIGD Signalling Unit D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
8.6.23 SIGE Signalling Unit E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
8.6.24 SIGF Signalling Unit F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
8.6.25 SIGG Signalling Unit G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
8.6.26 SIGH Signalling Unit H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
8.6.27 SSBA Signalling Sub Board A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
8.6.28 SSBB Signalling Sub Board B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
8.6.29 SSBC Signalling Sub Board C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
8.6.30 SSBD Signalling Sub Board D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
8.6.31 SSSM Simplex Signaling Sub Modul . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
8.6.32 SUPA Supplement A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
8.6.33 SUPB Supplement B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
8.6.34 SUTC Signaling Unit Trunk C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
8.6.35 SUTD Signalling Unit Trunk D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
8.7 Digital interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
8.7.1 ADM Analog Digital Mixboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
8.7.2 BVT2 Motherboard, Voice Transmitting Module 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
8.7.3 CA1B cable adapter 1 for B modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
8.7.4 CA2B cable adapter 2 for B modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
8.7.5 CA3B cable adapter 3 for B modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
8.7.6 CA3B/T cable adapter 3 for B modules TAREF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
8.7.7 CA4B cable adapter 4 for B modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
8.7.8 CA5B cable adapter 5 for B modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
8.7.9 CA6B cable adapter 6 for B modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
8.7.10 CAS Channel Associated Signalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
8.7.11 CL2M Clock 2 Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
8.7.12 CL2ME Clock 2 Module Extended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402

8 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 Service Manual CSI55 LX

8.7.13 DCON Digital Protocol Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

8.7.14 DECT21 ICU for DECT-Applications 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
8.7.15 DS02 Digital Linecard S0 Variant 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
8.7.16 DS03 Digital Linecard S0 Variant 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
8.7.17 DT0 Digital Linecard T0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
8.7.18 DT21 Digital Linecard T2 Variant 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
8.7.19 DUP03 Digital Subscriber UP0 HW Variant 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
8.7.20 DUPN Digital Subscriber UPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
8.7.21 EEADM Emergency Extension Analog Digital Mixboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
8.7.22 EES0B Emergency Extension Switch S0 B Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
8.7.23 EESS0 Emergency Extension Switch S0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
8.7.24 EMAC Extended Multi Access Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
8.7.25 HAMUX Home Agent Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
8.7.26 IMUX Integrated Multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
8.7.27 IPN Intelligent Private Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
8.7.28 MAC Multi Access Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
8.7.29 MULI Multi-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
8.7.30 OFA2B/OFAS Optical Fibre Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
8.7.31 S64LI Structured 64 KBit Line Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
8.7.32 SPCU Speech Compression Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
8.7.33 STSM S0/T0 Submodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
8.7.34 UIP Universal Interface Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
8.7.35 UKSM UK0 Submodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
8.7.36 UPSM UPN submodule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
8.7.37 V24M Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
8.7.38 X64LI kBit Line Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
8.8 IP Telephoning Gateways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
8.8.1 IPGW Internet Protocol Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
8.8.2 VOIP Voice over IP Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513

9 BS Confidata: 517
9.1 Packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
9.2 GCU configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
9.2.1 Package S1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
9.2.2 Package S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
9.2.3 Package I1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
9.2.4 I2 Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521

CSI55 LX 07/2006 9
Service Manual CSI55 LX

9.2.5 I3 Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522

9.2.6 Package I4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
9.3 Interface Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
9.3.1 Single Modules S1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
9.3.2 Twin module S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
9.3.3 Multi-Module I1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
9.3.4 Multi-Module I1 (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
9.3.5 Multi-Modules I2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
9.3.6 Multi-Module I2 (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
9.3.7 Multi-Modules I3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
9.3.8 Multi-Module I3 (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
9.3.9 Multi-Modules I4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
9.3.10 Multi-Module I4 (continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542

10 Cable network 545

10.1 Connections from CSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
10.1.1 Main Distribution Frame or Network Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
10.1.2 Service panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
10.2 Line lengths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
10.3 Configuration Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
10.4 Contact occupation of the modular plug connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
10.5 LWL-specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568

11 Note on DECT: 569

11.1 Intermodule Handover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
11.1.1 Application in the Multi-Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
11.1.2 Application in the Twin module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
11.1.3 Configurations not allowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
11.1.4 Connection of the external high precision reference clock to the CSI55 . . . . . . . . . . 573
11.2 Supply of the DECT-Net Base Station to the Integral 55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
11.3 Suitable cable types used to connect DECT RBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
11.4 The structure of the cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575

12 Notes to VolP 577

13 Operator sets 578

14 Measuring and Testing Tools 579

14.1 BA Board Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579

10 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 Service Manual CSI55 LX

14.2 CBT C-Bus Tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580

14.2.1 Hardware and Software Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
14.2.2 Installing the Printed Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
14.2.3 Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
14.2.4 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
14.2.5 Connection cable between CBT and PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
14.2.6 LEDs and Switch Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
14.2.7 Removing and Inserting the board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
14.3 MAHC Measuring Adapter Half Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
14.3.1 Line Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
14.3.2 Digital Measuring Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
14.3.3 Analog Measuring Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
14.3.4 LEDs and Switch Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
14.4 SP1 Spy Probe 1 (SP1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
14.5 V24IA V24 Interface Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX 590

15.1 About this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
15.2 Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
15.2.1 Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
15.2.2 Required Servicing Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
15.3 Product description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
15.3.1 Comparison Integral 55/Integral 55 Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
15.3.2 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
15.4 Base Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
15.4.1 Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
15.4.2 Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
15.4.3 Housing open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
15.4.4 Table unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
15.4.5 Install in the cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
15.4.6 Mounting on the wall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
15.4.7 Setting up in the room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
15.5 Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
15.5.1 ACBO Advanced Computer Board Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
15.5.2 ASC21 Analog Subscriber Circuit 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
15.5.3 ASCxx Analogue Subscriber Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
15.5.4 ATA Analog Trunk Interface A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628

CSI55 LX 07/2006 11
Service Manual CSI55 LX

15.5.5 CAS Channel Associated Signalling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632

15.5.6 DECT21 ICU for DECT-Applications 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
15.5.7 DSPF Digital Signal Processing Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
15.5.8 DT21 Digital Linecard T2 Variant 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
15.5.9 HSCBO High Speed Computer Board Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
15.5.10IPN Intelligent Private Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
15.5.11MBO Motherboard Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
15.5.12SBAO System Board Adapter Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
15.5.13VOIP Voice over IP Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
15.6 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
15.6.1 PSO Power Supply Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 669
15.6.2 PE or FPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
15.7 View of module in the ISM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674
15.8 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
15.9 Cable network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
15.9.1 Cross-connect cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
15.9.2 Connections from the BU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680

16 Index 685

12 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 Service Manual CSI55 LX

(c) All rights reserved. Copyright 2006 AVAYA GmbH & Co. KG Frankfurt/Main.
Edition: 07/2006
Reproductions and disclosure of information contained in this copyright-protected document, in any form or
by any means - graphical, electronic or mechanical, by photocopying, recording on disk or tape or storage in
a data retrieval system - even in parts - require the prior consent in writing of AVAYA.
All technical data, information and properties of the product described in this document have been compiled
to the best of our knowledge. They correspond to the state at the time of issue.
Subject to modification and improvements to the product in the course of technical developments.
AVAYA GmbH & Co. KG

CSI55 LX 07/2006 13
1 About this Manual

1 About this Manual

This manual contains information for sales personnel, service technicians and installers for the acquisition,
installation, service, maintenance and expansion of the Integral 55 Communication Server and Integral 55
Compact.

In this manual, abbreviations of boards and modules marked with an ”x” apply to specific variants of boards
and/or modules.
A separate manual is available for each individual application.

14 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 2 Important notes

2 Important notes

2.1 Safety Information

Prior to completing the connection of the system to the mains power, all cabling of the communication server
Integral 55 must be completed and checked.
System service and repairs are the exclusive domain of an authorised specialist!
The telecommunications system must be connected to properly installed, earthed mains socket. The power
supply voltage must correspond to the mains voltage. The provided mains cables must be used.
When connecting devices to the V.24 interfaces, only use the supplied shielded cables.
Each module must be connected to voltage compensation!
The occurrence of strong magnetic fields in the vicinity of the communication server Integral 55 must be
prevented!
The communication server Integral 55 must not be exposed to shock, impact or vibrations!
ESD precautions must be followed when working with boards susceptible to electrostatic shock.
For reasons of EMC, vacant slots should be covered with frontplates.
Prior to removing power supply modules, they must be separated from the mains voltage!
Prior to commissioning, pull the protective hoods over the power supply devices on the front side.
Subsequent to system startup, the communication server Integral 55 must be closed (dust covers and rear
panels depending on hardware configuration and module types)!
The following regulations or guidelines must be considered during system installation, startup and operation:

• DIN VDE 0100 Setting up heavy current systems

• DIN VDE 0105 Operating heavy current systems
• DIN VDE 0132 Fire countermeasures in electrical systems
• DIN VDE 0298 Use of cables and insulated wiring for heavy current systems
• DIN VDE 0800 Telecommunications engineering
• DIN VDE 0891 Use of cables and insulated wiring for telecommunication and information processing
systems
• DIN 4102 Combustive properties of building materials and components
• DIN 5035 Interior lighting with artificial light
• VDI 2054 Air conditioning systems for data processing environments

Additional regulations or guidelines may apply in special or individual circumstances.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 15
2 Important notes

2.2 Environmental Conditions

The following placement guidelines must be considered in order to ensure trouble free operation of the Com-
munication Server Integral 55:

• The room must be dry and provide options for ventilation.

• Gross weight, fully equipped - seeTechnical data → 27.
• The floor covering should possess antistatic properties. It should be easy to clean and abrasion resistant.

• If the system is to be installed in tight quarters, sufficient ventilation should be ensured. The Communi-
cation Server Integral 55 should not be exposed to radiated heat (e.g. radiator).
• If the PSL55 is doubled, the mains connections should be established using separate circuits (phase
and fuse).
• An additional number of earthed mains sockets must be provided for service purposes.

Climatic conditions for operation, storage and transportation - see Technical data → 27.

Access to the Communication Server Integral 55 (cabinet, standing casing) must be

guaranteed from the front and the back.

2.3 Delivery and transportation

Only transport the Communication Server Integral 55 in its original packaging.

Check that the system is complete by referring to the delivery note and the accompanying installation docu-
ments.

2.4 Protective earthing

All modules must generally be earthed via a separately routed protective conductor. Earthing via the protective
conductor of the power cord does not suffice.
The protective conductor must have a green-yellow insulating jacket and a minimum cross-section of 2.5 mm2
if mechanical protection is present, or 4 mm2 if this is not the case. More detailed information can be found in
the chapter Earthing concept → 136
You will find ready-made solutions in the chapters GRAB=”T”>19” cabinet → 107, Standing casing → 110
and Housing/Cabinet solutions → 112.
The following must always be taken into account:

• The lockable earth plug with cable (49.9804.5750) is only used in standing casings with one rack.

• The FPE conductors in the cabinet are executed in green-yellow and have a minimum cross-section
of 2,5 mm2. The potential equalisation conductor (PA) outside is protected and has a minimum cross-
section of 6 mm2.
• Two cables have been defined for the fixed connection of the cabinet:

– 49.9906.7592 5m with CEE plug blue

16 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 2 Important notes

– 49.9906.7593 10m with CEE plug blue

• If more devices have been installed it is necessary to check if the leakage current is greater than 3.5
mA. If this is the case these devices, too, have to be connected tightly to the potential equalisation bar.
• If the leakage current is greater than 3.5 mA it is imperative to provide an earthing connection prior to
connection to the supply circuit!
• Leakage currents of UPS systems must be taken into account. If the current is >3.5 mA the UPS must
be provided with a FPE fixed connection.
• If a cabinet is supplied by an external UPS the connection must be made using the cable 49.9906.8660
(3x1.5 mm2 with earthing-pin plug and conductor end sleeves).
• With redundant power supply of the CSI55 ensure that the power supplies are powered by two different
supply circuits. (cabinet with two multiple sockets)
• If the CSI55 rack is to be installed in third-party cabinets without a potential equalisation bar make
sure that the FPE of the rack is connected to the potential equalisation conductor (PA) via a potential
equalisation bar that has to be retro-fitted or that it is connected directly to the potential equalisation
conductor.
• If cabinets on rollers are connected this always has to be done using a flexible connecting cable (litz-wire
cable).
• If the computer board with V24 interface of the CSI55 is used, preference should be given ot the insulated
interface V24I (28.7640.3242) or similar.

In the chapters FPE in cabinets → 106 andFPE in B3 module → 120 you will find a description of how to
connect the earthing conductor.
19”cabinet → 107

2.5 Required Servicing Procedures

If servicing is required the Helpdesk has been called by:

• the customer,
• the technician/service technician,
• Remote alarm signalling,
• TNS (off hours)

.
In most cases, the Helpdesk will already have located the fault through the use of remote diagnostics. If this is
the case, if necesary, simply replacing the faulty module will suffice. It should be stated, however, that remote
diagnostics are not capable of locating every fault.
You must then:

• Condense the available information

• Interpret fault returns/indications or displays
• Locate the fault using the service PC
• Carry out diagnostics with the aid of the Helpdesk.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 17
2 Important notes

2.6 Connections to V.24 Interfaces

To prevent the destruction of the V.24 interface drivers and receiver components when
connecting circuits, it is imperative to use cables that are shielded on both ends (e.g.
27.5630.0561, .0562, .0564, .0565 or similar).

18 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 2 Important notes

2.7 EU Declaration of Conformity

We Avaya GmbH & Co. KG declare that the products Integral 55 and Integral 55 Compact (telecommunication
systems in various upgrade stages) concur with the basic requirements and other relevant provisions of EU
guideline 1999/5/EU concerning on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the
mutual recognition of their conformity.
The EU Declaration of Conformity is enclosed to the product and can be also requested at the Internet ad-
dresses:
http://www.avaya.de/gcm/emea/de/includedcontent/termsofuse.htm
or
http://www.avaya.de/gcm/emea/de/includedcontent/conformity.htm
or you use the search with the headword ”conformity” in our Internet.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 19
3 Product overview

3 Product overview

The boundaries between computers and telephones are becoming increasingly hazy. TC systems that can be
installed directly in the data environment represent a further step in this direction. In this context, it is important
to find integral solution approaches, which regard EDP, internet and telephone environments as a unit.
CSI55 is a product in 19” technology, which adapts itself with this construction to the IT environment. It is made
up of uniform racks, which can be upgraded in any way. Accordingly, the CSI55 can handle port numbers of
less than 30 to over 32,000 within a multi-modular configuartion.
In essence, the marketing strategy is based on the sale of solutions. This strategy is already in practice under
the term ICC ”Integral Communication Center”. CSI55’s high flexibility enables the satisfaction of any customer
wishes.
The merging CSI55 with the application integration of the ICC has created a highly flexible product, which will
satisfy any customer. The new system offers a large range of opportunities in order to make use of all aspects
of modern telecommunications. These include e.g. voice over IP, call identification, least cost routing and
many more.
Integral 55 systems do not require regularly scheduled maintenance procedures.
The technician requires no system specific tools.
Special tools are available for factory trained technicians.

3.1 Structure

CSI55 is made up of uniform racks, built in 19-inch technology. They can be installed in standard 19” cabinets
or in 19” frames. In addition, the racks can be installed in specially developed, more cost-efficient standing
cases (see chapter Standing cases).
Up to four racks can be joined together to form a single module by means of 8-wire CAT6 copper cables with a
length of up to 30m. This means that the racks can be assembled flexibly. For example they can be distributed
over several 19-inch cabinets. The following provides a more detailed explanation of the HW components.

3.1.1 Rack

One rack consists of 8 slots for connecting circuit boards (ISUs) and 2 slots for the control boards (HSCB/ACB,
CF2E/CF22). In addition, each end (right and left) has a slot for the power supply.

20 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 3 Product overview

3.1.1.1 Rack assembly

Communication Server Integral 55, rack for installation in a 19” cabinet or in a standing casing (max. 256
ports), view from the front.

1. Left side
2. Upper part
3. Backplane
4. Fan (a fan must be fitted to the rack with ACB/HSCB and CF22/CF2E)
5. Right side
6. Board frame for eight connecting circuit boards

CSI55 LX 07/2006 21
3 Product overview

Communication Server Integral 55, rack for installation in a 19” cabinet or in a standing casing (max. 256
ports), view from the rear.

1. Right side
2. Connection boards on the backplane
3. Upper part
4. Board frame
5. Left side
6. Backplane
7. Rear cover

8. Fastening groove
9. Fan (a fan must be fitted to the rack with ACB/HSCB and CF22/CF2E)

Dimensions: 485x400(9HU)x418 (WxHxL)

3.1.2 Modules

In the CSI55 one module is made up of up to 4 individual uniform racks. In this way, a single module that
is initially made up of one rack can be expanded later on simply by adding further racks. One module of the
CSI55 is made up of up a maximum of 4 racks.
Up to 3 expansion racks can be connected to the basic rack using the connecting module ”R1 Rack Connector”
R1RC.
Depending on the number of racks in use, the configurations are called C1 to C4.

22 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 3 Product overview

• C1: consists of one rack

• C2: consists of 2 racks
• C3: consists of 3 racks

• C4: consists of 4 racks

The control modules are only used in the basic rack. The expansion racks (racks 2 to 4) are connected
with the basic rack via an 8-wire copper cable in a star-shaped pattern and do not require any separate control.
The slots for HSCB/ACB and CF2E/CF22 are not used beyond the second rack and are covered by frontplates.
Several modules (C1 to C4) can be joined together to form a twin or multi-group system.
For this purpose it is possible to use both, modules of different sizes (C1 to C4) in mixed form, and a system
network made up of the CSI55 and the predecessor system I33.

3.1.2.1 Single module

A single module can be made up of up to 4 racks, thus enabling a maximum of 1,024 ports with only one
control. This number of ports is achieved in that each subscriber receives a B-channel for the transmission of
speech and a D-channel for signaling. The maximum possible number of ports may be reduced, depending
on the number of participants with 2B+D configuration. In extreme cases, in which each subscriber has a
2B+D connection, the maximum number of ports is reduced to 512.
The expansion racks are connected by 8-wire CAT6 copper cable with a length of up to 30m, which transmits
all information (signal pulse, CBus, Highways...). They are a form of separate modules without control, and
can be stacked or arranged in star shapes.

The Single module in tabular form

Modules: One module is made up of 1-4 racks (R1, R2, R3, R4). The CF22/CF2E is only
connected with the R1 in slot 10. The ACB/HSCB board is only connected with the
R1 rack, usually slot 9 (unless there is doubling of CF22/CF2E).
Module types: The following names have been defined for the various module types:
C1: Module with one rack
C2: Module with 2 racks
C3: Module with 3 racks
C4: Module with 4 racks
The racks in the modules receive consecutive numbers. The basic rack is called R1, followed by R2 to R4.
Rack number: The following slots and CBI addresses have been defined for the racks R1-R4:
R1: Slot 1-10/CBI-address 06 - 0F + 40
R2: Slot 11-18/CBI-address 10 - 19 + 41
R3: Slot 19-26/CBI-address 46 - 4F +42
R4: Slot 29-36/CBI-address 50 - 59 + 43
Backplane: The backplane used in racks R1-R4 is always the same. The bus terminal
resistances are integrated on the backplane. Additional submodules are not
necessary.
Power supply: 2 power supplies can be connected to each rack. The 1st power supply is
connected to the right-hand power supply slot. The 2nd power supply can be
connected to the left-hand power supply slot for redundant operation or to increase
power.
Alternatively a PS350A can be installed on the left side of the rack. For this
purpose the PS350 Adaption set is available.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 23
3 Product overview

Restriction on the
number of
subscribers: • 960 digital/analogue subscribers (assumption: at least two boards per
module are not intended for subscribers)

• 640 analogue subscribers (restriction due to available DSP resources)

• 864 subscribers with Stimulus terminals (restriction due to available
processing capacity on the computer board)

3.1.2.2 Twin module

Twin module configurations consist of two single modules, coupled with each other. These are connected
directly to the CF2E/CF22 board via the EOCSM or EOCMM or EOCPF submodules using fibre-optic cable.
The individual modules can be put together and assembled in any way. The maximum number of ports with a
twin module configuration is 2,048 (per subscriber 1B+D).
The fibre-optic connection between two modules can have a cable length of up to 15 kilometres. Larger
distances can also be covered. In this case the modules can be network connected for example with QSIG.
Connections of this kind are installed very often in corporate networks.

1. FOC
2. 8-wire CAT6 copper cable with a length of up to 30m

3.1.2.3 Multi-module

Large systems are built using multi-modules. A multi-module is used to link several individual modules. For
up to 16 modules this can be done by means of an Interconnection Server ICS. If more than 16 modules have
to be linked, up to 32 single modules (up to 128 racks if only C4 modules are used) can be connected to a B3
module to form one system. Such a system provides 32.768 ports.
Here, too, the connection to the multi-module is done on the system module side via the CF2E/CF22 module
with the EOCSM or EOCMM or EOCPF submodules and using fibre-optic cable.

24 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 3 Product overview

Thanks to fibre-optic links, the individual modules can be installed at a large distance from each other (up to
15 km, larger distances using QSIG). This way, for example individual modules or module systems can be
distributed over the company premises. This is possible either across several storeys within one building or
even in different buildings.

1. FOC
2. 8-wire CAT6 copper cable with a length of up to 30m

3.1.3 Power supply

The CSI55 is fed from a power supply unit specially designed for this purpose, called
PSL55, material number: 49.9902.4943 → 122.
The system contains two slots to provide the option of doubling the power supply. The mains units can be
used for redundant operation and also in order to double capacity. in redundant operation, the second mains
unit takes over the functions in the event of the first unit failing. Connect a second mains unit to the left-hand
slot in the event of technical reasons (more than 5 DECT boards in one rack!) necessitating an increase in
capacity.
Please observe that redundant operation will not be possible in this case!

CSI55 LX 07/2006 25
3 Product overview

Occupancy of slots in R1 rack

1. AO boards
2. Control modules

3. PSL55 (mandatory)
4. PSL55 (optional)

Alternatively a PS350A can be installed on the left side of the rack. For this purpose the
PS350 Adaption → 94

3.1.4 Configurations

Like I33, the CSI55 also realises single, twin and multi-modular configurations. CSI55 offers high flexibility,
thus enabling the realisation of systems in a small port range and also up to 32,000 ports as a single system.
Unlike I33, CSI55 does not require an exchange of modules for any system expansion! All you need to do is
connect a new expansion rack. Even if a customer still owns an I33 system, he or she can expand it using
new I55 racks, thus realising a mixed form of the old and the new integral systems.
CSI55 and I33 systems can be operated together in a system network.

3.2 Expansion options

One single rack represents a fully operative Communication Server I55. The rack can be installed in a standard
19” cabinet or in a standing casing.
One rack consists of 8 slots for connecting circuit boards (ICUs) and 2 slots for the control boards (ACB/HSCB,
CF22/CF2E). As a result, there are the following expansion options:

• A single 19”-Rack.
• One single rack in a 19” standing casing.
• A single or multi rack for installation in a 19” cabinet or 19” frame existing at the customer’s location.
• A single or several racks in a provided 19” cabinet or 19” frame.
• Up to four racks (standing casing, racks in 19” cabinets, racks in 19” frames or any combination thereof)
connected by flexible cables, can form a single module .

3.2.1 Standing casing

26 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 3 Product overview

In this assembly option, a CSI55 rack can be installed in a

specially developed standing casing.
The special construction means that there are two height
units available for additional components such as a 19” server
or UPS systems.
The dimensions of the standings casings are 550 mm x 550
mm x 11 HU; they stand on four lockable wheels. No more
than two standing casings may be stacked.

3.2.2 19” cabinets - 19” frames

The CSI55 racks are installed in standard 19” cabinets or in frames. A

maximum of 3 racks (one rack has 9 U) can be installed in one 19”
cabinet with 33 U, which can be transported vertically through a
standard door on a transport pallet. However, this does assume that the
cabinet will be sufficiently ventilated or air conditioned (see Technical
specifications).
At the installation of additional components (data systems technology,
server, UPS) the climatological conditions on every individual case must
be checked according to the guidelines described in the chapter
Tecnical Data!
Additionally, single or several racks can be installed in a 19” assembly
frame. On the one hand, like the 19” cabinets, these frames can be
supplied as new ones, on the other hand, these racks can also be
installed in frames existing at the customer’s location.

3.3 Technical Data

Connecting options, interfaces

CSI55 LX 07/2006 27
3 Product overview

Network interfaces T0 T2
Administration network S0 V.24
management
Subscriber interfaces a/b UPN US0 UPD UK0

maximum analogue/ digital/ Stimulus/ total/ IP clients/ DECT

number of module module module module system subscr./
subscribers system
640 960 840 960 5000 2000

Modules C1 C2 C3 C4
Connection possibilities in 256 512 768 1024
ports: 1B+D per port
Connection possibilities in 128 256 384 512
ports: 2B+D per port

Connecting circuit 8 16 24 32
modules (max.)
Control module 2 2 2 2

Power supply

Rack
Dimensions WxHxL 485x400(9HU)x418
Empty weight 16.6 kg
Weight equipped with one PSL55, 22.9kg
all module slots occupied
Weights in detail Other weights → 29

Network connection
Mains voltage 230V ± 10%
Mains frequency 50 Hz -6% +26%
Circuit protection Automatic circuit breaker 16A Type C slow acting

Further information
Sound pressure level
at a distance of 1 m according to <39dB(A)
EN ISO 3744
in the rack 45dB(A)
Reliability and traffic values
Technical reliability Reliability → 29
Traffic values Traffic capacity → 30

28 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 3 Product overview

Telephones/terminals
Terminals of the T93 and T1 series and the telephones of the T3 series can be connected as well as various
IP phones if our IPV solution is used.

Environmental conditions/Air conditioning

DIN ETS Temperature range Relative humidity
Storage: 300.019-Kl.1.1 -5 ◦ C to +45 ◦ C
Transport: 300.019-Kl.2.2 -25◦ C to +70◦ C
Operation: 300.019-Kl.232 -5 ◦ C to +45 ◦ C 5 to 95%
Air conditioning Passive ventilation (e.g. an opening for incoming air in the skirting board or
door) is sufficient if up to 2 racks are installed. Active ventilation is necessary if
more than 2 racks or additional active components are installed.

3.3.1 Other weights

Other weights

two modules R1RG 0.278 kg

a fan assembly set 0.338 kg
Power Supply PSL55 3.600 kg
Standard cable 16x2 connecting circuit, length: 5 m 0.800 kg
Mains connection cable, length: 3 m 0.240 kg

The weight of a rack was found using the following equipment

Rack without cable with:

a fan
a HSCB board incl. a Calluna disk drive
a CF2E board
a DT21 board
a DUPN boards
a DUPN board
a ADM board with a submodule ABSM and a submodule STSM
two ASC2 boards
two ATA boards, each with four SIGA submodules
eight cable adapters CA1B
a AV24B board
a ESB board
as well as
one power supply PSL 55

22.920 kg

CSI55 LX 07/2006 29
3 Product overview

3.3.2 Reliability

The reliability values (MTBF, availability, failure time per year) are specified for CSI55. This focuses on different
system parameters.
Total system failure is considered. Total failure means that none of the functions in the entire system can be
used. This corresponds with a failure of all subscribers.
In all of the values stated herein, the power supply devices were also taken into consideration. However, the
failure of power supply devices is less frequent than the failure of mains voltage due to the the power plant. If
UPS (uninterrupted power supply) is not used, this will lead to total system failure in both cases. This must be
taken into account during the use of the values.
If invitations to tender specify that the system reliability values must be stated without power supply devices,
the tables for the system can be applied with the power supply doubled.
Reliability CSI55

MTBF (years) Availability (%) Failure time

p.a.
Single module not redundant 34 99,9993 3.5 min.
configuration Redundant power 59 99,9996 2 min.
supply
Redundant power 147 99,9998 < 1 min.
supply and central
functions

MTBF (years) Availability (%) Failure time

p.a.
Twin module not redundant 2 548 151 99,9999 <1s
configuration Redundant power 7 724 300 99,9999 <1s
supply
Redundant power 47 176 407 99,9999 <1s
supply and central
functions

MTBF (years) Availability (%) Failure time

p.a.
Multi-module not redundant 2 548 151 99,9999 <1s
configuration Redundant power 7 724 300 99,9999 <1s
supply
Redundant power 47 176 407 99,9999 <1s
supply and central
functions

30 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 3 Product overview

3.3.3 traffic capacity

The term traffic capacity can be broken down into dynamic and static traffic capacity.
The dynamic traffic capacity is the capacity provided by the system. It is specified in BHCA (Busy Hour Call
Attempts) and measures the number of calls that can be processed in an average busy hour. For ACD systems
the unit BHCC is used (Busy Hour Call Completions) and measures the number of calls that are connected in
an average busy hour and reach at least a queue with a recorded announcement.
The static traffic capacity describes the capacity of the switching matrix. It is specified in Erlang (Erl).
The basis for the dimensioning of telephone systems the FTZ guideline 12TR2. It specifies a traffic value of
0.3 Erlang for digital subscribers (2B+D) (see German BAPT regulations for traffic values).
The values listed in the tables below apply to the CSI55:
Traffic capacity up to E070V08:

Dynamic
Single module 8000 BHCA
Twin module 16000 BHCA
Multi-module 24000 to 350000 BHCA depending on configuration
Static
Single module Non-blocking (1 Erlang/B channel)
Twin module Non-blocking (1 Erlang/B channel)
Multi-module 0.88 Erlang with digital ports only and with a proportion of 50% of the
traffic inside the module and 50% between modules.

Traffic capacity with IEE2:

Dynamic
Single module 20000 BHCA
Twin module 40000 BHCA
Multi-module 60000 to 750000 BHCA depending on configuration
Static
Single module Non-blocking (1 Erlang/B channel)
Twin module Non-blocking (1 Erlang/B channel)
Multi-module 0.88 Erlang with digital ports only and with a proportion of 50% of the
traffic inside the module and 50% between modules.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 31
4 Modules

4 Modules

A module is a complete unit which is fully operative. The smalles module is an Integral 55 rack. The following
table shows a rough overview of the possible modules:

Module overview
Module Description Racks
max.
Single modules consists of 1 to 4 racks 4
Connection: 8-wire CAT6 copper cable, length <30m
Twin module Two single modules Connection 8
fibre-optic cable, length <15km, or via QSIG for larger
distances
Multi-module 3 to 16 modules with ICS, up to 32 modules with B3 64 or 128
Connection: Fibre-optic cable, length <15km.

4.1 Single and twin module

One module can be made up of up to four racks.

The following restriction on the number of subscribers per module must be assumed for various reasons:

• 960 digital/analogue subscribers (assumption: at least two boards per module are not intended for
subscribers)
• 640 analogue subscribers (restriction due to available DSP resources)
• 864 subscribers with Stimulus terminals (restriction due to available processing capacity on the computer
board HSCB)

These restrictions only take effect with the use of the new ratio boards (twice the number of ports).
Twin module configurations consist of two single modules, coupled with each other.

4.1.1 Procedure for Installation

Depending on the configuration, the racks are, or must be, installed in standing casings or in 19” cabinets.

4.1.2 Board slots

For reasons of electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), board slots which are not occupied must be provided with
metal shields.

Board slot Material number: 49.9901.9774

Power supply unit Material number: 49.9903.1809

32 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 4 Modules

When installing the shields they have to be held parallel to the front side because otherwise
there is danger that no contact to the housing will be established.

In the view on the left you can see a C4

module with the board slots, the
corresponding
in decimal form and the
in hexadecimal form.
The addresses and slot numbers of
smaller modules are identical, please
ignore other expansion modules in this
view (for example, consider only R1 and
R2 for C2).
Please note:
The slots with the CBI addresses
19;4F;59 (slots 20, 28 and 38) are not
suitable for the use of a ACB/HSCB
because there is no power fail signal on
these slots.

4.1.3 General information on boards

The boards used in the module are listed hereafter:

CSI55 LX 07/2006 33
4 Modules

Boards for Connection Technology and Signalling

AEV24B Adapter Ethernet V24 B module

AV24B Adapter V.24 for B Modules
ESBx External Signalling B Module
CAxB Cable Adapter
OFA2B Optical Fibre Adapter 2 B Module
OFAS Optical Fibre Adapter Single mode
CARUB Cable Adapter Russia B Module
EESxB Emergency Extension Switch B Module

Boards for Control, Central Functions and Transport

ACB Advanced Computer Board

HSCB High Speed Computer Board
DSPF Digital Signal Processing Function
CF22 Central Function 22 (used in all modules)
CF2E Central Function 2E (used in all modules)
R1RC R1 Rack Connector for I55

Boards for Analog Interfaces

ASCxx Analog Subscriber Circuit

ATLC Analog Tie Line Circuit
ATxx Analog Trunk Interface
DDID Direct Dialling Inward Circuit
JPAT JISCOS Public Analog Trunk
ADM Analogue/Digital Mixboard

Boards for Digital Interfaces

DUP03 Digital Linecard UPN

DUPN Digital Linecard UPN
DT0 Digital Linecard TIE/T0
DT21 Digital Linecard TIE/T2 (S2M)
DS02 Digital Linecard S0
DECT21 Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunication
CAS Channel Associated Signalling
IPN Intelligency Private Network
IMUX Integrated Multiplexer
DCON Digital Protocol Converter
MAC Multi Access Circuit Board
HAMUX Home Agent Multiplexer
BVT2 (part of a PC, Home Agent)
MULI Multi-line

34 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 4 Modules

UIP Universal Interface Platform

ADM Analogue/Digital Mixboard

Boards for IP telephony

IPGW Internet Protocol Gateway

VoIP Voice over IP Board

Boards for Power Supply

PSL55 in racks R1 to R4 Power Supply Low 55

PS350A in racks R1 to R4 Power Supply 350A
(optional)

4.1.4 Access to the system

The available and familiar service programmes can be accessed in the following ways:

• Via V.24 with a connected terminal/PC in MML dialogue.

• Using the operator position in MML dialogue.
• Using S0 access via protocol stack.

The V.24 and S0interfaces can be accessed on the Service Panel.

Although this communication level presupposes the availability of a PC with corresponding software, it corre-
sponds only to a conventional MML dialogue (transparent mode).
File Transfer
File transfer PC <—> HGS (Background Memory)
Traffic measurement
The VEME traffic measurement can be activated by one of the aforementioned methods; the resulting data
however is output via the file handling system to the V.24 interfaces.
Central Call Charge Data Recording (ZGDE)
The ZGDE generally outputs data via the file handling system to the V.24 interfaces.
Callback
It is possible to set up an automatic connection to a PC or a service centre.

4.1.5 Inserting the Connecting Cables

The connection of the Communication Server Integral 55 with the MDF or NT is implemented using the sup-
plied connecting cables. The connectors for these cables are located on the adapter modules (cable adapters),
which can be reached from the rear side of the rack.
Example: 19” cabinet

CSI55 LX 07/2006 35
4 Modules

Open the 19” cabinet

Mark the cable at both ends (server and MDF) using the supplied labels.

Attach the connecting cable at the main distribution frame first, and then at the PBX.

Feed the ends of the connecting circuit cable into the console and then into the modules. The cable guides
are illustrated.

Rear side of cabinet with wiring

Insert the Champ plug of the connecting cable into the plug sockets of the adapter modules according to the
configuration. The adapter modules are held in place by set-squares.
Attach the connecting cables to the provided fastening clamps in the racks using cable binders.
Cover the area with the CA cover.

36 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 4 Modules

Rack in standing casing, rear side with CA cover.

Each connecting circuit of a connecting circuit board is fitted with an overvoltage protection device to 4 kV on
the output side. Make sure that removed boards are placed back into the same slot (various equipment of the
connecting circuit boards with submodules).Ç

4.1.6 Connectivity

No more than four racks can be connected to form a module during the installation of a 19” cabinet.
Furthermore, an optical waveguide cable can be used to connect two of these modules directly.

• four racks (one module) and four racks (second module).

This presumes that the group is equipped with the CF22/CF2E boards. This board must also be compleeted
by the Sub LP EOCSM/MM/PF.Ç
If three or more of these groups are to be connected to form a PBX, they must be connected using a B3
multi-module or ICS.
This is done via the fibre-optic cable on the MLB board of the multi-module. This presumes also that the
modules are equipped with the CF22/CF2E boards.
The R1 rack can also be used as part of a network. Coupling is implemented via S2M on the DT21 or S0
submodules of the DT0 or ADM boards.

4.1.7 Switching on

Single module
Check the stable position of the power supply devices and power supply cables.
Cover all slots with the slot covers.
Insert all required covers over the front panels of the ACB or HSCB and CF22 or CF2E boards.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 37
4 Modules

R1 rack in the standing casing

1. Slot cover
2. Covers for ACB or HSCB and CF22 or CF2E
3. Protective bracket for the mains connection cable

Pull the protective hoods over the slots of the mains connection cable on the front of the power supply devices.
Insert the earthed mains plug(s) of the mains connection cable(s) for the racks in their designated earthed
mains sockets.
Startup with the ACB board
The module is now switched on and is loading the programs (loading duration less/equal 15 min).

38 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 4 Modules

If the illustrated green LEDs L1 to L2 of the Advanced Computer Board ACB are illuminated, the module is
ready for operation.
Startup with the HSCB board
The module is now switched on and is loading the programs (loading duration less/equal 10 min).

If the illustrated yellow LEDs L7 to L10 of the High Speed Computer Board HSCB are off, the module is ready
for operation.
Twin module
Check whether only one ESU is active in the Communication Server Integral 55 (DIL switch to CF22/CF2E).
Startup with the ACB board
(Information yet to come!)
Startup with the HSCB board
In twin operation, the S3 switch of the HSCB board without HGS should be placed in the right-hand position.
Switch on both modules of the server.
The loading phases shown in the modules (LEDs of the HSCB boards) may differ from time to time.
Having switched on both modules, first run through loading phases 15 to 6.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 39
4 Modules

From this point, the HSCB board without HGS is held at loading phase 6 while the HSCB with inserted HGS
runs through the remaining loading phases 5 and 4 (access to HGS).
The HSCB board without HGS subsequently runs through loading phases 5 and 4.
Finally both HSCB boards run through loading phases 3 to 0.

HSCB Loading Phases

No. L7 L8 L9 L10 Phase name

15 1 1 1 1 Start reset phase
14 1 1 1 0 Test flash-PROM
13 1 1 0 1 Test QUICC
12 1 1 0 0 Test real time clock
11 1 0 1 1 Test C-bus interface
10 1 0 1 0 Test DUART (V.24 ports)
9 1 0 0 1 Test dynamic RAM
8 1 0 0 0 Output hardware image
7 0 1 1 1 End reset phase
6 0 1 1 0 Initial program loading (IPL)/IPL ready flag
5 0 1 0 1 STIN program loader is loaded and started
4 0 1 0 0 Operating system has been loaded and started (restart)
3 0 0 1 1 User programs (have been dispatched) have been loaded
2 0 0 1 0 Start of customer data loading in the user programs
1 0 0 0 1 All customer data loaded Start commissioning of module(s)
0 0 0 0 0 Module(s) in operation

1 = LED on
0 = LED off

4.1.8 Troubleshooting

Power supply

Fault Action
Yellow LED on the PS350A power supply Check the mains voltage.
unit does not light up If mains voltage is present, replace the power supply unit.
Green LED on the power supply unit Check the mains voltage.
does not light up Check the battery voltage (for PS350A only). Observe battery
switch function on PS350A!
First check whether the malfunction can be rectified by
removing the board(s).
If this is the case, replace with new board(s).
If this is not the case, replace the power supply unit.

General Points

40 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 4 Modules

Fault Action
with ACB
Loading procedure failed during first (Information yet to come!)
startup
with HSCB
Loading procedure failed during first Small reset (restart)
commissioning (single module) Switch S2 (HSCB board) in left position, switch S1 (HSCB) in
left and then back to middle position
Large reset
Switch S2 in right position, switch S1 in left and then back to
middle position, switch S2 to left position after loading has
finished (loading phase 0)
Loading procedure failed during first In the module with HSCB board and without HDD, check
commissioning (twin module) whether LED L8 on the CF22/CF2E board is flashing.
If not, check the optical waveguide connections. If there is no
connection, establish it.
If subsequently necessary for these modules:
Small reset (restart)
Switch S2 (HSCB board) in left position, switch S1 (HSCB) in
left and then back to middle position
Large reset
Switch S2 in right position, switch S1 in left and then back to
middle position, switch S2 to left position after loading has
finished (loading phase 0)

Further Course of Action

with ACB
(Information yet to come!)
with HSCB
First check the displays of the HSCB board with inserted HGS.
Then check the displays of the HSCB board without HGS (Twin Module).
Note down the status of the LEDs on all boards.
Inform your Service Control Centre.

4.2 ICS (multi-module)

Mains voltage
The ICS is operated with the PSL55. Therefore it is suitable for connection to 230 V; ±10 %, 50 Hz -6% +26%
(47 to 63 Hz). For more details, see PSL55 → 122.
Power dissipation

Max. power dissipation with expansion for an 8-group system 95 W

(A MLB board fully equipped with 8 EOC)
Max. power dissipation with expansion for a 12-group system 115 W
(two MLBs, one equipped with 8 EOC, the other with 4 EOC)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 41
4 Modules

Max. power dissipation with expansion for a 16-group system 130 W

(Full expansion with two MLBs each equipped with 8 EOC)

Board slots
The slots in the ICS are arranged as follows:

The slots for the ICF and ISM2 boards have a 27.5 mm spacing. The two slots for the MLB boards have a
spacing of 68.75 mm. as the MLBs are equipped with EOC submodules.
The slots for the individual boards have the following C-bus addresses:

42 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 4 Modules

4.2.1 Rack and assembly

The assembly kit 49.9904.4791 must be ordered for the assembly of the ICS.
Shielding
Since the front side of the rack is the EMC barrier it is necessary to always create a complete cover. The slots
of the ISM, ICF boards and a PSL55 power supply are always occupied, the shielding function is provided by
the front panels of the boards.
The slots of the MLB board must be provided with the same shields regardless of whether they are occupied
or free. The shields are part of the scope of delivery of the rack.
The table shows the material numbers of the shields for the MLB and power supply slots:

Slot Cover material number

MLB free and occupied slots 49.9906.2856
Power supply (free slot) 49.9903.1809

Installation of optical waveguides

The optical waveguides are led in via an opening in the backplane, which is located behind the MLB slots.
They are linked to the EOCXX boards on the front side and these are then fitted to the MLB or MLBIML board
(as applicable) and locked in place.

Board MLB EOCx submodules

1. Tool for locking and unlocking submodule EOC *

2. MLB board
3. OWG twin cable
4. Isolating hose facility *
5. Duct for OWG
6. Sending

CSI55 LX 07/2006 43
4 Modules

7. Receiving
8. EOCPF submodule
9. EOCMM/SM submodule

10. locking
11. unlocking

* Component of tool kit for B3 module (OWG/EOCxx)

Contacting the fans, ESB installation; CA3B
The multipoint connectors for installation of the ESB and CA3B boards are located under the rear cover hood.
The slot TP1E is designed for the ESB board and the slot TP1C for the CA3B board. To connect them, the
fixing screws on the rear ICS hood are loosened and the hood is removed. The boards are pressed into the
slots designed for them.
The connections on the fans are linked to the connections on the ESB board for fans (see also Pin strips on
the ESB → 278). The cables for this are laid out so that they go through the cover hood.
Then the hood is replaced and screwed on firmly using the two screws at the lower end.
Earth connection
The protective earth connection is achieved via the earthing terminal on the rear side of the housing. The
ground clamp is mounted between the earthing sign and the ICS type plate.

4.2.2 Doubling

To increase the stability of communications in a multigroup system, two ICS can be linked to one another
and to the corresponding modules via OWG (twin cable). One ICS performs normal function, and the second
moves to the hot standby operating mode. The second ICF takes over the function of the first as soon as it
reports a malfunction.
For more details, see also Complete doubling → 153.

4.2.3 General information on boards

The boards used in the B3 module and in the ICS are listed below.
Service board

CBT C-Bus Tester (only B3 module)

44 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 4 Modules

Boards for Connection Technology and Signalling

CA3B Cable Adapter 3 B Module

AV24B Adapter V.24 B Module
EDU Error Display Unit
ESB External Signalling B Module
TER Termination 2 and 3 (only B3 module)

Boards for Control, Central Functions and Transport

ISMx/ISM2x IMTU Switching Matrix

MLB Module Link Board
ICF IMTU Central Functions
CL2M/CL2ME Clock 2 Module (if CL2ME is used see also Intermodule-Handover)

Boards for Power Supply

ISPS IMTU Supplementary Power Supply (only B3 module)

PS Power Supply (PS280A or PS350A in B3 module, PSL55 and PS350A in racks R1 to
R4, PSL55 in ICS)

Check the correct positioning of TER2 and TER3 before switching on the B3 module! Make
sure that any removed boards are reinserted in the same slot!

4.2.4 Switching on

Check the stable position of the power supply devices and power supply cables.
Pull the protective hoods over the slots on the front of the power supply devices.
Check whether only one ESU is active in the Communication Server Integral 55 (DIL switch to CF22/CF2E/
ICF).
Insert the grounded plug of the mains connecting cable into the protection unit or earthed mains socket
provided.
If necessary, connect the battery connector (e.g. inserting the -48 V fuse in the battery unit, etc).
If required, move the battery switch on all inserted PS350A power supply units to position 1 (front panel).
The I55 server is switched on and loading programs (loading time depends on number of modules).

Startup with the ACB board

(Information yet to come!)

Startup with the HSCB board

CSI55 LX 07/2006 45
4 Modules

Startup with the ACB board

In multi-module operation, the S3 switch of the

HSCB boards without HGS should be placed in the
right-hand position.
The loading phases shown in the HSCB boards
(LEDs L7-L10) may differ from time to time.
Having switched on the modules, the HSCB boards
first run through loading phases 15 to 6.
From this point, the HSCB board without HGS is
held at loading phase 6 while the HSCB with
inserted HGS runs through the remaining loading
phases 5 and 4 (access to HGS).
The HSCB boards without HGS subsequently run
though loading phases 5 and 4.
Finally all HSCB boards run through loading
phases 3 to 0.
The L7 LEDs of the CF22/CF2E boards flash in the
modules during the loading phases (signalling input
of the valid module address).
If the yellow LEDs L7 to L10 (loading phase 0) of
the HSCB boards shown are off in all modules, this
denotes that the server I55 is ready for operation.

Meaning of the LEDs on the front panel of the

HSCB board

HSCB Loading Phases

No. L7 L8 L9 L10 Phase name

15 1 1 1 1 Start reset phase
14 1 1 1 0 Test flash-PROM
13 1 1 0 1 Test QUICC
12 1 1 0 0 Test real time clock
11 1 0 1 1 Test C-bus interface

46 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 4 Modules

No. L7 L8 L9 L10 Phase name

10 1 0 1 0 Test DUART (V.24 ports)
9 1 0 0 1 Test dynamic RAM
8 1 0 0 0 Output hardware image
7 0 1 1 1 End reset phase
6 0 1 1 0 Initial program loading (IPL)/IPL ready flag
5 0 1 0 1 STIN program loader is loaded and started
4 0 1 0 0 Operating system has been loaded and started (restart)
3 0 0 1 1 User programs (have been dispatched) have been loaded
2 0 0 1 0 Start of customer data loading in the user programs
1 0 0 0 1 All customer data loaded Start commissioning of module(s)
0 0 0 0 0 Module(s) in operation

1 = LED on
0 = LED off

4.2.5 Troubleshooting

Power supply

Fault Action
Yellow LED on the PS350A power Check the mains voltage.
supply unit does not light up If mains voltage is present, replace the power supply unit.
Green LED on the power supply Check the mains voltage (for PS280A only).
unit does not light up Check the battery voltage (for PS350A only). Observe battery switch
function on PS350A!
First check whether the malfunction can be rectified by removing the
boards(s).
If this is the case, replace with new board(s).
If this is not the case, replace the power supply unit.

General Points

Fault Action
with ACB
Loading procedure failed during first (Information yet to come!)
startup
with HSCB

CSI55 LX 07/2006 47
4 Modules

Loading procedure failed during first In all modules containing HSCB boards without HGS, check
commissioning (twin module) whether the L8 LEDs on the CF2x boards are flashing.
If not, check the optical waveguide connections for these
modules. Create any missing optical waveguide connections.
If subsequently necessary for these modules:
Small reset (restart):
Switch S2 of the HSCB board in left-hand position, switch S1
of the HSCB board in left-hand and then back to middle
position.
Large reset:
Switch S2 in right position, switch S1 in left and then back to
middle position, switch S2 to left position after loading has
finished (loading phase 0).

Further Course of Action

with ACB
(Information yet to come!)
with HSCB
First check the displays of the HSCB board with inserted HGS.
Then check the displays of the HSCB board without HGS (Twin Module).
Note down the status of the LEDs on all boards.
Inform your Service Control Centre.

4.3 B3 module (multi-module)

Communication Server Integral 55 - B3 Built-In-Module in the 1/2 K rack

1. Status display and service device connection

2. Console
3. 1/2 K rack
4. B3 Built-In-Module
5. Empty B module

Procedure for Installation

The B3 Built-In-Module is accommodated in the 1/2 K rack The rack is on rollers.
Remove the covers of the console.

48 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 4 Modules

• Release the quick-action closures on the front side and remove the cover
• Press up and remove the remaining covers

The four rollers in the console can be locked into place.

Console, position of rollers

1. Lock the rollers using 13 mm socket wrench

2. Connect the racks with M8 screw (two or more racks)

4.3.1 Board slots

Slot

1. Slot
2. External module number, decimal
3. A second PS350A and a ISPS are required if more than 14 groups are installed.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 49
4 Modules

4.3.2 General information on boards

The boards used in the B3 module and in the ICS are listed below.
Service board

CBT C-Bus Tester (only B3 module)

Boards for Connection Technology and Signalling

CA3B Cable Adapter 3 B Module

AV24B Adapter V.24 B Module
EDU Error Display Unit
ESB External Signalling B Module
TER Termination 2 and 3 (only B3 module)

Boards for Control, Central Functions and Transport

ISMx/ISM2x IMTU Switching Matrix

MLB Module Link Board
ICF IMTU Central Functions
CL2M/CL2ME Clock 2 Module (if CL2ME is used see also Intermodule-Handover)

Boards for Power Supply

ISPS IMTU Supplementary Power Supply (only B3 module)

PS Power Supply (PS280A or PS350A in B3 module, PSL55 and PS350A in racks R1 to
R4, PSL55 in ICS)

Check the correct positioning of TER2 and TER3 before switching on the B3 module! Make
sure that any removed boards are reinserted in the same slot!

4.3.3 Connectivity

Inserting the Connecting Cables

The B3 module is connected to the other modules belonging to the Communication Server Integral 55 using
optical waveguides (twin cables).
Open the quick-action closures of the cover plates. Remove the cover plates.
Close the rear panel of the communication server Integral 55 using the supplied keys.

• 1/2 K rack: one rear panel without ventilation holes

Lift out the covers.

50 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 4 Modules

Feed the ends of the LWL twin cable into the console and then into the module (bending radius min. 35
mm!).
Remove the covers of the LWL cable ducts on the rear side of the backplane.

With the I55 system switched on and unprotected coupling, there is a risk of short-circuiting
when assembling the LWL twin cable!

For each LWL twin cable, insert the two insulating tubes (auxiliary item, part of the tool kit for the B3 module)
through the respective cable duct of the backplane. See also
Insert the optical waveguide cable in the insulating tubes. Pull the insulating tubes containing the optical
waveguide twin cable through the cable ducts toward the front.
Insert and secure the connections of the optical waveguide twin cable to the connectors of the EOCx submod-
ule.
Make sure that the transmitting section of the EOCx submodule belonging to the B3 module is connected
to the receiving section of the EOCx submodule. Conversely, the receiving section of the EOCx submodule
belonging to the B3 module is to be connected to the transmitting section of the EOCx submodule.
EOCSM/EOCMM
The optical waveguide wire with the red plugs is to be inserted in the transmitting socket of the EOCSM/
EOCMM and in the receiving socket of the B3 module. The opposite applies to the LWL wire with the black
plugs.
EOCPF
The LWL wire with the grey plugs is to be inserted in the grey sockets of both EOCPF submodules. The LWL
wire with the blue plugs is to be inserted in the blue sockets.
Insert the EOCx submodules onto the MLB and lock the submodules into place (hook the tool on the locking
rail of the EOCx and lock or unlock).
The slot addresses of the MLB/EOCx boards are defined in TIP.
Insert the edge protector into the optical waveguide cable duct and fasten the connecting cable using cable
binders on the fastening grooves provided (optical waveguide cable duct and side wall) in the B3 module.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 51
4 Modules

Cable routing of fibre-optic twin cables, view of a 1/2 K rack with a B3 module from the rear side

1. OWG twin cable

2. Fastening groove
3. OWG twin cable
4. Edge protector
5. LWL cable duct
6. B3 module
7. Cover
8. Bending radius min. 35 mm!
9. OWG twin cable

Connections MLB

52 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 4 Modules

Board MLB EOCx submodules

1. Tool for locking and unlocking submodule EOC *

2. MLB board
3. OWG twin cable
4. Isolating hose facility *
5. Duct for OWG
6. Sending
7. Receiving
8. EOCPF submodule
9. EOCMM/SM submodule
10. locking
11. unlocking

* Component of tool kit for B3 module (OWG/EOCxx)

4.3.4 Doubling

To increase the stability of communications in the system, two B3 modules can be linked to one another and
to the corresponding modules via OWG (twin cable). This presumes that the B3 modules are equipped with
the MLB boards.
Refer to the TIP documents for the required slots and assignment.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 53
4 Modules

Doubling of the B3 module

AO = connecting circuit
CB = ACB/HSCB
CF* = CF22/CF2E
ICF = IMTU Central Functions
ISM = IMTU Switching Matrix
ISPS = IMTU Supplementary Power Supply
LWL = Optical waveguide (OWG)
MLB = Multi Link Board
PS = only PS350A
PSL55 = Power Supply Low 55
Wall-mounted and built-in modules can also be connected.

54 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 4 Modules

4.3.5 Switching on

Check the stable position of the power supply devices and power supply cables.
Pull the protective hoods over the slots on the front of the power supply devices.
Check whether only one ESU is active in the Communication Server Integral 55 (DIL switch to CF22/CF2E/
ICF).
Insert the grounded plug of the mains connecting cable into the protection unit or earthed mains socket
provided.
If necessary, connect the battery connector (e.g. inserting the -48 V fuse in the battery unit, etc).
If required, move the battery switch on all inserted PS350A power supply units to position 1 (front panel).
The I55 server is switched on and loading programs (loading time depends on number of modules).

Startup with the ACB board

(Information yet to come!)

Startup with the HSCB board

CSI55 LX 07/2006 55
4 Modules

Startup with the ACB board

In multi-module operation, the S3 switch of the

HSCB boards without HGS should be placed in the
right-hand position.
The loading phases shown in the HSCB boards
(LEDs L7-L10) may differ from time to time.
Having switched on the modules, the HSCB boards
first run through loading phases 15 to 6.
From this point, the HSCB board without HGS is
held at loading phase 6 while the HSCB with
inserted HGS runs through the remaining loading
phases 5 and 4 (access to HGS).
The HSCB boards without HGS subsequently run
though loading phases 5 and 4.
Finally all HSCB boards run through loading
phases 3 to 0.
The L7 LEDs of the CF22/CF2E boards flash in the
modules during the loading phases (signalling input
of the valid module address).
If the yellow LEDs L7 to L10 (loading phase 0) of
the HSCB boards shown are off in all modules, this
denotes that the server I55 is ready for operation.

Meaning of the LEDs on the front panel of the

HSCB board

HSCB Loading Phases

No. L7 L8 L9 L10 Phase name

15 1 1 1 1 Start reset phase
14 1 1 1 0 Test flash-PROM
13 1 1 0 1 Test QUICC
12 1 1 0 0 Test real time clock
11 1 0 1 1 Test C-bus interface

56 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 4 Modules

No. L7 L8 L9 L10 Phase name

10 1 0 1 0 Test DUART (V.24 ports)
9 1 0 0 1 Test dynamic RAM
8 1 0 0 0 Output hardware image
7 0 1 1 1 End reset phase
6 0 1 1 0 Initial program loading (IPL)/IPL ready flag
5 0 1 0 1 STIN program loader is loaded and started
4 0 1 0 0 Operating system has been loaded and started (restart)
3 0 0 1 1 User programs (have been dispatched) have been loaded
2 0 0 1 0 Start of customer data loading in the user programs
1 0 0 0 1 All customer data loaded Start commissioning of module(s)
0 0 0 0 0 Module(s) in operation

1 = LED on
0 = LED off

4.3.6 Troubleshooting

Power supply

Fault Action
Yellow LED on the PS350A power Check the mains voltage.
supply unit does not light up If mains voltage is present, replace the power supply unit.
Green LED on the power supply Check the mains voltage (for PS280A only).
unit does not light up Check the battery voltage (for PS350A only). Observe battery switch
function on PS350A!
First check whether the malfunction can be rectified by removing the
boards(s).
If this is the case, replace with new board(s).
If this is not the case, replace the power supply unit.

General Points

Fault Action
with ACB
Loading procedure failed during first (Information yet to come!)
startup
with HSCB

CSI55 LX 07/2006 57
4 Modules

Loading procedure failed during first In all modules containing HSCB boards without HGS, check
commissioning (twin module) whether the L8 LEDs on the CF2x boards are flashing.
If not, check the optical waveguide connections for these
modules. Create any missing optical waveguide connections.
If subsequently necessary for these modules:
Small reset (restart):
Switch S2 of the HSCB board in left-hand position, switch S1
of the HSCB board in left-hand and then back to middle
position.
Large reset:
Switch S2 in right position, switch S1 in left and then back to
middle position, switch S2 to left position after loading has
finished (loading phase 0).

Further Course of Action

with ACB
(Information yet to come!)
with HSCB
First check the displays of the HSCB board with inserted HGS.
Then check the displays of the HSCB board without HGS (Twin Module).
Note down the status of the LEDs on all boards.
Inform your Service Control Centre.

58 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 5 19” cabinets and cooling

5 19” cabinets and cooling

/>
The communication server Integral 55 is marketed in a 19” cabinet or integrated in the existing customer
infratsurtcure.
The RJ45 slot connection system is used for the panels.
For the Communication Server Integral 55 there are available different cabinet versions:

5.1 Standing casing

Standing casing S1 (material number: 49.9902.0611)

A rack can be installed in a standing casing S1. It can accommodate no more than one Communication
Server Integral 55. In addition, two HU (height units) are available for the server and / or service panel
(material number: 49.9904.8477).
The standing casing S1 is fitted with hidden rollers.
The front plate (plastic pane) can be ordered as a spare part.

Standing casing S1

1. Ground clamps (max. 3)

2. The standing casing S1 is locked using a no. 13 nut key

Dimensions

• Width = 550 mm
• Length = 550 mm
• Height = 11 HU

CSI55 LX 07/2006 59
5 19” cabinets and cooling

Cabinet colour RAL 7035

Two standing casings S1 can be stacked on each other. Three standing casings must not be stacked on each
other.

1. Hexagonal screw M6x30

2. Spacer roller
3. Covering plate

The two standing casings are connected using two M6 screws (1.). Spacer rollers (2.) must be fitted in
between for each screw.
The two standing casings must be connected to each other using a earthing wire.

5.1.1 Cable routing

The Communication Server Integral 55 is placed on the ground in the standing casing S1 and then screwed
tight on the guides.
The cable adapters are accessible from the rear. This is where the connecting circuit cables must be con-
nected.

60 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 5 19” cabinets and cooling

Section standing casing, cable on cable adapter

5.2 33HU

19-inch cabinet 33HU

Dimensions

• Width (exterior) = 600 mm

• Length (exterior) = 600 mm

CSI55 LX 07/2006 61
5 19” cabinets and cooling

• Height (exterior) = 1,650 mm

• Height (interior) = 33HU
• Profile rail = 495 mm

The cabinet colour and the colour of accessory parts is RAL 7035
Description
The cabinet can accommodate a maximum of 3 communications servers I55. Additionally, 6 HU are reserved
for the application server, which must be separated thermally from the communication server I55.

Features:
the cabinet is fitted with hidden rollers.
vertical profile rail in 2 levels
front level 120mm separation from the front door in the section where the communication
server I55 is located
no separation in the section where the application server is located
lockable glass door in the front
closed locakable door at the rear
Lockable side panels
Cable insertion at the rear under the door and/or through the roof
Strain relief of the cables is installed at the server shield
1 multiple socket with 8 sockets
1 earthing rail for the connection of earthing cables 2,5-16 mm2
Work lead
Sliding rail for 1 application server
50 cage nuts, 50 mounting screws are attached in bulk form

Delivery will be in pallets, the supplier’s packaging will be used for packaging.
There is a documentation pocket in the door at the rear.
ECONET program options

Roof with 2 fans 49.9905.9115 is required if 3 racks are used

Multiple socket with 8 sockets is required for redundant power supply
Bottom of the device, fixed 49.9904.8474
19-inch keyboard tray type A 49.9904.6386
Patch panel 1HU 27.9798.2413
Blind panel 1HU 27.9798.2404 Blind panels serve to cover unoccupied height
Blind panel 2HU 27.9798.2406 units
Blind panel 3HU 27.9798.2407
Blind panel 6HU 27.9798.2408

62 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 5 19” cabinets and cooling

CSI55 LX 07/2006 63
5 19” cabinets and cooling

19-inch cabinet 33HU

Section of the 19-inch cabinet 33 HU on the pallet

5.3 42HU 500mm

19-inch cabinet 42HU

Dimensions

• Width (exterior) = 800 mm

• Length (exterior) = 800 mm
• Height (exterior) = 2,150 mm

• Height (interior) = 42HU

• Profile rail = 500 mm

The cabinet colour and the colour of accessory parts is RAL 7035
Description
The system can be equipped with several Communication Servers I55 (max. 4) and several application
servers.
Depending on the needs it is also possible to install uninterrupted power supplies UPS in the cabinet.
The level difference between the profile rails in the front and the rear is 500 mm.

Features:
vertical profile rail at one level, front level 125 mm separation from the front door
Base 100 mm high with three-part floor panel (removable)
Adjustable levelling feet for levelling on irregular floors
ventilated lockable glass door in the front
closed locakable door at the rear

64 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 5 19” cabinets and cooling

Lockable side panels

Roof panel for cable insertion at the back
Ventilation holes and prepared for active ventilation (fan kit can be retrofitted)
Cable insertion through the floor, base and/or the roof
Jumpering bracket for cable routing left, right, front and rear
2 multiple sockets with 7 sockets each on 2 branching boxes.
1 earthing rail horizontal for the connection of earthing cables 2,5-16 mm2
Work lead
50 cage nuts, 50 mounting screws Torx are attached in bulk form

Delivery will be in pallets, the supplier’s packaging will be used for packaging.
There is a documentation pocket in the door at the rear.
ECONET program options:

Fan insert for active 49.9808.0869 is required if more than 2 I55 are used
ventilation incl. 2 fans 18W
140 m3/h
Fan expansion kit consisting 27.9798.2258 is required for expansion of the fan insert and
of 1 fan for replacement
Patch panel 1HU 27.9798.2413
Blind panel 1HU 27.9798.2404 Blind panels serve to cover unoccupied
Blind panel 2HU 27.9798.2406 height units
Blind panel 3HU 27.9798.2407
Blind panel 6HU 27.9798.2408
Bottom of the device, fixed 27.9798.2474
500mm
Telescopic rail for bottom of 27.9798.2553
device
Sliding rail for the second and 27.9798.2289
further servers

5.4 42HU 730mm

19-inch cabinet 42HU

Dimensions

• Width (exterior) = 800 mm

• Length (exterior) = 800 mm

• Height (exterior) = 2,150 mm

• Height (interior) = 42HU
• Profile rail = 730 mm

CSI55 LX 07/2006 65
5 19” cabinets and cooling

The cabinet colour and the colour of accessory parts is RAL 7035
Description
This cabinet is used when the E200 application server is used. An assembly kit with a telescopic rail and a
cable shears is preinstalled in the cabinet.
The system can be equipped with several Communication Servers I55 (max. 4) and several application
servers.
Depending on the needs it is also possible to install uninterrupted power supplies UPS in the cabinet.
The level difference between the profile rails in the front and the rear is 730 mm.

Features:
vertical profile rail at one level, front level 120 mm separation from the front door
Base 100 mm high with three-part floor panel (removable)
Adjustable levelling feet for levelling on irregular floors
ventilated lockable glass door in the front
closed locakable door at the rear
Lockable side panels
Roof panel for cable insertion at the back
Ventilation holes and prepared for active ventilation (fan kit can be retrofitted)
Cable insertion through the floor, base and/or the roof
Jumpering bracket for cable routing left, right, front and rear
2 multiple sockets with 7 sockets each on 2 branching boxes
1 earthing rail for the connection of earthing cables 2,5-16 mm2
Work lead
50 cage nuts, 50 mounting screws Torx are attached in bulk form

Delivery will be in pallets, the supplier’s packaging will be used for packaging.
There is a documentation pocket in the door at the rear.
ECONET program options:

Fan insert for active 49.9808.0869 is required if more than 2 racks are used
ventilation incl. 2 fans 18W
140 m3/h
Fan expansion kit consisting 27.9798.2258 is required for expansion of the fan insert and
of 1 fan for replacement
Patch panel 1HU 27.9798.2413
Blind panel 1HU 27.9798.2404 Blind panels serve to cover unoccupied
Blind panel 2HU 27.9798.2406 height units
Blind panel 3HU 27.9798.2407
Blind panel 6HU 27.9798.2408

5.5 42HU-can be disassembled

ICC cabinet 42HU-can be disassembled

66 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 5 19” cabinets and cooling

• Width (exterior) = 800 mm

• Length (exterior) = 900 mm
• Height (exterior) = 2,150 mm

• Height (interior) = 42 HU
• Profile rail = 730 mm

Cabinet same as2 HE 730mm” GRAB=”T”>19” 42HU 730mm → 65but with removable horizontal struts for
easy disassembly of the cabinet as it is possible, depending on local conditions, that the cabinet must be
disassembled.
42HU 730mm → 65

5.6 Overview of components (1)

Edition: 01.06.2002
Material Name HU Weight ICC cabinet ICC cabinet Notes
number in kg 6+27HU 42HU
WXHXL WXHXL
600 X 600 X 800 X 800 X
1650 2150
Schroff Proline Rittal TS8-Syst.
Maximum tilting <1900 2295
height
without pallet and
packaging
Maximum tilting <1900 2402
height
with pallet and
packaging
Transport on 25 X X
pallet equipped per 1 to 3 racks 1 to 4 racks
with racks rack (max..27HU)
4.999.059.049 ICC-XXL 120 X
6+27HU
W 600 X H 600 X
L 1680
Schroff Proline
4.999.059.117 ICC-XXL 42HU 240 X
with side panels
W 800 X H 800 X
L 2150
Rittal
TS8-System
DK 7995.453

CSI55 LX 07/2006 67
5 19” cabinets and cooling

Edition: 01.06.2002
Material Name HU Weight ICC cabinet ICC cabinet Notes
number in kg 6+27HU 42HU
WXHXL WXHXL
600 X 600 X 800 X 800 X
1650 2150
Schroff Proline Rittal TS8-Syst.
4.999.070.388 ICC-XXL 42HU 187 X
without side
panels
W 800 X H 800 X
L 2150
Rittal
TS8-System
DK 7995.561
4.999.070.418 1 pair of side 53 O
panels
2000 X 800 for
cabinet
4.999.070.388
DK 7824.208
4.999.059.120 ICC-XXL 42HU 260
with side panels
W 800 X H 900 X
L 2150
Rittal
TS8-System
DK 7995.454
4.999.070.399 ICC-XXL 42HU 205
without side
panels
W 800 X H 900 X
L 2150
Rittal
TS8-System
DK 7995.563
4.999.070.419 1 pair of side 55
panels
2000 X 9000 for
cabinet
4.999.070.399
and
4.999.070.411
DK 7824.209
4.999.065.258 ICC-XXL 42HU 260
with side panels
W 800 X H 900 X
L 2150 can be
disassembled
Rittal
TS8-System
DK 7995.455

68 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 5 19” cabinets and cooling

Edition: 01.06.2002
Material Name HU Weight ICC cabinet ICC cabinet Notes
number in kg 6+27HU 42HU
WXHXL WXHXL
600 X 600 X 800 X 800 X
1650 2150
Schroff Proline Rittal TS8-Syst.
4.999.070.411 ICC-XXL 42HU 205
without side
panels
W 800 X H 900 X
L 2150 can be
disassembled
Rittal
TS8-System
DK 7995.564
4.999.070.420 Locks for 1 pair of O
side panels
(4pcs)
DK 7824.500
4.998.081.260 Baying kit incl. O
fixing material PU
=4pcs
(2 PU are
required to join 2
cabinets)
PS 4582.500
Base with closed X
frontplates
Floor panel, X
three-part,
slidable
Sliding rail (Rittal) 2X
for server (for server + I55)
2.797.982.289
Sliding rail 1X
(Schroff) for (for server)
server
Telescopic rail for
server E200
4.999.020.096
DK 7063.900
Sliding rail
variable depth
(Rittal) DK
7063.880 for
installation of
server E120
Multiple socket X X
1X 8 sockets with 2X 7 sockets on
5m cable and branching box
earthing-pin plug

CSI55 LX 07/2006 69
5 19” cabinets and cooling

Edition: 01.06.2002
Material Name HU Weight ICC cabinet ICC cabinet Notes
number in kg 6+27HU 42HU
WXHXL WXHXL
600 X 600 X 800 X 800 X
1650 2150
Schroff Proline Rittal TS8-Syst.
Lockable glass X X
door front with left hinge right hinge
ventilation holes
Closed lockable X X
door at the rear left hinge right hinge
Lockable side X X
panels
Profile rails front X X Separation
33HU 42HU 100-125mm
distributed over 2 from front
levels, 6HU for door.
server and 27HU
for CS I55 and
others
Profile rails rear X X
6HU below in the 42HU
server section
Level difference X X
profile rails front 495mm in the 500mm
and rear server section
Cable insertion X X
from rear through base
Cable insertion X
from below
Cable insertion X X
from above
Earthing rail with X X Clamps in
clamp enclosed
plastic bag
12 jumpering X
bracktes front,
12 jumpering
brackets rear.
Document pocket X X on rear door
Rollers X
Levelling feet X X
Earth conductor X X
2,5mm2 2 4
conductor
sleeves on both
ends.

70 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 5 19” cabinets and cooling

Edition: 01.06.2002
Material Name HU Weight ICC cabinet ICC cabinet Notes
number in kg 6+27HU 42HU
WXHXL WXHXL
600 X 600 X 800 X 800 X
1650 2150
Schroff Proline Rittal TS8-Syst.
x cage nuts, M6 X X In enclosed
mounting screws (50x) (100x) plastic bag
and plastic
washers.
Racks I55 9 25 O O Voice
max. 3 max. 4 Server
4.998.034.799 Application 5 O O
Server E120
Standard
4.999.034.798 Application 5 O O
Server E120
Professional
4.999.027.925 Application 6
Server E200
Enterprise
4.998.095.981 Retrofitting kit for O O 1X per
E120 E120
Server,
sliding rail
available in
cabinet
2.797.982.289 Sliding rail for O Is required if
server 2X part of the more
DK 7063.500 cabinet servers are
used.
4.999.020.096 Telescopic rail for Is required if
server E200 more
DK 7063.900 servers are
used.
4.999.069.426 Sliding rail is required
variable depth additionally
(Rittal) DK if more than
7063.880 for one I55 are
installation I55 not installed
one on top
of the other
4.999.059.115 Roof with fan O Is required if
sheet 3 I55 racks
are
installed.
4.998.080.869 Fan insert with 2 O Is required if
fans 3 or 4 I55
TS 7886.000 racks are
installed.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 71
5 19” cabinets and cooling

Edition: 01.06.2002
Material Name HU Weight ICC cabinet ICC cabinet Notes
number in kg 6+27HU 42HU
WXHXL WXHXL
600 X 600 X 800 X 800 X
1650 2150
Schroff Proline Rittal TS8-Syst.
2.797.982.258 Fan expansion O Is required if
set 3 or 4 I55
DK 7980.000 racks are
installed.
The set
consists of
one fan for
installation
in the fan
roof
4.999.048.474 Bottom of the O Accessory
device, fixed shelf
2.797.982.474 Bottom of the O
device 500
DK 7145.035
4.999.063.238 Assembly kit
variable depth for
bottom of the
device
DK 7063.860
2.797.982.553 Telescopic O Extractable
drawer for bottom +Bottom of the shelf
of the device device 500
(50kg)
DK 7081.000
4.999.046.386 19” keyboard tray 1 O O
2.797.982.413 Jumpering 1 O O
bracket
2.797.982.404 Blind panel 1 O O for covering
slots that
are not
needed
2.797.982.406 Blind panel 2 O O for covering
slots that
are not
needed
2.797.982.407 Blind panel 3 O O for covering
slots that
are not
needed
2.797.982.704 Blind panel 6 O O for covering
slots that
are not
needed

72 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 5 19” cabinets and cooling

Edition: 01.06.2002
Material Name HU Weight ICC cabinet ICC cabinet Notes
number in kg 6+27HU 42HU
WXHXL WXHXL
600 X 600 X 800 X 800 X
1650 2150
Schroff Proline Rittal TS8-Syst.
4.999.046.814 Patch panel 1 O O
internal 3X8WE
(4-wire)
4.999.046.813 Patch panel 1 O O
internal 48WE
(2-wire)
4.999.048.477 Service panel 1 O O
4.998.045.619 Telecommunications 1 O O
patch panel
external 24WE
2.797.982.353 External patch 1 O O
panel CAT5
16WE
2.797.982.354 External patch 2 O O
panel CAT5
32WE
2.797.982.357 External patch 3 O O
panel CAT5
48WE
4.999.065.625 Multiple socket O 1X for
doubling
4.998.079.986 C profile rail in O
482,6 (6PU)
4.998.079.987 Cable rail O
4.999.067.592 Mains cable with O
CEE plug blue
5m
4.999.067.593 Mains cable with O
CEE plug blue
10m
4.998.080.012 19” frames for 3 O O
LSA-Plus strips
series 2(10 for
150 WP

X = standard O = optional not possible

5.7 Overview of components (2)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 73
5 19” cabinets and cooling

Edition: 01.06.2002
Material Name HU Weight ICC cabinet ICC cabinet Notes
number in kg 42HU 42HU
WXHXL WXHXL
800 X 800 X 800 X 900 X
2150 2150
Rittal TS8-Syst. can be
disassembled
Rittal TS8-Syst.
Maximum tilting 2330 2330
height
without pallet and
packaging
Maximum tilting 2438 2438
height
with pallet and
packaging
Transport on 25 X X
pallet equipped per 1 to 4 racks 1 to 4 racks
with racks rack
4.999.059.049 ICC-XXL 120
6+27HU
W 600 X H 600 X
L 1680
Schroff Proline
4.999.059.117 ICC-XXL 42HU 240
with side panels
W 800 X H 800 X
L 2150
Rittal
TS8-System
DK 7995.453
4.999.070.388 ICC-XXL 42HU 187
without side
panels
W 800 X H 800 X
L 2150
Rittal
TS8-System
DK 7995.561
4.999.070.418 1 pair of side 53
panels
2000 X 800 for
cabinet
4.999.070.388
DK 7824.208

74 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 5 19” cabinets and cooling

Edition: 01.06.2002
Material Name HU Weight ICC cabinet ICC cabinet Notes
number in kg 42HU 42HU
WXHXL WXHXL
800 X 800 X 800 X 900 X
2150 2150
Rittal TS8-Syst. can be
disassembled
Rittal TS8-Syst.
4.999.059.120 ICC-XXL 42HU 260 X
with side panels
W 800 X H 900 X
L 2150
Rittal
TS8-System
DK 7995.454
4.999.070.399 ICC-XXL 42HU 205 X
without side
panels
W 800 X H 900 X
L 2150
Rittal
TS8-System
DK 7995.563
4.999.070.419 1 pair of side 55 O O
panels
2000 X 9000 for
cabinet
4.999.070.399
and
4.999.070.411
DK 7824.209
4.999.065.258 ICC-XXL 42HU 260 X
with side panels
W 800 X H 900 X
L 2150 can be
disassembled
Rittal
TS8-System
DK 7995.455
4.999.070.411 ICC-XXL 42HU 205 X
without side
panels
W 800 X H 900 X
L 2150 can be
disassembled
Rittal
TS8-System
DK 7995.564
S4.999.070.420Locks for 1 pair of O O
side panels
(4pcs)
DK 7824.500

CSI55 LX 07/2006 75
5 19” cabinets and cooling

Edition: 01.06.2002
Material Name HU Weight ICC cabinet ICC cabinet Notes
number in kg 42HU 42HU
WXHXL WXHXL
800 X 800 X 800 X 900 X
2150 2150
Rittal TS8-Syst. can be
disassembled
Rittal TS8-Syst.
4.998.081.260 Baying kit incl. O O
fixing material PU
=4pcs
(2 PU are
required to join 2
cabinets)
PS 4582.500
Base with closed X X
frontplates
Floor panel, X X
three-part,
slidable
Sliding rail (Rittal)
for server
2.797.982.289
Sliding rail
(Schroff) for
server
Telescopic rail for 1X 1X
server E200 (for server) (for server)
4.999.020.096
DK 7063.900
Sliding rail 1x 2X
variable depth (for I55) (for server + I55)
(Rittal) DK
7063.880 for
installation of
server E120
Multiple socket X X
2X 7 sockets on 2X 7 sockets on
branching box branching box
Lockable glass X X
door front with right hinge right hinge
ventilation holes
Closed lockable X X
door at the rear right hinge right hinge
Lockable side X X
panels
Profile rails front X X Separation
42HU 42HU 100-125mm
from front
door.

76 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 5 19” cabinets and cooling

Edition: 01.06.2002
Material Name HU Weight ICC cabinet ICC cabinet Notes
number in kg 42HU 42HU
WXHXL WXHXL
800 X 800 X 800 X 900 X
2150 2150
Rittal TS8-Syst. can be
disassembled
Rittal TS8-Syst.
Profile rails rear X X
42HU 42HU
Level difference X X
profile rails front 730mm 730mm
and rear
Cable insertion X X
from rear through base through base
Cable insertion X X
from below
Cable insertion X X
from above
Earthing rail with X X Clamps in
clamp enclosed
plastic bag
12 jumpering X X
bracktes front,
12 jumpering
brackets rear.
Document pocket X X on rear door
Rollers
Levelling feet X X
Earth conductor X X
2,5mm2 4 4
conductor
sleeves on both
ends.
x cage nuts, M6 X X In enclosed
mounting screws (100x) (100x) plastic bag
and plastic
washers.
Racks I55 9 25 O O Voice
max. 4 max. 4 Server
4.998.034.799 Application 5 O O
Server E120
Standard
4.999.034.798 Application 5 O O
Server E120
Professional
4.999.027.925 Application 6 O O
Server E200
Enterprise

CSI55 LX 07/2006 77
5 19” cabinets and cooling

Edition: 01.06.2002
Material Name HU Weight ICC cabinet ICC cabinet Notes
number in kg 42HU 42HU
WXHXL WXHXL
800 X 800 X 800 X 900 X
2150 2150
Rittal TS8-Syst. can be
disassembled
Rittal TS8-Syst.
4.998.095.981 Retrofitting kit for O 1X per
E120 E120
Server,
sliding rail
available in
cabinet
2.797.982.289 Sliding rail for Is required if
server more
DK 7063.500 servers are
used.
4.999.020.096 Telescopic rail for O O Is required if
server E200 1X part of the 1X part of the more
DK 7063.900 cabinet cabinet servers are
used.
4.999.069.426 Sliding rail O O is required
variable depth 2X part of the 2X part of the additionally
(Rittal) DK cabinet cabinet if more than
7063.880 for one I55 are
installation I55 not installed
one on top
of the other
4.999.059.115 Roof with fan Is required if
sheet 3 I55 racks
are
installed.
4.998.080.869 Fan insert with 2 O O Is required if
fans 3 or 4 I55
TS 7886.000 racks are
installed.
2.797.982.258 Fan expansion O O Is required if
set 3 or 4 I55
DK 7980.000 racks are
installed.
The set
consists of
one fan for
installation
in the fan
roof
4.999.048.474 Bottom of the Accessory
device, fixed shelf

78 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 5 19” cabinets and cooling

Edition: 01.06.2002
Material Name HU Weight ICC cabinet ICC cabinet Notes
number in kg 42HU 42HU
WXHXL WXHXL
800 X 800 X 800 X 900 X
2150 2150
Rittal TS8-Syst. can be
disassembled
Rittal TS8-Syst.
2.797.982.474 Bottom of the O O
device 500 + assembly kit + assembly kit
DK 7145.035 variable depth variable depth
4.999.063.238 Assembly kit O O
variable depth for
bottom of the
device
DK 7063.860
2.797.982.553 Telescopic O O Extractable
drawer for bottom +assembly kit +assembly kit shelf
of the device variable depth variable depth
(50kg) +bottom of device +bottom of device
DK 7081.000
4.999.046.386 19” keyboard tray 1 O O
2.797.982.413 Jumpering 1 O O
bracket
2.797.982.404 Blind panel 1 O O for covering
slots that
are not
needed
2.797.982.406 Blind panel 2 O O for covering
slots that
are not
needed
2.797.982.407 Blind panel 3 O O for covering
slots that
are not
needed
2.797.982.704 Blind panel 6 O O for covering
slots that
are not
needed
4.999.046.814 Patch panel 1 O O
internal 3X8WE
(4-wire)
4.999.046.813 Patch panel 1 O O
internal 48WE
(2-wire)
4.999.048.477 Service panel 1 O O
4.998.045.619 Telecommunications 1 O O
patch panel
external 24WE

CSI55 LX 07/2006 79
5 19” cabinets and cooling

Edition: 01.06.2002
Material Name HU Weight ICC cabinet ICC cabinet Notes
number in kg 42HU 42HU
WXHXL WXHXL
800 X 800 X 800 X 900 X
2150 2150
Rittal TS8-Syst. can be
disassembled
Rittal TS8-Syst.
2.797.982.353 External patch 1 O O
panel CAT5
16WE
2.797.982.354 External patch 2 O O
panel CAT5
32WE
2.797.982.357 External patch 3 O O
panel CAT5
48WE
4.999.065.625 Multiple socket 1X for
doubling
4.998.079.986 C profile rail in O O
482,6 (6PU)
4.998.079.987 Cable rail O O
4.999.067.592 Mains cable with O O
CEE plug blue
5m
4.999.067.593 Mains cable with O O
CEE plug blue
10m
4.998.080.012 19” frames for 3 O O
LSA-Plus strips
series 2(10 for
150 WP

X = standard O = optional not possible

5.8 Selection of cabinets for installation of the Integral 55

The rack is designed in such a way that it can be installed in any standard 19” cabinet, regardless of the other
components. In order that components can be inserted in the rack from the front (EOC, cable etc.), there must
be a gap of at least 150 mm length between the front of the rack and the cabinet door. Depending on the size
of the cabinet, several racks or other 19” components can be installed stacked on top of each other.
The installation of lockable doors can prevent unauthorised access to the modules.
Selection of cabinets taking into account heat dissipation
How do I select a suitable 19” cabinet or how do I assess the suitability of an existing 19” cabinet for installation
of a Integral 55 (1-n racks and/or additional devices), taking into account the thermal requirements?
Why is heat offtake so important?

80 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 5 19” cabinets and cooling

Temperature is public enemy number one for the sensitive microelectronic components. A rule of thumb
suggests that each increase in temperature by 10 ◦ C (based on the recommended operating temperature) cuts
the life-expectancy in half. Accordingly, it is very important that this energy is kept away from the components
and is taken off outwards.
Thermal offtake concept for the 19” cabinet
The following options are available for thermal offtake from the 19” cabinet:
Passive ventilation
Passive ventilation of the cabinets is the simplest method. Using incoming air apertures in the base and/or the
door and waste air apertures in the roof plate and/or door, the air exchange is managed on the basis of the
principle ”front bottom for incoming, cool air” and ”top back to let the hot air out.” Whether or not this variant
can be used depends on the power dissipation of the installed components and on the max. inner cabinet
temperature (dependent on the equipment in use).
Active ventilation
Active ventilation (forced ventilation) is another possibility. Using incoming air apertures in the base and/or the
door and waste air apertures in the roof plate and/or door, the air exchange is managed on the basis of the
principle ”suck in incoming, cool air from the front bottom” and ”blow out hot air at the top back.” The number
of fans is dependent on the power dissipation of the installed components and on the max. inner cabinet
temperature (dependent on the equipment in use). As a standard, manufacturers offer roofs with 2 fans (air
output per fan from 120 m3/h upwards). In general, additional fans can be retro-fitted. Furthermore, the fans
can be controlled and monitored by thermostat or electronic, remote monitoring.
Solution: I55 in a 19” cabinet:
Conditions for the selection of cabinets for installation of the Integral 55:

19” cabinet with I55 in a 19” cabinet without additional active components
1 rack 2 racks 3 racks 4 racks (36HU)
(9HU) (18HU) (27HU)
Passive ventilation No fan X X - -
Active ventilation with at least X X X -
2 fans
at least X X X X
3 fans
at least X X X X
4 fans
at least X X X X
5 fans

19” cabinet with I55 in a 19” cabinet with additional active components -> determine power
loss Pv
up to 500 501W- 751W- 1001W- 1251W- >1500
W 750W 1000W 1250W 1500W W
Passive No fan X - - - - -
ventilation
Active at least 2 X X - - - -
ventilation fans
with at least 3 X X X - - -
fans

CSI55 LX 07/2006 81
5 19” cabinets and cooling

at least 4 X X X X - -
fans
at least 5 X X X X X Exact
fans calcula-
tion is
required.

Explanation/help:

• passive ventilation: Incoming air apertures in the base and/or door at the front and waste air apertures
in the roof and/or door at the rear

• active ventilation: Forced ventilation using a fan, incoming air apertures in the base and/or door at the
front and fans in the roof/side panel
• Power dissipation Pv Rack: 250 W are assumed per rack
• Determine total power loss = Pv (rack) x number of racks + Pv plus components + Pv plus components
+ .......
• Volume flow of the fans min. 120 m3/h
• An exact calculation is required if the power dissipation is greater than 1500 W
• The max. ambient temperature for the Integral 55 is 45 ◦ C, i.e. the max. ambient temperature outside of
the 19” cabinet should not exceed +40 ◦ C.

Option: thermostat for fan control, remote monitoring of the fans

In view of the extremely varied possibilities, manufacturers of 19” cabinets ensure a flexible design of the
cabinet systems, so that the cabinets can be adjusted to suit the thermal requirements retrospectively.

5.9 Air conditioning

5.9.1 Overview

Taking into consideration the following ambient conditions

• electric power dissipation Pv of the Integral 55 in the cabinet

• electric power dissipation Pv of additional devices in the cabinet

• Ambient temperature Tu (outside of the cabinet)

• Temperature inside the cabinet Ti
• Temperature difference Delta Ti-Tu

• IP protection
• Cooling performance Qk
• Type and location of assembly and cabinet size (height HU, width, length)

82 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 5 19” cabinets and cooling

the following options are available for the ventilation and cooling of the 19” cabinet:

• Intrinsic convection, heat transmission through the cabinet surface

• Passive ventilation, intrinsic convection with issue of the hot air from inside

• Active ventilation, forced convection, direct heat exchange using fans

• Heat offtake through the cooler (is not taken into consideration)
• Heat offtake through the cooler (is not taken into consideration)

5.9.2 Intrinsic convection, heat transmission through the cabinet surface

• Closed design, no apertures for incoming or outgoing air

• Max. feasible power dissipation between 300 and 500 W, depending on cabinet size, form of installation
and temperature difference
• The feasible power loss is reduced by approx. 15 % in the event of series assembly
• IP protection max. IP55 possible

Calculation of the power loss that can be taken off

Po = k x A x (Ti - Tu) [W]

Po power that can be taken off via the cabinet surface

k Heat transfer coefficient (steel plate 5 W/m2K)
A Effective cabinet surface, depending on the form of installation, for calculation see
”Calculation formula of the effective cabinet surface”
Ti Inner temperature of cabinet
Tu Ambient air temperature

CSI55 LX 07/2006 83
5 19” cabinets and cooling

5.9.3 Intrinsic convection with issue of the hot air from inside

• Open design, incoming air apertures on the base or door, waste air apertures in the roof
• Max.feasible power loss between 600 and 700 W, depending on cabinet size, form of installation and
temperature difference
• The feasible power loss is reduced by approx. 10 % in the event of series assembly

• IP protection max. IP54 possible

Incoming air in the base, waste air in the roof

84 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 5 19” cabinets and cooling

Incoming air from the front (side of door), waste air at the rear (aperture in door)

5.9.4 Forced convection, direct heat exchange using fans

• Open design
• Max. feasible power loss 1500 W, depending on fans in use (size, number) and temperature difference
• IP protection max. IP54 possible

a) Filter fans

CSI55 LX 07/2006 85
5 19” cabinets and cooling

b) Fan operation

c) Roof fans

86 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 5 19” cabinets and cooling

Calculation of the required volume flow

V = 4 x Pv / (Ti- Tu) [m3h]

V Required volume flow

Pv dissipation in the cabinet (heat output on the surface of the cabinet has been neglected)
Ti Inner temperature of cabinet
Tu Ambient air temperature

5.9.5 Thermal offtake by cooling device:

• Closed design
• Max. feasible power loss approx. 1000 W, depending on cabinet size, form of installation, air conditioning
system and temperature difference

• IP protection max. IP54 possible

Calculation of the required cooling performance

Po = k x A x (Ti - Tu) [W]
Qk = Pv - Po [W]

Po Power that can be taken off via the cabinet surface

k Heat transfer coefficient (steel plate 5 W/m2K)
A Effective cabinet surface, depending on the form of installation, for calculation see
”Calculation formula of the effective cabinet surface”
Ti Inner temperature of cabinet

CSI55 LX 07/2006 87
5 19” cabinets and cooling

Tu Ambient air temperature

Qk Required cooling performance of the cooling device

5.9.6 Forced circulation due to heat exchanger (air/air)

• Closed design
• Max. feasible power loss approx. 1500 W, depending on cabinet size, form of installation and heat
exchanger
• IP protection max. IP54 possible

Calculation of the required cooling performance

Po = k x A x (Ti - Tu) [W]
Qk = Pv - Po [W]

Po Power that can be taken off via the cabinet surface

k Heat transfer coefficient (steel plate 5 W/m2K)
A Effective cabinet surface, depending on the form of installation, for calculation see
”Calculation formula of the effective cabinet surface”
Ti Inner temperature of cabinet
Tu Ambient air temperature
Qk Required cooling performance of the cooling device

5.9.7 Calculation formula for the effective cabinet surface

Individual casing, free-standing on all sides

A = 1.8 x H x (W+D)+1.4 x W x D

Individual casing for wall mounting

A = 1.4 x W x (H+D)+1.8 x D x H

88 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 5 19” cabinets and cooling

Start-end casing, free-standing

A = 1.4 x D x (H+W)+1.4 x W x H

Start-end casing for wall mounting

A = 1.4 x H x (W+D)+1.4 x W x D

Central casing, free-standing

A = 1.8 x W x H + 1.4 x W x D + D x H

Central casing for wall mounting

A = 1.4 x W x (H+D) + D x H

W = cabinet with
H = cabinet height
D = cabinet depth

CSI55 LX 07/2006 89
5 19” cabinets and cooling

5.9.8 Flow chart: Air conditioning in a 19”cabinet for the installation of I55

90 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 5 19” cabinets and cooling

Flow chart

5.10 Universal installation aids

The universal installation aid consists of two round bolts with a groove running around and a M6 thread.

Section of cabinet, round bolts (1) and M6 thread (2)

This pins are screwed by hand into the upper mounting nuts on the left and right of the cabinet. Then grasp
the rack by the bracket with one hand and underneath the rack with the other hand and place the cabinet on
to the pins.
The mounting screws are screwed into the rack on the left and right sides, but are not tightened.
The round bolts are then crewed out of the upper part; the rack is raised slightly by the bracket in order to
facilitate the removal of the bolts. Now screw in the upper screws and tighten, the lower screws are also
tightened.
The upper mounting screws are removed and the bolts are fastened in order to remove a rack from the cabinet.
The lower screws are then removed and the rack is raised carefully by the bolts.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 91
5 19” cabinets and cooling

Take care that the lower section of the rack suspended from the bolts is always pressed with
one hand against the cabinet, as the rack is only held by the nut on the bolt when on the pins.

The bolts are not enclosed with the system. They can be ordered separately.
The material number is: 4.999.054.358
The installation aids work in any cabinet in which the installations are attached using cage nuts M6.

There is no counterpressure exerted against the insert screws M6 that run in the tracks (e.g.
for Knürr cabinets), so that the screws may fall out.

The bracket used to collect the cable is also used as a grip. It is a standard part of each rack and remains
attached.

The bracket used to collect the cable should not be used as a grip for carrying during
transport.

5.11 Integral- Com- Center- ICC- V 01

TS-DK networkcabinet DK 7821750 modified, reference number: : 4.999.089.755

Dimensions
Width 800 mm
Height 2020 + 100 mm (42 U)
Depth 800 mm
Colour
Surface execution Profile frame rack in RAL 7044, electrophoresis
immersion primer
Flat parts RAL 7035 powder-coated texture

Further information can be found at Technology Portal/Data networks/System cabinets/ free-standing MDF.

5.12 Integral- Com- Center- ICC- V 33 F

TS-DK networkcabinet DK 7821.510 modified, reference number: 4.999.089.756

Dimensions
Width 600 mm
Height 1600 + 100 mm (33 U)
Depth 800 mm
Colour
Surface execution Profile frame rack in RAL 7044, electrophoresis
immersion primer

92 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 5 19” cabinets and cooling

Flat parts RAL 7035 powder-coated texture

Further information can be found at Technology Portal/Data networks/System cabinets/ free-standing MDF.

5.13 Integral- Com- Center- ICC- V 02

TS-DK networkcabinet DK 7821760 modified, reference number: 4.999.089.757

Dimensions
Width 800 mm
Height 2020 + 100 mm (42 U)
Depth 900 mm
Colour
Surface execution Profile frame rack in RAL 7044, electrophoresis
immersion primer
Flat parts RAL 7035 powder-coated texture

Further information can be found at Technology Portal/Data networks/System cabinets/ free-standing MDF.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 93
6 Power supply

6 Power supply

General Points
In principle, all modules can be connected to the mains voltage of
230 V, 50 Hz and 60 Hz
The fuse protection for every electric circuit consists of a C Type 16 A slow acting automatic circuit breaker.
Doubled PS must be fed by separate circuits (phase and fuse).
4 different power supply modules are available, used according to module or application: The same type of
power supply unit is used for the two devices in the 19” rack, the CSI55 and the ICS.
Power supply CSI55 and ICS (19” racks)

• PSL55

For projects an adaption set - see PS350 Adaption → 94 In the ICS this set cannot be used.
Power supply units for the B3 module

• Direct feed PS280A (only B3 module)

• PS350A for reserve battery operation, doubling (for B3 module)
• Additional ISPS power supply for B3 module with more than 10 connected modules

The power supply boards PS280A and PS350A are connected to the designated slots on the B3 module.

Redundant doubling of the PS in the B3 module can only be done using the PS350A.

In the B3 module, the supplementary ISPS power supply may only be used in the appropriate slot.
The supplementary ISPS power supply module is made up of two similar DC/DC converters. It is supplied
with -48 V from two PS350As.

6.1 19”rack

/>
The following power supply units are used in the 19” rack:

• PSL55 → 122
• PS350A → 124 combined with PS350 Adaption (not in the ICS)

For the installation of the PS350A the

6.1.1 PS350 Adaption

By means of a special adaption set a PS350A can be installed in the Integral 55 rack. The installation is done
on the left side (front side). The first connecting circuit slot is lost.

94 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 6 Power supply

The PS350A can be operated with both 48V and with 230 V, 50/60 Hz or 115 V, 60 Hz mains voltage. The
electrical values of the PS350A are shown under PS350A, Technical data → 124
In combination with the PSL55, ringing voltage frequency 50 Hz, the PS350A can be operated as a redundant
power supply.

Assembly kit 1 or 2 has to be included in the order for the

installation of the PS350A. It comprises the cover plate, filter,
internal wiring and installation material.

1. PS350 Adaption

Six assembly kits have been defined:

1. Assembly kit for 48V power supply with 50/25 Hz AC ringing voltage, material number: 49.9907.8083
2. Assembly kit for 230V/115V AC power supply with 50/25 Hz AC ringing voltage, material number:
49.9907.6490
3. Assembly kit fuse clamp for 19” cabinet, material number: 49.9907.7417

4. Assembly kit fuse clamp for standing casing, material number: 49.9907.7416
5. Assembly kit for expansions (19” cabinets and standing casings), material number: 49.9907.7419
6. Installation kit, material number: 49.9907.4791

CSI55 LX 07/2006 95
6 Power supply

The installation procedures during operation vary depending on the different application cases:

96 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 6 Power supply

Failure and replacement of the PS350A in the case of redundant power supply or retrofitting of the
PS350A
PBX only with mains voltage 230V/115V
Activity Note / Necessary auxiliary means
Disconnection of 230V/115V
Removal of the defective PS350A
Connection of 230V/115V to a new PS350A Mains cable with protective conductor
required!
Contained in assembly kit 2.
Insertion of the preloaded PS350A
Disconnection of 230V/115V by removing the mains
cable
Install cover assembly kit Installation kit 2
Connection of 230V/115V to PS350A cover Mains cable without protective conductor
(contained in assembly kit 6), or combination
of mains cable with protective conductor and
adapter cable

Failure and replacement of the PS350A in the case of redundant power supply or retrofitting of the
PS350A
System with 48V battery voltage
Activity Note / Necessary auxiliary means
Put the switch to OFF
Disconnection of -48V
Removal of the defective PS350A
Put the switch of the new PS350A to OFF
Connection of the -48V battery voltage;
Screw cable to cover clamps
Put the battery plug of the cover into the PS350A
Put the switch to ON, preloading of the PS350A
Insertion of the preloaded PS350A
Install cover assembly kit Installation kit 1

Failure and replacement of the PS350A in the case of redundant power supply or retrofitting of the
PS350A
System with 230V and 48V battery voltage
Here, preference should be given to preloading using the 48V battery voltage.
The installation/replacement is done with assembly kit 1.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 97
6 Power supply

6.1.1.1 Installation

Startup procedure of a PS350A in Integral 55

The startup procedure of a PS350A in I55 is as follows:

1. Simple power supply with PS350A

• Installation of the PS350A

• Connection of 230V
• Put the switch to off
• Connection of -48V
• Put the switch to on

2. Redundant power supply with PS350A and PSL55

• Installation of the PS350A
• Connection of 230V
• Put the switch to off
• Connection of -48V
• Put the switch to on
• Installation of the PSL55
• Connection of 230V
3. Failure and replacement of the PS350A in the case of redundant power supply
• Put the switch to off
• Disconnection of -48V
• Disconnection of 230V
• Removal of the defective PS350A
• Put the switch of the new PS350A to off
• Connection of -48V (preloading of the PS350A), hast to be preloaded with -48V because 230V
must not be used due to the interruption of the protective conductor (PE).
• Installation of the PS350A
• Connection of 230V

Installation PS350 Adaption

1. Insert the PS350A into the slot

2. Screw the separators at the top and at the bottom (1.) into the rack.

98 CSI55 LX 07/2006
 6 Power supply

3. Connect the wire ends for

• 230V (1.)
• -48V to the PS350A (2.)
and
• -48V to the clamps (3.).

CSI55 LX 07/2006 99
6 Power supply

Put the cover onto the rack and screw it at the top and at the bottom (1).

100 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 6 Power supply

6.1.1.2 Switching off the ringing current PSL55

The power supply unit PSL55 can be operated in conjunction with a PS350A Rev 02.
If it is necessary to ring with 72VAC/25Hz, the ringing current output on the PSL55 must be switched off so that
the ringing current generator of the PS350A 72VAC/25Hz can be activated, see Ringing current switchover
PS350A → 102.
This is done by means of the switch located on the underside of the PSL55. The switch must be placed in the
direction of the multiple socket.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 101

6 Power supply

1. Ringer switch

The supplied sticker must be attached to the PSL55.

6.1.1.3 Ringing current switchover PS350A

The power supply unit PS350A Rev 02 can be operated in conjunction with the PSL55.
If it is necessary to ring with 72VAC/25Hz the ringing current output on the PS350A must be switched from
ringing voltage frequency 50 Hz to 25 Hz, see also Switching off the ringing current PSL55 → 101.
This is done by means of the switch located on the underside of the PS350A.

102 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 6 Power supply

PS350A, underside

1. Switch for ringing voltage frequency

The instructions are shown on the side panel of the housing.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 103

6 Power supply

PS350A

1. PS350A
2. Instruction plate

6.1.1.4 48V in cabinet

There is a fuse clamp for 19” cabinet for the connection of the -48V voltage in the cabinet.

104 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 6 Power supply

The fuse clamp can be extended by up to four connecting options.

In the standing casing the fuse clamp is mounted as shown in the picture.

6.1.1.5 Special aspects

The following points should be noted in the case of redundant power supply with PS350A:

CSI55 LX 07/2006 105

6 Power supply

• It is not possible to have redundant 48V supply in one rack. Only one PS350A can be plugged.
• The switchover time of the ringing voltage generators in the event of failure of a generator is approx.
20 ms from PS350A to PSL55 and approx. 200 ms from PSL55 to PS350A. This might disconnect an
analogue connection that is in the calling state at that time.

• A redundant operation mode of the ringing voltage is not possible for the 25 Hz setting (for redundant
power supply the ringing voltage must be deactivated on the PSL55).
• Fault signalling is not assigned unequivocally to the power supply unit and is also created twice.
• A special configuration and identification of the first connecting circuit slot is required for the use of the
PS350A in CAT and IMS.
• When plugging or unplugging the PS350A a special startup procedure has to be followed.

Please note also the connection of the

6.1.2 FPE in cabinets

Connect the copper wire (FPE=green/yellow, greater/equal 2.5 mm2) to the earthing rail in the 19” cabinet.
There is a clamp on the base of the standing casing for the copper wire.
All racks must be earthed via a separately routed protective conductor. Earthing via the protective conductor
of the power cord does not suffice.
The protective conductor has a green-yellow insulating jacket and a minimum cross-section of 2.5 mm2.
It is clamped to:

• The earthing rail (19” cabinet) or ground clamp (standing casing).

• The ground clamp on the rear side depicted in the following diagram.

106 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 6 Power supply

Section of the rear of the rack

1. Ground clamp

6.1.2.1 19”cabinet

The general information of the earthing concept must be taken into account. In the following you will see
graphic presentations of various configurations and their earthing measures.
Arrangement in 19” cabinet without UPS or with UPS outside the cabinet

CSI55 LX 07/2006 107

6 Power supply

1. Multiple sockets
2. Junction boxes in the cabinet
3. For mains connection:Fixed connection with separation option
e.g. cable 49.9906.7592 with CEE plug
For UPS: Connecting cable UPS system/cabinet 49.9906.8660
4. Potential equalisation conductor (PA) leads to the potential equalisation bar of the electrical installation
of the building minimum 6 mm2
5. Potential equalisation bar cabinet
6. Cabinet housing

Arrangement in a 19” cabinet with UPS systems in the cabinet

108 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 6 Power supply

1. Multiple socket of the UPS system

2. UPS system
3. Multiple socket in the cabinet
4. Junction box in the cabinet
5. Fixed connection with separation option, e.g. cable 49.9906.7592 with CEE plug
6. Potential equalisation conductor (PA) min. 6 mm2 to potential equalisation bar of electrical installation of
the building
7. Potential equalisation bar cabinet
8. Cabinet

CSI55 LX 07/2006 109

6 Power supply

CSI55 and other devices such as servers can be connected to the sockets of the upper or lower configuration.

An intermediate cable with material number 29.4752.3540 must be used to connect the
PSL55 power supply unit.

The mains cable, e.g. 27.4752.1003 is then connected to this intermediate cable that only has L and N
conductors. The mains cable has L, N and PE.
The mains cable can then be connected to the mains connection for example via the multiple socket in the
cabinet.

6.1.2.2 Standing casing

Connection of a rack in the standing casing (C1 module)

1. Intermediate cable 29.4752.3540

2. Mains cable, e.g. 27.4752.1003

3. Mains connection circuit or UPS connection
4. Lockable earth plug with cable 49.9804.5750

5. Cabinet

The lockable earth plug with cable 49.9804.5750 is only used in C1 modules!

Connection of two racks in the standing casing (C2 module)

110 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 6 Power supply

1. Intermediate cable 29.4752.3540

2. Mains cable, e.g. 27.4752.1003
3. Mains connection circuit or UPS connection
4. FPE conductor min. 2.5 mm2
5. Potential equalisation bolt on standing casing
6. Potential equalisation conductor (PA) min. 6 mm2 to potential equalisation bar of electrical installation of
the building
7. Cabinet

An intermediate cable with material number 29.4752.3540 must be used to connect the
PSL55 power supply unit.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 111

6 Power supply

The mains cable, e.g. 27.4752.1003 is then connected to this intermediate cable that only has L and N
conductors. The mains cable has L, N and PE.
The mains cable can then be connected to the mains connection for example via the multiple socket in the
cabinet.

6.1.2.3 Housing/Cabinet solutions

The general information of the earthing concept must be taken into account. In the following you will see
graphic presentations of various configurations and their earthing measures.
Arrangement in 19” cabinet without UPS or with UPS outside the cabinet

1. Multiple sockets
2. Junction boxes in the cabinet

3. For mains connection:Fixed connection with separation option

e.g. cable 49.9906.7592 with CEE plug
For UPS: Connecting cable UPS system/cabinet 49.9906.8660

112 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 6 Power supply

4. Potential equalisation conductor (PA) leads to the potential equalisation bar of the electrical installation
of the building minimum 6 mm2
5. Potential equalisation bar cabinet

6. Cabinet housing

Arrangement in a 19” cabinet with UPS systems in the cabinet

1. Multiple socket of the UPS system

2. UPS system
3. Multiple socket in the cabinet

CSI55 LX 07/2006 113

6 Power supply

4. Junction box in the cabinet

5. Fixed connection with separation option, e.g. cable 49.9906.7592 with CEE plug
6. Potential equalisation conductor (PA) min. 6 mm2 to potential equalisation bar of electrical installation of
the building
7. Potential equalisation bar cabinet
8. Cabinet

An intermediate cable with material number 29.4752.3540 must be used to connect the
PSL55 power supply unit.

The mains cable, e.g. 27.4752.1003 is then connected to this intermediate cable that only has L and N
conductors. The mains cable has L, N and PE.
The mains cable can then be connected to the mains connection for example via the multiple socket in the
cabinet.
Connection of a rack in the standing casing (C1 module)

1. Intermediate cable 29.4752.3540

2. Mains cable, e.g. 27.4752.1003

3. Mains connection circuit or UPS connection
4. Lockable earth plug with cable 49.9804.5750
5. Cabinet

The lockable earth plug with cable 49.9804.5750 is only used in C1 modules!

114 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 6 Power supply

Connection of two racks in the standing casing (C2 module)

1. Intermediate cable 29.4752.3540

2. Mains cable, e.g. 27.4752.1003
3. Mains connection circuit or UPS connection
4. FPE conductor min. 2.5 mm2

5. Potential equalisation bolt on standing casing

6. Potential equalisation conductor (PA) min. 6 mm2 to potential equalisation bar of electrical installation of
the building
7. Cabinet

CSI55 LX 07/2006 115

6 Power supply

6.2 B3 module

The following power supply units are used in B3 modules:

• PS280A → 123
• PS350A → 124
• ISPS (IMTU Supplementary Power Supply) → 125

The connection of 230V and 48V is made in the

6.2.1 Fuse Panels

Connection to the Supply Circuit

The B3 module is suitable for connection to 230 Volt alternating mains voltage or 48 Volt direct voltage or both.
The modules may have more than one connection to the supply circuit.
Operation with Battery or External 48 Volt Direct Current Voltage
The connecting cables for the battery or the external 48 Volt direct current voltage supply to the 1/2 kg rack
must have a minimum cross-section of 6 mm2.
Depending on the cable length, higher cable cross-sections may be required to prevent the voltage drop from
exceeding the permissible values.
If the system is supplied by an external 48 Volt direct current voltage source, this must be safely isolated from
the mains voltage and correspond with the classification for SELV. A suitable, easily accessible disconnecting
device which corresponds to the current values above is to be provided in the supply circuit.
Protective Earthing
All modules must generally be earthed via a separately routed protective conductor. Earthing via the protective
conductor of the power cord does not suffice.
The protective conductor must have a green-yellow insulating jacket and a minimum cross-section of 2.5 mm2
if mechanical protection is present, or 4 mm2 if this is not the case. More detailed information can be found in
the “Earthing concept” section.

116 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 6 Power supply

6.2.1.1 Fuse panel -48 V 1/2 K rack

Fuse panel -48V 1/2 K rack

1. Fuses F1 to F2 DIAZET Type USED 16, S16 A/500 V, time-lag

2. From primary current supply

F1 F2
PS 1 o
PS 2 o
PS 3 x
PS 4 x

o = Single PS x = Doubled PS

Sequence pattern of PS1 to PS4 (front view)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 117

6 Power supply

Text on label

Rear view of the 1/2 K rack

1. first B3 module
2. second B3 module
3. Mains supply assembly kit B1, B3 230V 29.5630.8061
or
Mains supply assembly kit B3 230V 29.5630.8071
for power supply second B module (PS2)
4. UPS operation assembly kit B1, B3 -48 V 29.5630.8081
or
UPS operation assembly kit B1E -48V 29.5630.8091
for power supply second B module (PS2)
or
assembly kit -48V doubling of B modules 29.5630.830
5. Mains supply assembly kit B1, B3 230V 29.5630.8061
for power supply first B module (PS1)

118 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 6 Power supply

6. UPS operation assembly kit B1, B3 -48V 29.5630.8081

for power supply first B module (PS1)
or
assembly kit -48V doubling of B modules 29.5630.8301

6.2.1.2 Connecting the Battery

Move the battery switch to position 0 on all inserted PS350 power supply units. The battery switch is located
on the front panel of the unit.
Disconnect the battery connection (e.g. remove the -48V fuse in the battery compartment).
Strip the end of the cable (approx. 15 cm). Feed the connecting cable from the battery into the console. Strip
the ends of both wires.
Clamp the red wire (GND) and the blue wire (-48 V) to the terminals on the locking plate illustrated.

1. Console, section of the front side

6.2.1.3 Cross-section of the cable between the B3 module and the battery

Fuse as per standard value

Simple 16 A 20 A 25 A 32 A 50 A 63 A 80 A
distance
2m 2.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 2.5 mm2 4 mm2 6 mm2 6 mm2
4m 2.5 mm2 4 mm2 4 mm2 6 mm2 10 mm2 10 mm2 16 mm2
6m 4 mm2 6 mm2 6 mm2 10 mm2 16 mm2 16 mm2 35 mm2
8m 6 mm2 6 mm2 10 mm2 10 mm2 16 mm2 25 mm2 35 mm2
10 m 6 mm2 10 mm2 10 mm2 16 mm2 25 mm2 25 mm2 35 mm2
12 m 10 mm2 10 mm2 16 mm2 16 mm2 25 mm2 35 mm2 35 mm2
14 m 10 mm2 16 mm2 16 mm2 25 mm2 35 mm2 35 mm2 50 mm2

CSI55 LX 07/2006 119

6 Power supply

Fuse as per standard value

Simple 16 A 20 A 25 A 32 A 50 A 63 A 80 A
distance
16 m 10 mm2 16 mm2 16 mm2 25 mm2 35 mm2 50 mm2 50 mm2
18 m 16 mm2 16 mm2 25 mm2 25 mm2 35 mm2 50 mm2 70 mm2
20 m 16 mm2 16 mm2 25 mm2 25 mm2 50 mm2 50 mm2 70 mm2
22 m 16 mm2 16 mm2 25 mm2 35 mm2 50 mm2 50 mm2 70 mm2
24 m 16 mm2 25 mm2 25 mm2 35 mm2 50 mm2 70 mm2 70 mm2
26 m 16 mm2 25 mm2 25 mm2 35 mm2 50 mm2 70 mm2 95 mm2
28 m 25 mm2 25 mm2 35 mm2 35 mm2 70 mm2 70 mm2 95 mm2
30 m 25 mm2 25 mm2 35 mm2 35 mm2 70 mm2 70 mm2 95 mm2
32 m 25 mm2 25 mm2 35 mm2 50 mm2 70 mm2 95 mm2 95 mm2
34 m 25 mm2 25 mm2 35 mm2 50 mm2 70 mm2 95 mm2 120 mm2
36 m 25 mm2 35 mm2 35 mm2 50 mm2 70 mm2 95 mm2 120 mm2
38 m 25 mm2 35 mm2 35 mm2 50 mm2 70 mm2 95 mm2 120 mm2
40 m 25 mm2 35 mm2 50 mm2 50 mm2 95 mm2 95 mm2 120 mm2
42 m 25 mm2 35 mm2 50 mm2 50 mm2 95 mm2 95 mm2 150 mm2
44 m 35 mm2 35 mm2 50 mm2 70 mm2 95 mm2 120 mm2 150 mm2
46 m 35 mm2 35 mm2 50 mm2 70 mm2 95 mm2 120 mm2 150 mm2
48 m 35 mm2 35 mm2 50 mm2 70 mm2 95 mm2 120 mm2 150 mm2
50 m 35 mm2 50 mm2 50 mm2 70 mm2 95 mm2 120 mm2 150 mm2
52 m 35 mm2 50 mm2 50 mm2 70 mm2 95 mm2 120 mm2 150 mm2
54 m 35 mm2 50 mm2 50 mm2 70 mm2 120 mm2 150 mm2 185 mm2
56 m 35 mm2 50 mm2 70 mm2 70 mm2 120 mm2 150 mm2 185 mm2
58 m 35 mm2 50 mm2 70 mm2 70 mm2 120 mm2 150 mm2 185 mm2
60 m 35 mm2 50 mm2 70 mm2 70 mm2 120 mm2 150 mm2 185 mm2
62 m 50 mm2 50 mm2 70 mm2 95 mm2 120 mm2 150 mm2 185 mm2
64 m 50 mm2 50 mm2 70 mm2 95 mm2 120 mm2 150 mm2 185 mm2
66 m 50 mm2 50 mm2 70 mm2 95 mm2 120 mm2 150 mm2 240 mm2
68 m 50 mm2 50 mm2 70 mm2 95 mm2 150 mm2 185 mm2 240 mm2
70 m 50 mm2 70 mm2 70 mm2 95 mm2 150 mm2 185 mm2 240 mm2

Clamp cross-section: B3 module 16 mm2

Intermediate distribution will be required for larger supply conductor cross-sections.
.
Please note also the connection of the

6.2.2 FPE in B3 module

The standing casings, 19” cabinets and possibly also the standing cabinets must be connected to a FPE.
The dimensions of the copper wire are dependent on the installations (sum of the amperage of the individual
devices). The exact procedure is described in the chapter Earthing concept → 136 .
Feed the copper wire (FPE=green/yellow, greater/equal 2.5 mm2) through one of the cable openings in the
console.

120 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 6 Power supply

Strip the end of the wire.

Direct Supply
Use a cable lug to clamp the wire to the screw with toothed lock washer illustrated.

Console of the PBX Integral 55, section from the front side
Uninterrupted Power Supply
Clamp the wire on the screw terminal shown into the locking plate.

Check whether the FPE is properly connected to the potential equalisation bar, distribution
battery and server!

Clamp the wire on the screw terminal shown into the locking plate.

1. Console, section of the front side

To protect against fire and energy hazards, fuses must only be replaced with fuses of the
same type. Fuses F1 to F4 DIAZET Type USED 16, S16 A/500 V, time-lag

CSI55 LX 07/2006 121

6 Power supply

6.3 PSL55

The power supply module PSL55 has the following performance features:

• Harmonics as per EN 61000 (PFC).

• Noise immunity input 4 kV (1.2/50).
• Delayed disconnection of outputs -28 V, -48 V, -60 V during overload/short-circuit

• Delayed disconnection of device during overload/short-circuit of +5 V output.

• Board ID data
• I2C bus port

Technical Data
Voltages and Frequencies

PSL55, Part number: 49.9902.4943

Mains voltage 230 V; ±10 % (single phase alternating current)
Mains frequency 230 V, 50 Hz -6% +26%;
Reduced voltage -5 V, +5 V, -28 V, -48 V, -60 V
AC ringing voltage 72 V
Ringing voltage frequency 50/60 Hz
Protection class 1 (in accordance with VDE 0100)
Radio interference Limit class B (in accordance with EN 55022 and VDE 878)
suppression

Device input
Power and currents

PSL55, Part number: 49.9902.4943

Pprim 325 VA
Iprim 1.52 A

Device output
Power and currents

PSL55, Part number: 49.9902.4943

P 262 W
+ 5V 18 A
-5V 1A
-28 / 48V *#2.2 / 3.2* A
-60V 1.3*# A
72 V 0.18 A

122 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 6 Power supply

* = total performance max. 154W

# = total performance max. 140W

6.4 PS280A

The power supply module PS280A has the following performance features:

• Harmonics as per EN 61000 (PFC).

• Noise immunity input 4 kV (1.2/50).
• Delayed disconnection of outputs -28 V, -48 V, -60 V during overload/short-circuit

• Delayed disconnection of device during overload/short-circuit of +5 V output.

Technical Data
Voltages and Frequencies

PS280A, Part number: 49.9807.6163

Mains voltage 230 V; plus/minus 10 % (single phase alternating current), switchable to 115
V; plus/minus 10 %
Mains frequency 230 V, 50 Hz or 60 Hz; plus/minus 3 Hz; 115 V, 60 Hz; plus/minus 3 Hz
Reduced voltage -5 V, +5 V, -28 V, -48 V, -60 V
AC ringing voltage 72 V
Ringing voltage frequency 50/60 Hz
Protection class 1 (in accordance with VDE 0100)
Radio interference Limit class B (in accordance with EN 55022 and VDE 878)
suppression

Device input
Power and currents

PS280A, Part number: 49.9807.6163

Pprim 450 VA
Iprim 1.82 A

Device output
Power and currents

PS280A, Part number: 49.9807.6163

P 337 W
+ 5V 23 A
-5V 1.5 A
-28 / 48V 3.2* A
-60V 0.8 A
72 V 0.18 A

CSI55 LX 07/2006 123

6 Power supply

* total performance max. 154 W

6.5 PS350A

The power supply module PS350A (Frako) has the following performance features:

• Harmonics as per EN 61000 (PFC).

• Noise immunity input 4 kV (1.2/50).
• Power increase of outputs compared to PS280 (see table).

• Delayed disconnection of outputs -28 V, -48 V, -60 V during overload/short-circuit and power increase 28
V/5 A
• Delayed disconnection of device during overload/short-circuit of +5 V output.
• Call generator synchronisation when doubling the power supply (PS350A/PSL55 only in case of 50 Hz
ringing voltage frequency)

Technical Data
Voltages and Frequencies

PS350A, Part number: 49.9807.6164

Mains voltage 230 V; plus/minus 10 % (single phase alternating current), switchable to 115
V; plus/minus 10 %
Mains frequency 230 V, 50 Hz or 60 Hz; plus/minus 3 Hz; 115 V, 60 Hz; plus/minus 3 Hz
Battery voltage -48 V
Reduced voltage -5 V, +5 V, -28 V, -48 V, -60 V
AC ringing voltage 72 V
Ringing voltage frequency 50 Hz redundancy with PSL55;
25 Hz no redundancy with PSL55
Protection class 1 (in accordance with VDE 0100)
Radio interference Limit class B (in accordance with EN 55022 and VDE 878)
suppression

Device input
Power and currents

PS350A, Part number: 49.9807.6164 PS350A, Part number: 49.9807.6164

with battery charge with battery operation
Pprim 622 VA 622 VA
Iprim 2.7 A and 230 V
Ibat 13 A and 55.2 V

Device output
Power and currents

PS350A, Part number: 49.9807.6164 PS350A, Part number: 49.9807.6164

with battery charge with battery operation

124 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 6 Power supply

P 435 W 435 W
+ 5V 23 A 23 A
-5V 1.5 A 1.5 A
-28 / 48V 5.0/5.0* A 5.0/5.0* A
-60V 2.5* A 2.5* A
72 V 0.18 A 0.18 A
Ibat 1.8* A

* = Total power less/equal 300 W

6.6 ISPS (IMTU Supplementary Power Supply)

The supplementary power supply module ISPS is used for the direct feeding of the boards of the B3 module
if more than 10 modules are connected.
The 2 DC/DC converters work parallel to the B3 module’s PS350A power pack. They convert the superfluous
capacity of the -48 V rail to +5 V.
Maximum capacity 1 ISPS per B3 module
Technical data
Voltages and Frequencies

ISPS, material number: 28.5630.1991

Mains voltage -48 V direct current voltage from PS280 or PS350
Mains frequency DC
Reduced voltage +5V

Device Input Side

Capacity and Currents

ISPS, material number: 28.5630.1991

Pprim 122 VA
Iprim 2.55 A

Device Output Side

Capacity and Currents

ISPS, material number: 28.5630.1991

P 100 W
+ 5V 20 A

6.6.1 Fuses

CSI55 LX 07/2006 125

6 Power supply

To protect against fire and energy hazards, fuses must only be replaced with fuses of the
same type.
Remove cooling plate (four screws on conductor side)
fuses F1 and F2 with G fuse link 6.3 x 32 mm, 20 A, 250 V, semi-lag
fuses F3 and F4 with G fuse link 5 x 20 mm, 4 A, 250 V, time-lag

Board ISPS, location of fuses

6.7 Uninterrupted Power Supply

Stand-alone and built-in (19” technology) devices are available for the uniterrupted power supply (UPS).
The procedures that are relevant to assembly and commissioning are described in the manufacturer docu-
ments. These documents are enclosed with the products.
A distinction is made between online technology and line-interactive technology. The application fields of each
type are partly different. While the line-interactive family is able to compensate

• Power failures
• Voltage oscillations
• Voltage peaks
• Undervoltage
• Overvoltage

online USP systems are also capable of compensating

• Voltage surges
• Alternating voltages

• Voltage bursts
• High harmonic oscillations

126 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 6 Power supply

.
Online USP systems must always be used for customers with increased safety requirements such as Hospi-
tals, Police, Fire Brigade or energy supply companies. In addition to that, online UPS systems will continue to
be used in cases where a poor quality of the mains supply must be expected, for example near railway lines,
sawmills etc.
The selection criteria are shown below.

Disturbances in the Time EN 50091-3/ UPS solution Discharge

mains supply IEC 620403 solution
1. Power failures > 10 ms VFD Classification 3 ———-
Voltage+ passive
2. Voltage oscillations < 16 ms ———-
Frequency standby operation
3. Voltage peaks 4 - 16 ms Dependent (offline) ———-
4. Undervoltage continuous VI Classification 2 ———-
Voltage+ line
5. Overvoltage continuous Interpendent interactive ———-
operation
6. Lightning strikes sporadic VFI Classification 1 Lighting and over
Voltage+ double voltage protection
Frequency conversion IEC (60364-5-534)
7. Voltage surges < 4 ms Independent operation ———-
(online)
8. Frequency sporadic ———-
oscillations
9. Voltage bursts periodic ———-
10. High harmonic continuous ———-
oscillations

6.7.1 Online UPS systems

Off.-Pos. Material Name MGE Material

number Item number number
or
T-Mat. No.
Online
#.218.310.100 4.999.085.468 Pulsar Extreme 66346 4.999.084.360
1000 C UPS
#.218.310.101 4.999.085.469 Pulsar Extreme 66349 4.999.084.361
1000 C battery
pack
#.218.310.104 4.999.085.472 Pulsar Extreme 66352 4.999.084.364
1000 C Rack
#.218.310.105 4.999.085.473 Pulsar Extreme 66355 4.999.084.365
1000 C Rack
Battery pack
#.218.310.102 4.999.085.470 Pulsar Extreme 66347 4.999.084.362
1500 C UPS

CSI55 LX 07/2006 127

6 Power supply

Off.-Pos. Material Name MGE Material

number Item number number
or
T-Mat. No.
Online
#.218.310.103 4.999.085.471 Pulsar Extreme 66350 4.999.084.363
1500 C battery
pack
#.218.310.106 4.999.085.474 Pulsar Extreme 66353 4.999.084.366
1500 C Rack
#.218.310.107 4.999.085.475 Pulsar Extreme 66356 4.999.084.367
1500 C Rack
Battery pack
#.218.310.108 4.999.085.476 Pulsar Extreme 67747 4.999.084.368
2000
#.218.310.109 4.999.085.477 Pulsar Extreme 67960 4.999.084.369
2000 Battery LA
#.218.310.110 4.999.085.485 Pulsar Extreme 67961 4.999.084.370
2000 Battery XLA
#.218.310.114 4.999.085.489 Pulsar Extreme 67767 4.999.084.374
2000 Rack
#.218.310.115 4.999.085.490 Pulsar Extreme 67980 4.999.084.375
2000 Rack Battery
LA
#.218.310.116 4.999.085.491 Pulsar Extreme 67981 4.999.084.376
2000 Rack Battery
XLA
#.218.310.111 4.999.085.486 Pulsar Extreme 67827 4.999.084.371
3000
#.218.310.112 4.999.085.487 Pulsar Extreme 67964 4.999.084.372
3000 Battery LA
#.218.310.113 4.999.085.488 Pulsar Extreme 67965 4.999.084.373
3000 Battery XLA
#.218.310.117 4.999.085.492 Pulsar Extreme 67847 4.999.084.377
3000 Rack
#.218.310.118 4.999.085.493 Pulsar Extreme 67984 4.999.084.378
3000 Rack Battery
LA
#.218.310.119 4.999.085.494 Pulsar Extreme 67985 4.999.084.379
3000 Rack Battery
XLA
#.218.310.120 4.999.085.495 Comet Extreme 67865 4.999.084.380
4500
#.218.310.121 4.999.085.496 Comet Extreme 67970 4.999.084.381
4500 battery pack
LA
#.218.310.122 4.999.085.497 Comet Extreme 67875 4.999.084.382
4500 Rack

128 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 6 Power supply

Off.-Pos. Material Name MGE Material

number Item number number
or
T-Mat. No.
Online
#.218.310.123 4.999.085.498 Comet Extreme 67990 4.999.084.383
4500 Rack Battery
LA

6.7.1.1 Technical Data

In the relevant documents:

Pulsar EXtreme C
Pulsar EXtreme
and
Comet EXtreme
you will find the technical specifications concerning the products from the firm MGE.

6.7.2 Line-Interactive UPS systems

Off.-Pos. Material Name MGE Material

number Item number number
or
T-Mat. No.
Interactive
#.218.310.124 4.999.085.499 Pulsar Evolution 66225 4.999.084.384
500 Kombi
#.218.310.126 4.999.085.501 Pulsar Evolution 66227 4.999.084.386
800 Rack
#.218.310.125 4.999.085.500 Pulsar Evolution 66226 4.999.084.385
800 Tower
#.218.310.128 4.999.085.503 Pulsar Evolution 66229 4.999.084.388
1100 Rack
#.218.310.127 4.999.085.502 Pulsar Evolution 66228 4.999.084.387
1100 Tower
#.218.310.130 4.999.085.505 Pulsar Evolution 66231 4.999.084.390
1500 Rack
#.218.310.129 4.999.085.504 Pulsar Evolution 66230 4.999.084.389
1500 Tower
#.218.310.131 4.999.085.506 Pulsar Evolution 66232 4.999.084.391
2200 Kombi
#.218.310.132 4.999.085.507 Pulsar Evolution 66235 4.999.084.392
battery pack 2200

CSI55 LX 07/2006 129

6 Power supply

6.7.2.1 Technical Data

In the relevant document

Pulsar Evolution
you will find the technical data concerning the product Pulsar Evolution from the firm MGE.

6.7.3 Supplementary components

Off.-Pos. Material Name MGE Material

number Item number number
or
T-Mat. No.
Accessories
#.218.312.633 4.999.046.989 Status information 66246 4.999.046.989
kit card Pulsar
Extreme C
#.218.312.632 4.999.046.988 Status information 66060 4.999.046.988
kit card
Pulsar/Comet
Extreme
#.218.310.003 4.999.077.567 WEB/SNMP card 66074 4.999.077.567
10/100 BASET
(Extreme)
#.218.310.004 4.999.077.565 WEB/SNMP card 66244 4.999.077.565
10/100 BASET
(ExtremeC)
#.230.001.368 4.999.100.382 Management Pac 66923 4.999.100.382
2
#.218.312.634 4.999.046.990 Mains earthed Mains earthed 4.999.046.990
CEE input cable CEEADAPT
Multiple socket 4.999.092.960
IEC 320-USE 4.999.093.055
Adapter cable

6.7.4 Explanations

Name Material Successor mat. no. Parts list

number
Pulsar Extreme 1000 4.999.085.468 4.999.084.360 4,999,084,360 Pulsar
C UPS Extreme 1000 C Rack
4.999.046.990 Mains earthed
CEE input cable
4.999.093.052 IEC 320-USE
adapter cable
4.999.092.960 Multiple socket
Pulsar Extreme 1000 4.999.085.469 4.999.084.361 4.999.084.361 Pulsar
C battery pack Extreme 1000 C Battery Pack

130 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 6 Power supply

Name Material Successor mat. no. Parts list

number
Pulsar Extreme 1500 4.999.085.470 4.999.084.362 4,999,084,362 Pulsar
C UPS Extreme 1500 C Rack
4.999.046.990 Mains earthed
CEE input cable
4.999.093.052 IEC 320-USE
adapter cable
4.999.092.960 Multiple socket
Pulsar Extreme 1500 4.999.085.471 4.999.084.363 4.999.084.363 Pulsar
C battery pack Extreme 1500 C UPS Battery
Pack
Pulsar Extreme 1000 4.999.085.472 4.999.084.364 4,999,084,364 Pulsar
C Rack Extreme 1000 C Rack
4.999.046.990 Mains earthed
CEE input cable
4.999.093.052 IEC 320-USE
adapter cable
4.999.092.960 Multiple socket
Pulsar Extreme 1000 4.999.085.473 4.999.084.365 4,999,084,365 Pulsar
C Rack Battery pack Extreme 1000 C Rack Battery
pack
Pulsar Extreme 1500 4.999.085.474 4.999.084.366 4.999.084.366 Pulsar
C Rack Extreme 1500 C Rack
4.999.046.990 Mains earthed
CEE input cable
4.999.093.052 IEC 320-USE
adapter cable
4.999.092.960 Multiple socket
Pulsar Extreme 1500 4.999.085.475 4.999.084.367 4.999.084.367 Pulsar
C Rack Battery pack Extreme 1500 C Rack Battery
pack
Pulsar Extreme 2000 4.999.085.476 4.999.084.368 4,999,084,368 Pulsar
Extreme 2000
4.999.092.960 Multiple socket
Pulsar Extreme 2000 4.999.085.477 4.999.084.369 4,999,084,369 Pulsar
Battery LA Extreme 2000 Battery LA
Pulsar Extreme 2000 4.999.085.485 4.999.084.370 4,999,084,370 Pulsar
Battery XLA Extreme 2000 Battery XLA
Pulsar Extreme 3000 4.999.085.486 4.999.084.371 4.999.084.371 Pulsar
Extreme 3000
4.999.092.960 Multiple socket
Pulsar Extreme 3000 4.999.085.487 4.999.084.372 4.999.084.372 Pulsar
Battery LA Extreme 3000 Battery LA
Pulsar Extreme 3000 4.999.085.488 4.999.084.373 4.999.084.373 Pulsar
Battery XLA Extreme 3000 Battery XLA
Pulsar Extreme 2000 4.999.085.489 4.999.084.374 4.999.084.374 Pulsar
Rack EXtreme 2000 Rack
4.999.092.960 Multiple socket

CSI55 LX 07/2006 131

6 Power supply

Name Material Successor mat. no. Parts list

number
Pulsar Extreme 2000 4.999.085.490 4.999.084.375 4,999,084,375 Pulsar
Rack Battery LA Extreme 2000 Rack Battery
LA
Pulsar Extreme 2000 4.999.085.491 4.999.084.376 4,999,084,376 Pulsar
Rack Battery XLA Extreme 2000 Rack Battery
XLA
Pulsar Extreme 3000 4.999.085.492 4.999.084.377 4.999.084.377 Pulsar
Rack Extreme 3000 Rack
4.999.092.960 Multiple socket
Pulsar Extreme 3000 4.999.085.493 4.999.084.378 4.999.084.378 Pulsar
Rack Battery LA Extreme 3000 Rack Battery
LA
Pulsar Extreme 3000 4.999.085.494 4.999.084.379 4.999.084.379 Pulsar
Rack Battery XLA Extreme 3000 Rack Battery
XLA
Comet Extreme 4500 4.999.085.495 4.999.084.380 4.999.100.502 Comet
EXtreme 4500 Basic device
4.999.084.381 Comet
Extreme 4500 Battery Pack
LA
Comet Extreme 4500 4.999.085.496 4.999.084.381 4.999.084.381 Comet
battery pack LA Extreme 4500 Battery Pack
LA
Comet Extreme 4500 4.999.085.497 4.999.084.382 4.999.100.503 Comet
Rack Extreme 4500 Rack Basic
device
4.999.084.383 Comet
Extreme 4500 Rack Battery
LA
Comet Extreme 4500 4.999.085.498 4.999.084.383 4.999.084.383 Comet
Rack Battery LA Extreme 4500 Rack Battery
LA
Pulsar Evolution 500 4.999.085.499 4.999.084.384 4.999.084.384 Pulsar
Kombi Evolution 500 Kombi
4.999.046.990 Mains earthed
CEE input cable
4.999.093.052 IEC 320-USE
adapter cable
4.999.092.960 Multiple socket
Pulsar Evolution 800 4.999.085.500 4.999.084.385 4.999.084.385 Pulsar
Tower Evolution 800 Tower
4.999.046.990 Mains earthed
CEE input cable
4.999.093.052 IEC 320-USE
adapter cable
4.999.092.960 Multiple socket

132 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 6 Power supply

Name Material Successor mat. no. Parts list

number
Pulsar Evolution 800 4.999.085.501 4.999.084.386 4.999.084.386 Pulsar
Rack Evolution 800 Rack
4.999.046.990 Mains earthed
CEE input cable
4.999.093.052 IEC 320-USE
adapter cable
4.999.092.960 Multiple socket
Pulsar Evolution 1100 4.999.085.502 4.999.084.387 4,999,084,387 Pulsar
Tower Evolution 1100 Tower
4.999.046.990 Mains earthed
CEE input cable
4.999.093.052 IEC 320-USE
adapter cable
4.999.092.960 Multiple socket
Pulsar Evolution 1100 4.999.085.503 4.999.084.388 4,999,084,388 Pulsar
Rack Evolution 1100 Rack
4.999.046.990 Mains earthed
CEE input cable
4.999.093.052 IEC 320-USE
adapter cable
4.999.092.960 Multiple socket
Pulsar Evolution 1500 4.999.085.504 4.999.084.389 4,999,084,389 Pulsar
Tower Evolution 1500 Tower
4.999.046.990 Mains earthed
CEE input cable
4.999.093.052 IEC 320-USE
adapter cable
4.999.092.960 Multiple socket
Pulsar Evolution 1500 4.999.085.505 4.999.084.390 4,999,084,390 Pulsar
Rack Evolution 1500 Rack
4.999.046.990 Mains earthed
CEE input cable
4.999.093.052 IEC 320-USE
adapter cable
4.999.092.960 Multiple socket
Pulsar Evolution 2200 4.999.085.506 4.999.084.391 4,999,084,391 Pulsar
Kombi Evolution 2200 Kombi
4.999.046.990 Mains earthed
CEE input cable
4.999.093.052 IEC 320-USE
adapter cable
4.999.092.960 Multiple socket
Pulsar Evolution 4.999.085.507 4.999.084.392 4.999.084.392 Pulsar
battery pack 2200 Evolution battery pack 2200

6.7.5 Installation and service concept

Installation and service concept for the Uninterrupted Power Supply from MGE, see Installation and service
concept Uninterrupted Power Supply from MGE.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 133

6 Power supply

6.7.6 Earthing measures

6.7.6.1 Pulsar Extreme 700C-1500C, standing casing

For Discharge currents >3.5 mA, see

Annex 5 → 140 you must connect an earthing wire to Pulsar Extreme 700C-1500C, standing casing.
Proceed as follows:

Extract Pulsar Extreme 700C-1500C, standing casing

1. Ground clamp

• Clamp the earthing wire to the ground clamp (1.).

6.7.6.2 Pulsar Extreme 700C-1500C, rack version

For Discharge currents >3.5 mA, see

Annex 5 → 140 you must connect an earthing wire to Pulsar Extreme 700C-1500C, rack version.
Proceed as follows:

134 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 6 Power supply

Extract Pulsar Extreme 700C-1500C, rack version

1. Ground clamp

• Clamp the earthing wire to the ground clamp (1.).

6.7.6.3 Pulsar Extreme 1500 - 3000

For Discharge currents >3.5 mA, see

Annex 6 → 141 you must connect an earthing wire to Pulsar Extreme 700C-3000.
Proceed as follows:

CSI55 LX 07/2006 135

6 Power supply

Extract Pulsar Extreme 1500 -3000

1. Cover
2. Opening for connecting cable
3. Connecting clamps

• Unscrew the cover (1).

• Insert the earthing wire through the designated opening (2.).
• Clamp the earthing wire to the ground clamp (3.).
• Screw the cover back on to the device (1).

6.8 Earthing concept

Telecommunications systems generally required protective earthing (E) and often functional earthing (FE).
Both protective earthing (PE) and functional earthing (FE) can be implemented by means of a functional and
protective earthing conductor (FPE).
Earthing of telecommunications systems is based on EN 60950 and DIN VDE 0800, Part 2, “Telecommunica-
tions Engineering - Earthing and Potential Equalization”.

136 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 6 Power supply

The PE supplied via the earthing-pin plug can then also be used as FE, provided that the operating current
flowing via functional earthing from the telecommunications system is no more than 9 mA alternating current
and/or more than 100 mA direct current from a direct voltage source with 60 V or more than 50 mA from a direct
voltage source with 120 V. If this limit is exceeded, a permanently connected functional earthing conductor,
that can also be used as FPE, must be fitted.
The question of when, how and which devices are to be earthed (PE) for reasons of electrical safety, as well
as device-specific information, is dealt with in the decision-making diagram in the sections titled “Earthing
concept for devices / systems” and “Earthing concept for devices/systems operating via a UPS”.
If a device/system has leakage current of greater than 3.5 mA, the protective-conductor terminal must always
be permanently connected to earth. The leakage currents exhibited by I55 systems, also in combination with
various UPSs, are listed in the tables in Annex 4 to Annex 6.
Housings and cabinet solutions were defined to allow safe and easy handling of the earthing measures.

6.8.1 General Requirements and Explanations for the Decision-Making Diagram

• A permanently connected protective earthing (PE) conductor for several devices is to be implemented
in such a way that removal of one device does not lead to the PE connection for one or several other
devices being interrupted at any point. This can be achieved, for example, by star-shaped routing of
the PE connection from a local earth terminal to the individual devices. (DIN VDE 0800 part 2 Section
6.2.2.5.2)
• The protective earthing (PE) conductor is insulated in green/yellow or is bare (DIN VDE 0100, Part 540,
Section 5.2).
• The minimum cross-section of the functional earthing (FE) conductor depends on the nominal current
strength of the assigned safety device (e.g. automatic circuit breaker), but is at least 2.5 mm2. More
detailed specifications can be found in Table 1 of DIN VDE 0800, Part 2, Section 6.2.2.5.5 (Annex 1).
• The absolute minimum cross-section of the separate earthing wire is: 2.5 mm2 if mechanical protection
is provided (e.g. conductors sheathed in a cable, cable duct or conduit), 4 mm2 if this is not the case (see
DIN VDE 0100 Part 540 Section 5). It also specifies that the minimum cross-section is proportionate to
the operating current of the safety device and its response time as well as to a material coefficient. By
way of providing a guideline, the minimum cross-section of the protective conductor must be same as the
cross-section of the external conductor (mains supply cable) of the system. If the protective conductor
comprises a conductor in a multi-wire cable (see DIN VDE 0100, Part 540, Section 5.2.1), the minimum
cross-section is the same as the cross-section of the external conductor (see DIN VDE 0100, Part 540,
Section 5.1.2). If the supply cable comprises a cable with flexible conductors, its minimum cross-section
is 0.75mm2 (depending on the supply current) (see DIN VDE 0100, Part 520, Section 524.3, Table 52
J).
• The minimum cross-section of the functional and protective earthing conductor (FPE) is subjected to the
same high requirements as for FE and E.

6.8.2 Explanations for the terms SELV, TNV1, TNV2 and TNV3:

In an SELV electric circuit, limited voltages only (max. 42.4 V peak value or 60 V direct voltage) may occur
(both in standard operation and after a single fault), with the exception of temporary exceptions in the event
of faults. SELV voltages are regarded as contact-safe. (refer to EN 60950, Section 2.3 for more detailed
specifications).
In a TNV2 electric circuit limited voltages only may occur in standard operation: Uac/70.7+Udc/120 V<1
(except for telephone ringing signals). Temporary exceptions in the event of single faults are permissible
within defined boundaries. (refer to EN 60950, Section 6.2 for more detailed specifications).

CSI55 LX 07/2006 137

6 Power supply

TNV1 electric circuits are SELV circuits that are subjected to overvoltage surges of the telecommunications
network.
TNV3 electric circuits are TNV2 circuits that are subjected to overvoltage surges of the telecommunications
network.

6.8.3 Annex 1

Minimum cross-sections for sections of the functional earthing conductor (from DIN VDE 0800, Part 2, Section
6.2.2.5.5)

Nominal current strength of the assigned safety Minimum cross-section of the copper conductor in
device 1) in A mm2
up to 25 2,5
up to 35 4
up to 50 6
up to 63 10
up to 125 16
up to 160 25
up to 224 35
up to 250 50
up to 630 70
up to 800 95
up to 1000 120

1) The safety device must not be located in the course of the earthing conductor.

6.8.4 Annex 2

Earthing concept for devices/systems of protective class I

Protective earthing (PE) required due to TNV/SELV #1

yes no
Discharge current >3.5 mA #3,5 Discharge current >3.5 mA #3,5
yes no yes no
Fixed access via: Fixed access via: Fixed access via: PE via earthing-pin plug
Potential equalisation Potential equalisation Potential equalisation of device
bar in the building bar in the building bar in the building
or or or
Oven connection Oven connection Oven connection
socket socket socket
or
Lockable two-pole
earth plug

Earthing concept for devices/systems in protective class II

Protective earthing (PE) required due to TNV/SELV #1

yes no

138 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 6 Power supply

Fixed access via: No PE required

Potential equalisation bar in the building
or
Oven connection socket
or
Lockable two-pole earth plug

Explanations for the decision-making tables:

#1
If a device is connected to both TNV2 / TNV3 circuits (e.g. analog a/b connection or Uko interface) and also
SELV or TNV1 circuits (e.g. V24, S0, UPo, S2m) (DIN EN 60950, section TNV circuit)

6.8.5 Annex 3

Earthing concept for devices/systems in protective class I operating via a UPS system

Protective earthing (PE) required due to TNV/SELV #1

yes no
Discharge current >3.5 mA #2 Discharge current >3.5 mA #2
yes no yes no
Fixed access for all Fixed access for all Fixed access for all E via earthing-pin plug
devices and UPS via: devices and UPS via: devices and UPS via: of the UPS and devices
Potential equalisation Potential equalisation Potential equalisation
bar in the building bar in the building bar in the building
or or or
Oven connection Oven connection Oven connection
socket socket socket
or
Lockable two-pole
protection pin plug

Earthing concept for devices/systems in protective class II operating via a UPS system

Protective earthing (PE) required due to TNV/SELV #1

yes no
Fixed access for all devices and UPS via: PE is not necessary for
Potential equalisation bar in the building devices in protective
or class II.
Oven connection socket The PE for the UPS can
or be supplied via its
Lockable two-pole earth plug earthing-pin plug if its
The PE for the UPS can be supplied via its earthing-pin plug if its leakage leakage current is <3.5
current is <3.5 mA. mA.
A fixed access is necessary if the discharge current is >3.5 mA. A fixed access is
necessary if the
discharge current is >3.5
mA.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 139

6 Power supply

Explanations for the decision-making tables:

#1
If a device is connected to both TNV2 / TNV3 circuits (e.g. analog a/b connection or Uko interface) and also
SELV or TNV1 circuits (e.g. V24, S0, UPo, S2m) (DIN EN 60950, section TNV circuit)
#2
Sum total of leakage currents from UPS and connected devices

6.8.6 Annex 4

Discharge currents of I55 systems

Module Power supply unit Leakage Input filter leakage Total leakage current
type current current
C1 (R1) 1 x PS350 49.9902.4902 < 0.8 mA Not applicable < 0.8 mA
2 x PS350 49.9902.4902 < 0.8 mA < 1.6 mA

C2 (R1-R2) 2 x PS350 49.9902.4902 < 0.8 mA Not applicable < 1.6 mA

4 x PS350 49.9902.4902 < 0.8 mA < 3.2 mA

C3 (R1-R3) 3 x PS350 49.9902.4902 < 0.8 mA Not applicable < 2.4 mA

6 x PS350 49.9902.4902 < 0.8 mA <4.8 mA

C4 (R1-R4) 4 x PS350 49.9902.4902 < 0.8 mA < 3.2 mA

8 x PS350 49.9902.4902 < 0.8 mA <6.4 mA

A fixed earth connection is certainly necessary for all extensions, as the lockable earth plugs are insufficient
in this case to handle the high leakage current (>3.5 mA).

Module type Power supply unit PS leakage Input filter leakage Total leakage
current current current
B3 1 x PS280A < 0.5 mA < 0.3 mA < 0.8 mA
49.9807.6163
1 x PS350A < 0.7 mA < 1.0 mA
49.9807.6164
2 x PS350A < 0.7 mA < 1.7 mA
49.9807.6164

6.8.7 Annex 5

Leakage currents of I55 systems with UPS Pulsar Extreme 700C, 1000C, 1500C

Module Power supply unit Leakage current UPS Pulsar Extreme Leakage current
type 700C, 1000C, 1500C total
C1 (R1) 1 x PS350 < 0.8 mA < 0.4 mA < 1.2 mA
49.9902.4902

140 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 6 Power supply

2 x PS350 < 1.6 mA < 2.0 mA

49.9902.4902

C2 2 x PS350 < 1.6 mA < 0.4 mA < 2.0 mA

(R1-R2) 49.9902.4902
4 x PS350 < 3.2 mA <3.6 mA
49.9902.4902

C3 3 x PS350 < 0.8 mA < 0.4 mA < 2.8 mA

(R1-R3) 49.9902.4902
6 x PS350 <4.8 mA <5.2 mA
49.9902.4902

C4 4 x PS350 < 3.2 mA < 0.4 mA <3.6 mA

(R1-R4) 49.9902.4902
8 x PS350 <6.4 mA <6.8 mA
49.9902.4902

A fixed earth connection is certainly necessary for all extensions, as the lockable earth plugs are insufficient
in this case to handle the high leakage current (>3.5 mA).

Module type Power supply unit PS leakage Input filter leakage Total leakage
current current current
B3 1 x PS280A < 0.5 mA < 0.3 mA < 0.8 mA
49.9807.6163
1 x PS350A < 0.7 mA < 1.0 mA
49.9807.6164
2 x PS350A < 0.7 mA < 1.7 mA
49.9807.6164

If an I55 is used in connection with a B3 module (IMTU), the values of the ”total leakage current” must be
added to the values ”total leakage current” for the I55.

6.8.8 Annex 6

Leakage currents of I55 systems with UPS Pulsar Extreme 1500, 2000, 3000

Module Power supply unit Leakage current UPS Pulsar Extreme Total leakage current
type 1500, 2000, 3000
C1 (R1) 1 x PS350 < 0.8 mA < 2.7 mA < 3.5 mA
49.9902.4902
2 x PS350 < 1.6 mA <4.3 mA
49.9902.4902

C2 2 x PS350 < 1.6 mA < 2.7 mA <4.3 mA

(R1-R2) 49.9902.4902

CSI55 LX 07/2006 141

6 Power supply

4 x PS350 < 3.2 mA <5.9 mA

49.9902.4902

C3 3 x PS350 < 2.4 mA < 2.7 mA <5.1 mA

(R1-R3) 49.9902.4902
6 x PS350 <4.8 mA <7.5 mA
49.9902.4902

C4 4 x PS350 < 3.2 mA < 2.7 mA <5.9 mA

(R1-R4) 49.9902.4902
8 x PS350 <6.4 mA <9.1 mA
49.9902.4902

A fixed earth connection is certainly necessary for all extensions, as the lockable earth plugs are insufficient
in this case to handle the high leakage current (>3.5 mA).

Module type Power supply unit PS leakage Input filter leakage Total leakage
current current current
B3 1 x PS280A < 0.5 mA < 0.3 mA < 0.8 mA
49.9807.6163
1 x PS350A < 0.7 mA < 1.0 mA
49.9807.6164
2 x PS350A < 0.7 mA < 1.7 mA
49.9807.6164

If an I55 is used in connection with a B3 module (IMTU), the values of the ”total leakage current” must be
added to the values ”total leakage current” for the I55.

6.9 Power consumption

-48 V Power consumption of the I55 when fully configured

Module/rack I (A)
R1 rack 1.5 A
1/2K rack (B3) 14 A

Power supply parameteres for the connected terminals in the T13 families

Analogue terminals via ASCEU 48 V/7 mA (350 mW)

Analogue terminals via ASC2 28 V/9 mA (250 mW)
Digital terminals via S0 or UPN 48 V/7 mA (350 mW)
DECT per base station Bosch 48 V/70 mA (3.5 W)

142 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 7 Doubling

7 Doubling

7.1 Doubling

There are two reasons for doubling:

• As an option, the central functions of the communication server Integral 55 may be doubled redundantly
in order to increase the security against failure.
• In addition to the redundant doubling, it may be necessary within the system to double certain functions
in order to enhance the performance (e.g. processor performance or electrical output)

Because these functions have been created with the aid HW units (boards, equipment), this means that if
doubling occurs, a unit will be used not once, but several times in the system.

7.2 Single module

Up to four racks (standing casing, racks in 19” cabinets, racks in 19” frames or any combination thereof) can
form a single module, spread over any area and connected by flexible cables.

Module types: The following names have been defined for the various module types:
C1: Module with one rack (R1)
C2: Module with 2 racks (R1+R2)
C3: Module with 3 racks (R1+R2+R3)
C4: Module with 4 racks (R1+R2+R3+R4)

*CB = ACB/HSCB
CF* = CF22/CF2E

CSI55 LX 07/2006 143

7 Doubling

7.2.1 doubling PS

Doubling of the PS within one module is possible for each individual rack (R1, R2, etc.)
The PSL55 occupies the right-hand slot in the rack. A PSL55 is also connected to the left-hand side of the
rack in the event of PS doubling.

AO = connecting circuit
CB = ACB/HSCB
CF* = CF22/CF2E
C4 Module with PS doubling

The doubling of the PSL55 may be necessary for reasons of:

• Redundancy
• Performance increase

For projects an adaption set - see PS350 Adaption → 94

7.2.2 doubling CF*

Mixed operation CF22/CF2E in one module is not permitted.

CF doubling within one module is only possible in the R1 rack.

An additional CF22/CF2E board, which is normally operated by hot stand-by, can only be inserted there. In
the event of trouble on the active CF22/CF2E side, a complete automatic switchover to the previously passive
CF22/CF2E takes place. Individual messages may be lost here.
The slot for the second CF22/CF2E board is reserved and must be set up during system configuration.

144 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 7 Doubling

AO = connecting circuit
CB = ACB/HSCB
CF* = CF22/CF2E
R1 rack (C1 module) with CF doubling
The switching matrix facilities of a recently inserted CF22/CF2E are updated automatically by adopting the
current information from the active CF22/CF2E, while at the same time entering all connections made since
insertion.
CF doubling is possible in the R1 rack.

AO = connecting circuit
CB = ACB/HSCB
CF* = CF22/CF2E
C4 module with CF doubling

7.2.3 doubling *CB

Mixed operation ACB/HSCB in one module is not possible (different operating systems).

Although doubling of the ACB/HSCB board is possible, technical reasons dictate that it is not necessary in the
single module.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 145

7 Doubling

7.3 Twin module

An I55 twin module is made up of any two I55 single modules (C1, C2, C3 or C4), which, connected to each
other by a transmission channel (optical waveguide), form an I55 system. With regard to the central boards,
the facilities of the connected, individual modules is the same as with a single module.
Each module has its own CF22/CF2E and ACB/HSCB.

AO = connecting circuit
CB = ACB/HSCB
CF* = CF22/CF2E
e.g. a twin module consisting of 2 C1 modules

7.3.1 doubling PS

The power supply (PS) can generally be doubled in any rack of any module that forms a so-called twin module
together with an additional module.
The purpose of the PS doubling may be to establish redundancy or to increase performance.

AO = connecting circuit
CB = ACB/HSCB
CF* = CF22/CF2E
e.g. a twin module consisting of 2 C1 modules
For projects an adaption set - see PS350 Adaption → 94

7.3.2 doubling CF* (within a module)

146 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 7 Doubling

Mixed operation CF22/CF2E in one module is not permitted. However, the other module
(twin) can be equipped with two other CF boards which have to be identical, e.g. two CF2E.

If the central functions of this board are to be doubled redundantly, the CF22/CF2E boards will then be doubled
in the R1 racks of the connected, single modules. This also includes an additional transmission link. For a
transmission link to be operable however, it must not only have an optical waveguide, but also the CFIML
function unit on the CF22/CF2E board.
In principle, the active CF22/CF2E board transmits on both available optical waveguide lines. This means the
MTU functions operate respectively on the CF22/CF2E board which is active at that time. This also operates
the optical waveguide line of the hot stand-by CF22/CF2E board however. In the event of a failure on the
active side, a complete switchover to the hot stand-by CF22/CF2E side will take place.

AO = connecting circuit
CB = ACB/HSCB
CF* = CF22/CF2E
A twin module consisting of 2 C1 modules with CF22/CF2E doubling
If failure of a transmission link occurs without redundancy (double fault!), the two modules are separate and
no longer form a joint unit, they each remain operable, if only in a limited sense.
The switching matrix facilities of a recently inserted CF22/CF2E are updated automatically by adopting the
current information from the active CF22/CF2E, while at the same time entering all connections made since
insertion.

7.3.3 doubling *CB

Mixed operation ACB/HSCB in one module is not possible (different operating systems).

Although doubling of the ACB/HSCB board is possible, technical reasons dictate that it is not necessary.
In the event of ACB/HSCB board failure in a twin module, the corresponding module will also fail. The second
module will continue to operate without limitation. The second ACB/HSCB board, which is still intact, cannot
take on the functions of the failed ACB/HSCB.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 147

7 Doubling

AO = connecting circuit
CB = ACB/HSCB
CF* = CF22/CF2E
Twin module consisting of 2 C1 modules

7.4 Multi-module

7.4.1 Interconnected systems

An I55 multi-module system is made up of several, varied I55 and I33 single modules (between 3 and 16 or
between 17 and 32, depending on the configuration), which are connected to each other by a multi-module,
which can be either an ICS (3 to 16 modules) or a B3 module (17 to 32 modules). The multi-module is
accommodated in a separate module casing. If an ICS is used the casing is a 19” rack and can be installed in
the same cabinet as the CSI55 modules. If more than 16 modules have to be interconnected it is necessary
to use a B3 module with the IMTU function, which cannot be integrated in the 19” technology of the CSI55.
Multi-module without MTU/IMTU doubling with ICS

148 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 7 Doubling

AO = connecting circuit
CB = ACB/HSCB
CF* = CF22/CF2E
Multi-module without MTU/IMTU doubling with B3 module

CSI55 LX 07/2006 149

7 Doubling

AO = connecting circuit
CB = ACB/HSCB
CF* = CF22/CF2E
PS = only PS350A
The following boards are used in the multi-module, among others:

• MLB Module Link Board

• ISMx IMTU Switching Matrix
• ICF IMTU Central Functions

The following chapters describe how operation with the multi-module can be carried out in various ways.

7.4.2 MLB (Module Link Board)

• Board for optical fibre connection; 8 modules can be connected by one 5ML. Up to 2 MLB boards can
be used in one ICS (16 groups).
• Up to four MLB boards can be inserted in one B3 module (17 to 32-group system).
• The optical fibre connectors can be distributed as desired onto the MLB board.
• See also MLB Module Link Board → 209

Example:
4 required optical waveguide connections can be installed on one MLB, although they are distributed over 4
MLB boards.

150 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 7 Doubling

7.4.3 ISMx

• Switching matrix with control

• See also ISMx Switching Matrix x → 206

Four of these boards are present in each multi-module. Should one of these board fail, the remaining con-
nected modules continue working. Connections which have been made via the failed ISMx board will be
disconnected.

When doubled, both multi-modules must contain ISMx boards which are the same type.

7.4.4 ICF

• Inter module manager, clock generation.

• An optical fibre pair can be connected to form a connection path between the IMTU’s during doubling.
• See also ICF IMTU Central Functions → 285

7.4.5 IVZ on *CB boards

The IVZ is always doubled and is placed onto the ACBs/HSCBs of 2 participating modules. This variant is
suitable as long as the number of modules is not too high (normal limit is 8 modules).
The I1 package can be configured with a maximum of 20 groups.
IVZ on ACB/HSCB boards

CSI55 LX 07/2006 151

7 Doubling

AO = connecting circuit
CB = ACB/HSCB
CF* = CF22/CF2E

1. IVZ

7.4.6 IVZ on separate *CB boards

IVZ and RIVZ slots may be allocated as desired.

Installation of a ACB/HCSB (with IVZ function) in a B3/ICS module is generally not possible for software
reasons!
The I2. I3 or I4 package can be expanded with a maximum of 32 groups.
Other functional units of the I3 and I4 packages are assigned to separate ACB/HSCB boards.
IVZ on separate ACB/HSCB boards

152 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 7 Doubling

AO = connecting circuit
CB = ACB/HSCB
CF* = CF22/CF2E

1. IVZ

7.4.7 Doubling of the PS in the B3 module

The failure of a non-doubled PS in a B3 module is synonymous with the failure of the entire multi-module. This
means that communication between the individual, connected modules is no longer possible. Accordingly, all
modules fail completely for communication between modules excepting the two modules with IVZ functions.
This risk can be reduced by doubling the PS (only PS350A) in the multi-module redundantly.

7.4.8 Complete doubling

Doubling of the transmission link

In a multi-module system, only one transmission link per module can ever be connected to a multi-module
(ICS or B3 module). Connecting two transmission links for one module to just one multi-module contradicts
the redundancy concept and is therefore not technically possible - it would lead to erratic behaviour in the
system.
Accordingly, transmission links can only be doubled in a fully doubled multi-module system.
Fully redundant system
In a complete double system, the CF22/CF2E board is present twice over in the individual connected modules
for redundancy purposes, and likewise the multi-module (ICS or B3 module).

CSI55 LX 07/2006 153

7 Doubling

Depending on the slots, one of the two CF22/CF2E boards in each module is connected with one of the two
multi-modules by transmission link.
In this, each of the two multi-modules forms one half of the system together with the CF22/CF2E boards they
are connected to. One of these is the ”active” system half, in which all user data is processed, as for a non-
doubled system. The other is the ”hot stand-by” half, which is activated in different ways in the event of the
”active” half failing.

1. Fibre-optic cable for linking the interconnection servers

2. Fibre-optic link to the ”hot standby” half of the system

3. Fibre-optic link to the ”active” half of the system
4. CF22/CF2E of the ”hot standby” half of the system
5. CF22/CF2E of the ”active” half of the system

154 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 7 Doubling

Complete IMTU doubling

In the event of one of the functional units on one of the two CF22/CF2E or one optical waveguide connection
failing, the missing information is brought over to the module in question from the inactive to the active side,
and therefore is replaced. This alternative route will remain in existence for the duration of the failure.
Following repairs, the active CF22/CF2E in the ”default” active side should take over the information flow
again. This is brought about by a manual service changeover on either one of the two CF22/CF2E boards of
the affected module. This also automatically releases the alternative route between the two ICS/B3 modules,
making it available for any new occurrence of an error in one of the connected modules.
If another error occurs in a different module on the active side while the first error is still in existence (failure
on active CF22/CF2E or its transmission link), the system will react by completely switching over to the other
system half, that is to say, all modules in the system switch to their ”hot standby” side.
The complete system half will also switch over in the event of failure of functional units within an active IMTU
(see above).
If the hot standby side fails, the flow of information is unaffected.
Message loss is to be expected in all cases where a switchover occurs.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 155

8 Boards

8 Boards

The board is a physical unit within the CSI55 system. It is made up of a multilayer, a socket connector,
electronic components and a front panel with low force on/off connectors.
The board frame in the rack contains slots to accommodate various other boards.
Plug connectors are used to secure the boards to the board frame.

8.1 General Points

The boards may be removed and inserted during system operation.

Please note:

• ESD protective measures.

• All existing connections of the board are disconnected if it is removed.

For reasons of EMC, vacant slots should be covered with frontplates.

More information about removing and inserting should be noted for the following boards

• ACB
• HSCB
• CF22
• CF2E
• ICF
• ISM
• CBT (see Measuring and Testing Tools)

• V24IA V24 Interface Adapter (see Measuring and Testing Tools)

. You will find the information in the subchapter ”Removing and Inserting Modules” for the boards mentioned
above.
Removing and inserting
Using the latch fasteners on the front panel, boards can be inserted and then interlocked into the board frame,
or be detached and removed from it.

156 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Board locking levers

1. Latch fasteners
2. Board

Bridges and Breakpoints

In some boards, it is possible to make hardware adjustments (e.g. for setting the current strength). This can
be done by inserting or removing bridges and breakpoints.
The diagram opposite shows the coordinates which enable bridges and breakpoints to be located.

Board co-ordinates

1. Soldering side

CSI55 LX 07/2006 157

8 Boards

8.2 Configurations

Example of a configuration with ICS as multi-module

1. Single module
2. Twin module
3. Multi-module
4. Cable for backplane connection
5. FOC
6. ICS

158 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

There is also an adaption module - see PS350 Adaption → 94

Example of a configuration with B3 module as multi-module

1. Single module
2. Twin module
3. Multi-module
4. Cable for backplane connection
5. FOC

CSI55 LX 07/2006 159

8 Boards

6. B3 module

Mixed operation of ISMx and ISM2x boards is not permissible.

8.3 Block diagram of R1 rack

1. Central Functions, Control and Power Supply

2. analogue

160 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

3. digital
4. IP

Block diagram of R1 rack as of software IEE2

1. Central Functions, Control and Power Supply

2. analogue
3. digital
4. IP

8.4 Control, Central Functions and Transport

CSI55 LX 07/2006 161

8 Boards

Board Sub module Connecting

circuit board

Module/ ACB/ACB1 V24I → 219 AEV24B → 230

Rack/ → 221 V24NI → 219
Backplane
HSCB → 281 V24I → 219 AV24B → 238
V24NI → 219
CBI1A3 → 172
CF22 → 248 CFIML → 187 ESBx → 276
ESBA → 276
ESBB → 276
EOCSM/MM
→ 195
EOCPF → 194
CF2E → 256 CFIML Central ESB → 276
Functions Inter ESBA → 276
Module Link
ESBB → 276
→ 187
EOCSM/MM
→ 195
EOCPF → 194
ICF → 285 CL2M → 401 ESB → 276
ESBA → 276
ESBB → 276
CA3B cable
adapter 3 for B
modules → 393
CL2ME → 402 CA3B → 393
ISMx → 206
DSPF → 190 ASM3 → 171
MLB → 209 MLBIML → 212 EOCSM/MM
→ 195
EOCPF → 194
R1RC → 213

Special application

Sub module Board

V24M → 501 UIP → 495

8.4.1 ACB/ACB1 Advanced Computer Board

Short description
The ACB board is the basic equipment in all modules. This computer board must be used to support the
software IEEx (Linux operating sistem). As HGS it is used a 2.5” hard disc drive.

162 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

The ACB1 board is the follow-up board of the ACB and can be used starting with software version IEE2
(version L021V00 1 1.0). The difference to the ACB is the physical medium of the HGS. In the case of the
ACB1, the HGS is a Compact Flash Card with different capacity according to system size, the following sizes
are recommended:

Compact Flash Card

for single and Twin system: with 1 GB
for multi-module up to 4000 subscr.: with 2 GB
for multi-module of more than 4000 subscr.: with 4 GB

Handling, as well as switch and display functions of both boards are identical:

Features
ETX-PC 512 MByte of main memory, (only one SO DIMM
The ETX-Board is a complet PC-System. All Modul)
functions the current PCs offer are realized on this Boot flash PROM with Phoenix Bios
Board. Performance same as Pentium III/400MHz
or higher. Voltage generation
Real-time clock (RTC)
Hardware watchdog
RTC battery (8 years buffer operation)
Ethernet interface 10/100 Base T
two V.24 interfaces (see AEV24B Adapter Ethernet V24 B Modul)
Interface to the PCM highway (4 independent B channel accesses)
PCI Bus (5V tolerant) 32Bit/33MHz
Two CBus interfaces (ISA Bus)
on for system control reasons
one as SPY-remote Interface (SPY =System Protocoller and Analyser)
IDE interface for HGS

The hardware prerequisites for remote logging with SPY are contained on the board.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 163

8 Boards

ACB1 board, component side

164 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

ACB board, component side

1. Battery
2. ETX-PC
3. V24I/NI
4. Transformer 10/100 Base T

5. Boot Flash (Compact Flash Card)

6. PCM highway controller
7. PCM highway controller
8. CBI1A3 for SPY I55
9. EPLD

CSI55 LX 07/2006 165

8 Boards

10. CBI1A3
11. HDD

The ACB is equipped with one of the following V.24 submodules:

• V.24I Insulated
• V.24NI Non-Insulated (basic configuration)

The following signals are available for the V.24:

• RXD
• TXD
• DTR
• GND
• DSR
• RTS
• CTS

Other features
Power demand +5V 3.5A
The V24NI submodule is used as standard when connecting devices to the V.24 interfaces. If necessary, it
is also possible to use the DC isolated V24I.

AEV24B adapter Ethernet / V24 B module → 230

8.4.1.1 LEDs and Switch Functions

166 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

ACB board, front side ATC board, front side

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Neutral position
S2 Left position
S3 Left position

Switch Function

S1 Reset switch
Mean: Operating status
links: Hardware Reset of the board, locking

CSI55 LX 07/2006 167

8 Boards

Right: ACB is been shut down (by operating system), pushing

S2 Hard Disk Change Request (HDCHR)
links: Operating status: IDE Hard Disk in operation
Right: Service position: Pulling out the IDE hard disk and plugging it
back in
S3 Service entry
links: The commissioning (OS, applications and customer’s data load)
is executed without break
Right: Before booting, the switch must be in the righthand position
(reboot, power restoration).
The boot phase is interrupted at a defined point. At this point an
service access via ISM (WebMin) is possible. Changing of
parameters as for example IP addresses or GCU slot address
can be executed.
Then the switch is to be brought in the left position. The service
access is closed and a reboot is executed.

Meanings of LEDs

LL On: Ethernet connection status is OK

off: Ethernet connection status is interrupted
LD On: data transmission via Ethernet
off: no data transmission via Ethernet
L1 On: The Ethernet interface of this module is connected to the network
off: The Ethernet interface of this module is not connected to the network
L2 On: Alle the voltages of the board are present
L3 on or Data transfer via the C bus
flashing:
L4 on or Access to the inserted background memory
flashing:
L5 On: Indicates that the HGS can be unplugged
off: Operating system does not allow pulling out the HGSs
L6 On: Fault in GCU (collective display)
off: Operating status
L7 - L10 These light-emitting diodes show the statuses from reset to operation. After switching on the
power a function check is executed (short flashing).

If an error was recognized by SEM (System Error Management) which leads to a recovery (prozess restart
or system shut down), the light-emitting diode L6 goes on (shines). The L7 to L10 remain unconsidered. If
the recovery is finished, the L6 (red) is turned on for 5 sec. and afterwards is switched off. The status LEDs
L7-L10 show now the actual system status.
The commissioning status is divided into eight groups:

1. Loading ACB from the flash software

2. Loading ACB from HGS at operating system level
3. Loading ACB from HGS at application level

168 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

4. Loading ACB in special status (APS change) during operation.

No. L7 L8 L9 L10 Gr. Status Phase name

15 1 1 1 1 0 Commissioning BIOS is running; LED test.
starts
14 1 1 1 0 0 operating system Linux kernel is loaded.
takes over the GRUB finished and initialization RAM-Disc
funktion started.
13 1 1 0 1 0 Load operating ACB board without HGS is loaded as a
system via CBI slave via C bus.
Status 11 and 12 are skipped over.
12 1 1 0 0 0 Load operating ACB board without HGS is loaded as
system via master via Ethernet.
Ethernet Status 11 and skipped over.
11 1 0 1 1 0 Load operating ACB board with HGS is loaded as master
system via local directly.
bus Statuses 11 to 13 are not processed in the
order.
10 1 0 1 0 0 Update flash SW Flashsoftware ACB under development.
9 1 0 0 1 1 PAL startet The pascal server is ready.
All known pascal tasken will be started.
8 1 0 0 0 1 Download the Download Applikationfiles in progress.
application
7 0 1 1 1 3 Start of the Start of the platform applications such as
platform PFSP, PAL, L4AD.
applications
6 0 1 1 0 3
5 0 1 0 1 3
4 0 1 0 0 3 APS change in ACB with IVL funktion prepares an APS
progress change.
(indication only
at the IVL)
3 0 0 1 1 2 Customer data Customer data conversion (Started by
conversion MML CKDT is not displayed.).
(display only at
the IVL)
2 0 0 1 0 2 Load APS DMS of the module signalls the phase
customer data loading customer data.
1 0 0 0 1 2 ICU All customer data loaded.
commissioning Start commissioning of the module(s).
0 0 0 0 0 2 Normal Module(s) in operation
operation

1 = LED on
0 = LED off

CSI55 LX 07/2006 169

8 Boards

2x There are 16 USB devices preconfigurated. Beeing 8 of them designed for only TTY operation.
USB Furthermore 4 are designed for the ACOM protocol and 4 as RAW, they are not used yet. By
default all have the Host Index configured as group 1. But this can be changed by means of the
Webmin at any moment.
The USB devices are not connected normally with logical devices of the pascal applications.
This must still be done via the Webmin interface.
As soon as this is done, the pascal application (prolog task) will try to show its prompt (ˆC) on
this new device. This activation can take up to one minute after the change of configuration
data done by the Webmin.
In the same way all other interfaces can be also configured (commissioning and shut down).

Reference numbers, that are available in the Ebuyer Tool:

4.999.096.855 USB Hub

4.999.096.856 USB/V24 adapter
4.999.100.643 USB/USB Laplink gold cable

8.4.1.2 Fan replacement

Replacement of defective fans in I55 systems with ACB

The ACB for standard systems is characterized by its relatively low heat generation. For this reason, even if
no fan is used the risk that the processor reaches or exceeds the maximum operating temperature only exists
under unfavourable conditions. Unfavourable conditions are a high room temperature (over 35 degrees C (95
degrees F)) and permanent high load (over 70 percent).
In the event of failure of one of the two fans we recommend replacing it within one week.
In the event of failure of both fans the CPU temperature and CPU usage (total load) of the ACB in question
should be checked first (Webmin: Performance Management). If the CPU temperature is clearly below the
limit value of 100 degrees C (212 degrees F) the defective fans should be replaced within the following two
days. For safety reasons the CPU temperature should controlled at regular intervals until then. If the CPU
temperature is only slightly below or even above the limit value the defective fans must be replaced as soon
as possible.
Projects
Up to four ACBs shall be allowed per module. However, only two per frame to provide sufficient heat dissipa-
tion. The software can handle this (a confirmation test will be provided later), four per module were mentioned
as the upper limit for systems with HSCB during the workshops with system specialists.

8.4.1.3 Removing and Inserting the board

The ACB board may be removed or inserted during system operation, if the S1 switch handle has been moved
to the left.
In single module systems, removing the ACB board during operation will result in a total breakdown.
In multi-module systems, removing the ACB board will result in the failure of this module or of the central
functions depending on the BS Confi data packet.

170 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

8.4.1.4 Operation ACB

Refer to handling specification HSP to ACB, APS IEE2.1

8.4.2 ASM3 Announcement Module 3

Short description
The announcement module ASM3 is a submodule of the DSPF.
The ASM3 variant is used in the CSI55 for recording and playback of ACD spoken announcements and for
hotel applications. The corresponding hotel messages are pre-programmed in the hotel application.

Samples and announcements

maximum number of samples recorded 1000
maximum total time recorded 32 minutes of announcements (PCM)
maximum number of simultaneous announcements 30

Samples in one announcement up to 10

A sample is a recording with varied contents (music or spoken text).

An announcement can be repeated several times, or even infinitely.
The 30 announcement channels are handled and managed as a digital port with 30 channels.
Each ASM3 also provides two additional channels for the recording of samples for ACD application. These
samples are initially available as WAV files, and are loaded to the ASM3 by means of PC application (ACD
user interface). The 2 recording channels are handled and managed as a digital port with 2 channels.

Other features
Power demand +5V 300 mA

Each ASM3 can occupy up to 32 channels.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 171

8 Boards

Location of the ASM3 on the DSPF module

1. ASM3 Module
2. DSPF Module

3. Connecting circuit slot

8.4.3 CBI1A3 CBus Interface 1 Adapter Version 3

Short description
The CBI receives a message (data packet) from the micro processor and stores it internally in a buffer memory.
Once the message has been completely entered from the micro processor (cyclic recording), the CBI sends
the packet via the C-bus to the specified destination CBI. This CBI stores the packet internally and offers it to
its micro processor (typ. per interrupt). The micro processor then receives the packet via cyclic readout from
the CBI. The CBIs receiving and transmitting parts work independently of each other.
The CB1A3 is used on the HSCB board. Only one package for transmission and reception can be stored
internally at any one time.

CBI1A3 submodule on the BG HSCB

1. BG HSCB module
2. CBI1A3 Module

3. HSCB slot

LED Denotations

L1 on: High data traffic

flashing: Data packet being received/sent to/from the micro processor
L2 flashing: Packet loss in transmission buffer because of transmit time-out or reset, or
synchronization fault in the micro processor
L3 flashing: Packet loss in receiver buffer because of receive time-out or reset

172 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

L4 on: Abnormal operating status e.g.:

• CBI cannot be used to transmit and receive

• Reset status

flashing 1 MBit of data has been transmitted on the C-bus.

weakly:

8.4.4 CF22 Central Functions 22

Short description
The central board CF22 is the basic equipment in all modules. It replaces the CF2E board.
It supports:

• the dealer functions

• intermodule handover functions for DECT
and
• call number display for incoming calls to analogue terminals (”CLIP” Calling Line Identification Protocol).
As opposed to CF2E it only features one DSP system.

Features
Ports 544
B channels (time slots) 1088
ILMx +
DECT +
Internal traffic flow 1088 Erl.
External traffic flow 225 Erl.

Features
Clock Supply and Module Synchronization
External synchronization via network nodes (S0, S2M).
Master function in multi-module systems can be set up using software.
Master free-run clock mode (internal clocking)

Module Switching Matrix

Bit rate 4,096 MBit/s
Module internal non-blocking

11 DTMF receiver sets, 4 DTMF transmitters (only for dialling)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 173

8 Boards

Call Progress Tones

A maximum of 16 call progress tones can be generated as customer-specific or country-specific and can
be cyclically repeated. At the same time unrestricted supply is possible.
In addition, a maximum of 3 tones with burst character can be supplied.

Short Voice Messages

Up to 8 voice messages or “music on holds” can be used. The total duration of all brief voice messages
must be no longer than 64 sec.

Long Voice Messages

4 voice messages with unspecified time limits and confidata can be set up (connecting message devices
via analogue subscriber line circuits). At the same time unrestricted supply is possible.

Tone Injection in Two-Party Conversations

Up to 3 various cyclic tones can be generated which may be fed into a maximum of 15 two-party
conversations (e.g. call waiting tone, rolling tone etc.).

Conferences
The system software only allows three-party conferences.
Only dealer terminals support conferences with more participants.

Call number ID
8 DTMF transmitters for CLIP (call nummer indication on analogue terminals for incoming calls)

Other features
Power demand +5V 1400 mA

A high precision reference clock is required for the intermodule handover functions. This can be carried out
through the use of the CL2M submodule on the UIP or ICF. See also Intermodule Handover section.
If fibre-optic links are used, the CF22 board is to be fitted with the submodule CFIML Central Function Inter
Module Link.

8.4.4.1 Jumper and DIL Switch Functions

Configuration switches are located on the component side of the board. The functions and positions of these
switches are described below:

174 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

CF22 board, component side

1. DIL switch, 8-part

2. DIL switch, 4-part
3. Fuse F2 for the power supply EOC, 500 mA replaceable
4. LED red:
Loadable hardware of the board out of service
Operation of the board is not possible
5. FPGA Boot/Load PROM

6. Fire protection fuse 7A

If the fire protection fuse is defective (burned out), the board must be replaced by a new one.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 175

8 Boards

7. LED green: R/T active

on: High data traffic
flashing: Data packet being received/sent to/from the micro processor
8. LED yellow: TFAIL
flashing: Packet loss in transmission buffer because of transmit time-out or reset, or synchronization
fault in the micro processor
9. LED red: RFAIL
flashing: Packet loss in receiver buffer because of receive time-out or reset
10. CFIML submodule Central Function Inter Module Link

Functions of the DIL Switches, 8-part

Switch Switch
System configuration for MMG 1 3
Single module system ON ON
Two module system, first module ON OFF
Two module system, second module OFF ON
Two module system, systems with more than two modules OFF OFF

Specification of highest scan address 2 4

35 ON ON
55 ON OFF
87 OFF ON
126 (Default) OFF OFF

Battery status query (AIC) 5

Testing of -48 V battery is not possible ON
(Default)
Testing of -48 V battery active OFF
When using PS350 with a connected battery (only Integral 33): Switching on the battery voltage
monitoring
Error signalling unit 6
with ESU ON
without ESU OFF

In order to get the correct signalling direction ATA with EE8B in a communication server Integral 55 with ESBA
instead of ESB, switch 6 must be placed to ON (with ESU).

Switch
Download 7
Download inactive ON
Download possible (default) OFF

Module Manager Watchdog 8

176 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Watchdog inactive ON
Watchdog active (default) OFF

Functions of the DIL Switches, 4-part

Switch
Intermodule handover 1
for twin and multi-module configuration: Intermodule handover active between ON
modules
for twin and B3 configuration: Intermodule handover not active between modules OFF

Optical waveguide length compensation (only with doubled CF2E) 2

Activation of the length compensation function for the default passive CF slot ON
Deactivation of the length compensation function for the default passive CF slot OFF

Switch still without function 3

Switch still without function 4

CSI55 LX 07/2006 177

8 Boards

8.4.4.2 LEDs and Switch Functions

CF22 board, front side

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position
S2 Middle position

Switch Function

S1 Reset switch
Middle: Operating status
Left: Reset of the board, locking
Right: Reset board, keying
S2 Service Switch
Middle: Operating status
Left: No function, locking
Right: With a doubled CF2x: Activate switchover, keying

178 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Meanings of LEDs

L1 ACTIVE MSMC active/inactive

on: MSMC (switching matrix processor unit) resetting/inactive
flashing: MSMC downloading or waiting for commissioning
off: MSMC active
L2 CLKUA Clock unit active
on: Normal operation: Active module clock unit
L3 IMHOSYNC
on: Module is synchronised for DECT operation
flashing: Resynchronization (flashes for 30 sec.)
off: Module is not synchronised for DECT operation
This operating status may also occur if switch 1 of DIL switch 2 is in
the ON position (IMHO active) while LED L4 is on.

L4 MAFREI
on: Master free-run clock mode (internal clocking) or external
synchronization (if L10 is also on)
flashing: Internal free-run clock mode (internal clocking) after failure of
synchronous clock via beam waveguide path
L5 AMEX1S Alarm message ext. synchr. clock 1 sec.
on: Failure of synchronizing clock signal for more than 1 sec. (with master
module: clock pulse from local exchange, network node; with slave
module: clock pulse via fibre-optic cable)
L6 DSP-LED1 Status - LED
on: Boot phase after board reset or DSP system permanently defective
flashing: temporary synchronization fault on a DSP Highway
off: DSP system in operation
L7 TFAIL
on or flashing: One or more C-bus transmit errors
off: C-bus in operation. CFIML submodule not inserted into the CF22.
L8 MMG MMG status
on: MMG not in operation (no board operation) or defective beam
waveguide connection (after CF reset in multi-module system)
flashing: MMG in operation, but board logon not yet possible
off: MMG in operation
L9 CLKUSYN Clock unit synchronization
on: Module clock system is synchronized
L10 MANK Master network node
on: External synchronous clock switched on for synchronization by the
system software
L11 IDR IDR fault from IMLA (e.g. beam waveguide not in order)
L12 ECLKU Error clock unit
on: Clock system error
flashing: After failure of synchronous clock via beam waveguide
L13 DSP-LED2 Status - LED
on: Boot phase after board reset or DSP system permanently defective

CSI55 LX 07/2006 179

8 Boards

flashing: temporary synchronization fault on a DSP Highway

off: DSP system in operation
L14 RFAIL
on or flashing: One or more C-bus receive errors
off: C-bus in operation. CFIML submodule not inserted into the CF22.

8.4.4.3 Doubling

It is possible to double the CF22 board in the R1 rack.

SeeDoubling → 143

8.4.4.4 Removing and Inserting the board

ESD-measures must be accomplished when working with boards susceptible to electrostatic shock.
The CF22 board can be removed or inserted during system operation. However, the module will not operate
if the CF22 is not doubled.
Removal of the board is followed by a restart without loading customer data.

When doubling, the CF22 board may only be removed when in passive status (LED 2 off). If
LED 2 is on, place switch S2 into the right position. LED 2 Off The board can now be
removed.

8.4.5 CF2E Central Functions 2E

Short description
The central board CF2E is the basic equipment in all modules.
It supports the dealer and intermodule handover functions for DECT.

Features
Ports 544
B channels (time slots) 1088
ILMx +
DECT +
Internal traffic flow 1088 Erl.
External traffic flow 225 Erl.

Features
Clock Supply and Module Synchronization
External synchronization via network nodes (S0, S2M).
Master function in multi-module systems can be set up using software.
Master free-run clock mode (internal clocking)

180 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Module Switching Matrix

Bit rate 4,096 MBit/s
Module internal non-blocking

11 DTMF receiver sets, 4 DTMF transmitters

Call Progress Tones

A maximum of 16 call progress tones can be generated as customer-specific or country-specific and can
be cyclically repeated. At the same time unrestricted supply is possible.
In addition, a maximum of 3 tones with burst character can be supplied.

Short Voice Messages

Up to 8 voice messages or “music on holds” can be used. The total duration of all brief voice messages
must be no longer than 64 sec.

Long Voice Messages

4 voice messages with unspecified time limits and confidata can be set up (connecting message devices
via analogue subscriber line circuits). At the same time unrestricted supply is possible.

Tone Injection in Two-Party Conversations

Up to 3 various cyclic tones can be generated which may be fed into a maximum of 15 two-party
conversations (e.g. call waiting tone, rolling tone etc.).

Conferences
The number of subscribers at a conference is 3.

Other features
Power demand +5V 2200 mA

The CF2E board is supported from the programme file MSC2P006 onwards.

A high precision reference clock is required for the intermodule handover functions. This can be carried out
through the use of the CL2M submodule on the UIP or ICF. See also Intermodule Handover section.
In coupling via LWL, the CF2E module is to be fitted with the submodule CFIML central function inter module
Link.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 181

8 Boards

8.4.5.1 Jumper and DIL Switch Functions

Configuration switches are located on the component side of the board. The functions and positions of these
switches are described below:

CF2E board, component side

1. DIL switch 3
2. DIL switch 2
3. Fuse F1 for the power supply EOC, 500 mA replaceable
4. LED red:
Fault indicator of the central functions
Hardware out of order

5. Fire protection fuse F3, 7 A

182 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

If the fire protection fuse is defective (burned out), the board must be replaced by a new one.

6. LED green: R/T active

on: High data traffic
flashing: Data packet being received/sent to/from the micro processor.
7. LED yellow: TFAIL
flashing: Packet loss in transmission buffer because of transmit time-out or reset, or synchronization
fault in the micro processor

8. LED red: RFAIL

flashing: Packet loss in receiver buffer because of receive time-out or reset
9. CFIML submodule Central Function Inter Module Link

Functions of the DIL Switch 3

Switch Switch
System configuration for MMG 1 3
Single module system ON ON
Two module system, first module ON OFF
Two module system, second module OFF ON
Two module system, systems with more than two modules OFF OFF

Specification of highest scan address 2 4

35 ON ON
55 ON OFF
87 OFF ON
126 (Default) OFF OFF

Battery status query (AIC) 5

Testing of -48 V battery is not possible ON
(Default)
Testing of -48 V battery active OFF
When using PS350 with a connected battery (only Integral 33): Switching on the battery voltage
monitoring
Error signalling unit 6
with ESU ON
without ESU OFF

In order to get the correct signalling direction ATA with EE8B in a communication server Integral 55 with ESBA
instead of ESB, switch 6 must be placed to ON (with ESU).

Switch
Download 7

CSI55 LX 07/2006 183

8 Boards

Download inactive ON
Download possible (default) OFF

Module Manager Watchdog 8

Watchdog inactive ON
Watchdog active (default) OFF

Functions of the DIL Switch 2

Switch
Intermodule handover 1
for twin and multi-module configuration: Intermodule handover active between ON
modules
for twin and B3 configuration: Intermodule handover not active between modules OFF

Optical waveguide length compensation (only with doubled CF2E) 2

Activation of the length compensation function for the default passive CF slot ON
Deactivation of the length compensation function for the default passive CF slot OFF

Switch still without function 3

Switch still without function 4

184 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

8.4.5.2 LEDs and Switch Functions

CF2E board, front side

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position
S2 Middle position

Switch Function

S1 Reset switch
Middle: Operating status
Left: Reset of the board, locking
Right: Reset board, keying
S2 Service Switch
Middle: Operating status
Left: No function, locking
Right: With a doubled CF2x: activate switchover, keying

CSI55 LX 07/2006 185

8 Boards

Meanings of LEDs

L1 ACTIVE MSMC active/inactive

on: MSMC (switching matrix processor unit) resetting/inactive
flashing quickly: MSMC downloading
flashing slowly: MSMC waiting for startup
off: MSMC active
L2 CLKUA Clock unit active
on: Normal operation: Active module clock unit
Doubling: active CF2x
L3 IMHOSYNC
on: Module is synchronised for DECT operation
flashing: Resynchronization (flashes for 30 sec.)
off: Module is not synchronised for DECT operation
This operating status may also occur if switch 1 of DIL switch 2
is in the ON position (IMHO active) while LED L4 is on.

L4 MAFREI
on: Master free-run clock mode (internal clocking) or external
synchronization (if L10 is also on)
flashing: Internal free-run clock mode (internal clocking) after failure of
synchronous clock via beam waveguide path
L5 AMEX1S Alarm message ext. synchr. clock 1 sec.
on: Failure of synchronizing clock signal for more than 1 sec. (with
master module: clock pulse from local exchange, network
node; with slave module: clock pulse via fibre-optic cable)
L6 DSP Status - LED
System 1
on: Boot phase after board reset or DSP system 1 defective
off: DSP system 25.40 mm operation
L7 TFAIL
flashing: Packet loss in transmission buffer because of transmit time-out
or reset, or synchronization fault in the micro processor
L8 MMG MMG status
on: MMG not in operation (no board operation) or defective beam
waveguide connection (after CF reset in multi-module system)
flashing: MMG in operation, but board logon not yet possible
off: MMG in operation
L9 CLKUSYN Clock unit synchronization
on: Module clock system is synchronized
L10 MANK Master network node
on: External synchronous clock switched on for synchronization by
the system software
L11 IDR IDR fault from IMLA (e.g. beam waveguide not in order)
L12 ECLKU Error clock unit
on: Clock system error
flashing: After failure of synchronous clock via beam waveguide

186 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

L13 DSP Status - LED

System 2
on: Boot phase after board reset or DSP system 2 defective
off: DSP system 2 in operation
L14 RFAIL
flashing: Packet loss in receiver buffer because of receive time-out or
reset

8.4.5.3 Doubling

It is possible to double the CF2E board in the R1 rack.

SeeDoubling → 143

8.4.5.4 Removing and Inserting the board

ESD-measures must be accomplished when working with boards susceptible to electrostatic shock.
The CF2E board can be removed or inserted during system operation. However, the module will not operate
if the CF2E is not doubled.
Removal of the board is followed by a restart without loading customer data.

When doubling, the CF2E board must only be removed when in passive status (LED 2 off). If
LED 2 is on, place switch S2 into the right position. LED 2 Off The board can now be
removed.

8.4.6 CFIML Central Functions Inter Module Link

Short description
The CFIML submodule is inserted in the CF22/CF2E board if this is connected via fibre-optic cable in twin or
multi-module operation.
It is connected with the CF22/CF2E via two SMD pin strips.

CFIML board, soldering side

CSI55 LX 07/2006 187

8 Boards

Meanings of LEDs

L1 on: High data traffic

flashing: Data packet being received/sent to/from the micro processor
L2 flashing: Packet loss in transmission buffer during regulatory transmit
time-out or reset.
L3 flashing: Packet loss in receiver buffer during regulatory receive time-out
or reset.
L4 on:
• CBI cannot be used to transmit and receive.
• Warm start or master reset.

• FIFO is full (100%) in transmission or receiver direction

flashing weakly: Further data has been transmitted with 1 MByte/sec capacity.
L5 on: IML path is frame synchronous.
L6 on: IML path is ready to transmit C-bus data.
L7 on: IML path is not ready to receive C-bus data in receiving
direction.
L8 on: IML path is not ready to receive C-bus data in transmitting
direction.
L9 on: ASICS loading procedure incomplete. CFIML out of operation

8.4.7 CL2M Clock 2 Module

Short description
The submodule CL2M on the UIP or ICF board implements an external clock supply for the PBX or a clock
pulse output for external devices.

Use on
UIP receiver and transmitter 2048 kHz
ICF receiver 2048/1544 kHz

This is necessary if digital dial-up lines or permanent connections are not available as the clock source, or if
the customer has made high demands in terms of the reliability of the clock supply.

Other features
Power demand +5V 100 mA

If the CL2M is positioned on slot 1 or 2 of the UIP, the line can be connected via the CA1B board.
With slots 3 or 4 occupied and V24M (slot 1 or 2) being used, the line must be connected via the CA3B board.

188 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Location of CL2M on the UIP board

1. Connecting circuit slot

2. UIP module
3. CL2M module

8.4.8 CL2ME Clock 2 Module Extended

Short description
The CL2ME submodule is used to implement an external clock supply by means of a high precision reference
clock (TAREF). This is needed if DECT Intermodule Handover is used in twin and multi-module configurations..

Use on
UIP/ICF Receiver 2048 kHz

Other features
Power demand +5V 100 mA

If the CL2ME is positioned on slot 1 of the UIP, the line can be connected via the CA3B/T board.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 189

8 Boards

Location of CL2ME on the UIP board

1. Connecting circuit slot

2. UIP module
3. CL2ME board

8.4.9 DSPF Digital Signal Processing Function

Short description
The DSPF as the basic board accommodates the ASM3 announcement module. The announcement module
serves for recording and playback of ACD spoken announcements and for hotel applications. Depending on
the application the DSPF can be equipped with up to:

4 ASM3 for access to 128 time slots in I55

2 ASM3 for access to 64 time slots in I55C

Other features
Country of application National and international
Power demand +5V 850 mA

For more detailed information about configuration with ASM3 please refer to the service manual.

8.4.9.1 Inserting the submodule

The used ASM3 modules are inserted in the submodule slots “submodule 1” - “submodule 4” of the DSPF.

190 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

DSPF board, component side

1. Submodule 1
2. Submodule 2
3. Submodule 3
4. Submodule 4

The position must correspond to the setting in the confidata. The following allocation must be observed:

“Submodule number” Labelling Labelling on the DSPF board

parameter in the ICU Editor
0 Submodule 1 SUB1
1 Submodule 2 SUB2
2 Submodule 3 SUB3
3 Submodule 4 SUB4

8.4.9.2 Time slot management

Each ASM3 submodule represents an ICU. This means that one DSPF board can implemented a maximum
of 4 ICUs. The ICU of the physical slot of the board logs on with the ICU type DSFM (DSPF Master). The
other (up to 3) ICUs are implemented on the same hardware by means of logical address entries in the CBI,
and log on with the ICU type DSFS (DSPF Slave).
This means that the DSPF must have access to a total of 128 time slots. Because the slots in the Integral
55xE generally only have 32 time slots, access must be enabled as follows.
The DSPF uses:

CSI55 LX 07/2006 191

8 Boards

Time slots of the DSPF slot ICU TYPE DSFM

Time slots of the Auxiliary Highway, Part 1 - AUX1 ICU TYPE DSFS 1)
Time slots of the Auxiliary Highway, Part 2 - AUX2 ICU TYPE DSFS 1)
Time slots of the slot to the right of the DSPF ICU TYPE DSFS 2)

1) Access to AUX1 and AUX2 is possible in each module to the left of the CF board. The time slots of the
Auxiliary Highway are available only once per module.
2)In order to gain access to the time slots of the right slot, the DSPF must be configured on an odd slot.
These events provide the following framework conditions:
One DSPF with four submodules

• must use the AUX1 and AUX2

• can be configured only once in each module
• must be set up on an odd slot to the left of the CF circuit board

Every other DSPF (within the same module)

• has access to a maximum of 64 time slots (DSPF slot and slot to the right of the DSPF)
• can consequently supports two modules only
• must be set up on an odd slot (to the right of the CF also possible)

In accordance with the above conditions, each submodule slot and thus an ICU can be assigned an application
(ACD or HOTCOM). This means that it is also possible to operate different applications on a DSPF. For
example, four submodules could be set up for ACD, three for ACD and one for HOTCOM or two for ACD and
two for HOTCOM, as well as any other possible configuration.
Setting up of the DSFM and DSFS ICUs prior to operation of the PBX is implemented using the KAD/CAT
application and during operation using the ICU Editor service and management programme.
A connection to the MDF is not implemented at present.

192 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

8.4.9.3 LEDs and Switch Functions

DSPF board, front panel

Meaning of the switch on the front panel of the DSPF board
Up to 4 ICUs (1* DSFM and 3 * DSFS) can be implemented on the DSPF board. The common status of the
ICUs can be controlled via the S1 front panel switch as follows:

S1 Reset and blocking switch

Middle position All ICUs in operating status
Left position All ICUs in preparatory disabling
Right position All ICUs in reset
Left position after board Master ICU DSMF (DSPF board) receives a forced ICU
reset download. After commencing the loading process, the
switch must be returned to the middle position.

Meaning of the LEDs on the front panel of the DSPF board

Up to 4 ICUs (1* DSFM and 3 * DSFS) can be implemented on the DSPF board. The common status of the
ICUs is displayed via the two front panel LEDs L1 and L10 according to the following pattern:
The display appears according to priority, i.e., if several functions of the scheme are represented by one LED,
the one with the highest priority is implemented. Prio 1 is the highest priority, and prio 5 the lowest. In the
cases with priority 1, the board is still in the reset or download phase, whereby the additional ICUs (DSFS)
are not yet active.

L1 flashing 5Hz At least 1 ICU is still in startup, waiting for “Switching On” Prio 2
message
flashing 1 All ICUs are preparatory disabled, the board is removeable Prio 3
Hz

CSI55 LX 07/2006 193

8 Boards

an (in) At least 1 ICU has a seizure in terms of switching technology Prio 4

in at least one channel. Prio 1
All ICUs (entire board) are in reset processing (if L10 is also
on)
off All ICUs are in a resting state with their ports, the board is not Prio 5
occupied
L2 flashing 5Hz At least 1 ICU is still waiting for commissioning Prio 2
Master ICU DSFM (DSPF board) ICU Download in progress Prio 1
flashing 1 / Prio 3
Hz
an (in) Master ICU DSFM (DSPF board) in reset processing (if L1 is Prio 1
also on) Prio 1
Master ICU DSMF (DSPF board) Programming procedure in
ICU download
off All ICUs in operation Prio 4

8.4.10 EOCPF Electrical Optical Converter Plastic Fibre

Short description
EOCPF is an electrical optical interface for the connection of modules via PF conductors in both transmitting
and receiving directions and can be installed onto the CF22, CF2E, MLB and ICF boards.

EOCPF submodule on the CF2E board

1. PF Connector
2. EOCPF Module
3. CF2E module

Fibre-optic cable length

EOCPF max. 40 m

194 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Other features
Country of application National and international
Power demand +5V 180 mA
EOCPF submodule, can be inserted on the front side of the boards mentioned above.
Max. transmission rate: aprox. 40 MBit/s

Observe the color coding when inserting the PF cable into the EOCPF submodule.

EOCPF, connectors for LWL

1. blue
2. grey
3. Transmitter

4. Receiver

8.4.11 EOCSM/MM Electrical Optical Converter

Short description
The two boards EOCSM (SM = Single Mode) and EOCMM (MM = multi-mode) are intended as interfaces for
use in the twin module and in multi-module systems.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 195

8 Boards

EOCSM/MM module on the CF2E board

1. LWL connector
2. EOCSM or EOCMM Module
3. CF2E module

Fibre-optic cable length

EOCSM 15 km (single-mode graded-index fibre)
EOCMM 7 km (multi-mode graded-index fibre)

Other features
Country of application National and international
Power demand +5V 180 mA

When inserting the LWL cable into the EOCSM/MM submodules, it must be remembered
that the “transmit” connector of one EOCSM/MM connects to the “receive” connector of
another EOCSM/MM and vice versa.

196 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

EOCSM/MM, Connectors for the LWL

1. Sending
2. Receiving
3. FOC

8.4.12 HSCB High Speed Computer Board

Short description
HSCB is the basic equipment in all modules. It is a computer board with dynamic RAM.

Features
Optionally with parity
128 kByte ERROR flash-PROM
512 kByte Boot flash-PROM
Buffered real time clock
Two-level hardware watchdog
Hardware status register
C-bus interface
4 B channel accesses
2 V.24 interfaces
Downloadable
2x PC card/ATA interfaces for 1.8” PC card driver with ATA mode. Hard disk drives with 260 MB or 1 GB
(for large systems) are available for these interfaces.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 197

8 Boards

Other features
Application Basic equipment in all modules
Power demand +5V 1900 mA without HGS
2400 mA with 1 HGS (startup current)
2900 mA with 2 HGS (startup current)
The drives can be replaced during operation.
The V24NI submodule is used as standard when connecting circuits to the V.24 interfaces. If necessary, it
is also possible to use the DC isolated V24I.
Additional Memory If additional memory submodules (PS2) are inserted into the HSCB, it should be
taken into account that the first memory slot must always be occupied. The
inserted PS2 memory modules must have an access time of 60 ns.

HSCB board, component side

1. Memory 4
2. Memory 3

3. Memory 2
4. Memory 1
5. HGS

6. Battery

The HSCB is equipped with one of the following V.24 submodules:

• V.24I Insulated

• V.24NI Non-Insulated (basic configuration)

The following signals are available for the V.24:

198 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

• RXD
• TXD
• DTR
• GND
• DSR
• RTS
• CTS

8.4.12.1 LEDs and Switch Functions

CSI55 LX 07/2006 199

8 Boards

HSCB board, front side

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position
S2 Left position
S3 Left position
S4 Left position

Switch Function

S1 Reset switch and MI button

Middle: Operating status
Left: Reset board, locking (see S2)
Right: Monitor interruption (TENOBUG start), keying
S2 Memory test switch
Left: (Standard) No memory test when resetting/restarting
Right: Memory test when reseting/reloading the TC system
S3 Hard Disk Change Request (HDCHR)
Left: Operating status: PC-CARD-ATA-interfaces in operation
Right: Service position: Removing and inserting the HGS(s)
S4 System console connected (SCOCON)
Left: No device connected (Default), or printer or video terminal
connected
Right: System terminal connected

Meanings of LEDs

L1 Fault indication from the control (group statement)

L2 Indicates module data transfer via the C-bus (e.g. call at subcriber)
L3 Indicates access to the inserted background memory
L4 Indicates that the HGS(s) can be removed
L5 Indicates that the S4 switch is in the “right” position, and that the system terminal can be
connected to the first V.24 interface on the AV24B/W (service)
L6 Unused
L7- L10 The LEDs flash to indicate the status from reset to operation. The display remains lit for
about 5 seconds if a fault is found in the loading phases 15 to 7 (see following table). If a
fatal fault occurs, the reset process is repeated from the beginning (loading phase 15).

No. L7 L8 L9 L10 Phase name

15 1 1 1 1 Start reset phase
14 1 1 1 0 Test flash-PROM
13 1 1 0 1 Test QUICC
12 1 1 0 0 Test real time clock
11 1 0 1 1 Test C-bus interface

200 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

10 1 0 1 0 Test DUART (V.24 ports)

9 1 0 0 1 Test dynamic RAM
8 1 0 0 0 Output hardware image
7 0 1 1 1 End reset phase
6 0 1 1 0 Initial program loading (IPL)/IPL ready flag
5 0 1 0 1 STIN program loader is loaded and started
4 0 1 0 0 Operating system has been loaded and started (restart)
3 0 0 1 1 User programs (have been dispatched) have been loaded
2 0 0 1 0 Start of customer data loading in the user programs
1 0 0 0 1 All customer data loaded Start commissioning of module(s)
0 0 0 0 0 Module(s) in operation

1 = LED on
0 = LED off

8.4.12.2 Changing the HGSs

The HGS may be removed or inserted during system operation without the prior removal of the HSCB.
The following procedure must be adhered to:

• Remove static charge from the module frame

• Move S3 switch to the right
• Wait for L4 to light up
• Remove the appropriate HGS

Do not touch the components!

Take hold of the drive from above and below.

• Insert the new HDD

• Move S3 switch to the left
• L4 will go out in a short time

8.4.12.3 Removing and Inserting the board

The HSCB board may be removed or inserted during system operation, if the S1 switch handle has been
moved to the left.
In single module systems, removing the HSCB board will result in a total breakdown.
In multi-module systems, removing the HSCB board will result in the failure of this module.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 201

8 Boards

8.4.13 ICF IMTU Central Functions

Short description
The central board of the B3 module or ICS is the ICF.

Features
Clock Supply and Clock frequency precision for DECT.
Synchronization Remote synchronizable by high precision reference clock and master module
(with CL2M or CL2ME)
Master function for multi-module systems, adjustable using software.

External interfaces
128 receive/transmit highway
Outputs for ext. signalling
Remote control for power supply
LWL connector
Ref. clock supply (CL2M)
Clocks
Micro processor bus

Interface to Other Modules

Through MLB, with possible MLBIML
Transfer of C-bus data.
256 PCM channels.

Inter Module Manager (IMMG)

Fault Management using Inter Module Manager

Other features
Application Basic equipment in B3/ICS
Power demand +5V 3210 mA
Battery status query
Memory Doubling e.g. for Downloading
Fire Protection Fuse

Difference between ICF .1321 and .1331

In .1331, CBI and IMLA are on the board.
The ICF with material number 49.9905.9146 can be used in the B3 module and in the ICS.

202 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

8.4.13.1 Jumper and DIL Switch Functions

ICF board, component side

1. DIL switch
2. Jumper
3. Fire Protection Fuse

Jumper Functions

Total breakdown (system not in operation) via ESB

1-2 Normally closed contact for message
2-3 Normally open contact for message

Battery status query

4-5 Testing of -48 V battery not possible (default)
5-6 Testing of -48 V battery active
When using PS350 with connected battery: Switch on the battery voltage monitoring option

Fire Protection Fuse

If the fire protection fuse is defective (burned out), the board must be replaced by a new one.

Functions of the DIL Switches

S1 Error signalling unit

CSI55 LX 07/2006 203

8 Boards

ON: with ESU

OFF: without ESU

S2 System configuration for IMMG

ON: IMMG passive
OFF: IMMG active

S3 S4 Specification of highest scan address

ON ON 16
OFF ON 32
ON OFF 64
OFF OFF 128 (default)

S5 Inter module manager watchdog

ON: Watchdog inactive
OFF: Watchdog active (default)

S6 CBI master mode switching

ON: Test mode
OFF: CBI master (default)
For testing and servicing purposes. Do not change

S7 Non-maskable interruption
ON: Enable NMI
OFF: NMI disable (default)
For testing and servicing purposes. Do not change

S8 CBI speed
ON: 2 MHz
OFF: 4 MHz (default)

8.4.13.2 LEDs and Switch Functions

204 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

ICF board for B3 module, front side ICF board for ICS and B3 module, front side

Switch Functions

S1 Reset
Left: No function, locking
Middle: Operating status
Right: Reset board, keying
S2 Service Switch
Left: No function, locking
Middle: Operating status
Right: With redundant star coupler: Activate switchover, keying

Meanings of LEDs

L1 No function

L2 Clock unit active

on: Active module clock unit
L3 When doubling, IMTU status
on: IMTU active
off: IMTU hot stand-by
flashing quickly: IMTU active and alternate path switched
flashing slowly: IMTU hot-standby and alternate path switched

L4 IMMG status

CSI55 LX 07/2006 205

8 Boards

on: IMMG not in operation (no board operation)

flashing: IMMG in operation, but board logon not yet possible
With doubled multi-module, also failure of the fibre-optic link
ICF <–> ICF.
off: IMMG in operation

L5 Clock unit synchronization

on: Module’s clock system is synchronized

L6 Master/free-run clock mode

on: Module prepared by system software for master operation
or
module in master free-run clock mode

8.4.13.3 Removing and Inserting the board

The board may be removed and inserted during system operation.

All existing connections are disconnected if the board is removed. Exception when doubling.

If the active ICF board of a doubled pair is to be removed, the service switch must be used to
change it over to the hot stand-by side. After the ICF has been reinserted, the service switch
must be switched back again.

8.4.13.4 Doubling

Only one ICF board can be inserted for each B3 module.

A doubling of the system can only be implemented by using a second ICS or B3 module.
SeeComplete doubling → 153

8.4.13.5 External clock pulse input

First V.24 interface of the CA3B (Cable Adapter 3 for B modules)

PIN 1 A1 External clock pulse input 2.048 MHz (high precision reference
PIN6 B1 clock / TAREF)

8.4.14 ISMx Switching Matrix x

Short description
The board ISMx is used in the basic configuration in the ICS and B3 module. Its task is to switch inter-module
connections with a bit rate of 4 MBit/s.

206 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

In order to ensure the total availability of the IMTU switching matrix function, 4 ISMx boards of
the same variant are required. Mixed operation of ISMx and ISM2x boards is not permissible.

Variants for the B3 module

ISMA IMTU Switching Matrix variant A, material number: 28.5630.1512
4x per B3 module, up to 8 modules in conjunction with one MLB in slot 1
ISMB IMTU Switching Matrix variant B, material number: 28.5630.1522
4x per B3 module, up to 16 modules in conjunction with two MLBs in slots 1 and 2
ISMC IMTU Switching Matrix variant C, material number: 28.5630.1532
4x per B3 module, up to 32 modules in conjunction with three or
four MLBs in slots 1, 2 and 8 or 1, 2, 8 and 9
ISM2A IMTU Switching Matrix variant 2 A, material number: 49.9805.5675
4x per B3 module, up to 8 modules in conjunction with one MLB in slot 1,
supersedes ISMA 28.5630.1512
ISM2B IMTU Switching Matrix variant 2 B, material number: 49.9805.5676
4x per B3 module, up to 16 modules in conjunction with two MLBs in slots 1 and 2,
supersedes ISMB 28.5630.1522
ISM2C IMTU Switching Matrix variant 2 C, material number: 49.9805.5677
4x per B3 module, up to 32 modules in conjunction with three or
four MLBs in slots 1, 2 and 8 or 1, 2, 8 and 9,
supersedes ISMC 28.5630.1532

Variants for the ICS

ISM2A IMTU Switching Matrix variant 2 A, material number: 49.9905.9147
4x per rack ICS, up to 8 system modules in conjunction with one MLB in slot 1,
supersedes ISM2A 49.9805.5675
ISM2B IMTU Switching Matrix variant 2 B, material number: 49.9905.9148
4x per rack ICS, up to 16 modules in conjunction with two MLBs in slots 1 and 2,
supersedes ISM2B 49.9805.5676

B3 module slot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Board MLB MLB ICF MLB MLB
ISMA It No: 28.5630.1512 x o o + o o
or
ISM2A It No: 49.9805.5675
ISMB It No: 28.5630.1522 x x o o + o o
or
ISM2B It No: 49.9805.5676
ISMC It No: 28.5630.1532 x x o o + o o x x
or
ISM2C It No: 49.9805.5677

ICS slot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Board MLB MLB ISM2 ISM2 ICF ISM2 ISM2
ISM2A It No: 49.9905.9147 x o o + o o

CSI55 LX 07/2006 207

8 Boards

ISM2B It No: 49.9905.9148 x x o o + o o

/td>

For each switching matrix, four switching matrix modules of the same type must be inserted (e.g. four ISMAs).
With doubled IMTU, all eight switching matrix modules (2 x 4) must be of the same type.
o = inserted switching matrix module
x = supported by switching matrix modules
+ = fixed assignment

Other features
Power demand +5V ISMA 840 mA
ISMB 980 mA
ISMC 1460 mA
Download board software
Board identification using board passport
Maintenance function

8.4.14.1 LEDs and Switch Functions

ISMx board, front side ISM2x board, front

Switch Function

208 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

S1 Left: No function, locking

Middle: Operating status
Right: Reset board, keying

Meanings of LEDs

L1 Switching matrix processor unit

on: Resetting or inactive
flashing quickly: Download
flashing slowly: Waiting for startup
off: active
L2 No function

8.4.14.2 Doubling

Redundancy of the boards for the system’s switching matrix function is enabled by doubling the multi-module.

The ISMx board variants must be the same for both IMTUs. Mixed operation of ISMx and
ISM2x boards is not permissible.

8.4.14.3 Removing and Inserting the board

The board may be removed and inserted during system operation.

All existing connections are disconnected if the board is removed.

In doubled systems, a service switchover (service switch S2 on ICF) should be carried out
before removing an ISMx from the active multi-module. On completion of repairs, the service
switch must be switched back in order to resume operation of the default active side.

8.4.15 MLB Module Link Board

Short description
The board MLB is used to connect modules to the multi-module. It can be equipped with the MLBIML sub-
module and is designed for a maximum of 8 modules.
In standard configuration, the module is equipped with components for a max. of 3 modules. The MLBIML is
used from the fourth module onward.
The module connection is managed using the boards EOCMM, EOCSM or EOCPF.

Features
Adaptation to C-bus and coupler interface.
Multiplexes and demultiplexes of the various types of data to be transmitted (C-bus data and Highway).

CSI55 LX 07/2006 209

8 Boards

Line coding/decoding.
Clock generation.
Optical transmitting and receiving.
Test and maintenance function.

The following notes must be observed when using the MLB board:

• IMLE3 submodules with IML software 28.7637.8533 or IMLASB must be inserted in the connected CFx
boards.
• A maximum of 13 modules can be connected (on two MLBs) to the B3 module without the ISPS board.
No CBT must be inserted under these circumstances. These may only be inserted if only a single MLB
board is fitted.
The ISPS board is generally required from the 14th module on. In this case, the CBT may be inserted
without restriction.

Other features
Power demand +5V 1830 mA 3 MLBIML on the board and 330 mA for
MLB logic and 0 EOC

8.4.15.1 LEDs and Switch Functions

Switch Function

MLB board, front side

S1* Middle: Operating status

Left: No function
Right: Board RESET

210 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

* Depending on the configuration, adjusting the switch can result in a restart of the entire system.

S2 Middle: Operating status, Link 7/8

Left: RESET Link 7
Right: RESET Link 8
S3 Middle: Operating status, Link 5/6
Left: RESET Link 5
Right: RESET Link 6
S4 Middle: Operating status, Link 3/4
Left: RESET Link 3
Right: RESET Link 4
S5 Middle: Operating status, Link 1/2
Left: RESET Link 1
Right: RESET Link 2

LED Denotations

MLB board, component side

L1 on: High data traffic

flashing: Data packet being received/sent to/from the micro processor
L2 flashing: Packet loss in transmission buffer during regulatory receive
time-out or reset, or synchronization fault in the micro
processor.
L3 flashing: Packet loss in receiver buffer during regulatory transmit
time-out or reset.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 211

8 Boards

L4 on:

• CBI cannot be used to transmit and receive.

• Warm start or master reset.
• FIFO is full (100%) in transmission or receiver direction

flashing Further data has been transmitted with 1 MByte/sec capacity.

weakly:
L5 on: IML path is frame synchronous.
L6 on: IML path is ready to transmit C-bus data.
L7 on: IML path is not ready to receive C-bus data in receiving
direction.
L8 on: IML path is not ready to receive C-bus data in transmitting
direction.

8.4.16 MLBIML Module Link Board, Inter Module Link

Short description
The board MLBIML a sub-board which is plugged into the MLB board from the fourth module onwards. It can
optionally take an EOC.

Variants
EOCMM
EOCSM
EOCPF

Other features
Power demand +5V 500 mA

212 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

8.4.16.1 Meanings of LEDs

MLBIML board, component side

L1 on: High data traffic

flashing: Data packet being received/sent to/from the micro processor
L2 flashing: Packet loss in transmission buffer during regulatory receive
time-out or reset, or synchronization fault in the micro
processor.
L3 flashing: Packet loss in receiver buffer during regulatory transmit
time-out or reset.
L4 on:

• CBI cannot be used to transmit and receive.

• Warm start or master reset.
• FIFO is full (100%) in transmission or receiver direction

flashing weakly: Further data has been transmitted with 1 MByte/sec capacity.
L5 on: IML path is frame synchronous.
L6 on: IML path is ready to transmit C-bus data.
L7 on: IML path is not ready to receive C-bus data in receiving
direction.
L8 on: IML path is not ready to receive C-bus data in transmitting
direction.

8.4.17 R1RC Rack Connector for I55

Short description

CSI55 LX 07/2006 213

8 Boards

Up to 3 expansion racks can be connected to the basic rack in a star-shaped pattern, which are then called
the C2-C4 modules. You will require an R1RC/R1RC2 adapter for the connection between the backplanes.

Variants
R1RG (part no: 49.9903.5498) / R1RG2(part no: for use in the basic rack (R1 rack)
49.9907.9213)
R1RE (part no: 49.9903.5500) / R1RE2 (part no: for the expansion racks R2, R3 and R4.
49.9907.9214)

The adapters are connected to each other using cables. This connection transmits CBus information, highway
information, status signals and I2C bus data, so that the connected modules act as a single module (B2 of the
I33).
The adapters R1RG/R1RG2 and R1RE/R1RE2 are attached to the board frame from the rear.

The R1RG/R1RG2 and R1RE/R1RE2 variants do not have to be identical. Mixed operation
of the boards is possible.

Other features
Application for the expansion racks R2, R3 and R4.
Power demand +5V 400 mA

8.4.17.1 Connection of the expansion racks to the basic rack

The connection to the next board frame is made using a double-screened Ethernet cable ”category 6” (8-pin).
The maximum length is 30 metres. Connection is implemented via a Western socket RJ45 (8-pin). A cable
is required between each basic and expansion rack in order to transmit the system data. The connection is
made to the Western socket 1 (see under Function of the Switches and LEDs).
The following diagram depicts the principal connections.

214 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Connection of the expansion racks to the basic rack

1. View from the rear

2. Basic rack

3. Expansion rack 1
4. Expansion rack 2
5. Expansion rack 3

CSI55 LX 07/2006 215

8 Boards

8.4.17.2 LEDs and Switch Functions

R1RC (R1RG/R1RG2, R1RE/R1RE2) front side with LEDs and switches

1. Fan plug 1
2. Fan plug 2
3. Western socket RJ45 1

S1 Switch 1 Left: No function

Middle: Operating status
Right: Reset

LED Name Description

L1 Status on: SMALRES CBI
L2 RTActive on: Send and receive active
L3 RFail on: Receive error
L4 TFail on: Send fault
L5 TMFail on: Transmission is not synchronous
L6 IDR on: Data transfer possible
L7 TXTC on: Greater traffic from the rack

216 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

L8 RXTC on: Greater traffic into the rack

Fault signaling
The following fault monitoring is implemented:

1. There are two equipment variations for the modules, one for the basic rack (R1RG/R1RG2) and one for
the expansion rack (R1RE/R1RE2). A check is carried out whether the module is inserted in the correct
rack. If this is not the case, the LEDs TMFail, IDR, RXTC and TXTC will blink.

2. The transmitted FP8K is checked on the receiver side. Further, the FP160ms is also checked. The LED
TMFail then switches to inactive. If a FP8K or a FP160ms then fails, the LED TMFail switches to active
and the checking procedure starts once more.
3. The IDR LED displays that data transfer is possible. In the event of a fault, it remains inactive for at least
127 ms.
4. As soon as the CBI is unable to receive and data from the transmission link (PWR inactive), this is
displayed by the RXTC LED.
5. As soon as the CBI is unable to receive and data from the transmission link (PWR inactive), this is
displayed by the RXTC LED.
6. The TMFail LED is activated as soon as the reception frequency of 49.152 MHz is no longer correct.

Western plug
The Western plug RJ45 is used to transmit system data (frame pulse, highway data, CBus data, status lines
and I2C bus data) and the transmission pulses.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 217

8 Boards

8.4.17.3 C-bus address distribution

C-bus address distribution and slot numbers

1. Slot number

AO = connecting circuit

218 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

8.4.17.4 Fuses on the board

Component side of the R1Rc board

1. Fan plug
2. Fan plug
3. Switch
4. Light Emitting Diodes
5. Western plug 1
6. Fuses 48V (T SIC, 500 mA)
• R1RG/R1RE: on the rear of the board
• R1RG2/R1RE2: on the component side of the board
7. 5V fuse soldered in

If the fire 5V fuse is defective (burned out), the board must be replaced by a new one.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 219

8 Boards

8.4.18 V24I/NI Insulated/Non-Insulated

Short description
Both submodules are inserted on to the ACB/HSCB board and have the following features:

• V24I,
is for the DC decoupling of all signals and of the logic ground.

• V24NI,
is for the direct connection of all signals and of the logic ground.

V24I/V24NI modules on the HSCB board

8.4.19 V24M Module

Short description
V24M is a sub-board for the UIP board. It comprises the layer 1 functions for a V.24 interface.
A maximum of two V24 modules can be inserted on slots 1 and 2 of the UIP board. This requires the
connection of the connecting circuit line to be implemented via the CA3B board.

Other features
Application for further V.24 ports on the system
Power demand +5V 100 mA

8.5 Connector technology and signaling

Connection board of the connection board

CA → 240 General description

220 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Connection board of the connection board

AEV24B → 230 ACB → 221, VoIP → 513

AV24B → 238 HSCB → 281, CBT → 580
CA1B → 391 ASCEU → 324, ASCF → 324, ASCGB → 324, ATA → 330, ATA2
→ 333 ATB → 336, ATC → 338, CAS → 397, DDID → 354,
DCON → 403, DUP03 → 430, MULI → 487, DECT21 → 415, DT0
→ 423, DT21 → 427, UIP without V.24M → 495
CA2B → 392 ASC2 → 310, ASC21 → 314, ATLC → 341, DS02 → 418, DS03
→ 421, DUPN → 432, JPAT → 357, ADM → 301
CA3B → 393 UIP with V24 → 495, ICF with CL2M/CL2ME → 285
CA3B/T → 394 UIP with CL2ME → 495
CA4B → 395 DT21 → 427, CAS → 397, DCON → 403
CA5B → 395 IMUX → 458
CA6B → 396 MAC → 475, HAMUX → 447
CAIB → 247 IPGW → 502
CARUB → 248 ASCEU → 324, ASC2 → 310, ASC21 → 314, ATLC → 341, JPAT
→ 357
EES1B → 275 ATA → 330, ATA2 → 333, ATB → 336, ATC → 338
EES8B → 275 ATA → 330, ATA2 → 333, ATB → 336, ATC → 338
EES0B → 436 DT0 → 423
EESS0 → 440EESS0 DT0 → 423, ADM → 301
ESBx → 276 CF2E → 256, CF22 → 248, ICF → 285
ESBA → 276 CF2E → 256, CF22 → 248, ICF → 285
ESBB → 276 CF2E → 256, CF22 → 248, ICF → 285
OFA2B → 491 DT21 → 427
OFAS → 491 DT21 → 427
TER → 292 On backplane (only B3 module)

Connection board of the connection board

EDU → 263 ESB → 276

8.5.1 ACB/ACB1 Advanced Computer Board

Short description
The ACB board is the basic equipment in all modules. This computer board must be used to support the
software IEEx (Linux operating sistem). As HGS it is used a 2.5” hard disc drive.
The ACB1 board is the follow-up board of the ACB and can be used starting with software version IEE2
(version L021V00 1 1.0). The difference to the ACB is the physical medium of the HGS. In the case of the
ACB1, the HGS is a Compact Flash Card with different capacity according to system size, the following sizes
are recommended:

CSI55 LX 07/2006 221

8 Boards

Compact Flash Card

for single and Twin system: with 1 GB
for multi-module up to 4000 subscr.: with 2 GB
for multi-module of more than 4000 subscr.: with 4 GB

Handling, as well as switch and display functions of both boards are identical:

Features
ETX-PC 512 MByte of main memory, (only one SO DIMM
The ETX-Board is a complet PC-System. All Modul)
functions the current PCs offer are realized on this Boot flash PROM with Phoenix Bios
Board. Performance same as Pentium III/400MHz
or higher. Voltage generation
Real-time clock (RTC)
Hardware watchdog
RTC battery (8 years buffer operation)
Ethernet interface 10/100 Base T
two V.24 interfaces (see AEV24B Adapter Ethernet V24 B Modul)
Interface to the PCM highway (4 independent B channel accesses)
PCI Bus (5V tolerant) 32Bit/33MHz
Two CBus interfaces (ISA Bus)
on for system control reasons
one as SPY-remote Interface (SPY =System Protocoller and Analyser)
IDE interface for HGS

The hardware prerequisites for remote logging with SPY are contained on the board.

222 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

ACB1 board, component side

CSI55 LX 07/2006 223

8 Boards

ACB board, component side

1. Battery
2. ETX-PC
3. V24I/NI
4. Transformer 10/100 Base T

5. Boot Flash (Compact Flash Card)

6. PCM highway controller
7. PCM highway controller
8. CBI1A3 for SPY I55
9. EPLD

224 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

10. CBI1A3
11. HDD

The ACB is equipped with one of the following V.24 submodules:

• V.24I Insulated
• V.24NI Non-Insulated (basic configuration)

The following signals are available for the V.24:

• RXD
• TXD
• DTR
• GND
• DSR
• RTS
• CTS

Other features
Power demand +5V 3.5A
The V24NI submodule is used as standard when connecting devices to the V.24 interfaces. If necessary, it
is also possible to use the DC isolated V24I.

AEV24B adapter Ethernet / V24 B module → 230

8.5.1.1 LEDs and Switch Functions

CSI55 LX 07/2006 225

8 Boards

ACB board, front side ATC board, front side

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Neutral position
S2 Left position
S3 Left position

Switch Function

S1 Reset switch
Mean: Operating status
links: Hardware Reset of the board, locking

226 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Right: ACB is been shut down (by operating system), pushing

S2 Hard Disk Change Request (HDCHR)
links: Operating status: IDE Hard Disk in operation
Right: Service position: Pulling out the IDE hard disk and plugging it
back in
S3 Service entry
links: The commissioning (OS, applications and customer’s data load)
is executed without break
Right: Before booting, the switch must be in the righthand position
(reboot, power restoration).
The boot phase is interrupted at a defined point. At this point an
service access via ISM (WebMin) is possible. Changing of
parameters as for example IP addresses or GCU slot address
can be executed.
Then the switch is to be brought in the left position. The service
access is closed and a reboot is executed.

Meanings of LEDs

LL On: Ethernet connection status is OK

off: Ethernet connection status is interrupted
LD On: data transmission via Ethernet
off: no data transmission via Ethernet
L1 On: The Ethernet interface of this module is connected to the network
off: The Ethernet interface of this module is not connected to the network
L2 On: Alle the voltages of the board are present
L3 on or Data transfer via the C bus
flashing:
L4 on or Access to the inserted background memory
flashing:
L5 On: Indicates that the HGS can be unplugged
off: Operating system does not allow pulling out the HGSs
L6 On: Fault in GCU (collective display)
off: Operating status
L7 - L10 These light-emitting diodes show the statuses from reset to operation. After switching on the
power a function check is executed (short flashing).

If an error was recognized by SEM (System Error Management) which leads to a recovery (prozess restart
or system shut down), the light-emitting diode L6 goes on (shines). The L7 to L10 remain unconsidered. If
the recovery is finished, the L6 (red) is turned on for 5 sec. and afterwards is switched off. The status LEDs
L7-L10 show now the actual system status.
The commissioning status is divided into eight groups:

1. Loading ACB from the flash software

2. Loading ACB from HGS at operating system level
3. Loading ACB from HGS at application level

CSI55 LX 07/2006 227

8 Boards

4. Loading ACB in special status (APS change) during operation.

No. L7 L8 L9 L10 Gr. Status Phase name

15 1 1 1 1 0 Commissioning BIOS is running; LED test.
starts
14 1 1 1 0 0 operating system Linux kernel is loaded.
takes over the GRUB finished and initialization RAM-Disc
funktion started.
13 1 1 0 1 0 Load operating ACB board without HGS is loaded as a
system via CBI slave via C bus.
Status 11 and 12 are skipped over.
12 1 1 0 0 0 Load operating ACB board without HGS is loaded as
system via master via Ethernet.
Ethernet Status 11 and skipped over.
11 1 0 1 1 0 Load operating ACB board with HGS is loaded as master
system via local directly.
bus Statuses 11 to 13 are not processed in the
order.
10 1 0 1 0 0 Update flash SW Flashsoftware ACB under development.
9 1 0 0 1 1 PAL startet The pascal server is ready.
All known pascal tasken will be started.
8 1 0 0 0 1 Download the Download Applikationfiles in progress.
application
7 0 1 1 1 3 Start of the Start of the platform applications such as
platform PFSP, PAL, L4AD.
applications
6 0 1 1 0 3
5 0 1 0 1 3
4 0 1 0 0 3 APS change in ACB with IVL funktion prepares an APS
progress change.
(indication only
at the IVL)
3 0 0 1 1 2 Customer data Customer data conversion (Started by
conversion MML CKDT is not displayed.).
(display only at
the IVL)
2 0 0 1 0 2 Load APS DMS of the module signalls the phase
customer data loading customer data.
1 0 0 0 1 2 ICU All customer data loaded.
commissioning Start commissioning of the module(s).
0 0 0 0 0 2 Normal Module(s) in operation
operation

1 = LED on
0 = LED off

228 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

2x There are 16 USB devices preconfigurated. Beeing 8 of them designed for only TTY operation.
USB Furthermore 4 are designed for the ACOM protocol and 4 as RAW, they are not used yet. By
default all have the Host Index configured as group 1. But this can be changed by means of the
Webmin at any moment.
The USB devices are not connected normally with logical devices of the pascal applications.
This must still be done via the Webmin interface.
As soon as this is done, the pascal application (prolog task) will try to show its prompt (ˆC) on
this new device. This activation can take up to one minute after the change of configuration
data done by the Webmin.
In the same way all other interfaces can be also configured (commissioning and shut down).

Reference numbers, that are available in the Ebuyer Tool:

4.999.096.855 USB Hub

4.999.096.856 USB/V24 adapter
4.999.100.643 USB/USB Laplink gold cable

8.5.1.2 Fan replacement

Replacement of defective fans in I55 systems with ACB

The ACB for standard systems is characterized by its relatively low heat generation. For this reason, even if
no fan is used the risk that the processor reaches or exceeds the maximum operating temperature only exists
under unfavourable conditions. Unfavourable conditions are a high room temperature (over 35 degrees C (95
degrees F)) and permanent high load (over 70 percent).
In the event of failure of one of the two fans we recommend replacing it within one week.
In the event of failure of both fans the CPU temperature and CPU usage (total load) of the ACB in question
should be checked first (Webmin: Performance Management). If the CPU temperature is clearly below the
limit value of 100 degrees C (212 degrees F) the defective fans should be replaced within the following two
days. For safety reasons the CPU temperature should controlled at regular intervals until then. If the CPU
temperature is only slightly below or even above the limit value the defective fans must be replaced as soon
as possible.
Projects
Up to four ACBs shall be allowed per module. However, only two per frame to provide sufficient heat dissipa-
tion. The software can handle this (a confirmation test will be provided later), four per module were mentioned
as the upper limit for systems with HSCB during the workshops with system specialists.

8.5.1.3 Removing and Inserting the board

The ACB board may be removed or inserted during system operation, if the S1 switch handle has been moved
to the left.
In single module systems, removing the ACB board during operation will result in a total breakdown.
In multi-module systems, removing the ACB board will result in the failure of this module or of the central
functions depending on the BS Confi data packet.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 229

8 Boards

8.5.1.4 Operation ACB

Refer to handling specification HSP to ACB, APS IEE2.1

8.5.2 AEV24B adapter Ethernet / V24 B module

Short description
The adapter board Ethernet / V24 B module (AEV24B) is fitted in the R1 racks only behind the ACB or VOIP
boards.

The use of the AEV24B in conjunction with HSCB or CBT boards is not permitted!

AVE24B board

1. RJ45 socket (8 pins), 1st V24

2. RJ45 socket (8 pins), 1st V24 (not for VOIP)
3. 15-pin D socket for 6-pair cable to the MDF (not for VOIP)
4. 26-pin connection strip as output for SCA 28.7640.385x using pre-assembled cable (only for use in I33
with the ACB Advanced Computer Board)

230 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

5. RJ45 socket for the Ethernet connection for the hub (data network connection, LAN switch)
6. RJ45 socket for the Ethernet connection for a PC (direct connection to PC)
7. Plug for backplane

8. Fixation

It is not permitted for the Ethernet connections for the hub (5) and the PC (6) to be active
concurrently.

Applications for V24 ports

First V24 port with ACB Linux system console

with VOIP System console for the VOIP board

second V24 port with ACB MML system console

with VOIP none

8.5.2.1 MDF Connections

The connections described hereafter are only relevant for connection in the I33.
On the MDF the 6-pair (16-pin D plug) cable should be connected as follows.

MDF AEV24B
Colours
RD/BU A1/B1 (T) S0 connection
for service PC (*)
WH/YE C1/D1 (R) S0 connection
for service PC (*)
WH/GN A1/B1 (T) S0 test
subscriber (*)
UP0 test subscriber (*)
a1/b1, analog test
participants (*)
WH/BN C1/D1 (R) S0 test
subscriber (*)
WH/BK free
WH/BU free/GND (plug screen)

* Connect the S0-, UP0 and a/b test connections from the MDF to the PBX.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 231

8 Boards

8.5.2.2 V.24 Interfaces

see also interface configuration

PIN assignment of the V24 ports

Assignment of the V.24 interfaces

PIN1=free;
PIN2=TXDx;
PIN3=RXDx;
PIN4=DSRx;
PIN5=GNDx;
PIN6=DTRx;
PIN7=CTSx
PIN8=RTSx
Plug screen=GND

8.5.2.3 Ethernet ports

PIN assignment of the Ethernet ports

PIN assignment of the RJ45 connection socket for the hub

Pin Signal identification

1 TXD P
2 TXD M
3 RXD P
4 Z1
5 Z1
6 RXD M
7 Z2
8 Z2
Plug screen GND

Z = matching resistor (symmetry)

PIN assignment of the RJ45 connection socket for the service PC

232 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Pin Signal identification

1 RXD P
2 RXD M
3 TXD P
4 Z1
5 Z1
6 TXD M
7 Z2
8 Z2
Plug screen GND

Z = matching resistor (symmetry)

The cable connections for the hub are not crossed; those for the PC are crossed.

8.5.3 ASCxx Analogue Subscriber Circuit

Short description
The ASC board is available in the following variants:
ASCEU: Europe with the following characteristics:

Country-specific Germany, Spain, Netherlands, Switzerland, Italy, Belgium, Austria, Greece, Mexico
variants are and Venezuela
configurable using
board software for
the following
countries:
Power demand +5V 620 mA
Interfaces 16 a/b (connectors for analog terminals in accordance with country-specific
guidelines)
Constant current 24 mA, switchable to 30 mA (mounting of a 0 ohm resistance)
supply
Line resistance 2 x 475 Ohm
Range 4 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0.4 mm
9 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0.6 mm
15 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0.8 mm
Line lengths for Message waiting → 325
DTMF/pulse dialling, flash and earth button detection, Telecom-specific (dependent on terminals)
Short and long flash time, Telecom-specific (dependent on terminals)
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Board software download
Board identification using board pass
Maintenance function

CSI55 LX 07/2006 233

8 Boards

Polarity reversion for “message waiting” signalling

Connection of external announcement devices

ASCF: France with the following characteristics:

Power demand +5V 620 mA

Interfaces 16 a/b (connectors for analog terminals in accordance with French guidelines and
voice terminals)
Resistance feed 2 x 400 Ohm
(const. voltage)
DTMF/pulse dialling, polarity reversal and button detection
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Board software download
Board identification using board pass
Maintenance function
Symmetric call supply
Polarity reversion for “message waiting” signalling
Connection of external announcement devices

ASCGB: Great Britain

Power demand +5V 620 mA

Interfaces 16 a/b (connectors for analog terminals in accordance with British guidelines)
Constant current 30 mA
supply
Loop range 900 ohms
DTMF/pulse dialling, flash and earth button detection
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Board software download
Board identification using board pass
Maintenance function
Polarity reversion for “message waiting” signalling

8.5.3.1 Line lengths for Message waiting

The range for Message waiting signaling for analogue subscribers of the ASCEU board with the ICU pro-
gramme ASCEU018.ICP in connection with the various apparatus types and seizure (pick up on call) and
outgoing seizure (pick up) with the installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,4 mm is:

Outgoing seizure (pick up) Incoming seizure (pick up in call)

Apparatus types Line length [m] Line length [W ] Line length [m] Line length [W ]
Tel. T40 1400 379 1400 379
Tel. TE51 1000 272 1000 272
Tel. TE91 1000 272 1000 272

234 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Tel. TC91 1100 298 1100 298

Tel. TB510LED 1100 298 600 163
DE
Tel. TB519D 900 245 900 245
Tel. TK40-20-2 300 83 300 83

Recommendation
The line length with which the performance feature Message waiting is to be operated with conventional
signaling (permanently illuminated LED signal), should not exceed

600 m (Installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0.4 mm)

1.3 km (Installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0.6 mm)
2.4 km (Installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,8 mm)

Malfunctions may occur when establishing a connection if the lines are any longer.
The tel. TK40-20-2 should only be operated with a 300 m (83W ) line length.
Deviations from the recommended line length are possible.
If the lines are any longer, a different Message waiting signal (signal LED blinks) should be selected. Signalling
is implemented in the ICU programme ASCEU019.ICP for the ASCEU board.

8.5.3.2 LEDs and Switch Functions

ASCxx board, front side

CSI55 LX 07/2006 235

8 Boards

1. LED red
2. LED green

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position

Switch Function

S1 Left: Preparatory disabling (of all connecting circuits)

Middle: Neutral/release/ operating status
Right: Reset board
Right, then left: Forced board download

Meanings of LEDs

L1 on: Board is busy with switching functions

flashing: Module can be removed after preparatory disabling (VSP) or
blocked in terms of software
off: Board is not busy
L2 on: Board reset in progress
flashing: Download in progress
off: Board in operation

8.5.3.3 Bridge positions

The power supply can be increased from 24 mA (standard) to 30 mA per line in this board: The increase in
the supply current is implemented by inserted 0 Ohm resistors or bridges at the following coordinate points:

AO1 197 077

AO2 199 128
AO3 173 069
AO4 179 116
AO5 155 077
AO6 157 128
AO7 131 069
AO8 137 116
AO9 113 077
AO10 115 128
AO11 089 069
AO12 095 116
AO13 071 077
AO14 073 128
AO15 047 069

236 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

AO16 053 116

CSI55 LX 07/2006 237

8 Boards

8.5.3.4 MDF Connections

MDF Cable Adapter

CA1B/CARUB
Colours 16x2 Patch panel for
from ASCxx
two-wire
connection
RD/BU WE 1 a1/b1
WH/YE WE 2 a2/b2
WH/GN WE 3 a3/b3
WH/BN WE 4 a4/b4
WH/BK WE 5 a5/b5
WH/BU WE 6 a6/b6
WH/YE WE 7 a7/b7
WH/GN WE 8 a8/b8
WH/BN WE 9 a9/b9
WH/BK WE 10 a10/b10
WH/BU WE 11 a11/b11
RD/YE WE 12 a12/b12
WH/GN WE 13 a13/b13
WH/BN WE 14 a14/b14
WH/BK WE 15 a15/b15
WH/BU WE 16 a16/b16

8.5.4 AV24B Adapter V24 B Module

Short description

238 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

The adapter board V24 / B module (AV24B) is fitted in the R1 racks only behind the HSCB board or with the
CBT service board.

AV24 B board

1. BG AV24B, soldering side

2. 26-pin strip connector to the SCA 28.7640.385x board (only for use in I33)
3. 15-pin D plug for the six-pair cable to the HVT for a tester, service PC or DuWa test jack (only for use in
I33)
4. 9-pin D plug, 2nd V24
5. 9-pin D plug, 1st V24
6. HSCB slot
7. BG HSCB module

First V24 port Used to connect the PC for CBT applications, such as logging etc.
second V24 port can be configured in the IVL (HSCB with HGS) as a connecting interface of the
DCF77 receiver.

8.5.4.1 MDF Connections

The connections described hereafter are only relevant for connection in the I33.

MDF AV24B
Colours
RD/BU A1/B1 (T) S0 connection for service PC (*)
WH/YE C1/D1 (R) S0 connection for service PC (*)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 239

8 Boards

WH/GN A1/B1 (T) S0 test subscriber (*)

UP0 test subscriber (*)
a1/b1, analog test participants (*)
WH/BN C1/D1 (R) S0 test subscriber (*)
WHBK a11/b11 (DID test device) (*)
WH/BU a12/b12 (DID test device) (*)

* Connect the S0-, UP0 and a/b test connections from the MDF to the PBX.

8.5.4.2 V.24 Interfaces

seeInterface Configuration → 525

PIN assignment of the V24 ports

Assignment of the V.24 interfaces

PIN1=free;
PIN2=RXD;
PIN3=TXD;
PIN4=DTR (only supported for HSCB);
PIN5=GND;
PIN6=DSR (only supported for HSCB);
PIN7=RTS (only supported for HSCB);
PIN8=CTS (only supported for HSCB);
PIN9=free

Connections from the first V24 port of the CA3B in the B3 module

PIN1/PIN6 A1/B1 (R, external clock 2048/1544 kHz)

8.5.5 CA Cable Adapter

Short description
The CA Cable Adapters are fitted in the rack (only I55) and allow connecting circuit board connections to be
switched through to the MDF.

8.5.5.1 CA Assignment

Cable Adapters for Digital connecting device boards

240 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Board Cable adapter

CAS CA1B
CA4B
DCON CA1B
CA4B
DECT21 CA1B
DS02 CA2B
DT0 CA1B
DT21 CA1B
CA4B
OFA2B
DUP03 CA1B
DUPN CA2B
IMUX CA5B
MAC CA6B
HAMUX CA6B
MULI CA1B
ADM CA2B
UIP without V.24M CA1B
UIP with V.24M CA3B

Cable Adapters for Analog connecting device boards

Board Cable adapter

ASC2. CA2B
CARUB
ASC . . CA1B
CARUB
ATA/B/C CA1B
ATLC CA2B
CARUB
DDID CA1B
JPAT CA2B
CARUB

Cable adapters for IP telephoning Gateways

Board Cable adapter

IPGW CAIB
VoIP AEV24B

Cable Adapters for Other Connectors

Board Cable adapter

CSI55 LX 07/2006 241

8 Boards

CF22/CF2E ESBx
ACB AEV24B
HSCB AV24B
ICF + CL2M CA3B (B3 module and ICS)

8.5.6 CA1B cable adapter 1 for B modules

Short description
Cable adapter for 16, 4 or 2-pair analog or digital connecting circuit line for boards ASCEU, ASCF, ASCGB,
ATAx, ATB, ATC, DDID, DUP03, DT0, DT21, CAS, DCON, UIP without V24M, MULI and DECT21 with

• 50-pin CHAMP plug as an output to the MDF

• Overcurrent breakpoint (230 V contact)

1. 16, 4 or 2-pair to the MDF/NT

1. Release the lock by pressing the bracket

2. Do not turn the screw!

242 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

8.5.7 CA2B cable adapter 2 for B modules

Short description
Cable adapter for 2 to 8-wire analog or 4-wire digital connection device line for the ASC2, ASC21, ATLC,
DS02, DUPN, JPAT and ADM boards with

• 50-pin CHAMP plug as an output to the MDF

• Overcurrent breakpoint (230 V contact)

1. Cable 1 (16x2) to the MDF

2. Cable 2 (16x2) to the MDF

8.5.8 CA3B cable adapter 3 for B modules

Short description
Cable adapter for the UIP board, provided that the V24M submodules are also inserted here. The board is
also required for external synchronization when using the CL2M/CL2MEM on ICF (B3 module or ICS).

• 50-pin CHAMP plug as an output to the MDF

• 2x 9-pin D plugs for V24 interfaces or connection of high precision reference clock
• Overcurrent breakpoint (230 V contact)

If the first slot of a UIP board is equipped with a CL2ME for the clock supply of TAREF it is
necessary to use the CA3B/T cable adapter.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 243

8 Boards

1. Cable 16X2 to MDF

1. Cable for connecting an external clock source plugged on the first V.24

8.5.9 CA3B/T cable adapter 3 for B modules TAREF

Short description
Cable adapter for UIP board if the clock supply from TAREF is implemented via the CL2ME inserted on the
first slot of the UIP.
The V24M submodules can also be inserted here.

244 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

1. Cable for connecting the TAREF (material number: 27.5630.0531) inserted in the first V.24

8.5.10 CA4B cable adapter 4 for B modules

Short description
Cable adapter for the connection of coax lines when using boards DT21, CAS and DCON, provided that these
modules are set on unsymmetrical interfaces.

• 2 BNC Coax sockets as output to NT or MUX.

1. Coax cable to NT or MUX

8.5.11 CA5B cable adapter 5 for B modules

Short description
Cable adapters for the connection of V.24 and X.21 connectors to the IMUX board.

• Cable to the TA of the network operator or MDF (X1 and X5)

• 1x 15-pin Sub-D female Connector for X.21 data terminals (X4)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 245

8 Boards

• 1x 25-pin Sub-D female Connector for V.24 data terminals (X3)

• Overcurrent breakpoint (230 V contact)
• Ground breakpoints (see IMUX board)

1. Cable Adapter 5B, rear component side, breakpoints

8.5.12 CA6B cable adapter 6 for B modules

Short description
Cable adapter for connecting UP0 and S2M connections to MAC and HAMUX boards.

• 50-pin CHAMP plug as an output to the MDF

• 8-pin WE plugs

246 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

1. Cable 16X2 to MDF

2. 8-pin WE plugs

8.5.13 CAIB Cable Adapter I for B Modules

Short description
Cable adapters for the connection of the connections to the IPGW board.

CAIB cable adapter

1. Connection cable CAIB - MDF

Cable adapter CAIB, component side

1. Cable 6x2 to the main distribution frame

2. RJ45 socket for the Ethernet connection
3. V.24 connection

CSI55 LX 07/2006 247

8 Boards

4. Plug for backplane

5. Fixation

8.5.14 CARUB Cable Adapter Russia B modules

Short description
The cable adaptor CARUB are used in Russia and the USA for the connection of ASCEU, ASC2, ASC21,
JPAT and ATLC boards.

• 50-pin CHAMP plug as an output to the MDF

• Overcurrent breakpoint (230 V contact)
• Protective elements for contact with outside voltage

1. Cable 1 (16x2) to the MDF

2. Cable 2 (16x2) to the MDF

8.5.15 CF22 Central Functions 22

Short description
The central board CF22 is the basic equipment in all modules. It replaces the CF2E board.
It supports:

• the dealer functions

• intermodule handover functions for DECT
and
• call number display for incoming calls to analogue terminals (”CLIP” Calling Line Identification Protocol).
As opposed to CF2E it only features one DSP system.

248 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Features
Ports 544
B channels (time slots) 1088
ILMx +
DECT +
Internal traffic flow 1088 Erl.
External traffic flow 225 Erl.

Features
Clock Supply and Module Synchronization
External synchronization via network nodes (S0, S2M).
Master function in multi-module systems can be set up using software.
Master free-run clock mode (internal clocking)

Module Switching Matrix

Bit rate 4,096 MBit/s
Module internal non-blocking

11 DTMF receiver sets, 4 DTMF transmitters (only for dialling)

Call Progress Tones

A maximum of 16 call progress tones can be generated as customer-specific or country-specific and can
be cyclically repeated. At the same time unrestricted supply is possible.
In addition, a maximum of 3 tones with burst character can be supplied.

Short Voice Messages

Up to 8 voice messages or “music on holds” can be used. The total duration of all brief voice messages
must be no longer than 64 sec.

Long Voice Messages

4 voice messages with unspecified time limits and confidata can be set up (connecting message devices
via analogue subscriber line circuits). At the same time unrestricted supply is possible.

Tone Injection in Two-Party Conversations

Up to 3 various cyclic tones can be generated which may be fed into a maximum of 15 two-party
conversations (e.g. call waiting tone, rolling tone etc.).

Conferences
The system software only allows three-party conferences.
Only dealer terminals support conferences with more participants.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 249

8 Boards

Call number ID
8 DTMF transmitters for CLIP (call nummer indication on analogue terminals for incoming calls)

Other features
Power demand +5V 1400 mA

A high precision reference clock is required for the intermodule handover functions. This can be carried out
through the use of the CL2M submodule on the UIP or ICF. See also Intermodule Handover section.
If fibre-optic links are used, the CF22 board is to be fitted with the submodule CFIML Central Function Inter
Module Link.

8.5.15.1 Jumper and DIL Switch Functions

Configuration switches are located on the component side of the board. The functions and positions of these
switches are described below:

250 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

CF22 board, component side

1. DIL switch, 8-part

2. DIL switch, 4-part
3. Fuse F2 for the power supply EOC, 500 mA replaceable
4. LED red:
Loadable hardware of the board out of service
Operation of the board is not possible
5. FPGA Boot/Load PROM

6. Fire protection fuse 7A

If the fire protection fuse is defective (burned out), the board must be replaced by a new one.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 251

8 Boards

7. LED green: R/T active

on: High data traffic
flashing: Data packet being received/sent to/from the micro processor
8. LED yellow: TFAIL
flashing: Packet loss in transmission buffer because of transmit time-out or reset, or synchronization
fault in the micro processor
9. LED red: RFAIL
flashing: Packet loss in receiver buffer because of receive time-out or reset
10. CFIML submodule Central Function Inter Module Link

Functions of the DIL Switches, 8-part

Switch Switch
System configuration for MMG 1 3
Single module system ON ON
Two module system, first module ON OFF
Two module system, second module OFF ON
Two module system, systems with more than two modules OFF OFF

Specification of highest scan address 2 4

35 ON ON
55 ON OFF
87 OFF ON
126 (Default) OFF OFF

Battery status query (AIC) 5

Testing of -48 V battery is not possible ON
(Default)
Testing of -48 V battery active OFF
When using PS350 with a connected battery (only Integral 33): Switching on the battery voltage
monitoring
Error signalling unit 6
with ESU ON
without ESU OFF

In order to get the correct signalling direction ATA with EE8B in a communication server Integral 55 with ESBA
instead of ESB, switch 6 must be placed to ON (with ESU).

Switch
Download 7
Download inactive ON
Download possible (default) OFF

Module Manager Watchdog 8

252 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Watchdog inactive ON
Watchdog active (default) OFF

Functions of the DIL Switches, 4-part

Switch
Intermodule handover 1
for twin and multi-module configuration: Intermodule handover active between ON
modules
for twin and B3 configuration: Intermodule handover not active between modules OFF

Optical waveguide length compensation (only with doubled CF2E) 2

Activation of the length compensation function for the default passive CF slot ON
Deactivation of the length compensation function for the default passive CF slot OFF

Switch still without function 3

Switch still without function 4

CSI55 LX 07/2006 253

8 Boards

8.5.15.2 LEDs and Switch Functions

CF22 board, front side

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position
S2 Middle position

Switch Function

S1 Reset switch
Middle: Operating status
Left: Reset of the board, locking
Right: Reset board, keying
S2 Service Switch
Middle: Operating status
Left: No function, locking
Right: With a doubled CF2x: Activate switchover, keying

254 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Meanings of LEDs

L1 ACTIVE MSMC active/inactive

on: MSMC (switching matrix processor unit) resetting/inactive
flashing: MSMC downloading or waiting for commissioning
off: MSMC active
L2 CLKUA Clock unit active
on: Normal operation: Active module clock unit
L3 IMHOSYNC
on: Module is synchronised for DECT operation
flashing: Resynchronization (flashes for 30 sec.)
off: Module is not synchronised for DECT operation
This operating status may also occur if switch 1 of DIL switch 2 is in
the ON position (IMHO active) while LED L4 is on.

L4 MAFREI
on: Master free-run clock mode (internal clocking) or external
synchronization (if L10 is also on)
flashing: Internal free-run clock mode (internal clocking) after failure of
synchronous clock via beam waveguide path
L5 AMEX1S Alarm message ext. synchr. clock 1 sec.
on: Failure of synchronizing clock signal for more than 1 sec. (with master
module: clock pulse from local exchange, network node; with slave
module: clock pulse via fibre-optic cable)
L6 DSP-LED1 Status - LED
on: Boot phase after board reset or DSP system permanently defective
flashing: temporary synchronization fault on a DSP Highway
off: DSP system in operation
L7 TFAIL
on or flashing: One or more C-bus transmit errors
off: C-bus in operation. CFIML submodule not inserted into the CF22.
L8 MMG MMG status
on: MMG not in operation (no board operation) or defective beam
waveguide connection (after CF reset in multi-module system)
flashing: MMG in operation, but board logon not yet possible
off: MMG in operation
L9 CLKUSYN Clock unit synchronization
on: Module clock system is synchronized
L10 MANK Master network node
on: External synchronous clock switched on for synchronization by the
system software
L11 IDR IDR fault from IMLA (e.g. beam waveguide not in order)
L12 ECLKU Error clock unit
on: Clock system error
flashing: After failure of synchronous clock via beam waveguide
L13 DSP-LED2 Status - LED
on: Boot phase after board reset or DSP system permanently defective

CSI55 LX 07/2006 255

8 Boards

flashing: temporary synchronization fault on a DSP Highway

off: DSP system in operation
L14 RFAIL
on or flashing: One or more C-bus receive errors
off: C-bus in operation. CFIML submodule not inserted into the CF22.

8.5.15.3 Doubling

It is possible to double the CF22 board in the R1 rack.

SeeDoubling → 143

8.5.15.4 Removing and Inserting the board

ESD-measures must be accomplished when working with boards susceptible to electrostatic shock.
The CF22 board can be removed or inserted during system operation. However, the module will not operate
if the CF22 is not doubled.
Removal of the board is followed by a restart without loading customer data.

When doubling, the CF22 board may only be removed when in passive status (LED 2 off). If
LED 2 is on, place switch S2 into the right position. LED 2 Off The board can now be
removed.

8.5.16 CF2E Central Functions 2E

Short description
The central board CF2E is the basic equipment in all modules.
It supports the dealer and intermodule handover functions for DECT.

Features
Ports 544
B channels (time slots) 1088
ILMx +
DECT +
Internal traffic flow 1088 Erl.
External traffic flow 225 Erl.

Features
Clock Supply and Module Synchronization
External synchronization via network nodes (S0, S2M).
Master function in multi-module systems can be set up using software.
Master free-run clock mode (internal clocking)

256 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Module Switching Matrix

Bit rate 4,096 MBit/s
Module internal non-blocking

11 DTMF receiver sets, 4 DTMF transmitters

Call Progress Tones

A maximum of 16 call progress tones can be generated as customer-specific or country-specific and can
be cyclically repeated. At the same time unrestricted supply is possible.
In addition, a maximum of 3 tones with burst character can be supplied.

Short Voice Messages

Up to 8 voice messages or “music on holds” can be used. The total duration of all brief voice messages
must be no longer than 64 sec.

Long Voice Messages

4 voice messages with unspecified time limits and confidata can be set up (connecting message devices
via analogue subscriber line circuits). At the same time unrestricted supply is possible.

Tone Injection in Two-Party Conversations

Up to 3 various cyclic tones can be generated which may be fed into a maximum of 15 two-party
conversations (e.g. call waiting tone, rolling tone etc.).

Conferences
The number of subscribers at a conference is 3.

Other features
Power demand +5V 2200 mA

The CF2E board is supported from the programme file MSC2P006 onwards.

A high precision reference clock is required for the intermodule handover functions. This can be carried out
through the use of the CL2M submodule on the UIP or ICF. See also Intermodule Handover section.
In coupling via LWL, the CF2E module is to be fitted with the submodule CFIML central function inter module
Link.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 257

8 Boards

8.5.16.1 Jumper and DIL Switch Functions

Configuration switches are located on the component side of the board. The functions and positions of these
switches are described below:

CF2E board, component side

1. DIL switch 3
2. DIL switch 2
3. Fuse F1 for the power supply EOC, 500 mA replaceable
4. LED red:
Fault indicator of the central functions
Hardware out of order

5. Fire protection fuse F3, 7 A

258 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

If the fire protection fuse is defective (burned out), the board must be replaced by a new one.

6. LED green: R/T active

on: High data traffic
flashing: Data packet being received/sent to/from the micro processor.
7. LED yellow: TFAIL
flashing: Packet loss in transmission buffer because of transmit time-out or reset, or synchronization
fault in the micro processor

8. LED red: RFAIL

flashing: Packet loss in receiver buffer because of receive time-out or reset
9. CFIML submodule Central Function Inter Module Link

Functions of the DIL Switch 3

Switch Switch
System configuration for MMG 1 3
Single module system ON ON
Two module system, first module ON OFF
Two module system, second module OFF ON
Two module system, systems with more than two modules OFF OFF

Specification of highest scan address 2 4

35 ON ON
55 ON OFF
87 OFF ON
126 (Default) OFF OFF

Battery status query (AIC) 5

Testing of -48 V battery is not possible ON
(Default)
Testing of -48 V battery active OFF
When using PS350 with a connected battery (only Integral 33): Switching on the battery voltage
monitoring
Error signalling unit 6
with ESU ON
without ESU OFF

In order to get the correct signalling direction ATA with EE8B in a communication server Integral 55 with ESBA
instead of ESB, switch 6 must be placed to ON (with ESU).

Switch
Download 7

CSI55 LX 07/2006 259

8 Boards

Download inactive ON
Download possible (default) OFF

Module Manager Watchdog 8

Watchdog inactive ON
Watchdog active (default) OFF

Functions of the DIL Switch 2

Switch
Intermodule handover 1
for twin and multi-module configuration: Intermodule handover active between ON
modules
for twin and B3 configuration: Intermodule handover not active between modules OFF

Optical waveguide length compensation (only with doubled CF2E) 2

Activation of the length compensation function for the default passive CF slot ON
Deactivation of the length compensation function for the default passive CF slot OFF

Switch still without function 3

Switch still without function 4

260 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

8.5.16.2 LEDs and Switch Functions

CF2E board, front side

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position
S2 Middle position

Switch Function

S1 Reset switch
Middle: Operating status
Left: Reset of the board, locking
Right: Reset board, keying
S2 Service Switch
Middle: Operating status
Left: No function, locking
Right: With a doubled CF2x: activate switchover, keying

CSI55 LX 07/2006 261

8 Boards

Meanings of LEDs

L1 ACTIVE MSMC active/inactive

on: MSMC (switching matrix processor unit) resetting/inactive
flashing quickly: MSMC downloading
flashing slowly: MSMC waiting for startup
off: MSMC active
L2 CLKUA Clock unit active
on: Normal operation: Active module clock unit
Doubling: active CF2x
L3 IMHOSYNC
on: Module is synchronised for DECT operation
flashing: Resynchronization (flashes for 30 sec.)
off: Module is not synchronised for DECT operation
This operating status may also occur if switch 1 of DIL switch 2
is in the ON position (IMHO active) while LED L4 is on.

L4 MAFREI
on: Master free-run clock mode (internal clocking) or external
synchronization (if L10 is also on)
flashing: Internal free-run clock mode (internal clocking) after failure of
synchronous clock via beam waveguide path
L5 AMEX1S Alarm message ext. synchr. clock 1 sec.
on: Failure of synchronizing clock signal for more than 1 sec. (with
master module: clock pulse from local exchange, network
node; with slave module: clock pulse via fibre-optic cable)
L6 DSP Status - LED
System 1
on: Boot phase after board reset or DSP system 1 defective
off: DSP system 25.40 mm operation
L7 TFAIL
flashing: Packet loss in transmission buffer because of transmit time-out
or reset, or synchronization fault in the micro processor
L8 MMG MMG status
on: MMG not in operation (no board operation) or defective beam
waveguide connection (after CF reset in multi-module system)
flashing: MMG in operation, but board logon not yet possible
off: MMG in operation
L9 CLKUSYN Clock unit synchronization
on: Module clock system is synchronized
L10 MANK Master network node
on: External synchronous clock switched on for synchronization by
the system software
L11 IDR IDR fault from IMLA (e.g. beam waveguide not in order)
L12 ECLKU Error clock unit
on: Clock system error
flashing: After failure of synchronous clock via beam waveguide

262 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

L13 DSP Status - LED

System 2
on: Boot phase after board reset or DSP system 2 defective
off: DSP system 2 in operation
L14 RFAIL
flashing: Packet loss in receiver buffer because of receive time-out or
reset

8.5.16.3 Doubling

It is possible to double the CF2E board in the R1 rack.

SeeDoubling → 143

8.5.16.4 Removing and Inserting the board

ESD-measures must be accomplished when working with boards susceptible to electrostatic shock.
The CF2E board can be removed or inserted during system operation. However, the module will not operate
if the CF2E is not doubled.
Removal of the board is followed by a restart without loading customer data.

When doubling, the CF2E board must only be removed when in passive status (LED 2 off). If
LED 2 is on, place switch S2 into the right position. LED 2 Off The board can now be
removed.

8.5.17 EDU Error Display Unit

Short description
The EDU boards are used either optionally in the service panel or in the multi-module (1/2 k rack) as fault
displays.

Features
18 red LEDs for indicating fault statuses.
1 green LED for display of operational readiness
26-pin pin strip for control cable connection

CSI55 LX 07/2006 263

8 Boards

EDU board on the ESB board

1. BG ICF (only in the B3 module)

2. Ribbon cable
3. Board ESB
4. 26-pin plug
5. 10x2 LEDs
6. EDU board (located on the service panel or on the front of the1/2 K racks)

8.5.17.1 Meanings of LEDs

EDU board

LED Short description Description S01 switch on S01 switch

text code off text code
L0 System in operation 233 -
L1 (lockstoe) SMDT/automatic information 599, 604 600
call malfunction

264 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

L2 (hgsausf) HGS failure* - Switch off

using MML
after fault
elimination.
L3 (zgdeaus) ZGDE failure 126, 127, 297 128, 558, 564
L4 (ivgstoe) Module malfunction 98 139
L5 (rivzaus) Reserve CPU failure - Switch off
using MML
after fault
elimination.
L6 (schnstoe) Interface malfunction 262, 264, 265, Switch off
266, 267, 535 using MML
after fault
elimination.
L7 (lueausf) Fan failure 611, 613 Switch off
using MML
after fault
elimination.
L8 (ltgdef) Analog/digital line fault 77, 555 565
L9 (amtalrm) System ready for operation 664 665
L10 (stvstoe) Power supply fault 605, 607, 609 Switch off
using MML
after fault
elimination.
L11 (einzstoe) Individual Fault 14, 81, 225, Switch off
575 using MML
after fault
elimination.
L12 (redver) Loss of redundancy 227, 228, 361, Switch off
362, 363, 364, using MML
401 after fault
elimination.
L13 (synausf) Synchronization failure 649 650
L14 (ausfext) External facility failure 530, 615, 617, Switch off
619, 621, 694, using MML
696 after fault
elimination.
L15 (imtustoe) IMTU malfunction 643, 644 645

* LED2 is activated via the HGS driver.

A LED stays activated until the required switch off text code is output or until it is switched off by means of the
SSUP MML program (submenu MANI; command FSSM).
It is not possible to freely configure the LEDs that are not occupied. The assignment of LED and S01 text
code is a fixed part of the S01 program.
The S01 does not distinguish between the different system types; this has to be done by the user of the S01
task.
For a description of the S01 texts for the E070V06 version, see E070V06 S01

CSI55 LX 07/2006 265

8 Boards

8.5.18 EES0B Emergency Extension Switch S0 B Module

Short description
For special services, such as the police force, fire brigade or Red Cross, whose answering facilities must
always be available, the Emergency Extension Switch S0 for CSI55 is available. In the event of a power failure
or other malfunctions, this modules enables a switchover from the connecting line coming from the ISDN
network to sets that are powered by the ISDN network.

EES0B board

1. Cable 1 + 2, each 24-pair to external MDF

2. Champ plug
3. EES0B
4. Pl.1
5. Pl.2

Instructions
Connection to a DT0, i.e. 2 DAs are to be switched per port.
Switchover is implemented to a set that is only used when the switchover is active.
For this purpose, a switchover with 1 WP each for the analog voice documentation.
Two 50-pin plugs are available as external connectors.

Switch-over criteria
General power failure
PC Board DT0 removed
Manual actuation of an external potential-free switch

The number of ports is determined by the limited number of plug positions.

The port 1..6 contains the switchover option. Port 7 and 8 are directly switched through.
The switchover is implemented with 4 wires.
For each port, an additional 2 switchover contacts are brought out, via which, for example, lines to voice
recording devices are switched.

266 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

The power supply to the board is implemented with GND from the DT0. -48 V is fed via the connecting cable.
One wire is fed for the forced switchover via the connecting cable.
Connection cables required: 2 cables 24x2 I55-HVT (MDF) 29.9030.56xx (xx = cable length)
Block Diagram

Emergency switchover facility for S0 lines

1. ISDN line
2. Answering with emergency set
3. Answering without emergency set
4. Answering
5. Emergency set
6. ZN
7. manual emergency switching
8. Documentation

8.5.18.1 Further Information

An NTBA with emergency supply is used as the NT, and the exchange dialling can be loaded with up to 380
mW in this case.
In normal operation, the emergency set has no function and therefore nothing appears in the display.
Facilities of this type are normally only to be handled by trained personnel. It can then be assumed that no
unqualified actions shall be initiated by the users.
Each cable adapter is provided with 125 mA semi-lag fuse protection.

8.5.18.2 MDF Connections

CSI55 LX 07/2006 267

8 Boards

MDF Cable 1 Emergency Extension Switch S0 with DT0

Colours 24x2
RD/BU TA1/TB1 ISDN lines with emergency switching
WH/YE TC1/TD1
WH/GN TA2/TB2
WH/BN TC2/TD2
WH/BK TA3/TB3
WH/BU TC3/TD3
WH/YE TA4/TB4
WH/GN TC4/TD4
WH/BN TA5/TB5
WH/BK TC5/TD5
WH/BU TA6/TB6
WH/YE TC6/TD6
WH/GN TA7/TB7 ISDN lines without emergency switching
WH/BN TC7/TD7
WH/BK TA8/TB8
WH/BU TC8/TD8
WH/YE EA1/EB1 Emergency sets
WH/GN EC1/ED1
WH/BN EA2/EB2
WH/BK EC2/ED2
WH/BU EA3/EB3
WH/YE EC3/ED3
RD/GN EA4/EB4
WH/BN EC4/ED4

MDF Cable 2 Emergency Extension Switch S0with DT0

Colours 24x2
RD/BU EA5/EB5 Emergency sets
WH/YE EC5/ED5
WH/GN EA6/EB6
WH/BN EC6/ED6
WH/BK RA1/RB1 To analog voice recording
WH/BU ERA1/ERB1 from handset of emergency set
WH/YE EOA1/EOB1 From handset of answering facility
WH/GN RA2/RB2 To analog voice recording
WH/BN ERA2ERB2 from handset of emergency set
WH/BK EOA2/EOB2 From handset of answering facility
WH/BU RA3/RB3 To analog voice recording
WH/YE ERA3ERB3 from handset of emergency set
WH/GN EOA3/EOB3 From handset of answering facility

268 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

WH/BN RA4/RB4 To analog voice recording

WH/BK ERA4/ERB4 from handset of emergency set
WH/BU EOA4/EOB4 From handset of answering facility
WH/YE RA5/RB5 To analog voice recording
WH/GN ERA5/ERB5 from handset of emergency set
WH/BN EOA5/EOB5 From handset of answering facility
WH/BK RA6/RB6 To analog voice recording
WH/BU ERA6/ERB6 from handset of emergency set
WH/YE EOA6/EOB6 From handset of answering facility
RD/GN -48 V/-48 V From power supply
WH/BN ZN/GND For the contingency of an emergency change-over

8.5.19 EESS0 Emergency Extension Switch S0

Short description
For special services, such as the police force, fire brigade or Red Cross, whose answering facilities must
always be available, the adapter board Emergency Extension Switch S0 for CSI55 is available. In the event
of a power failure or other malfunctions, this modules enables a switchover from the connecting line coming
from the ISDN network to S0 sets that are powered by the ISDN network.

EESS0 board

1. Cable 1 + 2, each 24-pair to external MDF

2. Champ plug

3. EESS0
4. Pl.1
5. Pl.2

Instructions
Connection to a DT0 or ADM, i.e. 2 wire paris are to be switched per port.
Switchover is implemented to a set that is only used when the switchover is active.
For this purpose, a switchover with 1 WP each for the analog voice documentation.
Two 50-pin plugs are available as external connectors.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 269

8 Boards

Switch-over criteria
General power failure
DT0/ADM board removed
Manual actuation of an external potential-free switch

Other features
Power demand -48V = 108mA
The number of ports is determined by the limited number of plug positions.
The port 1..6 contains the switchover option. Port 7 and 8 are directly switched through. Ports 9 to 16
cannot be used (only applies to ADM).
The switchover is implemented with 4 wires.
For each port, an additional 2 switchover contacts are brought out, via which, for example, lines to voice
recording devices are switched.
The detection ”Board removed” is implemented with GND from the DT0 or ADM.
-48 V is fed via the connecting cable.
One wire is fed for the forced switchover via the connecting cable.
Connection cables required: 2 cables 24x2 I55-HVT (MDF) 29.9030.56xx (xx = cable length)

The X8 connector of the ADM board requires the EEADM submodule.

The EESS0 board differs from the EES0B board only in as far as in the EESS0 it is possible
to prevent emergency switching of individual ports by means of jumpers.

Block Diagram

270 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Emergency switchover facility for S0 lines

1. ISDN line
2. Answering station

3. Manual emergency switching

4. Documentation
5. Emergency answer

8.5.19.1 Additional measures with ADM

If the ADM board is used with emergency switching (EESS0 cable adapter) submodule 3 is
not required. On the X8 connector (normally for submodule 4) you must insert the EEADM
submodule instead of submodule 4.

ADM board, location of EEADM on X8

If the EEADM board is inserted in the wrong place on the ADM board this will cause a defect
in the ADM board.

8.5.19.2 Jumper

The EESS0 features switching contacts with jumpers to prevent emergency switching of individual ports.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 271

8 Boards

EESS0 cable adapter, component side

Upon first delivery emergency switching is active for ports 0 to 5, i.e. the jumpers are on 2-3 and 5-6. For
special applications it is possible to exclude individual ports from emergency switching.

View of connectors X7, X8 and X9

Connector X7 Jumpers 1-2 Emergency switching for

port 0 inactive

272 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Jumpers 2-3 Emergency switching for

port 0 active
Jumpers 4-5 Emergency switching for
port 1 inactive
Jumpers 5-6 Emergency switching for
port 1 active

Connector X8 Jumpers 1-2 Emergency switching for

port 2 inactive
Jumpers 2-3 Emergency switching for
port 2 active
Jumpers 4-5 Emergency switching for
port 3 inactive
Jumpers 5-6 Emergency switching for
port 3 active

Connector X9 Jumpers 1-2 Emergency switching for

port 4 inactive
Jumpers 2-3 Emergency switching for
port 4 active
Jumpers 4-5 Emergency switching for
port 5 inactive
Jumpers 5-6 Emergency switching for
port 5 active

8.5.19.3 Further Information

The feedlines of the -48V should not be connected to the same fuse as those of the PBX because of the
current difference between them.
The failure criteria such as fuse failure, board removed or manual switchover trigger a message on the system
console so that monitoring from there is guaranteed.
An NTBA with emergency supply is used as the NT, and the exchange dialling can be loaded with up to 380
mW in this case.
In normal operation, the emergency set has no function and therefore nothing appears in the display.
Facilities of this type are normally only to be handled by trained personnel. It can then be assumed that no
unqualified actions shall be initiated by the users.

8.5.19.4 MDF Connections

MDF Cable 1 Emergency Extension Switch S0with DT0

Colours 24x2
RD/BU TA1/TB1 ISDN line 0
WH/YE TC1/TD1 ISDN line 0
WH/GN TA2/TB2 ISDN line 1

CSI55 LX 07/2006 273

8 Boards

WH/BN TC2/TD2 ISDN line 1

WH/BK TA3/TB3 ISDN line 2
WH/BU TC3/TD3 ISDN line 2
WH/YE TA4/TB4 ISDN line 3
WH/GN TC4/TD4 ISDN line 3
WH/BN TA5/TB5 ISDN line 4
WH/BK TC5/TD5 ISDN line 4
WH/BU TA6/TB6 ISDN line 5
WH/YE TC6/TD6 ISDN line 5
WH/GN TA7/TB7 ISDN line 6
WH/BN TC7/TD7 ISDN line 6
WH/BK TA8/TB8 ISDN line 7
WH/BU TC8/TD8 ISDN line 7
WH/YE EA1/EB1 Emergency set 0
WH/GN EC1/ED1 Emergency set 0
WH/BN EA2/EB2 Emergency set 1
WH/BK EC2/ED2 Emergency set 1
WH/BU EA3/EB3 Emergency set 2
WH/YE EC3/ED3 Emergency set 2
RD/GN EA4/EB4 Emergency set 3
WH/BN EC4/ED4 Emergency set 3

Complementary wire: GND

MDF Cable 2 Emergency Extension Switch S0with DT0

Colours 24x2
RD/BU EA5/EB5 Emergency set 4
WH/YE EC5/ED5 Emergency set 4
WH/GN EA6/EB6 Emergency set 5
WH/BN EC6/ED6 Emergency set 5
WH/BK RA1/RB1 to analogue voice recording
WH/BU ERA1/ERB1 from handset of emergency set
WH/YE EOA1/EOB1 from handset of answering facility
WH/GN RA2/RB2 to analogue voice recording
WH/BN ERA2ERB2 from handset of emergency set
WH/BK EOA2/EOB2 from handset of answering facility
WH/BU RA3/RB3 to analogue voice recording
WH/YE ERA3ERB3 from handset of emergency set
WH/GN EOA3/EOB3 from handset of answering facility
WH/BN RA4/RB4 to analogue voice recording
WH/BK ERA4/ERB4 from handset of emergency set
WH/BU EOA4/EOB4 from handset of answering facility
WH/YE RA5/RB5 to analogue voice recording
WH/GN ERA5/ERB5 from handset of emergency set

274 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

WH/BN EOA5/EOB5 from handset of answering facility

WH/BK RA6/RB6 to analogue voice recording
WH/BU ERA6/ERB6 from handset of emergency set
WH/YE EOA6/EOB6 from handset of answering facility
RD/GN -48 V/-48 V -48V from power supply
WH/BN ZN/GND Contact of forced emergency switching /
to contact of forced emergency switching

Complementary wire: GND

8.5.20 EESxB emergency extension switch B module

Short description
The board EESxB is used to connect the a/b interfaces of the ATA, ATB, ATC and ATA2 modules to the lines
leading to the MDF.
The board EES1B serves the direct connection of an analog exchange line to a terminal in the event of a
network failure. It provides connections for one analog exchange line, one line with analog terminal and one
subscriber line circuit.
The EES8B enables an emergency switchover of eight analog subscriber sets to the network. The board also
contains an overvoltage breakpoint (230 V contact).

EESxB Adapter module with connection

1. 50-pin Champ plug

2. Cable, 16 or 24-pair to external MDF

3. EESxB Adapter module

8.5.20.1 MDF Connections

MDF via EES1B or EES8B from ATx

Colours 24x2
RD/BU a1/b1
WH/YE a2/b2
WH/GN a3/b3
WH/BN a4b4

CSI55 LX 07/2006 275

8 Boards

WH/BK a5/b5
WH/BU a6/b6
WH/YE a7/b7
WH/GN a8/b8
WH/BN NST a1/b1
WH/BK NST a2/b2 (8x only)
WH/BU NST a3/b3 (8x only)
WH/YE NST a4/b4 (8x only)
WH/GN TLN-S a1/b1
WH/BN TLN-S a2/b2 (8x only)
RD/BK TLN-S a3/b3 (8x only)
WH/BU TLN-S a4/b4 (8x only)
WH/YE NST a5/b5 (8x only)
WH/GN NST a6/b6 (8x only)
WH/BN NST a7/b7 (8x only)
WH/BK NST a8/b8 (8x only)
WH/BU TLN-S a5/b5 (8x only)
WH/YE TLN-S a6/b6 (8x only)
RD/GN TLN-S a7/b7 (8x only)
WH/BN TLN-S a8/b8 (8x only)

8.5.21 ESBx External Signalling B Module

Short description
The ESBx board is an adapter board which is inserted behind the CF2E, CF22 or ICF board.

Features
50-pin CHAMP plug as an output to the MDF.
18 relays for fault indication, one changeover contact per relay.
26-pin pin strip for connection of the EDU board
Total breakdown indication for single or doubled control (adjustable using jumper).
4 inputs used for external status queries, DC decoupled via optocoupler.
These may be messages from a UPS for example, that are signalled via the PBX and activate a validation
call.
4 fused -48 V electric circuits for the operator sets or NT
4 potential connections for fans with failure supervision.

Other features
Power demand +5V 20-400 mA (depending on the number of relays to be activated)

Apart from the fully equipped variant of the ESB there are two variants with reduced equipment:

variant

276 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

ESBA without external fault signalling, only power supplies for fan, VA and NT, with no
EDU
ESBB without external fault signalling, only power supplies for fan, VA and NT, with no
EDU, all optocouplers equipped.

The characteristics of the boards can be found in the following table:

Characteristics of the ESBx board family

Feature ESB ESBA ESBB Notes
Champ plug 1 1 1 to MDF
Relays for fault signalling 18 0 0 one changeover contact per relay
Champ plug 1 0 0 Fault signalling by the relay contacts
48V power supply circuit 4 4 4 Operator set or NT
assured
Optocoupler inputs for 4 0 4 e.g messages from a UPS for
interrogating external example, that are signalled via the
conditions PBX and activate a validation call.
Connection facilities for a 4 4 4 with drop-out monitoring
fan
26-pin connector 1 0 0 for EDU connection via ribbon cable

Schematic representation of the optocoupler interface

Possible opposite stations for the optocoupler

1. ESB
2. Possible Opposite Station

CSI55 LX 07/2006 277

8 Boards

3. Optocoupler
4. Jumper to deactivate the interface
5. ESD

6. Optocoupler
7. or relay contact
8. or jumper

8.5.21.1 Pin strip on the ESBx

• If overload current points of division on the ESBx board are burnt out, the board must
be replaced with a new one.
• Never attempt to repair the breakpoints!
• The system may carry out a reset when the board is inserted!

Assignment of pins to Pin strips on ESB and ESBB boards

Optoc. Bridge Optoc. Bridge

S1/1 1 inactive 1-2 1 active 2-3
S1/2 2 inactive 4-5 2 active 5-6
S2/1 3 inactive 1-2 3 active 2-3
S2/2 4 inactive 4-5 4 active 5-6
S3/1 Module with 1 CFx 1-2 Module with 2 2-3
CFx’s
S3/2 Default setting 4-5 Parking position 5-6

For use in B3 module (IMTU)

S3/1 Module with 1 ICF 1-2 not permissible 2-3

Insert the jumpers as required.

To protect against fire and energy hazards, fuses must only be replaced with fuses of the
same type. Fuses S1 to S5 Wickmann type TR5-630 mA, 250 V time-lag.

278 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

ESBx adapter board, pin strip location

1. Cable 1, 4, 16 or 24-pair to external MDF

2. Fuse 5 for fan in housing
3. Cable 2, 16 or 24-pair to external MDF
4. Connector for EDU circuit board
5. Fan connectors
6. Fire protection device; Will require servicing if defective!

Si = Fuse

8.5.21.2 MDF Connections

Colours Colours Patch panel Colours Cable 1

4x2 16x2 for the 24x2
two-wire
connection
BK/BN RD/BU WE 1 RD/BU GND/-48 V (fuse 1, 630 mA, M) for VA or NT
(all variants)
BK/RD WH/YE WE 2 WH/YE GND/-48 V (fuse 2, 630 mA, M) for VA or NT
(all variants)
BK/OR WH/GN WE 3 WH/GN GND/-48 V (fuse 3, 630 mA, M) for VA or NT
(all variants)
BK/YE WH/BN WE 4 WH/BN GND/-48 V (fuse 4, 630 mA, M) for VA or NT
(all variants)
WH/BK WE 5 WH/BK Total failure contact (only ESB)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 279

8 Boards

WH/BU WE 6 WH/BU free / SMDT automatic information call

malfunction contact, A (only ESB)
WH/YE WE 7 WH/YE SMDT automatic information call malfunction
contact, M/R (only ESB)
WH/GN WE 8 WH/GN free / HGS failure contact, A (only ESB)
WH/BN WE 9 WH/BN HGS failure contact, M/R (only ESB)
WH/BK WE 10 WH/BK free / module malfunction contact, A (only
ESB)
WH/BU WE 11 WH/BU Module malfunction contact, M/R (only ESB)
RD/YE WE 12 WH/YE free / individual malfunction contact, A (only
ESB)
WH/GN WE 13 WH/GN Individual malfunction contact, M/R (only ESB)
WH/BN WE 14 WH/BN free / interface malfunction contact, A (only
ESB)
WH/BK WE 15 RD/BK Interface malfunction contact, M/R (only ESB)
WH/BU WE 16 WH/BU Free contact (only ESB)
WH/YE free / IMTU malfunction contact, A (only ESB)
WH/GN IMTU malfunction contact, M/R (only ESB)
WH/BN free / reserve controls failure contact, A (only
ESB)
WH/BK Reserve controls failure contact, M/R (only
ESB)
WH/BU Ok. 1 external device malfunction (+/-, loop I
2.8 mA) (only ESB and ESBB)
WH/YE Ok. 2 external device malfunction (+/-, loop I
2.8 mA) (only ESB and ESBB)
RD/GN Ok. 3 external device malfunction (+/-, loop I
2.8 mA) (only ESB and ESBB)
WH/BN Ok. 4 external device malfunction (+/-, loop I
2.8 mA) (only ESB and ESBB)

Ok = optocoupler

Colours Patch panel Colours Cable 2

16x2 for the 24x2
two-wire
connection
RD/BU WE 1 RD/BU free / power supply malfunction contact, A (only ESB)
WH/YE WE 2 WH/YE Power supply malfunction contact, M/R (only ESB)
WH/GN WE 3 WH/GN free / fan failure contact, A (only ESB)
WH/BN WE 4 WH/BN Fan failure contact, M/R (only ESB)
WH/BK WE 5 WH/BK free / synchronisation failure contact, A (only ESB)
WH/BU WE 6 WH/BU Synchronisation failure contact, M/R (only ESB)
WH/YE WE 7 WH/YE free / ZGDE failure contact, A (only ESB)
WH/GN WE 8 WH/GN ZGDE failure contact, M/R (only ESB)
WH/BN WE 9 WH/BN free / system readiness contact, A (only ESB)
WH/BK WE 10 WH/BK System readiness contact, M/R (only ESB)

280 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

WH/BU WE 11 WH/BU free / line malfunction contact, A (only ESB)

RD/YE WE 12 WH/YE Analog/digital line fault contact, M/R (only ESB)
WH/GN WE 13 WH/GN free / loss of redundancy contact, A (only ESB)
WH/BN WE 14 WH/BN Loss of redundancy contact, M/R (only ESB)
WH/BK WE 15 RD/BK Free/contact malfunction external Facility, A (only ESB)
WH/BU WE 16 WH/BU Contact malfunction external Facility, M/R (only ESB)
WH/YE Free / contact not currently used, A (only ESB)
WH/GN Contact not currently used, M/R (only ESB)
WH/BN Free / contact not currently used, A (only ESB)
WH/BK Contact not currently used, M/R (only ESB)
WH/BU Free / contact not currently used, A (only ESB)
WH/YE Contact not currently used, M/R (only ESB)
RD/GN free/free
WH/BN free/free

8.5.22 HSCB High Speed Computer Board

Short description
HSCB is the basic equipment in all modules. It is a computer board with dynamic RAM.

Features
Optionally with parity
128 kByte ERROR flash-PROM
512 kByte Boot flash-PROM
Buffered real time clock
Two-level hardware watchdog
Hardware status register
C-bus interface
4 B channel accesses
2 V.24 interfaces
Downloadable
2x PC card/ATA interfaces for 1.8” PC card driver with ATA mode. Hard disk drives with 260 MB or 1 GB
(for large systems) are available for these interfaces.

Other features
Application Basic equipment in all modules
Power demand +5V 1900 mA without HGS
2400 mA with 1 HGS (startup current)
2900 mA with 2 HGS (startup current)
The drives can be replaced during operation.
The V24NI submodule is used as standard when connecting circuits to the V.24 interfaces. If necessary, it
is also possible to use the DC isolated V24I.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 281

8 Boards

Additional Memory If additional memory submodules (PS2) are inserted into the HSCB, it should be
taken into account that the first memory slot must always be occupied. The
inserted PS2 memory modules must have an access time of 60 ns.

HSCB board, component side

1. Memory 4
2. Memory 3
3. Memory 2
4. Memory 1
5. HGS
6. Battery

The HSCB is equipped with one of the following V.24 submodules:

• V.24I Insulated
• V.24NI Non-Insulated (basic configuration)

The following signals are available for the V.24:

• RXD
• TXD
• DTR
• GND
• DSR
• RTS
• CTS

282 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

8.5.22.1 LEDs and Switch Functions

HSCB board, front side

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position
S2 Left position
S3 Left position
S4 Left position

Switch Function

CSI55 LX 07/2006 283

8 Boards

S1 Reset switch and MI button

Middle: Operating status
Left: Reset board, locking (see S2)
Right: Monitor interruption (TENOBUG start), keying
S2 Memory test switch
Left: (Standard) No memory test when resetting/restarting
Right: Memory test when reseting/reloading the TC system
S3 Hard Disk Change Request (HDCHR)
Left: Operating status: PC-CARD-ATA-interfaces in operation
Right: Service position: Removing and inserting the HGS(s)
S4 System console connected (SCOCON)
Left: No device connected (Default), or printer or video terminal
connected
Right: System terminal connected

Meanings of LEDs

L1 Fault indication from the control (group statement)

L2 Indicates module data transfer via the C-bus (e.g. call at subcriber)
L3 Indicates access to the inserted background memory
L4 Indicates that the HGS(s) can be removed
L5 Indicates that the S4 switch is in the “right” position, and that the system terminal can be
connected to the first V.24 interface on the AV24B/W (service)
L6 Unused
L7- L10 The LEDs flash to indicate the status from reset to operation. The display remains lit for
about 5 seconds if a fault is found in the loading phases 15 to 7 (see following table). If a
fatal fault occurs, the reset process is repeated from the beginning (loading phase 15).

No. L7 L8 L9 L10 Phase name

15 1 1 1 1 Start reset phase
14 1 1 1 0 Test flash-PROM
13 1 1 0 1 Test QUICC
12 1 1 0 0 Test real time clock
11 1 0 1 1 Test C-bus interface
10 1 0 1 0 Test DUART (V.24 ports)
9 1 0 0 1 Test dynamic RAM
8 1 0 0 0 Output hardware image
7 0 1 1 1 End reset phase
6 0 1 1 0 Initial program loading (IPL)/IPL ready flag
5 0 1 0 1 STIN program loader is loaded and started
4 0 1 0 0 Operating system has been loaded and started (restart)
3 0 0 1 1 User programs (have been dispatched) have been loaded
2 0 0 1 0 Start of customer data loading in the user programs

284 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

1 0 0 0 1 All customer data loaded Start commissioning of module(s)

0 0 0 0 0 Module(s) in operation

1 = LED on
0 = LED off

8.5.22.2 Changing the HGSs

The HGS may be removed or inserted during system operation without the prior removal of the HSCB.
The following procedure must be adhered to:

• Remove static charge from the module frame

• Move S3 switch to the right
• Wait for L4 to light up
• Remove the appropriate HGS

Do not touch the components!

Take hold of the drive from above and below.

• Insert the new HDD

• Move S3 switch to the left
• L4 will go out in a short time

8.5.22.3 Removing and Inserting the board

The HSCB board may be removed or inserted during system operation, if the S1 switch handle has been
moved to the left.
In single module systems, removing the HSCB board will result in a total breakdown.
In multi-module systems, removing the HSCB board will result in the failure of this module.

8.5.23 ICF IMTU Central Functions

Short description
The central board of the B3 module or ICS is the ICF.

Features
Clock Supply and Clock frequency precision for DECT.
Synchronization

CSI55 LX 07/2006 285

8 Boards

Remote synchronizable by high precision reference clock and master module

(with CL2M or CL2ME)
Master function for multi-module systems, adjustable using software.

External interfaces
128 receive/transmit highway
Outputs for ext. signalling
Remote control for power supply
LWL connector
Ref. clock supply (CL2M)
Clocks
Micro processor bus

Interface to Other Modules

Through MLB, with possible MLBIML
Transfer of C-bus data.
256 PCM channels.

Inter Module Manager (IMMG)

Fault Management using Inter Module Manager

Other features
Application Basic equipment in B3/ICS
Power demand +5V 3210 mA
Battery status query
Memory Doubling e.g. for Downloading
Fire Protection Fuse

Difference between ICF .1321 and .1331

In .1331, CBI and IMLA are on the board.
The ICF with material number 49.9905.9146 can be used in the B3 module and in the ICS.

286 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

8.5.23.1 Jumper and DIL Switch Functions

ICF board, component side

1. DIL switch
2. Jumper
3. Fire Protection Fuse

Jumper Functions

Total breakdown (system not in operation) via ESB

1-2 Normally closed contact for message
2-3 Normally open contact for message

Battery status query

4-5 Testing of -48 V battery not possible (default)
5-6 Testing of -48 V battery active
When using PS350 with connected battery: Switch on the battery voltage monitoring option

Fire Protection Fuse

If the fire protection fuse is defective (burned out), the board must be replaced by a new one.

Functions of the DIL Switches

S1 Error signalling unit

CSI55 LX 07/2006 287

8 Boards

ON: with ESU

OFF: without ESU

S2 System configuration for IMMG

ON: IMMG passive
OFF: IMMG active

S3 S4 Specification of highest scan address

ON ON 16
OFF ON 32
ON OFF 64
OFF OFF 128 (default)

S5 Inter module manager watchdog

ON: Watchdog inactive
OFF: Watchdog active (default)

S6 CBI master mode switching

ON: Test mode
OFF: CBI master (default)
For testing and servicing purposes. Do not change

S7 Non-maskable interruption
ON: Enable NMI
OFF: NMI disable (default)
For testing and servicing purposes. Do not change

S8 CBI speed
ON: 2 MHz
OFF: 4 MHz (default)

8.5.23.2 LEDs and Switch Functions

288 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

ICF board for B3 module, front side ICF board for ICS and B3 module, front side

Switch Functions

S1 Reset
Left: No function, locking
Middle: Operating status
Right: Reset board, keying
S2 Service Switch
Left: No function, locking
Middle: Operating status
Right: With redundant star coupler: Activate switchover, keying

Meanings of LEDs

L1 No function

L2 Clock unit active

on: Active module clock unit
L3 When doubling, IMTU status
on: IMTU active
off: IMTU hot stand-by
flashing quickly: IMTU active and alternate path switched
flashing slowly: IMTU hot-standby and alternate path switched

L4 IMMG status

CSI55 LX 07/2006 289

8 Boards

on: IMMG not in operation (no board operation)

flashing: IMMG in operation, but board logon not yet possible
With doubled multi-module, also failure of the fibre-optic link
ICF <–> ICF.
off: IMMG in operation

L5 Clock unit synchronization

on: Module’s clock system is synchronized

L6 Master/free-run clock mode

on: Module prepared by system software for master operation
or
module in master free-run clock mode

8.5.23.3 Removing and Inserting the board

The board may be removed and inserted during system operation.

All existing connections are disconnected if the board is removed. Exception when doubling.

If the active ICF board of a doubled pair is to be removed, the service switch must be used to
change it over to the hot stand-by side. After the ICF has been reinserted, the service switch
must be switched back again.

8.5.23.4 Doubling

Only one ICF board can be inserted for each B3 module.

A doubling of the system can only be implemented by using a second ICS or B3 module.
SeeComplete doubling → 153

8.5.23.5 External clock pulse input

First V.24 interface of the CA3B (Cable Adapter 3 for B modules)

PIN 1 A1 External clock pulse input 2.048 MHz (high precision reference
PIN6 B1 clock / TAREF)

8.5.24 OFA2B/OFAS Optical Fibre Adapter

Short description
The OFA2B Optical Fibre Adapter 2 B modules and OFAS Optical Fibre Adapter single mode are for connect-
ing the optical waveguides when DT21 boards are used and the optical interfaces are employed.

290 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

The boards are used for various optical fibre types:

OFA2B OFAS
Graded-index fibres Mono-mode fibres
Ready-made cable types Coreصm Ready-made cable types Coreصm
29.9030.6101-6199* 62,5 29.9030.6201-6299* 9,5

*The last two characters of the material number indicate the length of the pre-prepared cable in metres.
Cable lengths >99m are handled by the project division.
Common data for OFA2B and OFAS boards

Interfaces Number and form Wavelength

Optical transmitters 1 SC socket 1300nm
Optical receivers 1 SC socket 1300nm

electrical values
Supply voltage 5V
Supply current 250mA typical
Power consumption 1.25W

Depending on the optical fibre used and cross-section area of the optical cable, different maximum cable
lengths can be achieved:

Maximum distances
Type of fibre Optical fibre maximum
core صm length km
Graded-index 62,5 10
fibre 50 6,2
Mono mode 9,5 15

Basic construction of OFA2B and OFAS

CSI55 LX 07/2006 291

8 Boards

OFA2B and OFAS boards are designed for connecting to SC plugs. Neither board is thus
compatible with the previous OFA1B board type, which was designed for mono-mode fibre
and ST connectors.

8.5.25 TER Termination

Short description
The TER boards are used for line terminations (terminating resistor) of the backplane. Depending on the
application, the following TER boards are available:

Submodules
TER2 Power demand +5V 110 mA
TER3 Power demand +5V 90 mA

When using TER boards, check that they are properly connected.

1. TER slot on the B3 backplane

8.6 Analog interfaces

Board Submodule Connection

board

Board/ ASCxx → 324 CA1B → 391,

Rack/ CARUB → 248
Backplane ASC2 → 310 CA2B → 392,
CARUB → 248
ASC21 → 314 CA2B → 392,
CARUB → 248
ATA → 330 SIGA → 361 CA1B → 391,
SIGB → 362 EESxB → 275

292 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Board Submodule Connection

board

SIGC → 362
SIGD → 363
SIGE → 364
SIGF → 365
SIGG → 365
ATA2 → 333 SIGH → 366 CA1B → 391,
EESxB → 275
ATB → 336 SUPA → 371 CA1B → 391,
SUPB → 372 EESxB → 275
ATC → 338 SSBA → 367 CA1B → 391,
SSBB → 368 EESxB → 275
SSBC → 368
SSBD → 369
ATLC → 341 SSSM → 370 CA2B → 392,
PLSM → 359 CARUB → 248
ALSM → 307
ALSMF → 308
ALSMH → 309
ACSM → 298
DDID → 354 CA1B → 391
JPAT → 357 SUTC → 373 CARUB → 248
SUTD → 379
ADM → 301 ABSM → 293 CA2B → 392
ABSM1 → 294
AUP see Service and installation manual Analog Universal
Platform AUP with submodule on I33

8.6.1 ABSM Analog Subscriber Submodule

Short description
The ABSM submodule is plugged into the ADM board. It makes available four a/b connection for analog end
devices, according to country specific requirements with the following features:

Country-specific Germany, Austria, Switzerland, Netherlands, Great Britain, Italy, Spain, Belgium,
variants are Venezuela, Hungary, Czech Republic, Slovakian Republic, Mexico, Hong Kong,
configurable using USA, Russia and France
board software for
the following
countries:
Power demand +5V 70 mA
Interfaces 4 × a/b
Constant current 24 mA convertible to 30 mA
supply
Line resistance 2 x 475 Ohm

CSI55 LX 07/2006 293

8 Boards

range: 4 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,4 mm

9 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,6 mm
15 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,8 mm
DTMF/pulse dialling
50 Hz ringing current (only with PS350A switchable to 25 Hz)
Short and long flash time (end device dependent)
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Board software download
Board identification using board pass
Maintenance function
Polarity reversion for “message waiting” signalling
Connection of external announcement devices

The connection on the MDF is carried out via the CA2B or CARUB boards.
Changing the Supply Current
The power supply per connecting circuit can be increased from 24 mA (standard) to 30 mA in this board.
The following actions are to be carried out per connecting circuit:

• Equip with 0 Ohm resistance (see illustration)

ABSM board, component side

1. Connecting circuit 1
2. Connecting circuit 2
3. Connecting circuit 3
4. Connecting circuit 4
5. Plug connector to the ADM (internal ADM interface)
6. Plug connector to the ADM (line interface)

8.6.2 ABSM1 Analog Subscriber Submodule 1

Short description
The ABSM1 submodule is plugged into the ADM board. It replaces the ABSM submodule and provides four a/
b connections for analogue terminals, according to country-specific requirements, with the following features:

294 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Country-specific Germany, Austria, Switzerland, Netherlands, Great Britain, Italy, Spain, Belgium,
variants are Venezuela, Hungary, Czech Republic, Slovakian Republic, Mexico, Hong Kong,
configurable using USA, Russia and France
board software for
the following
countries:
Power demand +5V 70 mA
Interfaces 4 × a/b
Constant current 24 mA convertible to 30 mA
supply
Line 2 x 475 Ohm
resistance
range: 4 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,4 mm
9 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,6 mm
15 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,8 mm
DTMF/pulse dialling
50 Hz ringing current (only with PS350A switchable to 25 Hz)
Short and long flash time (end device dependent)
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Board software download
Board identification using board pass
Maintenance function
Polarity reversion for “message waiting” signalling
Connection of external announcement devices

The connection on the MDF is carried out via the CA2B or CARUB boards.
Setting of the supply current 30mA per port
The ABSM1 board implements a subscriber interface with continuous current supply. This means that the
switching regulator of each port component provides the supply voltage to the terminal (analogue telephone)
in order for the supply current to flow (within the limits of the supply range). A continuous current of 24mA is
adjusted by default.
The supply current can be increased to 30mA by inserting bridges or 0 ohm resistances. Each of the 4 ports
can be adapted individually. A maximum of 4 ports must be changed individually.

Only one of the following setting options should be used for the ABSM1 submodule. Mixing
the variants does not make sense!

Increase of the supply current to 30mA by inserting bridges on the component side
The following picture shows the component side of the ABSM1. The positions of the soldering spots for the
resistances (or bridges) are highlighted and shown in detail next to the board.
Simple wire bridges must be soldered on the component side. Short-circuits as a result of contact with
neighbouring components and signalling lines at all costs must be avoided!

CSI55 LX 07/2006 295

8 Boards

ABSM1 submodule, component side

Increase of the supply current to 30mA by inserting bridges on the solder side
Since the components are in close proximity to each other and since it is not possible to immediately find
the modified current setting of an ABSM1 plugged onto the ADM, there is another possibility of setting the
current. By soldering wire bridge onto the solder side of the ABSM1 it is possible to obtain the same effect
as by soldering bridges onto the component side. The soldering points located between the *1 marks (very
small) must be connected by means of a wire bridge. The following figure shows the soldering side of the
ABSM1. The port-specific areas are outlined and shown in detail.

296 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

CSI55 LX 07/2006 297

8 Boards

ABSM1 submodule, conductor side

There are no components on the soldering side. This simplifies the soldering process and
the optical recognition of a chosen current increase. A very exact orientation must be
ensured with this variant! We recommend the use of a magnifying glass to make sure that
the correct soldering points are connected to each other.

8.6.3 ACSM Alternating Current Signalling Submodule

Short description
The Alternating Current Signalling submodule (ACSM) performs the signal exchange with the remote connect-
ing circuit by transmitting 50Hz AC impulses back and forwards on the speech lines.

Other features
Country of application National and international
Power demand +5V 5 mA
Interface to the remote connecting circuit an a/b (two-core line)
The signalling current must be measured.
Combinations with other submodules on an ATLC board are possible.

8.6.3.1 Setting up the ACSM

In exceptional application cases, a separate alternating current signal for signalling to the remote connecting
circuit can be supplied instead of the alternating current from the power supply of the I55. At the MDF, the
supply is implemented via the (in this case unused) wires of the incoming Ka/Kb speech path. To switch
the alternating current signal, two bridges must be disconnected and two bridges inserted on the ACSM
submodule.

Section of the soldering side on the ACSM submodule

1. Disconnect two bridges here

2. Insert two bridges here

Note
The supply must be implemented separately for each port via the associated Ka/Kb wires.

8.6.3.2 Calibrating the Signalling Current

The signal current comprises the base for signalling between the ACSM and the remote connecting circuit.
Because the strength of the current depends on the connecting line between ACSM and the remote connecting

298 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

circuit, commissioning or alteration of the connecting line must be followed by individual adjustment of the
signal current to and from the remote side.
If the signalling current is too weak, the individual criteria may not be identified. If the current is too strong,
this may lead to signal distortion, and subsequent misrepresentation of the individual criteria.
The ACSM submodule is equipped with two potentiometers for adjustment of the signal current to the remote
connecting circuit and two measuring points for identification of the signal current from the remote connecting
circuit.
For the calibrating procedure, the ATLC board and the corresponding ACSM sub-board should be inserted into
the TC system via the Board Adapter (BA) module, material number: 28.5630.590x. This provides access to
the potentiometers and measuring points.

The a.c signalling voltage is located on the sleeve strip lines to the ATLC basic board.
Contact with these parts as well as the component connections is to be avoided.

Soldering side of the ACSM submodule

1. Potentiometers

8.6.3.3 Measuring the Transmitted Alternating Current from the remote connecting circuit

In order to do this, the remote connecting circuit must transmit a continuous alternating current. The intensity
of the current is measured by a voltmeter, which is to be set as follows:
Measurement range: 1V -2V, DC
The required measuring points, PP1 (-) and PP2 (+), are illustrated.

Soldering side of the ACSM submodule

1. Potentiometers

CSI55 LX 07/2006 299

8 Boards

The signalling current must be adjusted at the remote connecting circuit until the test points read 0.7 V DC
voltage.
Once this process has been completed, the continuous alternating current from the remote connecting circuit
is switched off.

8.6.3.4 Setting the Transmission Current to the remote connecting circuit

In order to carry out this process, the ACSM must send a continuous alternating current to the remote con-
necting circuit. To do this, the appropriate testing and blocking switches on the ATLC board must be switched
into the right position. The associated LED will flicker slowly, the connecting circuit is now blocked and will
transmit continuous alternating current to the remote connecting circuit.
The alternating current transmitted by the ACSM is now measured at the remote connecting circuit, and, by
turning the potentiometers alternately, the ACSM adjusts the current to correspond with the remote connecting
circuit’s requirements. Turning the meters clockwise results in an increase of the transmission current. Turning
anti-clockwise results in a decrease of the transmission current.
Subsequently, the testing and blocking switches on the corresponding port of the ATLC must be brought back
into the middle (resting) position. The continuous alternating current is switched off, the accompanying LED
goes out, and the connecting circuit is ready for operation.
The calibrating procedure is completed.
The ATLC board can now be removed from the BA module and inserted in its place in the PBX.
The corresponding adjustments must be made in the configuration data.

8.6.3.5 Adjusting the Configuration Data

• Physical line interface

Set to “AC signalling active”.
• Signalling plan
Set the signalling plan so that is identical to that of (coordinated with) the remote connecting circuit.
• Speech path design and relative level
Set one of the following combinations according to the requirement of the interface to the remote con-
necting circuit.
If your country of application is not listed, select the required level setting for D. Your application then
corresponds to German transmission technology.

Speech path design Relative level Application in countries

(PrE/PrA)
2-wire 0/-7 dBr A, D, E, GR
2-wire 0/-7 dBr B, L
2-wire 0/-7 dBr F
2-wire 0/-7 dBr NL
2-wire 0/-7 dBr I
2-wire -3/-4 dBr D, GR(default setting)
2-wire -3/-4 dBr F
2-wire -4/-3 dBr B, L

300 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

2-wire -4/-3 dBr NL

2-wire -5/-2 dBr D
2-wire -6/-1 dBr A
2-wire -6/-1 dBr F

• Modifications of the signal times may only be made in exceptional circumstances on site.
• Some signalling plans require adjustments to be made to the “digits”. The permissible settings can be
found in the respective signalling plan.

• Settings for the connecting circuit type must not be changed.

8.6.4 ADM Analog Digital Mixboard

Short description
The ADM board is a basic board which accomodates up to five submodules. The following submodules are
available:

Submodule Features
STSM four S0/T0 interfaces as exchange, permanent connection or subscriber
connection
UPSM four UPN interfaces as subscriber connections or permanent connections
ABSM four analogue subscriber ports (a/b)
UKSM twoi UK0 master interfaces
EEADM for use of the ADM with S0 emergency sets via cable adapter EESS0

CSI55 LX 07/2006 301

8 Boards

ADM board, component side

Observe numbering of the submodules

1 AO 1-4
3 AO 9-12
2 AO 5-8
4 AO 13-16

If the ADM board is used with emergency switching (EESS0 cable adapter) submodule 3 is
not required. On the X8 connector (normally for submodule 4) you must insert the EEADM
submodule instead of submodule 4.

302 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

If the EEADM board is inserted in the wrong place on the ADM board this will cause a defect
in the ADM board.

For the ADM board the ”Call Reference Length - (CRL)” can be set to a length of one or two
bytes for the whole board by means of the ICU editor. The call reference length of 2 bytes is
required for QSIG network connection with some third-party PBX. If this setting is used all
ports have CRL=2 bytes no matter which protocol is selected. For this reason it was not
possible to connect any system terminals with TN1R6 protocol to this ADM board.
As of software version ADM0900.ICL / ADM00009.ICP of the ICU, the behaviour of the ADM
board and of the Integral 55 Compact-ADM port has changed. The CRL setting is only
adopted for the ports of the board which use the ”QSIG” protocol. For all other protocolos the
call reference length will always be CRL=1.
This makes it possible to configure QSIG ports with CRL=2 for networks with third-party
systems while it is possible to use system terminals and permanent circuit lines with CRL=1
for other ports with TN1R6 protocol.

Other features
Countries of application Application in all countries
Power demand +5V 230 mA
Interfaces 16 times 2/4-wire
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Download board software
Board identification using board passport
Maintenance function
In conjunction with V24IA module debugging interface on the board front

Debugger

CSI55 LX 07/2006 303

8 Boards

8.6.4.1 LEDs and Switch Functions

DECT board, front side

1. RJ45 connector with PIN assignment

Switch Functions

S1 Left: Preparatory disabling (of all connecting circuits)

Middle: Operating status/release
Right: Reset board
Right, then left: Forced board download

Meanings of LEDs

L1 on: Board is busy with switching functions

flashing: Board removable after preparatory disabling
off: Board is not busy
L2 on: Board reset in progress
flashing: Download in progress

304 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

off: Board in operation

L3 free
L4 free
L5 on: Layer 1 of the digital connecting circuit 1 active
or
analog connecting circuit 1 busy
L6 on: Layer 1 of the digital connecting circuit 2 active
or
analog connecting circuit 2 busy
L7- L19 on: Layer 1 of the digital connecting circuit 3...15 active
or
analog connecting circuit 3...15 busy
L20 on: Layer 1 of the digital connecting circuit 16 active
or
analog connecting circuit 16 busy

8.6.4.2 MDF Connections

MDF, Cable 1 via CA2B from

Colours 16x2 Patch panel Patch panel ADM ADM ADM ADM with
for the for the with with with ABSM/
two wire four-wire STSM UPSM UKSM ABSM1
connection connection
RD/BU WE 1 WE 1 1st slot A1/B1 A1/B1 A1/B1 a1/b1
(T)
WH/YE WE 2 C1/D1 free free free
(R)
WH/GN WE 3 WE 2 A2/B2 A2/B2 A2/B2 a2/b2
(T)
WH/BN WE 4 C2/D2 free free free
(R)
WH/BK WE 5 WE 3 A3/B3 A3/B3 free a3/b3
(T)
WH/BU WE 6 C3/D3 free free free
(R)
WH/YE WE 7 WE 4 A4/B4 A4/B4 free a4/b4
(T)
WH/GN WE 8 C4/D4 free free free
(R)
WH/BN WE 9 WE 5 2nd slot A5/B5 A5/B5 A3/B3 a5/b5
(T)
WH/BK WE 10 C5/D5 free free free
(R)
WH/BU WE 11 WE 6 A6/B6 A6/B6 A4/B4 a6/b6
(T)
RD/YE WE 12 C6/D6 free free free
(R)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 305

8 Boards

WH/GN WE 13 WE 7 A7/B7 A7/B7 free a7/b7

(T)
WH/BN WE 14 C7/D7 free free free
(R)
WH/BK WE 15 WE 8 A8/B8 A8/B8 free a8/b8
(T)
WH/BU WE 16 C8/D8 free free free
(R)

MDF Cable 2 via CA2B from

Colours 16x2 Patch panel Patch panel ADM ADM ADM ADM with
for the for the with with with ABSM/
two wire four-wire STSM UPSM UKSM ABSM1
connection connection
RD/BU WE 1 WE 1 3rd slot A9/B9 A9/B9 A5/B5 a9/b9
(T)
WH/YE WE 2 C9/D9 free free free
(R)
WH/GN WE 3 WE 2 A10/ A10/ A6/B6 a10/b10
B10 (T) B10
WH/BN WE 4 C10/ free free free
D10 (R)
WH/BK WE 5 WE 3 A11/ A11/ free a11/b11
B11 (T) B11
WH/BU WE 6 C11/ free free free
D11 (R)
WH/YE WE 7 WE 4 A12/ A12/ free a12/b12
B12 (T) B12
WH/GN WE 8 C12/ free free free
D12 (R)
WH/BN WE 9 WE 5 4th slot A13/ A13/ A7/B7 a13/b13
B13 (T) B13
WH/BK WE 10 C13/ free free free
D13 (R)
WH/BU WE 11 WE 6 A14/ A14/ A8/B8 a14/b14
B14 (T) B14
RD/YE WE 12 C14/ free free free
D14 (R)
WH/GN WE 13 WE 7 A15/ A15/ free a15/b15
B15 (T) B15
WH/BN WE 14 C15/ free free free
D15 (R)
WH/BK WE 15 WE 8 A16/ A16/ free a16/b16
B16 (T) B16
WH/BU WE 16 C16/ free free free
D16 (R)

306 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

8.6.5 ALSM Active Loop Submodule

Short description
The ALSM module is a submodule for the ATLC. It provides an extension to the signalling variants via a
two-wire speech path (a/b line). The ALSM submodule is an interface featuring:

Options for use National and international

Power demand +5V 30 mA
interface a/b
Supply/loop recognition (subscriber line circuit)
Ringing current signalling
Flash key recognition
Pulse and DTMF dial recognition
Possible combination with other submodules in an ATLC board

8.6.5.1 Setting up the ALSM

The Active Loop Submodule (ALSM) implements signal exchange with the remote connecting circuit by means
of active loop signals (supply and ringing current) on the speech wires.
The ALSM submodule is used for the connection of special facilities (e.g. speech memory). It is also possible
to connect analog CB sets or connecting lines which require this type of signalling.
Connection is implemented via a 2-wire line (a/b).
With the ALSM submodule, the supply current on the a/b line comprises 24 mA (standard). Current changeover
to supply current of 30 mA is achieved by disconnecting one conductor path and inserting one bridge (see
following illustration).

Section of the soldering side on the ALSM submodule

1. Material number: 28.7640.6961 or .6962

2. Insert bridge here
3. Disconnect bridge here

The corresponding adjustments must be made in the configuration data.

• Physical line interface

Set to ”loop signalling active”.
• Signalling plan
Set the signalling plan so that is identical to that of (coordinated with) the remote connecting circuit.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 307

8 Boards

• Speech path design and relative level

Set one of the following combinations according to the requirement of the interface to the remote con-
necting circuit.

Speech path design Relative level (PrE/PrA) Application in countries

2-wire 0/-7 dBr A, D, E, GR (def.)
2-wire 0/-7 dBr B, L
2-wire 0/-7 dBr F (with ALSMF)
2-wire 0/-7 dBr NL
2-wire 0/-7 dBr I
2-wire 0/-6.5 dBr CH
2-wire +3/-5 dBr UK
2-wire Special application 1

If your country of application is not listed, select the required level setting for D. Your application then
corresponds to German transmission technology.
In the case of ALSM submodules with material number: 28.7640.6961 which do not show any wire
changes, only a setting of “2-wire, special application 1” is permissible.
In the case of ALSM submodules with material number: 28.7640.6962 and ASLM submodules with
reference no. 28.7640.6961 which were changed by inserting wire bridges, all settings except “2-wire,
special application 1” are permissible.
• Adjustments to times must not be made.
• Adjustments to the digits may be made if required.
These settings depend on the application case and the selected signalling plan. The required setting
measures are found in the respective signalling plan.
• Settings for the connecting circuit type
The only other permissible setting in addition to connecting circuit type ”QUe” is ”TS”. This setting is
used if the ATLC port is to be operated as a ”normal” subscriber line circuit. More detailed information
can be found in the respective signal plan.

8.6.6 ALSMF Active Loop Submodule France

Short description
The ALSMF board is a submodule for the ATLC and is used in France. It provides an extension to the signalling
variants via a two-wire speech path (a/b line). The ALSMF submodule is an interface featuring:

Options for use National and international

Power demand +5V 30 mA
interface a/b
Supply/loop recognition (subscriber line circuit)
Ringing current signalling
Flash key recognition
Pulse and DTMF dial recognition
Possible combination with other submodules in an ATLC board

308 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

8.6.6.1 Setting up the ALSMF

The Active Loop Submodule France (ALSMF) implements signal exchange with the remote connecting circuit
by means of active loop signals (supply and ringing current) on the speech wires.
In terms of its functions, the ALSMF is identical to the ALSM submodule. However, additional components
mean that it is coordinated especially for French transmission technology.
Connection is implemented via a 2-wire line (a/b).
A switchover via a point of division is not possible with the ALSMF submodule.
The corresponding adjustments must be made in the configuration data.

• Physical line interface

Set to ”loop signalling active”.
• Signal code
Set the signalling plan so that is identical to that of (coordinated with) the remote connecting circuit.

• Speech path design and relative level

Set one of the following combinations according to the requirement of the interface to the remote con-
necting circuit.
If your country of application is not listed, select the required level setting for D. Your application then
corresponds to German transmission technology.

Speech path design Relative level (PrE/PrA) Application in countries

2-wire 0/-7 dBr A, D, E, GR (def.)
2-wire 0/-7 dBr B, L
2-wire 0/-7 dBr F (with ALSMF)
2-wire 0/-7 dBr NL
2-wire 0/-7 dBr I
2-wire 0/-6.5 dBr CH
2-wire +3/-5 dBr UK
2-wire Special application 1

• Adjustments to times must not be made.

• Adjustments to the digits may be made if required.
These settings depend on the application case and the selected signalling plan. The required setting
measures are found in the respective signalling plan.
• Settings for the connecting circuit type
The only other permissible setting in addition to connecting circuit type ”QUe” is ”TS”. This setting is
used if the ATLC port is to be operated as a ”normal” subscriber line circuit. More detailed information
can be found in the respective signal plan.

8.6.7 ALSMH Active Loop Submodule Hong Kong

Short description
The ALSMH module is a submodule of the ATLC and is used for direct inward dialling in Hong Kong.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 309

8 Boards

Once the ALSMH has been installed, it must be set up by the ICU editor in terms of software
for Hong Kong (deviating loadlist (.ICL) / Program (.ICP)).
Connection is implemented via a 2-wire line (a/b).

Setting up the ALSMH

Refer to the descriptions in the following documents:

• Setting up features
• ICU Editor User Manual

Other features:

Options for use National and international

Power demand +5V 30mA

8.6.8 ASC2 Analog Subscriber Circuit 2

Short description
The ASC2 board makes available 32 a/b connections for analog end devices, according to country specific
requirements with the following features:

Country-specific Germany, Austria, Switzerland, Netherlands, Great Britain, Italy, Spain, Belgium,
variants are Venezuela, Hungary, Czech Republic, Slovakian Republic, Mexico, Hong Kong,
configurable using USA, Russia and France
board software for
the following
countries:
Power demand +5V 700 mA
Interfaces 32 × a/b
Constant current 22 mA convertible to 30 mA
supply
Line resistance 2 x 235 Ohm
range: 1.7 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,4 mm
4.0 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,6 mm
7.5 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,8 mm
DTMF/pulse dialling
25/50 Hz ringing current (convertible)
Short and long flash time (end device dependent)
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Board software download
Board identification using board pass
Maintenance function
Polarity reversion for “message waiting” signalling
Connection of external announcement devices

310 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

In conjunction with V24IA board debugging interface on board front

Debugger = program that helps to track down errors

The connection on the MDF is carried out via the CA2B or CARUB boards.

8.6.8.1 Changing the Supply Current

The power supply per connecting circuit can be increased from 22 mA (standard) to 30 mA in this board.
The following steps must be taken:

• Each connecting circuit is fitted with its number on the conductor side or component side of the board.
• The code digit *3 is found in this connecting circuit area.
• Four soldering points are arranged at the position labelled *3. The two soldering points in the middle are
connected by a conductor path.
• Connect the right and left soldering point with the two soldering points in the middle. A supply current
setting of 30 mA is thereby achieved.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 311

8 Boards

ASC2 board

1. Connecting circuit e.g. 31

2. common for four connecting circuits

312 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

8.6.8.2 LEDs and Switch Functions

ASC2 board, front side with RJ45 connector and PIN assignment
Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position

Switch Function

S1 Left: Preparatory disabling (VSP) for all connecting circuits

Middle: Operating status/release
Right: Reset board
Right, then Forced board download
left:

Meanings of LEDs

L1 on: Board is busy with switching functions

flashing: Board removable after preparatory disabling
off: Board is not busy
L2 on: Board reset in progress

CSI55 LX 07/2006 313

8 Boards

flashing: Download in progress

off: Module has gone into operation

8.6.8.3 MDF Connections

MDF Cable Adapter CA2B or CARUB for ASC2

Colours 16x2 Patch Cable 1 Cable 2
panel
for
two-wire
connection
RD/BU WE 1 a1/b1 a17/b17
WH/YE WE 2 a2/b2 a18/b18
WH/GN WE 3 a3/b3 a19/b19
WH/BN WE 4 a4/b4 a20/b20
WH/BK WE 5 a5/b5 a21/b21
WH/BU WE 6 a6/b6 a22/b22
WH/YE WE 7 a7/b7 a23/b23
WH/GN WE 8 a8/b8 a24/b24
WH/BN WE 9 a9/b9 a25/b25
WH/BK WE 10 a10/b10 a26/b26
WH/BU WE 11 a11/b11 a27/b27
RD/YE WE 12 a12/b12 a28/b28
WH/GN WE 13 a13/b13 a29/b29
WH/BN WE 14 a14/b14 a30/b30
WH/BK WE 15 a15/b15 a31/b31
WH/BU WE 16 a16/b16 a32/b32

8.6.9 ASC21 Analog Subscriber Circuit 21

Short description
The ASC21 board provides 32 a/b connections for analog terminals, according to country-specific require-
ments with the following features:

Country-specific Germany, Austria, Switzerland, Netherlands, Great Britain, Italy, Spain, Belgium,
variants are Venezuela, Hungary, Czech Republic, Slovakian Republic, Mexico, Hong Kong,
configurable using USA, Russia and France
board software for
the following
countries:
Power demand +5V 600 mA
Interfaces 32 × a/b
Constant current 22 mA convertible to 30 mA
supply

314 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Line resistance 2 x 235 Ohm

range: 1.7 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,4 mm
4.0 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,6 mm
7.5 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,8 mm
DTMF/pulse dialling
25/50 Hz ringing current (convertible)
Short and long flash time (end device dependent)
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Board software download
Board identification using board pass
Maintenance function
Polarity reversion for “message waiting” signalling
Connection of external announcement devices

The connection on the MDF is carried out via the CA2B or CARUB boards.

8.6.9.1 Changing the Supply Current until F Revision

The supply current on the board can be set between 22mA (standard) and 30mA per connecting circuit.
Until the F Revision of the ASC21 (shown on the front panel: 49.9906.7719 F) the ASC21 is manufactured with
power supply components in a 28-lead SO (SO = Small Outline Package). The housing can be distinguished
by the plug-in connections (14) on each of the two longer sides.
The following steps must be taken:
The number of the AO for which the current changeover can be made is stated on the conductor path side
and on the component side.
Example:
The power supply component for AO 01 is located on the component side. The soldering points for setting the
higher loop current are located on the conductor path side. For this reason the 01 marking is also located on
the conductor path side.
The marking *3 is to be found in each AO area, close to which are four mounting spots for two not equipped
resistors (0 ohm).
These mounting spots must be connected in pairs by wire jumpers. It is important to solder two wire jumpers
per AO.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 315

8 Boards

ASC21 board

1. Power supply component per AO

2. jointly for four AOs

3. Connector to backplane of I55

For better orientation, please turn the board so that the connector (3) is facing you and the numbers of the
AOs are legible.
The following is a section from the component side on which you can see the position of the mounting spots
to be bridged.

316 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

1 on component or soldering side, depending on port

The mounting spots must be vertically connected to each other.
The marking *3 relates to the mounting spots marked with an arrow.
The current increase can be set on the component side for the following AOs:

AO number

CSI55 LX 07/2006 317

8 Boards

Number for xx Number for yy

02 04
05 07
10 12
13 15
18 20
21 23
26 28
29 31

The components are arranged in the same way in all AOs marked with xx or yy.
The following is an section from the conductor side on which you can see the position of the mounting spots
to be bridged.
A different arrangement applies to AO 01 and the remaining AOs. First of all, the component arrangement for
AOs 01 and 03:

318 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

1 on component or soldering side, depending on port

In AO 01 the two bridges to be vertically soldered lie side by side.
The marking *3 relates to the mounting spots marked with an arrow.
The components arrangement is the same for the remaining AOs on which the current increase can be set on
the conductor side:

CSI55 LX 07/2006 319

8 Boards

1 on component or soldering side, depending on port

The marking *3 relates to the mounting spots marked with an arrow.
The current increase can be set on the conductor side for the following AOs:

AO number
Number for xx Number for yy

320 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

01 #1 03
06 08
09 11
14 16
17 19
22 24
25 27
30 32

#1 The component arrangement is different on AO 01.

The components are arranged in the same way in all AOs marked with xx or yy.

Please connect (vertically) only the mounting spots which are marked accordingly!
Bridges which are soldered differently may result in serious malfunctioning.

8.6.9.2 Conversion of supply current from G revision onwards

The supply current on the board can be set between 22mA (standard) and 30mA per connecting circuit.
From the G revision onwards (designation on front panel: 49.9906.7719 G) the ASC21 will be manufactured
with power supply components in a 32-pole PLCC housing (PLCC = plastic leaded chip carrier) by modifying
the shape of the housing. The housing can be distinguished by the plug-in connections distributed over all
four sides.
The following steps must be taken:

• The number of the AO for which the current changeover can be carried out is stated on the conductor
path and on the component side.
Example:
The power supply component for AO 01 is located on the component side. The soldering points for
setting the higher loop current are located on the conductor path side. For this reason the 01 marking is
also located on the conductor path side.
• The marking *3 is to be found in each AO area, close to which are four mounting spots for two not
equipped resistors (0 ohm).
• These mounting spots must be connected in pairs by wire jumpers. It is important to solder two wire
jumpers per AO.

For better orientation, please turn the board so that the connector (3) to the backplane is facing you and the
numbers of the AOs are legible.
Since the component arrangement for the board from G revision onwards differs slightly from its predecessor,
a section from the component side is shown, on which you will see the location of the mounting spots to be
bridged.

The mounting spots must be vertically connected to each other.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 321

8 Boards

The marking *3 relates to the mounting spots in the yellow (grey) highlighted area.
The current increase can be set on the component side for the following AOs:

AO number
Number for xx Number for yy
02 04
05 07
10 12
13 15
18 20
21 23
26 28
29 31

The components are arranged in the same way in all AOs marked with xx or yy.
The mounting spots to be connected are now always located side by side. A short-circuit between the
two bridges to be inserted does not create a problem, provided the four points are connected to each
other. A contact to adjoining components must be avoided.
Please connect (vertically) only the mounting spots which are marked accordingly!
Bridges soldered at other points may result in serious malfunctioning.
The following is an section from the conductor side from the board from G revision onwards, on which you can
see the position of the mounting spots to be bridged.
Here the pattern for all affected ports is the same. Ports 01 and 03 are not shown separately.

The marking *3 relates to the mounting spots in the yellow (grey) highlighted area.
The current increase can be set on the conductor side for the following AOs:

AO number
Number for xx Number for yy
01 03
06 08
09 11
14 16
17 19
22 24
25 27
30 32

The components are arranged in the same way in all AOs marked with xx or yy.
The mounting spots to be connected are now always located side by side. A short-circuit between the
two bridges to be inserted does not create a problem, provided the four points are connected to each
other. A contact to adjoining components must be avoided.
Please connect (vertically) only the mounting spots which are marked accordingly!

322 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Bridges soldered at other points may result in serious malfunctioning.

8.6.9.3 LEDs and Switch Functions

ASC21 board, front side

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position

Switch Function

S1 Left: Preparatory disabling (VSP) for all connecting circuits

Middle: Operating status/release
Right: Reset board
Right, then Forced board download
left:

Meanings of LEDs

L1 on: Board is busy with switching functions

flashing: Board removable after preparatory disabling
off: Board is not busy
L2 on: Board reset in progress
flashing: Download in progress
off: Module has gone into operation

CSI55 LX 07/2006 323

8 Boards

8.6.9.4 MDF Connections

MDF Cable Adapter CA2B or CARUB for

ASC21
Colours 16x2 Patch Cable 1 Cable 2
panel
for
two-wire
connection
RD/BU WE 1 a1/b1 a17/b17
WH/YE WE 2 a2/b2 a18/b18
WH/GN WE 3 a3/b3 a19/b19
WH/BN WE 4 a4/b4 a20/b20
WH/BK WE 5 a5/b5 a21/b21
WH/BU WE 6 a6/b6 a22/b22
WH/YE WE 7 a7/b7 a23/b23
WH/GN WE 8 a8/b8 a24/b24
WH/BN WE 9 a9/b9 a25/b25
WH/BK WE 10 a10/b10 a26/b26
WH/BU WE 11 a11/b11 a27/b27
RD/YE WE 12 a12/b12 a28/b28
WH/GN WE 13 a13/b13 a29/b29
WH/BN WE 14 a14/b14 a30/b30
WH/BK WE 15 a15/b15 a31/b31
WH/BU WE 16 a16/b16 a32/b32

8.6.10 ASCxx Analogue Subscriber Circuit

Short description
The ASC board is available in the following variants:
ASCEU: Europe with the following characteristics:

Country-specific Germany, Spain, Netherlands, Switzerland, Italy, Belgium, Austria, Greece, Mexico
variants are and Venezuela
configurable using
board software for
the following
countries:
Power demand +5V 620 mA
Interfaces 16 a/b (connectors for analog terminals in accordance with country-specific
guidelines)
Constant current 24 mA, switchable to 30 mA (mounting of a 0 ohm resistance)
supply
Line resistance 2 x 475 Ohm

324 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Range 4 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0.4 mm

9 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0.6 mm
15 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0.8 mm
Line lengths for Message waiting → 325
DTMF/pulse dialling, flash and earth button detection, Telecom-specific (dependent on terminals)
Short and long flash time, Telecom-specific (dependent on terminals)
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Board software download
Board identification using board pass
Maintenance function
Polarity reversion for “message waiting” signalling
Connection of external announcement devices

ASCF: France with the following characteristics:

Power demand +5V 620 mA

Interfaces 16 a/b (connectors for analog terminals in accordance with French guidelines and
voice terminals)
Resistance feed 2 x 400 Ohm
(const. voltage)
DTMF/pulse dialling, polarity reversal and button detection
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Board software download
Board identification using board pass
Maintenance function
Symmetric call supply
Polarity reversion for “message waiting” signalling
Connection of external announcement devices

ASCGB: Great Britain

Power demand +5V 620 mA

Interfaces 16 a/b (connectors for analog terminals in accordance with British guidelines)
Constant current 30 mA
supply
Loop range 900 ohms
DTMF/pulse dialling, flash and earth button detection
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Board software download
Board identification using board pass
Maintenance function
Polarity reversion for “message waiting” signalling

CSI55 LX 07/2006 325

8 Boards

8.6.10.1 Line lengths for Message waiting

The range for Message waiting signaling for analogue subscribers of the ASCEU board with the ICU pro-
gramme ASCEU018.ICP in connection with the various apparatus types and seizure (pick up on call) and
outgoing seizure (pick up) with the installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,4 mm is:

Outgoing seizure (pick up) Incoming seizure (pick up in call)

Apparatus types Line length [m] Line length [W ] Line length [m] Line length [W ]
Tel. T40 1400 379 1400 379
Tel. TE51 1000 272 1000 272
Tel. TE91 1000 272 1000 272
Tel. TC91 1100 298 1100 298
Tel. TB510LED 1100 298 600 163
DE
Tel. TB519D 900 245 900 245
Tel. TK40-20-2 300 83 300 83

Recommendation
The line length with which the performance feature Message waiting is to be operated with conventional
signaling (permanently illuminated LED signal), should not exceed

600 m (Installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0.4 mm)

1.3 km (Installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0.6 mm)
2.4 km (Installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,8 mm)

Malfunctions may occur when establishing a connection if the lines are any longer.
The tel. TK40-20-2 should only be operated with a 300 m (83W ) line length.
Deviations from the recommended line length are possible.
If the lines are any longer, a different Message waiting signal (signal LED blinks) should be selected. Signalling
is implemented in the ICU programme ASCEU019.ICP for the ASCEU board.

326 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

8.6.10.2 LEDs and Switch Functions

ASCxx board, front side

1. LED red
2. LED green

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position

Switch Function

S1 Left: Preparatory disabling (of all connecting circuits)

Middle: Neutral/release/ operating status
Right: Reset board
Right, then left: Forced board download

Meanings of LEDs

L1 on: Board is busy with switching functions

flashing: Module can be removed after preparatory disabling (VSP) or
blocked in terms of software
off: Board is not busy
L2 on: Board reset in progress
flashing: Download in progress

CSI55 LX 07/2006 327

8 Boards

off: Board in operation

8.6.10.3 Bridge positions

The power supply can be increased from 24 mA (standard) to 30 mA per line in this board: The increase in
the supply current is implemented by inserted 0 Ohm resistors or bridges at the following coordinate points:

AO1 197 077

AO2 199 128
AO3 173 069
AO4 179 116
AO5 155 077
AO6 157 128
AO7 131 069
AO8 137 116
AO9 113 077
AO10 115 128
AO11 089 069
AO12 095 116
AO13 071 077
AO14 073 128
AO15 047 069
AO16 053 116

328 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

8.6.10.4 MDF Connections

MDF Cable Adapter

CA1B/CARUB
Colours 16x2 Patch panel for
from ASCxx
two-wire
connection
RD/BU WE 1 a1/b1
WH/YE WE 2 a2/b2
WH/GN WE 3 a3/b3
WH/BN WE 4 a4/b4
WH/BK WE 5 a5/b5
WH/BU WE 6 a6/b6
WH/YE WE 7 a7/b7

CSI55 LX 07/2006 329

8 Boards

WH/GN WE 8 a8/b8
WH/BN WE 9 a9/b9
WH/BK WE 10 a10/b10
WH/BU WE 11 a11/b11
RD/YE WE 12 a12/b12
WH/GN WE 13 a13/b13
WH/BN WE 14 a14/b14
WH/BK WE 15 a15/b15
WH/BU WE 16 a16/b16

8.6.11 ATA Analog Trunk Interface A

Short description
The ATA board provides the interface for up to 8 analog exchange accesses (PSTN) in accordance with
country-specific guidelines. It is a universal Euro-based trunk module and can be adapted to individual coun-
tries by means of the corresponding submodule and software (level, impedances etc.).

Submodule Countries of application

SIGA Signalling Unit A Germany, Russia
SIGB Signalling Unit B Switzerland
SIGC Signalling Unit C Luxemburg
SIGD Signalling Unit D: Austria
SIGE Signalling Unit E Austria
SIGF Signalling Unit F Belgium
SIGG Signalling Unit G Hungary

A mixed combination of ATA boards and submodules is not possible.

The board can accommodate a maximum of 4 two-part submodules.

330 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

ATA board, slots

Other features
Power demand +5V 530 mA with eight occupied connecting circuits
Interfaces 8 × a/b
DTMF/pulse dialling
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Dial tone identification, charge count
Board software download
Board identification using board pass
Maintenance function

In the Integral55, an emergency operation switchover can be set up by inserting an EES1B (EES8B) board
behind the ATA board; this is not possible in the Integral55 Compact.

8.6.11.1 LEDs and Switch Functions

ATA board, front side

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position
S2-S9 Left position

Switch Function

CSI55 LX 07/2006 331

8 Boards

S1 Left: Preparatory disabling (of all connecting circuits)

Middle: Operating status/release
Right: Reset board
Right, then left: Forced board download
S2 Right: AO1 preparatory disabling
Left: Approve, operation status
S3-S8 Right: AOx preparatory disabling;
Left: Approve, operation status
S9 Right: AO8 preparatory disabling
Left: Approve, operation status

Meanings of LEDs

L1 on: Board is busy with switching functions

flashing: Board removable after preparatory disabling
off: Board is not busy
L6 on: Board reset in progress
flashing: Download in progress or blocked by software
off: Board in operation
L2 on: AO1 busy
off: AO1 not busy
L3, L4, L5, on: AOx busy
L7, L8, L9 off: AOx not busy
L10 on: AO8 busy
off: AO8 not busy

8.6.11.2 MDF Connections

MDF Cable Adapter

Colours 16x2 Patch panel for CA1B for ATA
two-wire
connection
RD/BU WE 1 a1/b1
WH/YE WE 2 a2/b2
WH/GN WE 3 a3/b3
WH/BN WE 4 a4/b4
WH/BK WE 5 a5/b5
WH/BU WE 6 a6/b6
WH/YE WE 7 a7/b7
WH/GN WE 8 a8/b8
WH/BN WE 9 free
WH/BK WE 10 free
WH/BU WE 11 free

332 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

RD/YE WE 12 free
WH/GN WE 13 free
WH/BN WE 14 free
WH/BK WE 15 free
WH/BU WE 16 free

8.6.12 ATA2 Analog Trunk Interface A2

Short description
The ATA2 board provides the interface for up to 8 analog exchange accesses (PSTN). It is a universal basic
exchange line board for Europe. By

Submodule Countries of application

SIGH Signalling Unit H Czech/Slovak Republic

and software (level, impedance, etc.) it is adapted to the specific requirements of each country.
The difference between this module and the ATA board is the lower DC loop resistance.
A mixed combination of ATA2 modules and submodules is not possible.
The board can accommodate a maximum of 4 two-part submodules.

ATA2 board, slots

Other features
Power demand +5V 530 mA with eight occupied connecting circuits
Interfaces 8 × a/b
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Dial tone identification, charge count
Board software download
Board identification using board pass

CSI55 LX 07/2006 333

8 Boards

Maintenance function

An emergency operation switchover can be set up by inserting an EES1B (EES8B) board behind the ATA2
board.

8.6.12.1 LEDs and Switch Functions

ATA2 board, slots

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position
S2-S9 Left position

Switch Function

S1 Left:
Middle: Operating status/release
Right: Reset board
Right, then left: Forced board download
S2 Right: AO1 preparatory disabling
Left: Approve, operation status
S3-S8 Right: AOx preparatory disabling;
Left: Approve, operation status
S9 Right: AO8 preparatory disabling

334 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Left: Approve, operation status

Meanings of LEDs

L1 on: Board is busy with switching functions

flashing: Board removable after preparatory disabling
off: Board is not busy
L6 on: Board reset in progress
flashing: Download in progress or blocked by software
off: Board in operation
L2 on: AO1 busy
off: AO1 not busy
L3, L4, L5, on: AOx busy
L7, L8, L9
off: AOx not busy
L10 on: AO8 busy
off: AO8 not busy

8.6.12.2 MDF Connections

MDF Cable Adapter

Colours 16x2 Patch panel for CA1B from ATA2
two-wire
connection
RD/BU WE 1 a1/b1
WH/YE WE 2 a2/b2
WH/GN WE 3 a3/b3
WH/BN WE 4 a4/b4
WH/BK WE 5 a5/b5
WH/BU WE 6 a6/b6
WH/YE WE 7 a7/b7
WH/GN WE 8 a8/b8
WH/BN WE 9 free
WH/BK WE 10 free
WH/BU WE 11 free
RD/YE WE 12 free
WH/GN WE 13 free
WH/BN WE 14 free
WH/BK WE 15 free
WH/BU WE 16 free

CSI55 LX 07/2006 335

8 Boards

8.6.13 ATB Analog Trunk Interface B

Short description
The ATB board provides the interface for up to 8 analog network accesses (PSTN) in accordance with British
Telecom guidelines. It is a universal basic exchange line board for Europe. By

Submodule Countries of application

SUPA Loop Calling/Earth Calling GB,HK
SUPB Loop Calling/Earth Calling USA

and software (level, impedance, etc.) it is adapted to the specific requirements of each country.

ATB board, slots

Other features
Power demand +5V 595 mA with eight occupied connecting circuits
Interfaces 8 × a/b
Levels, impendances, etc. adjustable via confidata
Signalling method selectable via software download Loop calling guarded clearing
Earth calling signalling system
Simple call routing mode
DTMF/pulse dialling
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Dial tone recognition, charge metering (350-440 Hz, 1111 Hz/50 Hz)
Board software download
Board identification using board pass
Maintenance function
Access to private MCL network via British Telecom lines.

An emergency operation switchover can be set up by inserting an EES1B (EES8B) module behind the ATB

336 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

board.

8.6.13.1 LEDs and Switch Functions

ATB board, front side

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position
S2-S9 Left position

Switch Function

S1 Left: Preparatory disabling (of all connecting circuits)

Middle: Neutral/release
Right: Reset board
Right, then left: Forced board download
S2 Right: AO1 preparatory disabling
Left: AO1 release
S3-S8 Right: AOx preparatory disabling
Left: AOx release
S9 Right: AO8 preparatory disabling
Left: AO8 release

Meanings of LEDs

CSI55 LX 07/2006 337

8 Boards

L1 on: Board is busy with switching functions

flashing: Board removable after preparatory disabling
off: Board is not busy
L6 on: Board reset in progress
flashing: Download in progress
off: Board in operation
L2 on: AO1 busy
off: AO1 not busy
L3, L4, L5, on: AOx busy
L7, L8, L9
off: AOx not busy
L10 on: AO8 busy
off: AO8 not busy

8.6.13.2 MDF Connections

MDF Cable Adapter

Colours 16x2 Patch panel for CA1B from ATB
two-wire connection
RD/BU WE 1 a1/b1
WH/YE WE 2 a2/b2
WH/GN WE 3 a3/b3
WH/BN WE 4 a4/b4
WH/BK WE 5 a5/b5
WH/BU WE 6 a6/b6
WH/YE WE 7 a7/b7
WH/GN WE 8 a8/b8
WH/BN WE 9 free
WH/BK WE 10 free
WH/BU WE 11 free
RD/YE WE 12 free
WH/GN WE 13 free
WH/BN WE 14 free
WH/BK WE 15 free
WH/BU WE 16 free

8.6.14 ATC Analog Trunk Interface C

Short description
The ATC board provides the interfaces for up to 8 analog network accesses (PSTN) in accordance with
country-specific guidelines. It is a universal basic exchange line board for Europe and can be adapted by

338 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Submodule Countries of application

SSBA Signalling Sub Board Type A France
SSBB Signalling Sub Board Type B Spain
SSBC Signalling Sub Board Type C Italy
SSBD Signalling Sub Board Type D Netherlands

and software (level, impedance, etc.) to meet the specific requirements of each country.
The board can accommodate a maximum of 4 two-part submodules.

ATC board, slots

A mixed combination of ATC modules and submodules is not possible.

Other features
Power demand +5V 530 mA with eight occupied connecting circuits
Interfaces 8 × a/b
DTMF/pulse dialling
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Dial tone identification, charge count
Board software download
Board identification using board pass
Maintenance function
Direct current loop control

An emergency operation switchover can be set up by inserting an EES1B (EES8B) module behind the ATC
board.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 339

8 Boards

8.6.14.1 LED and Switch Functions

ATC board, front side

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position
S2-S9 Left position

Switch Function

S1 Left: Preparatory disabling (of all connecting circuits)

Middle: Neutral/release
Right: Reset board
Right, then left: Forced board download
S2 Right: AO1 preparatory disabling
Left: AO1 release
S3-S8 Right: AOx preparatory disabling
Left: AOx release
S9 Right: AO8 preparatory disabling
Left: AO8 release

Meanings of LEDs

L1 on: Board is busy with switching functions

flashing: Board removable after preparatory disabling
off: Board is not busy

340 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

L6 on: Board reset in progress

flashing: Download in progress
off: Board in operation
L2 on: AO1 busy
off: AO1 not busy
L3, L4, L5, on: AOx busy
L7, L8, L9
off: AOx not busy
L10 on: AO8 busy
off: AO8 not busy

8.6.14.2 MDF Connections

MDF Cable Adapter

Colours 16x2 Patch panel for CA1B from ATC
two-wire
connection
RD/BU WE 1 a1/b1
WH/YE WE 2 a2/b2
WH/GN WE 3 a3/b3
WH/BN WE 4 a4/b4
WH/BK WE 5 a5/b5
WH/BU WE 6 a6/b6
WH/YE WE 7 a7/b7
WH/GN WE 8 a8/b8
WH/BN WE 9 free
WH/BK WE 10 free
WH/BU WE 11 free
RD/YE WE 12 free
WH/GN WE 13 free
WH/BN WE 14 free
WH/BK WE 15 free
WH/BU WE 16 free

8.6.15 ATLC Analog TIE Line Circuit

Short description
The Analog TIE Line Circuit board (ATLC) is used for

• Networking of the CSI55 with identical or different telecommunication systems via analogue connecting
lines,
• connection of special facilities (e.g. speech memory, door handsfree device).

CSI55 LX 07/2006 341

8 Boards

The module can be used inland or abroad, e.g. in special police networks, power supply companies, etc.
The ATLC board contains 8 connecting circuits. These connecting circuits do not have submodules in their
basic configuration. The exchange of signals with the remote connecting circuit can take place via separate
signal wires depending on the signalling plan (San (in)/Sab (out) forr connection setup and realease and
additionally S3an (in)/S3ab (out) for monitoring functions). The speech path can be executed as a two or
four-wire path.
Speech wire designation:

• a/b two-wire speech path or outgoing speech path of the four-wire speech path,

• Ka/Kb incoming speech path of the four-wire speech path

The following signalling procedures can be used with these designs:

• Static signals on the Sin (E) and Sout (M) signal wires
• Time-assessed signals on the Sin (E) and Sout (M) signal wires
• Time-assessed signals on the signal wires San (in) (E) and Sab (out)(M) and monitoring functions via
the signal wires S3an and S3ab.

Dialling information signalling, which controls the connection setup, may appear as:

• Pulses on signal wires San (E) and Sab(M)

• DTMF signals via the speech wires
• Pulse signalling procedure using speech wires (simultaneous transmission). Alternating current trans-
mission

The individual connecting circuits can also be equipped with submodules according to application. One termi-
nating set is occupied in each submodule.
The following submodules are available:

• Alternating Current Signalling Submodule (ACSM), alternating current transmission

• Simplex Signalling Submodule (SSSM), simultaneous transmission
• Active Loop Submodule (ALSM/ALSMF/ALSMH), subscriber
• Passive Loop Submodule (PLSM), loop transmission

Signal exchange for these applications takes place via the speech path. An exception to this rule is the PLSM
submodule in certain applications.
The function of the ATLC board is assigned by means of the configuration data at the corresponding slot in
the CSI55. The configuration data can be entered or changed using the ICU editor.
The following adaptations and adjustments must be made to the ATLC boards’s configuration data for each
connecting circuit:

• Physical interface condition must be adapted

• Signal exchange and speech path version must be adjusted

342 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

• Signalling function
The signalling function for the ATLC and it’s submodules is documented in signalling plans. These
indicate the physical version (direct current, alternating current, etc.) and also the nature and duration of
individual signals (seizure, selection, etc.) corresponding to the exchange connection status.

• Changing the connecting circuit type.

This function type is used to log on the port of the ATLC to the CSI55’s control. This connecting circuit
type must coincide with the customer data set up in the CSI55! The basic setting of the connecting circuit
type for all applications is ”QUE”. Exceptions to this are stated in the respective signalling plan.

The appropriate interface for the remote connecting circuit with regard to:

• physical realization and

• signal exchange

can be identified with the aid of the ATLC signalling plans:

Numbering scheme
Alternating current signalling, ACSM
Simplex signalling a/b earth, SSSM
No submodule, 2 signal lines
No submodule, 4 signal lines
Passive loop signal, PLSM
Active loop signal, ALSM
Special applications
Examples for the connection of door handsfree devices
A signalling plan is set up for each signalling process.

Other features
Country of National and international
application
Power demand +5V 480 mA
Interfaces 8 times 2/4-wire speech path with 2/4 signal wires each
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Board software download
Download of configuration data
Board identification using board pass
Maintenance function

8.6.15.1 ATLC board Without Submodule

Each connecting circuit of the ATLC board that is being operated without a submodule can exchange signals
with the remote connecting circuit using:

• static signals on the signal wires Sin (E) and Sout (M)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 343

8 Boards

• time-assessed signals on the signal wires Sin (E) and Sout (M)
• time-assessed signals on the signal wires San (E) und Sab (M) and monitoring functions via the signal
wires S3an und S3ab

Signalling of the dialling information in order to control the connection setup can be implemented using:

• Pulses on signal wires San (E) and Sab(M)

or

• DTMF signals via the speech wires

The corresponding adjustments must be made in the configuration data.

Signalling on the outgoing signal wires Sab (out)(M) and S3ab (out)is performed applying a 0V potential during
the active signal. When resting or pausing from signalling, the signal wires are unconnected.
The signal wire Sab (out) (M) can be changed to signalling with a negative potential (-48V) for ATLC boards
as of material number: 28.5630.4003. These different signalling methods are internationally designated as
type 1 and type 4.

Signalling on signal wires Sout and Sin

1. ATLC (first delivery)

2. User
3. ATLC (altered)

The outgoing signal wire S3ab is not switchable.

In order to change the signal potential of the Sout signal wire, a breakpoint must be opened for each port and
a wire bridge must be soldered in. The following illustration shows the location of the breakpoints and the
bridging points.

The ATLC board is a multilayer circuit board. The connector must be removed at a flat angle,
so that the conductor tracks located below are not damaged.

344 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Soldering side of the ATLC board. Example of switching the signal potential on port 1 (port 0)

1. Disconnect
2. Connect

With an active Sout (M) line, the minimum current is monitored in static signalling. This recognizes the ”pres-
ence” of the connected remote side. In order to ensure the error-free operation of the board, the following
conditions for the signal wires must be observed.
Input conditions:

Principle of the San signal wire

1. Remote side and connecting cable

2. Indicator
3. Control

With HW version .4001 or

.4003
IIN min: 3mA
IIN max: 15 mA (RL = 0 Ohm)
RL max: 12 kOhm (resistive load)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 345

8 Boards

Principle of the S3an (in) signal wire

1. Remote side and connecting cable

2. Indicator
3. Control

With HW version .4001 or

.4003
IIN min: 3mA
IIN max: 8.6 mA (RL = 0 Ohm)
RL max: 10 kOhm (resistive load)

Output power:

Principle of the Sab (out) signal wire (condition when delivered)

1. Control
2. Indicator

3. Remote side and connecting cable

4. Counter-potential type: -48V

With HW version 0.4001 With HW version .4003

IOUT P max: 400 mA 400 mA For max. 10 ms
IOUT C max: 100 mA 100 mA Continuous load
RON typ: 700 Ohm 135 Ohm IOUT=10 mA
IOUT min: 2.5 mA 1mA
at UGP = -48V (RLD = 16,4 kOhm) (RLD = 46.5 kOhm)

346 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Principle of the Sab (out) signal wire (switched to -48 V)

1. Control
2. Indicator
3. Remote side and connecting cable

4. Counter-potential

With HW version 0.4001 With HW version .4003

IOUT P max: Not switchable 400 mA For max. 10 ms
IOUT C max: —–//—– 65 mA RLD = 0 Ohm
RON typ: —–//—– 800 Ohm IOUT=10 mA
IOUT min: —–//—– 1mA at RLD = 47 kOhm

Principle of the S3ab (out) signal wire

1. Remote side and connecting cable

2. Counter-potential type: -48V

With HW version .4001 or

.4003
IOUT P max: 400 mA For max. 10 ms
IOUT C max: 100 mA Continuous load
RON typ: 14 Ohm IOUT=10 mA

Adjusting the Configuration Data

• Physical line interface

Make a selected setting according to the requirement of the interface to the remote connecting circuit:

CSI55 LX 07/2006 347

8 Boards

”No submodule, 2 signal lines” (default setting)

”No submodule, 4 signal lines”

• Signalling plan
Set the signalling plan so that is identical to that of (coordinated with) the remote connecting circuit.
• Speech path design and relative level
• Set one of the following combinations according to the requirement of the interface to the remote con-
necting circuit. If your country of application is not listed, select the required level setting for D. Your
application then corresponds to German transmission technology.

Speech path design Relative level (PrE/PrA) Application in countries

2-wire 0/-7 dBr A, D, E, GR
2-wire 0/-7 dBr B, L
2-wire 0/-7 dBr F
2-wire 0/-7 dBr NL
2-wire 0/-7 dBr I
2-wire -3/-4 dBr D, GR
2-wire -3/-4 dBr F
2-wire -4/-3 dBr B, L
2-wire -4/-3 dBr NL
2-wire -5/-2 dBr D
2-wire -6/-1 dBr A
2-wire -6/-1 dBr F
4-wire 0/0 dBr
4-wire -2.5/-4.5 dBr (default setting)
4-wire -3.5/-3.5 dBr
4-wire +4/-14 dBr
4-wire +9/-17 dBr

• Modifications of the signal times may only be made in exceptional circumstances on site.

• Some signalling plans require adjustments to be made to the “digits”. The permissible settings can be
found in the respective signalling plan.
• The only other permissible setting in addition to connecting circuit type “QUe” is “DUe”. This connecting
circuit type is to be set if special facilities for line adaptation are to be connected to the ATLC board.

348 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

8.6.15.2 Inserting the Submodules

ATLC board, component side

1. Connecting circuit 1
2. Connecting circuit 2
3. Connecting circuit 3
4. Connecting circuit 4
5. Connecting circuit 5
6. Connecting circuit 6
7. Connecting circuit 7

8. Connecting circuit 8

Remove the ATLC board from the I55 slot.

The board may be removed and inserted during system operation. The switch functions and
LED displays on the front panel must be taken into consideration however.

Remove the strapping plug of the corresponding connecting circuit (1-8) from the three pin strips.
Insert the submodule into the prepared location.
Insert the ATLC board into the I55 slot.
Once a submodule has been installed, the configuration data must be set up or changed in the I55 (line
interface, signalling plan and speech path version/level). This is necessary for the ATLC board to work properly
with the submodule.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 349

8 Boards

8.6.15.3 Removing the Submodules

When removing a submodule, reinsert the bridge plug. Make sure it is in the correct position.

Installation which does not correspond with the diagram can lead to malfunctions in the
whole board or Communication Server Integral 55.

8.6.15.4 Connection to the MDF

The connectors of the ATLC board are picked up by two 16-pair cables on the CA2B adapter modules, and
fed to the MD.
Insert the CA2B adapter module in the respective alignment section.
Insert the Champ plug of the connecting cable into the plug socket of the adapter module.
Attach the connecting cable to the designated fastening grooves.

CA2B adapter module with ATLC board

1. 50-pin Champ plug

2. Cable 1, 16-pair to MDF
3. 50-pin Champ plug
4. Cable 2, 16-pair to MDF

350 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

8.6.15.5 LEDs and Switch Functions

Switch Function

S1 Reset switch
Middle: Operating status
Left: Preparatory disabling of board (VSP of all connecting circuits)
Right: Reset board
Right, then left: Forced board download
S2-S9 AO1-AO8
Middle: Operating status
Left: Test AO1-AO8 (e.g. simulate an S3in signal)
Right: AO1-AO8 preparatory disabling (VSP)
S10 * Test
Middle: Operating status
Left: Extend DTMF signalling to approx. 20 sec. (for testing
purposes only)
Right: Not used at present
* from .4003!

Meanings of LEDs

L1 on: Board is busy in terms of exchange functions

flashing: Board removable (all connecting circuits blocked or defective)
off: Board not busy
L2 on: Board reset in progress. Programming break in download

CSI55 LX 07/2006 351

8 Boards

flashing: Download in progress

off: Board in operation
L3 AO1 status display
L4 AO2 status display
L5 AO3 status display
L6 AO4 status display
L7 AO5 status display
L8 AO6 status display
L9 AO7 status display
L10 AO8 status display

Connecting Circuit (AO) status display

L.. on: AO.. is busy in terms of exchange functions

flashing quickly: AO.. is defective
flashing slowly: AO.. is blocked (in terms of software or by preparatory
disabling)
Flickering to the rhythm AO.. dials by pulse dialling to the remote connecting circuit, or
of the dial pulse: AO.. receives pulse dialling dial pulses from the remote
connecting circuit.
off: AO.. not busy
L11* on: Data exchange with I55 control
off: No data exchange
L12* on: Error while throughputting data with I55 control
off: Faultless data exchange with I55 control
* from .4003!

8.6.15.6 MDF Connections

Main distributor
If necessary, connect the sheath wires of the connecting cable (open end and WP plug) with the ground
clamps.
Connect the connectors of the connecting cable from the I55 with the line network (wiring blocks).
Mark the cable at both ends using the supplied labels.
Connections from the ATLC

Variants Port Interfaces/procedures Connections

ATLC without submodules 8 (1 per line) 2-wire speech path, a/b
E+M signalling Sin/Sout
ATLC without submodules 8 (1 per line) 4-wire speech path, a/b
E+M signalling Ka/Kb
Sin/Sout

352 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

ATLC without submodules 8 (1 per line) 4-wire speech path, a/b

E+M and S3an/S3ab- Ka/Kb
signalling Sin/Sout
S3in/S3out

ATLC with SSSM submodules 8 (1 per SSSM) a/b earth a/b

ATLC with ACSM submodules 8 (1 per ACSM) 50 Hz alternating current a/b

ATLC with ALSM/ALSMF 8 (1 per Special facility (e.g. speech a/b

submodules ALSM/ALSMF) memory)
or ALSMH (1 per ALSMH) Analog DID Hong Kong a/b

ATLC with PLSM submodules 8 (1 per PLSM) Special facility (e.g. door a/b
handsfree device) c/d
e/f

MDF connection via CA2x or CARUx from the ATLC board without submodules

MDF Cable Adapter CA2B or CARUB

Colours 16x2 Patch panel for Cable 1 Cable 2
two-wire
connection
RD/BU WE 1 1a/1b 1Sin/1Sout
WH/YE WE 2 1Ka/1Kb 1S3in/1S3out
WH/GN WE 3 2a/2b 2Sin/2Sout
WH/BN WE 4 2Ka/2Kb 2S3in/2S3out
WH/BK WE 5 3a/3b 3Sin/3Sout
WH/BU WE 6 3Ka/3Kb 3S3in/3S3out
WH/YE WE 7 4a/4b 4Sin/4Sout
WH/GN WE 8 4Ka/4Kb 4S3in/4S3out
WH/BN WE 9 5a/5b 5Sin/5Sout
WH/BK WE 10 5Ka/5Kb 5S3in/5S3out
WH/BU WE 11 6a/6b 6Sin/6Sout
RD/YE WE 12 6Ka/6Kb 6S3in/6S3out
WH/GN WE 13 7a/7b 7Sin/7Sout
WH/BN WE 14 7Ka/7Kb 7S3in/7S3out
WH/BK WE 15 8a/8b 8Sin/8Sout
WH/BU WE 16 8Ka/8Kb 8S3in/8S3out

MDF connection via CA2x or CARUx from the ATLC board with ACSM or ALSM/ALSMF/ALSMH or
SSSM submodules

MDF Cable Adapter CA2B or CARUB

CSI55 LX 07/2006 353

8 Boards

Colours 16x2 Patch panel for Cable 1 Cable 2

two-wire
connection
RD/BU WE 1 1a/1b free/free
WH/YE WE 2 free/free free/free
WH/GN WE 3 2a/2b free/free
WH/BN WE 4 free/free free/free
WH/BK WE 5 3a/3b free/free
WH/BU WE 6 free/free free/free
WH/YE WE 7 4a/4b free/free
WH/GN WE 8 free/free free/free
WH/BN WE 9 5a/5b free/free
WH/BK WE 10 free/free free/free
WH/BU WE 11 6a/6b free/free
RD/YE WE 12 free/free free/free
WH/GN WE 13 7a/7b free/free
WH/BN WE 14 free/free free/free
WH/BK WE 15 8a/8b free/free
WH/BU WE 16 free/free free/free

MDF connection via CA2x or CARUx from the ATLC board with PLSM submodules

MDF Cable Adapter CA2B or CARUB

Colours 16x2 Patch panel for Cable 1 Cable 2
two-wire
connection
RD/BU WE 1 1a/1b 1c/1d
WH/YE WE 2 free/free 1f/1e
WH/GN WE 3 2a/2b 2c/2d
WH/BN WE 4 free/free 2f/2e
WH/BK WE 5 3a/3b 3c/3d
WH/BU WE 6 free/free 3f/3e
WH/YE WE 7 4a/4b 4c/4d
WH/GN WE 8 free/free 4f/4e
WH/BN WE 9 5a/5b 5c/5d
WH/BK WE 10 free/free 5f/5e
WH/BU WE 11 6a/6b 6c/6d
RD/YE WE 12 free/free 6f/6e
WH/GN WE 13 7a/7b 7c/7d
WH/BN WE 14 free/free 7f/7e
WH/BK WE 15 8a/8b 8c/8d
WH/BU WE 16 free/free 8f/8e

354 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

8.6.16 DDID Direct Dialling Inward Circuit

Short description
The DDID board is the interface for 8 analogue network accesses for direct dial in accordance with country-
specific guidelines.

Other features
Power demand +5V 450 mA
Interfaces 8 × a/b
16 kHz meter pulse count
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Board software download
Board identification using board pass
Maintenance function

8.6.16.1 LEDs and Switch Functions

DDID board, front side

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position
S2-S9 Middle position

Switch Function

CSI55 LX 07/2006 355

8 Boards

S1 Left: Preparatory disabling (VSP)

Middle: Neutral/release
Right: Reset board
Right, then left: Forced board download
S2 Left: DID 1 preparatory disabling
Middle: DID 1 release
S3-S8 Left: DID x preparatory disabling
Middle: DID x release
S9 Left: DID 8 preparatory disabling
Middle: DID 8 release

Meanings of LEDs

L1 on: Board is busy with switching functions

flashing: Board removable after preparatory disabling
off: Board is not busy
L6 on: Board reset in progress
flashing: Download in progress
off: Board in operation
L2 on: DID 1 is busy
L3, L4, L5, on: DID x is busy
L7, L8, L9
L10 on: DID 8 is busy

8.6.16.2 MDF Connections

MDF Cable Adapter

Colours 16x2 Patch panel for CA1B from DDID
two-wire connection
RD/BU WE 1 a1/b1
WH/YE WE 2 a2/b2
WH/GN WE 3 a3/b3
WH/BN WE 4 a4/b4
WH/BK WE 5 a5/b5
WH/BU WE 6 a6/b6
WH/YE WE 7 a7/b7
WH/GN WE 8 a8/b8
WH/BN WE 9 free
WH/BK WE 10 free
WH/BU WE 11 free
RD/YE WE 12 free
WH/GN WE 13 free
WH/BN WE 14 free

356 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

WH/BK WE 15 free
WH/BU WE 16 free

8.6.17 JPAT JISCOS Public Analog Trunk

Short description
The board JPAT board provides a maximum of eight 3-wire, analogue connectors for the connection of ex-
change lines to the CSI55 in the public network.
In order to operate the JPAT module, it must be equipped with a least one of the following submodules:

Submodule Country of application

SUTC Signaling Unit Trunk C Russia
SUTD Signaling Unit Trunk D Russia

Mixed combination with both submodules on the JPAT is possible.

JPAT board, component side

Other features
Interfaces 8 times 3-wire (2-wire speech path which is also used for signalling together with
the c-wire)
Pulse dialling (DEC)
MF-PS register signalling
Transmission and receipt of ANI

The JPAT is connected using the CARUB cable adapter.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 357

8 Boards

8.6.17.1 LEDs and Switch Functions

S1 Reset switch
Middle: Operating status
Left: Preparatory disabling of board (VSP of all connecting circuits)
Right: Reset board
S2-S9 AO1-AO8
Left: AO1-AO8 Normal status (operating status)
Right: AO1-AO8 preparatory disabling (VSP)
S10 * RS2323 Interface
Left: On
Right: Off

Meanings of LEDs

L1 on: Board is busy in terms of exchange functions

flashing: Board removable
(all connecting circuits blocked or defective)
off: Board not busy
L2 on: Board reset in progress. Programming break in download
flashing: Download in progress
off: Board in operation
L3 AO1 status display
L4 AO2 status display
L5 AO3 status display

358 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

L6 AO4 status display

L7 AO5 status display
L8 AO6 status display
L9 AO7 status display
L10 AO8 status display
L11 Message from or to the C-bus
L12 C-bus fault

8.6.17.2 MDF Connections

MDF Cable Adapter CARUB from JPAT

Colours 16x2 Patch panel for Cable 1 Cable 2
two-wire
connection
RD/BU WE 1 a1/b1 c1/free
WH/YE WE 2 free/free free/free
WH/GN WE 3 a2/b2 c2/free
WH/BN WE 4 free/free free/free
WH/BK WE 5 a3/b3 c3/free
WH/BU WE 6 free/free free/free
WH/YE WE 7 a4/b4 c4/free
WH/GN WE 8 free/free free/free
WH/BN WE 9 a5/b5 c5/free
WH/BK WE 10 free/free free/free
WH/BU WE 11 a6/b6 c6/free
RD/YE WE 12 free/free free/free
WH/GN WE 13 a7/b7 c7/free
WH/BN WE 14 free/free free/free
WH/BK WE 15 a8/b8 c8/free
WH/BU WE 16 free/free free/free

8.6.18 PLSM Passive Loop Sub Modul

Short description
The submodule Passive Loop Sub Module (PLSM) performs the signal exchange with the remote connecting
circuit by means of passive loop signals on the speech wires.
The PLSM submodule is used for the connection of special facilities, e.g.:

Door handsfree facilities

Paging systems
Dictation facilities

CSI55 LX 07/2006 359

8 Boards

.
For certain special facilities (e.g. door opener), further signals can be fed via additional speech wires.

Other features
Options for use National and international
Power demand +5V 5 mA
interface six wires (a/b/c/d/e/f)

8.6.18.1 Functions of the Wires

a/b wire
The seizure of special facilities is implemented by the closing of the a/b loop. The loop current must be
supplied from the special facility (remote side). If the remote side cannot provide this supply, the ”ATLC
without submodule” version is to be applied.
c wire
The c wire serves to check the operational readiness of the special facility. Here, a -48 V voltage is offered by
the PLSM via a resistor. The operational readiness is signalled by the 0V potential from the special facility.
d wire
The d wire serves to switch on the special facility. The PLSM switches 0 V potential onto the line.
e wire
The e wire is used to implement, for example, the door opening function via the transmitted 0 V potential.
f wire
The f wire serves to block the respective connecting circuit from the paging system so as to prevent an
outgoing seizure by the subscriber (0 V potential). When connecting to a door handsfree facility, the f wire can
be connected to the door bell.
The functions of the e and f wires described above can be changed to the following functions in some signalling
plans:
Loop monitoring in place of the f wire
Earth button function in place of the e wire
To do this, conductor paths must be disconnected and bridges inserted on the PLSM submodule.
The corresponding adjustments must be made in the configuration data.

Section of the soldering side on the PLSM submodule

1. For the evaluation of loop current monitoring in place of the f wire disconnect the bridge here

360 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

2. For the evaluation of loop current monitoring in place of the f wire insert the bridge here
3. Insert bridge here for the earth button function in place of the e wire

8.6.18.2 Adjusting the Configuration Data

• Physical line interface

Set to ”loop signalling passive”.

• Signalling plan
Set the signalling plan so that is identical to that of (coordinated with) the remote connecting circuit.
• Speech path design and relative level
Set one of the following combinations according to the requirement of the interface to the remote con-
necting circuit.

Speech path design Relative level (PrE/PrA) Application in countries

2-wire 0/-7 dBr A, D, E, GR (default setting)
2-wire -7/0 dBr D

• Changes to the signal times must not be made.

• Adjustments to digits are to be made according to the application of the PLSM (door handsfree facility,
paging system, etc.), for example, to provide a code to activate the door opening function. The code can
be set once the number of digits in the code has been specified. The functions of the codes depend on
the set signalling plan. They are explained in the respective signalling plan.
• Settings for the connecting circuit type must not be changed.

8.6.19 SIGA Signalling Unit A

Short description
The submodule SIGA contains the functions for 2 connecting circuits and is inserted on the ATA board. A
maximum of 4 submodules can be used as analog trunk module (non direct inward).

Location of the SIGA on the ATA module

CSI55 LX 07/2006 361

8 Boards

1. ATA module
2. Submodule SIGA
3. Connecting circuit slot

Other features
Country of application Germany, Russia
Call recognition (25/50 Hz)
Charge recognition (16 kHz)

8.6.20 SIGB Signalling Unit B

Short description
The submodule SIGB contains the functions for 2 connecting circuits and is inserted on the ATA board. A
maximum of 4 submodules can be used as analog trunk modules without direct inward dialling.

Location of the SIGB on the ATA module

1. ATA module

2. Submodule SIGB
3. Connecting circuit slot

Other features
Country of application Switzerland
Call recognition (20/55 Hz)
Charge recognition (12 kHz)

362 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

8.6.21 SIGC Signalling Unit C

Short description
The submodule SIGC contains the functions for 2 connecting circuits and is inserted on the ATA board. A
maximum of 4 submodules can be connected as trunk modules.

Location of the SIGC on the ATA module

1. ATA module
2. Submodule SIGC
3. Connecting circuit slot

Other features
Country of application Luxemburg
Call recognition (25 Hz)
Charge recognition (16 kHz or 50 Hz earth symmetric).
The switchover is made using the ATA board software.

8.6.22 SIGD Signalling Unit D

Short description
The submodule SIGD contains the functions for 2 connecting circuits and is inserted on the ATA board. A
maximum of 4 submodules can be used for the direct inward dialling circuits with monitoring frequency.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 363

8 Boards

Location of the SIGD on the ATA module

1. ATA module
2. Submodule SIGD
3. Connecting circuit slot

Other features
Country of application Austria
12 kHz identifier for supervisory frequency and charges

8.6.23 SIGE Signalling Unit E

Short description
The submodule SIGE contains the functions for 2 connecting circuits and is inserted on the ATA board. A
maximum of 4 submodules can be used for DC direct inward dialling (GSD).

Location of the SIGE on the ATA module

1. ATA module

364 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

2. Submodule SIGE
3. Connecting circuit slot

Other features
Country of application Austria
Charge identifier (12 kHz)
Call identifier (40-60 Hz)
Potential switch and direct current identifier for GSD signalling process.

8.6.24 SIGF Signalling Unit F

Short description
The submodule SIGF contains the functions for 2 connecting circuits and is inserted on the ATA board. A
maximum of 4 submodules can be connected as trunk modules.

Location of the SIGF on the ATA module

1. ATA module
2. Submodule SIGF
3. Connecting circuit slot

Other features
Country of application Belgium
Charge identifier (16 kHz)
Call identifier (25 Hz)
Dial tone identifier (f1 = 420-460 Hz, f2 = 1140 Hz)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 365

8 Boards

8.6.25 SIGG Signalling Unit G

Short description
The submodule SIGG contains the functions for 2 connecting circuits and is inserted on the ATA board. A
maximum of 4 submodules can be used as analog trunk modules without direct inward dialling.

Location of the SIGG on the ATA module

1. ATA module
2. Submodule SIGG
3. Connecting circuit slot

Other features
Country of application Hungary
Charge identifier (12 kHz)
Call identifier (20-50 Hz)

8.6.26 SIGH Signalling Unit H

Short description
The submodule SIGH contains the functions for 2 connecting circuits and is inserted on the ATA2 board. A
maximum of 4 submodules can be used as analog trunk modules without direct inward dialling.

366 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Location of the SIGH on the ATA module

1. ATA module
2. Submodule SIGH
3. Connecting circuit slot

Other features
Countries of application Czech/Slovak Republic
Charge identifier (16 kHz)
Call identifier (25-50 Hz)

8.6.27 SSBA Signalling Sub Board A

Short description
The submodule SSBA contains the functions for 2 connecting circuits and is inserted on the ATC board. A
maximum of 4 submodules can be connected.

Location of the SSBA on the ATC module

CSI55 LX 07/2006 367

8 Boards

1. ATC module
2. Submodule SSBA
3. Connecting circuit slot

Other features
Country of application France
Call recognition (50 Hz)
Charge identifier (12 kHz)
Direct loop current limit: 60 mA
Polarity reversal detection

8.6.28 SSBB Signalling Sub Board B

Short description
The submodule SSBB contains the functions for 2 connecting circuits and is inserted on the ATC board. A
maximum of 4 submodules can be connected.

Location of the SSBB on the ATC module

1. ATC module

2. Submodule SSBB
3. Connecting circuit slot

Other features
Country of application Spain
Call recognition (20-30 Hz)
Charge identifier (50 Hz and 12 kHz)

368 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

8.6.29 SSBC Signalling Sub Board C

Short description
The submodule SSBC contains the functions for 2 connecting circuits and is inserted on the ATC board. A
maximum of 4 submodules can be connected.

Location of the SSBC on the ATC module

1. ATC module
2. Submodule SSBC
3. Connecting circuit slot

Other features
Country of application Italy
Call recognition (25-50 Hz)
Charge identifier (12 kHz)
Blocking of incoming seizure in case of malfunctions or during shutdown
Polarity reversal detection
Switchable loop impedance (high, low)

8.6.30 SSBD Signalling Sub Board D

Short description
The submodule SSBD contains the functions for 2 connecting circuits and is inserted on the ATC board. A
maximum of 4 submodules can be connected.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 369

8 Boards

Location of the SSBD on the ATC module

1. ATC module
2. Submodule SSBD
3. Connecting circuit slot

Other features
Country of application Netherlands
Call recognition (50 Hz)
Charge identifier (50 Hz)
Polarity reversal detection
Switchable loop impendance

8.6.31 SSSM Simplex Signaling Sub Modul

Short description
The submodule Simplex Signalling Sub Module (SSSM) performs the signal exchange with the remote con-
necting circuit by means of continuous current signals on the speech wires.

Other features
Country of application National and international
Power demand +5V 45 mA
Interface to the remote connecting circuit a/b earth signalling method (two-wire
line)
No calibrations are required for the signal
exchange with the remote connecting
circuit.
Combinations with other submodules on an ATLC board are possible.

The corresponding adjustments must be made in the configuration data.

370 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

8.6.31.1 Adjusting the Configuration Data

• Physical line interface

Set ”Simplex signalling a/b earth”.
• Signalling plan
Set the signalling plan so that is identical to that of (coordinated with) the remote connecting circuit.

• Speech path design and relative level

Set one of the following combinations according to the requirement of the interface to the remote con-
necting circuit.

Speech path design Relative level (PrE/PrA) Application in countries

2-wire 0/-7 dBr A, D, E, GR
2-wire 0/-7 dBr B, L
2-wire 0/-7 dBr NL
2-wire -3/-4 dBr D, GR(default setting)
2-wire -4/-3 dBr B, L
2-wire -4/-3 dBr NL
2-wire -5/-2 dBr D
2-wire -6/-1 dBr A

If your country of application is not listed, select the required level setting for D. Your application then corre-
sponds to German transmission technology.

• Adjustments to times must not be made.

• Adjustments to digits must not be made.
• Settings for the connecting circuit type must not be changed.

8.6.32 SUPA Supplement A

Short description
The submodule SUPA contains the functions for 2 connecting circuits and is inserted on the ATB board. A
maximum of 4 submodules can be connected.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 371

8 Boards

Location of the SUPA on the ATB module

1. ATB module
2. Submodule SUPA
3. Connecting circuit slot

Other features
Countries of application Great Britain/Hong Kong
Call recognition/charge detector (14-26 Hz/50 Hz)
Switch to turn on earth calling signalling systems (ECS)
Highly resistant tape loop for loop calling guarded clearing (LGC)
Auxiliary voltage switch for testing PSTN off-line condition in ECS.

8.6.33 SUPB Supplement B

Short description
The submodule SUPB contains the functions for 2 connecting circuits and is inserted on the ATB board. A
maximum of 4 submodules can be connected.

372 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Location of the SUPB on the ATB module

1. ATB module
2. Submodule SUPB
3. Connecting circuit slot

Other features
Countries of application USA
Call recognition (14-26 Hz/50 Hz)
Ground Start
Loop Start
Auxiliary voltage switch for testing PSTN off-line condition in ECS.

8.6.34 SUTC Signaling Unit Trunk C

Short description
The SUTC is a submodule of the JPAT. It is used for analog exchange lines (direct inward dialling) with 3-wire
signalling.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 373

8 Boards

Location of the SUTC on the JPAT module

1. JPAT module
2. Submodule SUTC
3. Connecting circuit slot

Other features
Country of application Russia
Variants Incoming traffic, local
Incoming traffic, long-distance

Two ports are implemented on each submodule. Using the ICU Editor, the two ports can be configured for
incoming local, incoming long-distance or mixed traffic.
The transmission of signals is implemented in decimal dialling (DEC) via DC signalling only and using various
resistance values. Only the transmission of ANI is implemented in the voiceband by means of frequency
signalling.
The following tables indicate the correlation between the signal, transmission direction and associated resis-
tance value.

8.6.34.1 Incoming Traffic, Local

Signal Direction Incoming end of connection Notes

/ wire a b c c
Operation Operation
with CO with CO
coordinates HDW
Idle C - + - - The input resistance of
condition the c-wire depends on
control the associated central
office (CO coordinates
<——- 1000 Ohm 1000 Ohm 1040 Ohm 1)
or HDW) and on the line
resistance of the c-wire
at the HDW system.

374 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Seizure C A seizure is recognised

in the I55 via a current in
——-> the c-wire ( 13 mA).
Once recognized, the
current in the c-wire is
C limited to 30 mA.
(seizure
<——- 1040 Ohm Rin + acknowledgement)
+ greater/ greater/
equal R equal R
Call a - + - - DEC: Pulse/pause via
number a/b-wire, or pulse/pause
reception via a-wire only.
(DEC or MF-PS Dial information
MF-PS) ——-> in voiceband with
frequency signaling
(multi-frequency pulse
shuttle).
b 1000 Ohm 1000 Ohm 1040 Ohm Rin +
+ greater/ greater/
equal R equal R

- : - 60 V
+ : GND
greater/: The size of greater/equal R depends on the line resistance of the c-wire and the associated
equal supply voltage
R
1) : Line resistance of the c-wire between 0 Ohm - > 500 Ohm = input resistance SUTC 1040
Ohm - 350 Ohm

Signal Direction Incoming end of connection Notes

/ wire a b c c
Operation Operation
with CO with CO
coordinates HDW
Reply or a, b + -
ANI
prompt
<——- 1000 Ohm 200 kOhm
from the
I55
Withdraw a, b - + - -
ANI
<——- 1000 Ohm 1000 Ohm 1040 Ohm Rin +
prompt
+ greater/ greater/
equal R equal R
Subscriber a, b + - 1040 Ohm Rin + Subscriber B (subsc. in
B discon- + greater/ greater/ I55) disconnects first
nects equal R equal R after a call.
first Subscriber B (subsc. in
I55) is busy.
No free connection
CSI55 LX 07/2006 paths in the I55. 375
8 Boards

<——- 200 kOhm 1000 Ohm

Subscriber a + - 1040 Ohm Rin + The signal is transmitted

A + greater/ greater/ on two paths. The signal
disconnects equal R equal R receiver stops working
when the current is 6.5
mA. There is no
detection if the current in
the a-wire is smaller
——-> 1000 Ohm 200 kOhm
than 6.5 mA. The
reception on the c-wire
is interrupted when the
control resistance circuit
has reached 8000 Ohm
and voltage of 74 V.

- : - 60 V
+ : GND
greater/: The size of greater/equal R depends on the line resistance of the c-wire and the associated
equal supply voltage
R

Signal Direction Incoming end of connection Notes

/ wire a b c c
Operation Operation
with CO with CO
coordinates HDW
Disconnectionc Rin + The connection in the
in every ——-> 1040 Ohm greater/ I55 is disconnected at
status + greater/ equal R current of I <10 mA.
equal R
Depends on technical
switching status
Transition c - + - -
to idle
<——- 1000 Ohm 1000 Ohm 1040 Ohm 1)
status
Blocking c - + The I55 informs the
opposite station that it
<——- 1000 Ohm 1000 Ohm Insulation Insulation cannot be seized
(blocking status).

- : - 60 V
+ : GND
1) : Line resistance of the c-wire between 0 Ohm - > 500 Ohm = input resistance SUTC 1040
Ohm - 350 Ohm

376 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

8.6.34.2 Incoming Traffic, Long-distance

Signal Direction Incoming end of connection Notes

/ wire a b c c
Operation Operation
with CO with CO
coordinates HDW
Idle C - + - - The input resistance of
condition the c-wire depends on
control the associated central
office (CO coordinates
<——- 1000 Ohm 1000 Ohm 1040 Ohm 1)
or HDW) and on the line
resistance of the c-wire
at the HDW system.
Seizure C A seizure is recognized
in the I55 via a current in
——-> the c-wire ( 13 mA).
Once recognized, the
current in the c-wire is
C limited to 30 mA.
(seizure
<——- 1040 Ohm Rin + acknowledgement)
+ greater/ greater/
equal R equal R
Call a - + - - DEC: Pulse/pause via
number a/b-wire, or pulse/pause
reception via a-wire only.
(DEC or ——-> MF-PS Dial information
MF-PS) in voiceband with
frequency signaling
b 1000 Ohm 1000 Ohm 1040 Ohm Rin + (multi-frequency pulse
+ greater/ greater/ shuttle).
equal R equal R

- : - 60 V
+ : GND
greater/ : The size of greater/equal R depends on the line resistance of the c-wire and the associated
equal supply voltage
R
1) : Line resistance of the c-wire between 0 Ohm - > 500 Ohm = input resistance SUTC 1040
Ohm - 350 Ohm

Signal Direction Incoming end of connection Notes

/ wire a b c c
Operation Operation
with CO with CO
coordinates HDW

CSI55 LX 07/2006 377

8 Boards

Subscriber a, b + - - - Subscriber B (subsc. in

B free I55) is free once the
<——- 1000 Ohm 1000 Ohm subscriber B call number
is received.
Ringing a or b + - - - The remote side
switches the a or b-wire
to a lower resistance in
——-> 1000 Ohm 1000 Ohm 1040 Ohm Rin +
order to display the call
+ greater/ greater/
signalling.
equal R equal R
Subscriber a, b + - - The I55 informs the
busy or no remote side about the
free status of the subscriber
connection or I55.
<——- 200 kOhm 1000 Ohm 1040 Ohm Rin + Subscriber B (subsc. in
+ greater/ greater/ I55) is busy
equal R equal R no free connection path
in the I55.
Reply a, b + - - The I55 informs the
remote side when the
subscriber has lifted the
handset and changes
<——- 200 kOhm 200 kOhm 1040 Ohm Rin +
the resistance on the a,
+ greater/ greater/
b-wire (conversation
equal R equal R
status).
Subscriber a, b + - - Subscriber B (subsc. in
B I55) disconnects first
<——- 1000 Ohm 1000 Ohm > = 1300
disconnects after a call.
Ohm

- : - 60 V
+ : GND
greater/ : The size of greater/equal R depends on the line resistance of the c-wire and the associated
equal supply voltage
R

Signal Direction Incoming end of connection Notes

/ wire a b c c
Operation Operation
with CO with CO
coordinates HDW
Disconnectionc Rin + The connection in the
at every ——-> 1040 Ohm greater/ I55 is disconnected at
stage + greater/ equal R current of I <10 mA.
Depends on technical
equal R
switching status
Blocking c - + The I55 informs the
opposite station that it
<——- 1000 Ohm 1000 Ohm Insulation Insulation cannot be seized
(blocking status).

378 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

- : - 60 V
+ : GND

8.6.35 SUTD Signalling Unit Trunk D

Short description
The SUTD is a submodule of the JPAT. It is used for analog exchange lines with 3-wire signalling (direct inward
dialling).

Location of the SUTD on the JPAT module

1. JPAT module
2. Submodule SUTD
3. Connecting circuit slot

Other features
Country of application Russia
variant Outgoing local and long-distance traffic

The transmission of signals is implemented in decimal dialling (DEC) via DC signalling only and using various
resistance values. Only the transmission of ANI is implemented in the voiceband by means of frequency sig-
nalling. The following tables indicate the correlation between the signal, transmission direction and associated
resistance value.
Two ports are implemented on each submodule.

8.6.35.1 Outgoing traffic, local and long-distance

Signal Direction Outgoing end of connection Notes

/ wire a b c

CSI55 LX 07/2006 379

8 Boards

Idle c - + + Ringing current monitoring (I 2 mA)

condition to see if the central office (CO) is
<——- insulated insulated + 22
control ready to be seized.
kOhm
Seizure c - 42 kOhm + 1 kOhm + 22
——-> kOhm
Dec. a, b + 500 - 500 Ohm Pause: - 42 kOhm on a-wire
dialling Ohm Pause: + 1 kOhm on b-wire
(pulse) ——-> insulated insulated > = 65
Ohm
Subscriber b -42 kOhm + 1 kOhm > = 65 Checks whether current is flowing in
busy <——- Ohm the b-wire (I 13 - 20 mA)
Reply or a -42 Ohm + 1 kOhm > = 65 Checks whether current is flowing in
ANI Ohm the a-wire (I 1 mA)
<——-
prompt
Withdraw a -42 Ohm + 1 kOhm > = 65 No current in the a or b-wire
ANI Ohm
<——-
prompt
Disconnectiona, b -42 Ohm + 1 kOhm > = 65 Checks whether current is flowing in
by called Ohm the b-wire (I 13 - 20 mA)
subscriber <——-
B

Signal Direction Outgoing end of connection Notes

/ wire a b c
Disconnectiona - 1 kOhm + 1 kOhm < + 65 Current in the a-wire increases from
by called Ohm I 1 mA to I 13 - 20 mA
subscriber ——->
A
Disconnectionc Insulation Insulation > + 22
at any kOhm
——->
stage
Blocking/ c Insulation Insulation > + 22 Checks whether c wire ext. = open
idle kOhm (no current from I 2 mA)
condition <——-
control

- : - 60 V
+ : GND

8.7 Digital interfaces

380 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Board Submodule Connection

board

Board/ DUP03 → 430 CA1B → 391

Rack/ DUPN → 432 CA2B → 392
Backplane
DT0 Digital CA1B → 391,
Linecard T0 EES0B → 436,
→ 423 EESS0 → 440
DS02 → 418 CA2B → 392
DS03 → 421 CA2B → 392
DT21 → 427 CA1B → 391
CA4B → 395
OFA2B → 491
OFAS → 491
DCON → 403 CA1B → 391
CA4B → 395
CAS → 397 CA1B → 391
CA4B → 395
IPN → 473
MAC → 475> EMAC → 447 CA6B → 396
DECT21 → 415 CA1B → 391
IMUX → 458 SPCU CA5B → 395
S64LI
S64LI
UIP → 495 V24M → 501 CA3B → 393
CL2M → 401 CA1B
→ 391/ CA3B
→ 393
CL2ME → 402 CA3B/T → 394
HAMUX → 447 CA6B → 396
BVT2 → 387 Mirror card to HAMUX in the PC
MULI → 487 CA1B → 391
ADM → 381 UPSM → 500 CA2B → 392,
STSM → 494 EESS0 → 440
UKSM → 499
EEADM → 435

8.7.1 ADM Analog Digital Mixboard

Short description
The ADM board is a basic board which accomodates up to five submodules. The following submodules are
available:

Submodule Features
STSM four S0/T0 interfaces as exchange, permanent connection or subscriber
connection

CSI55 LX 07/2006 381

8 Boards

UPSM four UPN interfaces as subscriber connections or permanent connections

ABSM four analogue subscriber ports (a/b)
UKSM twoi UK0 master interfaces
EEADM for use of the ADM with S0 emergency sets via cable adapter EESS0

ADM board, component side

Observe numbering of the submodules

1 AO 1-4
3 AO 9-12
2 AO 5-8
4 AO 13-16

382 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

If the ADM board is used with emergency switching (EESS0 cable adapter) submodule 3 is
not required. On the X8 connector (normally for submodule 4) you must insert the EEADM
submodule instead of submodule 4.

If the EEADM board is inserted in the wrong place on the ADM board this will cause a defect
in the ADM board.

For the ADM board the ”Call Reference Length - (CRL)” can be set to a length of one or two
bytes for the whole board by means of the ICU editor. The call reference length of 2 bytes is
required for QSIG network connection with some third-party PBX. If this setting is used all
ports have CRL=2 bytes no matter which protocol is selected. For this reason it was not
possible to connect any system terminals with TN1R6 protocol to this ADM board.
As of software version ADM0900.ICL / ADM00009.ICP of the ICU, the behaviour of the ADM
board and of the Integral 55 Compact-ADM port has changed. The CRL setting is only
adopted for the ports of the board which use the ”QSIG” protocol. For all other protocolos the
call reference length will always be CRL=1.
This makes it possible to configure QSIG ports with CRL=2 for networks with third-party
systems while it is possible to use system terminals and permanent circuit lines with CRL=1
for other ports with TN1R6 protocol.

Other features
Countries of application Application in all countries
Power demand +5V 230 mA
Interfaces 16 times 2/4-wire
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Download board software
Board identification using board passport
Maintenance function
In conjunction with V24IA module debugging interface on the board front

Debugger

CSI55 LX 07/2006 383

8 Boards

8.7.1.1 LEDs and Switch Functions

DECT board, front side

1. RJ45 connector with PIN assignment

Switch Functions

S1 Left: Preparatory disabling (of all connecting circuits)

Middle: Operating status/release
Right: Reset board
Right, then left: Forced board download

Meanings of LEDs

L1 on: Board is busy with switching functions

flashing: Board removable after preparatory disabling
off: Board is not busy
L2 on: Board reset in progress
flashing: Download in progress

384 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

off: Board in operation

L3 free
L4 free
L5 on: Layer 1 of the digital connecting circuit 1 active
or
analog connecting circuit 1 busy
L6 on: Layer 1 of the digital connecting circuit 2 active
or
analog connecting circuit 2 busy
L7- L19 on: Layer 1 of the digital connecting circuit 3...15 active
or
analog connecting circuit 3...15 busy
L20 on: Layer 1 of the digital connecting circuit 16 active
or
analog connecting circuit 16 busy

8.7.1.2 MDF Connections

MDF, Cable 1 via CA2B from

Colours 16x2 Patch panel Patch panel ADM ADM ADM ADM with
for the for the with with with ABSM/
two wire four-wire STSM UPSM UKSM ABSM1
connection connection
RD/BU WE 1 WE 1 1st slot A1/B1 A1/B1 A1/B1 a1/b1
(T)
WH/YE WE 2 C1/D1 free free free
(R)
WH/GN WE 3 WE 2 A2/B2 A2/B2 A2/B2 a2/b2
(T)
WH/BN WE 4 C2/D2 free free free
(R)
WH/BK WE 5 WE 3 A3/B3 A3/B3 free a3/b3
(T)
WH/BU WE 6 C3/D3 free free free
(R)
WH/YE WE 7 WE 4 A4/B4 A4/B4 free a4/b4
(T)
WH/GN WE 8 C4/D4 free free free
(R)
WH/BN WE 9 WE 5 2nd slot A5/B5 A5/B5 A3/B3 a5/b5
(T)
WH/BK WE 10 C5/D5 free free free
(R)
WH/BU WE 11 WE 6 A6/B6 A6/B6 A4/B4 a6/b6
(T)
RD/YE WE 12 C6/D6 free free free
(R)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 385

8 Boards

WH/GN WE 13 WE 7 A7/B7 A7/B7 free a7/b7

(T)
WH/BN WE 14 C7/D7 free free free
(R)
WH/BK WE 15 WE 8 A8/B8 A8/B8 free a8/b8
(T)
WH/BU WE 16 C8/D8 free free free
(R)

MDF Cable 2 via CA2B from

Colours 16x2 Patch panel Patch panel ADM ADM ADM ADM with
for the for the with with with ABSM/
two wire four-wire STSM UPSM UKSM ABSM1
connection connection
RD/BU WE 1 WE 1 3rd slot A9/B9 A9/B9 A5/B5 a9/b9
(T)
WH/YE WE 2 C9/D9 free free free
(R)
WH/GN WE 3 WE 2 A10/ A10/ A6/B6 a10/b10
B10 (T) B10
WH/BN WE 4 C10/ free free free
D10 (R)
WH/BK WE 5 WE 3 A11/ A11/ free a11/b11
B11 (T) B11
WH/BU WE 6 C11/ free free free
D11 (R)
WH/YE WE 7 WE 4 A12/ A12/ free a12/b12
B12 (T) B12
WH/GN WE 8 C12/ free free free
D12 (R)
WH/BN WE 9 WE 5 4th slot A13/ A13/ A7/B7 a13/b13
B13 (T) B13
WH/BK WE 10 C13/ free free free
D13 (R)
WH/BU WE 11 WE 6 A14/ A14/ A8/B8 a14/b14
B14 (T) B14
RD/YE WE 12 C14/ free free free
D14 (R)
WH/GN WE 13 WE 7 A15/ A15/ free a15/b15
B15 (T) B15
WH/BN WE 14 C15/ free free free
D15 (R)
WH/BK WE 15 WE 8 A16/ A16/ free a16/b16
B16 (T) B16
WH/BU WE 16 C16/ free free free
D16 (R)

386 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

8.7.2 BVT2 Motherboard, Voice Transmitting Module 2

Short description
The board BVT2 is used to provide access to an I55 for PC supported applications. A UP0connector on the
BVT2 module connects the PC to the I55.

BVT2 board with CC telephone

1. PC
2. HAB with BVT2
3. CC telephone
4. Cable with UP0 connection
5. for I55

Application options
ACD-UI application. ACD system with CSI55.
CC telephone Can only be used in conjunction with a call centre and the CSI55. Up to 15 IPN
aplication. connections are possible per board.

8.7.2.1 BVT2 Module

CSI55 LX 07/2006 387

8 Boards

BVT2 board
The BVT2 board features the following connector options:

1. UP0 connection
2. AEI interface
3. Loudspeaker and microphone connector
4. Handset and headset connector

5. Hook switch connector

8.7.2.2 Pin Assignment

Assignment of the WE sockets

1. Hook switch

2. Handset
3. Loudspeaker and microphone
4. AEI
5. UP0

388 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Hook switch
The pin configuration of GND and GU allows a hook switch function to be assigned. The make contact 1
is intended for the application of a tape recorder controller, and make contact 2 for the application of a door
opener, for example.

Connector Hook switch

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6
Seizure GND GU K1 K1 K2 >K2

GND = Ground
GU = Hook switch
K1, K2 = Make contact 1, 2

Handset or headset
Either a T1 handset or a headset can be connected to the 4-pin WE socket. Connecting a switchover module
enables switchover between the handset and headset.

Connector Handset or headset

Pin 1 2 3 4
Seizure SK- HK+ HK- SK+

SC = Transmitter inset (microphone)

HK = Receiver inset

Loudspeaker and microphone

A loudspeaker and a microphone can be connected to this interface for handsfree operation or open listening.

Connector Loudspeaker and microphone

Pin 1 2 3 4
Seizure MIC- MIC+ LS- LS+

LS = Loudspeaker
MIC = Microphone

AEI interface
The AEI (Additional Equipment Interface) pursuant to ETSI features an analog X port and digital Y port. A
tape recorder or headset can be connected to the AEI interface.
Connection is implemented via a 6-pin WE socket.

A connection cable must not exceed the total length of 6 m.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 389

8 Boards

Connector AEI interface

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6
Seizure XTE XTE GND YTE GND YTE
OUT IN A IN D OUT

UP0 Interface
The UP0 interface is in two-wire design. Both wires transmit the user data and signalling data between the PC
and the I55 using the time separation technique, also known as the ping-pong technique.

Connector UP0 Interface

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6
Seizure free free A B free free

UP0 Interface Range

When planning the cable network, it is necessary to take into account that the range of the UP0 interface
concerning the cables used is different:

• 0.6 mm diameter for 3.5 km outdoor cable; 1.7 km for installation cable
• 0.4 mm diameter for 2.1 km outdoor cable

The use of different cable types and the number of distributors in the network reduces the range of the UP0
interface.
When connecting the line network, the following instructions must be adhered to:

• The lines for the UP0 interface must be installed as a twisted wire pair.
• The shields of the cables must be connected to the earth potential on both sides.

The supply of the UP0 interface to a terminal is implemented via so-called Universal Connector Units (UAEs).

8.7.2.3 Tape recorder

Connector
A tape recorder can be connected to the AEI interface. The input line of the tape recorder must be DC isolated
and highly resistant (>10 kOhm).
The tape recorder is controlled via make contacts 1. See “AEI interface” table for pin assignment.
Control
The diagram illustrates the control connections on a tape recorder.

390 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Tape recorder connection

1. AEI interface
2. Tape recorder NF input
3. BVT2
4. Relay contact
5. Interface for hook switch

AC DC Unit
I max 2 2 A
Umax 250 220 V
P max 62,5 30 W

8.7.3 CA1B cable adapter 1 for B modules

Short description
Cable adapter for 16, 4 or 2-pair analog or digital connecting circuit line for boards ASCEU, ASCF, ASCGB,
ATAx, ATB, ATC, DDID, DUP03, DT0, DT21, CAS, DCON, UIP without V24M, MULI and DECT21 with

• 50-pin CHAMP plug as an output to the MDF

• Overcurrent breakpoint (230 V contact)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 391

8 Boards

1. 16, 4 or 2-pair to the MDF/NT

1. Release the lock by pressing the bracket

2. Do not turn the screw!

8.7.4 CA2B cable adapter 2 for B modules

Short description
Cable adapter for 2 to 8-wire analog or 4-wire digital connection device line for the ASC2, ASC21, ATLC,
DS02, DUPN, JPAT and ADM boards with

• 50-pin CHAMP plug as an output to the MDF

• Overcurrent breakpoint (230 V contact)

392 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

1. Cable 1 (16x2) to the MDF

2. Cable 2 (16x2) to the MDF

8.7.5 CA3B cable adapter 3 for B modules

Short description
Cable adapter for the UIP board, provided that the V24M submodules are also inserted here. The board is
also required for external synchronization when using the CL2M/CL2MEM on ICF (B3 module or ICS).

• 50-pin CHAMP plug as an output to the MDF

• 2x 9-pin D plugs for V24 interfaces or connection of high precision reference clock
• Overcurrent breakpoint (230 V contact)

If the first slot of a UIP board is equipped with a CL2ME for the clock supply of TAREF it is
necessary to use the CA3B/T cable adapter.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 393

8 Boards

1. Cable 16X2 to MDF

1. Cable for connecting an external clock source plugged on the first V.24

8.7.6 CA3B/T cable adapter 3 for B modules TAREF

Short description
Cable adapter for UIP board if the clock supply from TAREF is implemented via the CL2ME inserted on the
first slot of the UIP.
The V24M submodules can also be inserted here.

394 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

1. Cable for connecting the TAREF (material number: 27.5630.0531) inserted in the first V.24

8.7.7 CA4B cable adapter 4 for B modules

Short description
Cable adapter for the connection of coax lines when using boards DT21, CAS and DCON, provided that these
modules are set on unsymmetrical interfaces.

• 2 BNC Coax sockets as output to NT or MUX.

1. Coax cable to NT or MUX

8.7.8 CA5B cable adapter 5 for B modules

Short description
Cable adapters for the connection of V.24 and X.21 connectors to the IMUX board.

• Cable to the TA of the network operator or MDF (X1 and X5)

• 1x 15-pin Sub-D female Connector for X.21 data terminals (X4)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 395

8 Boards

• 1x 25-pin Sub-D female Connector for V.24 data terminals (X3)

• Overcurrent breakpoint (230 V contact)
• Ground breakpoints (see IMUX board)

1. Cable Adapter 5B, rear component side, breakpoints

8.7.9 CA6B cable adapter 6 for B modules

Short description
Cable adapter for connecting UP0 and S2M connections to MAC and HAMUX boards.

• 50-pin CHAMP plug as an output to the MDF

• 8-pin WE plugs

396 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

1. Cable 16X2 to MDF

2. 8-pin WE plugs

8.7.10 CAS Channel Associated Signalling

Short description
The CAS board is a PCM30 interface for up to 30 B channels in accordance with CCITT. The board contains
the following features:

Other features
Country of National and international
application
Power demand +5V 930 mA
Line signalling in channel 16 (CAS) in accordance with CCITT or country/customer specifications.
Register signalling in 30 B channels (inband) in accordance with CCITT or country/customer
specifications.
Can be used as an exchange interface, connection line or special interface.
Incoming, outgoing and bothway traffic direction, can also be mixed as required
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Board software download.
PCM30 interface configuration via board software.
Board identification using board pass
Maintenance functions

8.7.10.1 CAS-TIELINE User Program

Introduction
The CAS-TIELINE user program was developed for the I55 system on the CAS hardware platform, and is a
tie-line transmission program. The 16 different tie-line transmission variants are designated E1 to E10/2.
The user data is adapted to individual requirements by means of the ICU mask.
Hardware
The CAS board (channel associated signalling) is used here. Depending on the application, the 2 MBit/s
interface can be configured using the confidata (see Section “ICU mask and confidata”) with impedance of 75
W (unsymmetrical) or 120 W (symmetrical).
Depending on that, for the line connection one of the following adapter boards (only Integral 55) is then
required:

• CA1B for 75 W
• CA4B for 120 W

Further general information about the CAS board, in particular about the controls and denotations of the front
panel, can be gathered from the appropriate paragraphs.
SoftWare

CSI55 LX 07/2006 397

8 Boards

The CAS board is set up with KAD (customer specific user data) for TIELINE application. This requires the
corresponding load list name for the accompanying slot address to be entered.
The necessary parameters (confidata) are then set up using the ICU editor. The corresponding ICP files and
the confidata subsequently end up on the CAS board by means of a download.
Short description of Applications
The TIELINE user program supports inband signalling (DTMF dial codes, call progress tones) and line sig-
nalling (signalling channel bit a). The following applies to line bits b, c and d: bcd = 101. Only changes to bit
’a’ will be processed by the user program. Changes to the bcd bits will be ignored.
16 different signalling plans are produced from the available signal stock. These plans can be selected using
the confidata and always apply to all 30 connecting circuits (AO).
In principle all the AOs are set up for both-way throughput.
Line signalling will not be carried out if all the signals appear as pulsed signals.
DTMF (dual tone multi-frequency dialling) and pulse dialling are suitable dialling systems.
The suffix dialling facility is guaranteed for the entire duration of an outgoing call, and for a predefined period
of an incoming call.
If the criterion “message” is identified, an active call will be cancelled and the digits memory will be deleted.
The elegibility or inelegibility of a line can be set up by the confidata seperately for incoming and outgoing
AOs.
In the same way, a 425 Hz continuous tone can be connected to the switching matrix as a proceed-to-select
signal for outgoing traffic, or a 425 Hz busy tone to the line for incoming traffic according to configuration.
Up to 10 digits can be programmed for a destination number in outgoing traffic. The destination number will
be chosen automatically according to the preset timeout when “elegible” or “inelegible” in the absence of the
“dialling” message.
If “elegible”; incoming “dialling” messages are ignored once the timeout has ended. If “inelegible”; they will
always be ignored. The suffix dialling facility is also guaranteed for the previous destination number when in
call status.
Outgoing DTMF signals which are “called through” will be identified, and incoming “dialling” messages are
subsequently ignored.
An area code may be programmed, which will be relayed to the GCU global control unit during incoming
seizure once the proceed-to-select criterion (signal, time) has been met.
Where ”dial” or ”message” information is absent, the release which has been initialized by the user program’s
watchdog exists neither for incoming nor for outgoing traffic.
If a fault occurs, trouble signalling to the opposite side can be activated using confidata.
In the same way, an unblocking function can be set up for each connecting circuit: When active (blocking-n =
on), and with the front panel switches TBS (total blocking switch) and TBS-N (total blocking switch minus n)
switched on, the corresponding connecting circuit will not be blocked.
Specification of Inband Signals
The available DTMF transmitters and receivers are set out in accordance with CEPT recommendation T/CS
46-02.
The tone identifier will certainly operate in the range of 350 to 500 Hz with -30 dBm0.
The tone generator supplies a 425 Hz frequency with a transmission level of -3 dBm0. In outgoing traffic, it
can be sent to the switching matrix as a proceed-to-select signal (continuous tone). In incoming traffic, it can
be connected to the line as a busy tone (German rhythm).

398 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Synchronization
The CAS board can generally be used as the synchronous clock supplier for synchronization purposes. In the
TIELINE application, however, this is only meaningful if no digital exchange interfaces or tie lines are present.
. This is the reason for the default setting of “No synchronous clock”. This setting can be changed via the
configuration data.

8.7.10.2 Identifying the Operation Phase

As described above, the boot software controls

• initialization,
• test and download procedures after a reset and
• indicates various statuses and possible faults by means of the LED’s on the front panel.

If no faults are found and all GCU messages (test messages, “startup ready” etc) have been received, L1
will flash eleven times and L9, L7, L8, L15 and L16 will go out, indicating that the operation phase has been
reached.

8.7.10.3 LED and Switch Functions

The functions of the switches and LED’s on the front panel differ in boot phase from those in operation phase.
Following a reset, the boot software carries out initialization, test and download procedures, and indicates
various statuses as well as possible faults via the LEDs on the front panel.
If no faults are found and all necessary GCU messages (test messages, “ready for startup” etc.) have been
received, the CAS board will reach the operation phase, where user software is put into effect.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 399

8 Boards

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position
S2 Middle position
S3 Middle position

Switch Function

S1 Left: Preparatory disabling (TBS) *

Middle: Neutral/release
Right: Reset board
Right, Forced board download
then left:
S2 Left: Preparatory disabling (TBS-N) *
Middle: Neutral
Right: No function
S3 Left: No function
Middle: No function
Right: No function

* With S1 (TBS) in the left position and S2 (TBS-N) in the middle position, all 30 ports will be blocked.
With S1 (TBS) and S2 (TBS-N) in the left position, all ports outlined in the configuration data will not
be blocked.
If S1 (TBS) is in the middle position, all 30 ports will not be blocked, irrespective of the position of S2
(TBS-N).

Meanings of LEDs

L1 TSL Total status LED

L2 ESY External synchronization
L3 LOS No signal
L4 LOF Frame failure
L5 CRC CRC4 test fault
L6 RFR Frame failure at remote side
L7 ISU1 **
L8 ISU3 **
L9 RDL LED reset/download
L10 MSG C-bus message
L11 AIS Alarm identification signal
L12 LMF Superframe failure
L13 BIT Increased bit error ratio
L14 RMF Superframe failure at remote side
L15 ISU2 **
L16 ISU4 **

400 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

** The denotation of the LEDs depends on the application (display of R2 register, DTMF
receiver/transmitter, tone transmitter/receiver)

8.7.10.4 MDF Connections

MDF Connection via CA1B from the CAS Module

Cable end CA1B

Colours CAS
BK/BN A1/B1 (T)
BK/RD C1/D1 (R)

MDF Connection via CA4B from the CAS Module

Coax 1 A1/B1 Transmit

Coax 2 C1/D1 Receive

8.7.11 CL2M Clock 2 Module

Short description
The submodule CL2M on the UIP or ICF board implements an external clock supply for the PBX or a clock
pulse output for external devices.

Use on
UIP receiver and transmitter 2048 kHz
ICF receiver 2048/1544 kHz

This is necessary if digital dial-up lines or permanent connections are not available as the clock source, or if
the customer has made high demands in terms of the reliability of the clock supply.

Other features
Power demand +5V 100 mA

If the CL2M is positioned on slot 1 or 2 of the UIP, the line can be connected via the CA1B board.
With slots 3 or 4 occupied and V24M (slot 1 or 2) being used, the line must be connected via the CA3B board.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 401

8 Boards

Location of CL2M on the UIP board

1. Connecting circuit slot

2. UIP module
3. CL2M module

8.7.12 CL2ME Clock 2 Module Extended

Short description
The CL2ME submodule is used to implement an external clock supply by means of a high precision reference
clock (TAREF). This is needed if DECT Intermodule Handover is used in twin and multi-module configurations..

Use on
UIP/ICF Receiver 2048 kHz

Other features
Power demand +5V 100 mA

If the CL2ME is positioned on slot 1 of the UIP, the line can be connected via the CA3B/T board.

402 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Location of CL2ME on the UIP board

1. Connecting circuit slot

2. UIP module
3. CL2ME board

8.7.13 DCON Digital Protocol Converter

Short description
The DCON board network connects the systems from various manufacturers, in which signalling between the
systems takes place via the DPNSS protocol.
It provides this protocol by converting the TNet Bosch Network Protocol.

Other features
Country of application National and international
Power demand +5V 800 mA
Interfaces A module contains one port (30B+D or
23B+D).
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Download board software
Board identification using board passport
Maintenance functions

The CS155 SW and tools will treat the DCON like a DT2 with TNET protocol.
The board should generally be set up as a SLAVE type via the ICU data.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 403

8 Boards

8.7.13.1 LEDs and Switch Functions

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position
S2 Middle position
S3 Middle position
S4 Middle position

Switch Function

S1 Left: Preparatory disabling

Middle: Operating status/release
Right: Reset DT2 part
Right, then left: Forced board download
S2 Left: No function
Middle: Normal mode
Right: Report (fault statistic message to the system console) The
switch must be moved back to the middle position after use.
S3 Left: Trace mode
Middle: Normal mode
Right: Reset converter part
S4 Left: No function
Middle: Normal mode
Right: Non-maskable interruption request

404 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Meanings of LEDs

L1 on: Module is busy in terms of exchange functions (active layer 3

connection)
flashing: Board removable after preparatory disabling
off: Board is not busy
L2 on: Module is clock supplier
L3 on: Unused
L4 on: Remote Alarm Indication RAI (remote side reporting fault
status)
L5 on: Alarm Indication Signal AIS (remote side reporting Out of
Order)
L6 on: Loss of Signal LOS (no receiving signal)
L7 on: RES1 (reserve)
L8 on: Trace mode (Test operation for fault tracking)
L9 on: TNET LOS (loss of signal in TNET)
L10 on: TNET L1 alarm (layer 1 failure in TNET)
L11 on: TNET L2 alarm (layer 2 failure in TNET)
L12 on: TNET in operation
L13 on: Board reset in progress
flashing: Download in progress
off: Board in operation
L14 on: Normal operation (layer 1 active, no alarm)
L15 Unused
L16 on: Fault count> E-6 (bit error rate > 10-6)
L17 on: Fault count> E-3 (bit error rate > 10-3)
L18 on: Loss of Frame LOF (loss of frame synchronization)
L19 on: RES2 (not busy at present)
L20 on: Reset of converter part in progress
off: Converter part in operation
L21 on: DPNSS LOS (loss of signal in DPNSS network)
L22 on: DPNSS L1 alarm (layer 1 failure in DPNSS network)
L23 on: DPNSS L2 alarm (layer 2 failure in DPNSS network)
L24 on: DPNSS network in operation (layer 2 is o.k.)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 405

8 Boards

8.7.13.2 Jumper Position

DCON board, component side

X32-X36 Line Impedance Selection
The line impedance is set using five-fold jumpers.

Connection Impedance
X32-X33 75 Ohm
X33-X34 100 Ohm
X34-X35 100 Ohm
X35-X36 120 Ohm

X31
not equipped

8.7.13.3 DIL Switch Position

S4 Pulse Shape Selection

The shape of the transmission pulse can be adapted for 1.544 MHz applications using S4. For E1, the
switch position is ignored and the pulse shape is set according to the specified line impedance. For DSX-1
applications, the pulse shape can be set according to the line length. S4/4 is not used.

S4/1 S4/2 S4/3 Application

OFF OFF OFF DSX-1 (163-200 m)
ON OFF OFF DSX-1 (122-163 m)

406 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

OFF ON OFF DSX-1 (81-122 m)

ON ON OFF DSX-1 (41-81 m)
OFF OFF ON DSX-1 (0-41 m)
OFF OFF ON CSU ECSA T1 C1.2
ON OFF ON CSU FCC Part 68A
X ON ON CSU FCC Part 68A

S5
This is used by the ZAP monitor (interactive module control). S5/6 and S5/7 determine the baud rate for the
serial ZAP RS232 port.

S5/7 S5/6 Baud rate

Off Off 38400
Off On 19200
On X 9600

X = Insignificant position
S5/1 is used to select the ”DT2 Transparent Mode” (ON position) The DCON acts as a normal DT2 in this
mode. The board transfers all D channel messages transparently.
In the OFF position, the user program is booted and the board starts to operate automatically.
S5/2 determines whether the user program or the ZAP monitor program is loaded. In the ON position, the
board will boot the ZAP monitor program, and is then ready for testing and debugging.
S6
Only S6/6 is used at present. This selects the clock source for the transmission port.
In the OFF position, the system’s internal clock is used.
In the ON position, the clock is derived from the receiver port.

8.7.13.4 DCON Configuration

General Points
This chapter describes the user interface and the configuration parameters which are required for the TNet/
DPNSS board.
Each paragraph consists of a configuration menu, which appears to the user, and a description of the available
options.
The user interface consists of a list of menus. Each menu option is selected by entering the number to the left
of the option.
In order to commence a user interface session, the user must press any button within the first five seconds of
system initialization. The user then selects the required option by entering the number to the left of the option.
Connecting the Terminal
The socket on the front side of the board is 9-pin (D Sub). 3 connectors are needed to connect the terminal.
The connected terminal can be 9-pin or 25-pin.
A VT 100 compatible terminal or a VT 100 emulation on a PC can be used.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 407

8 Boards

9-pin to 9-pin connection

Terminal
RXD 2 ————– 3 TXD
TXD 3 ————– 2 RXD
GND 5 ————– 5 GND

9-pin to 25-pin connection

Terminal
RXD 2 ————– 3 TXD
TXD 3 ————– 2 RXD
GND 5 ————– 7 GND

System Initialization
The following text will appear on the screen during initialization:
BOSCH TELECOM TNet/DPNSS Conversation
Version x.xx
DCON Initialising
Press Any Key for MMI: 3
In order to commence configuration, the user must press any key within the first five seconds of initialization.
If no button is pressed during this time, the configuration menu will only become available again after a reset.
The following text will appear on the screen after initialization:
BOSCH TELECOM TNet/DPNSS Conversation
Version x.xx
Initialisation Complete
Reset DCON for MMI
Main menu
The configuration main menu is displayed.
BOSCH TELECOM TNet/DPNSS Conversation
Version x.xx
1. TNET Configuration
2. DPNS Configuration
3. System Clock Source
4. Software Download
5. Exit
Enter Option [1..5]:
The user selects an option by entering a number (1..5) and pressing the return button.
The following paragraphs describe the available options.
TNet Configuration
The TNet configuration main menu is displayed.
TNet Configuration
——————
1. Orignation Adress
2. Timeslots
3. Timers

408 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

4. Write Settings
5. Exit
Enter Option [1..5]:
The following options are available:

1. Default origination address (during call setup) in the TNet, if no line identity is supported by DPNSS.
2. Incoming time slots can be configured individually.
3. Signal timer configuration
4. New settings are written in the flash-PROM, and the board is reset.
5. Return to main menu.

Origination Address
The following options are available:
TNet Origination Adress
———————–
1. Default Origination Adress: 0525371393
2. Write Settings
3. Exit
Enter Option [1..3]:

1. The user will be prompted to enter a new default origination address. Only digits between 0 and 9
are accepted. A maximum of 30 digits can be entered. Pressing the return button without entering
any digits will result in the default origination address being erased.
2. New settings are written in the flash-PROM, and the board is reset.
3. Return to previous menu.

Time slots
The following options are available:
TNet Timeslot Configuration
—————————
[01] D [17] B
[02] D [18] B
[03] D [19] B
[04] D [20] B
[05] D [21] B
[06] D [22] B
[07] D [23] B
[08] D [24] B
[09] D [25] B
[10] D [26] B
[11] D [27] B
[12] D [28] B
[13] D [29] B
[14] D [30] B
[15] D [31] B
1. Edit
2. Exit

1. Edit time slot configuration (as shown in next diagram).

CSI55 LX 07/2006 409

8 Boards

2. Return to previous menu.

All time slots are bidirectional in terms of default.

The time slots are selected using the numeric keypad. The user can select the following options:
TNet Timeslot Configuration
[01] D [17] B Use Numeric
[02] D [18] B keypad to
[03] D [19] B select timeslot -
8:up
2:down
4:left
6:right
[04] D [20] B
[05] D [21] B
[06] D [22] B
[07] D [23] B
[08] D [24] B Timeslot Settings:
[09] D [25] B
[10] D [26] B B:Bidirektional
[11] D [27] B I:Incomming
[12] D [28] B O:Outgoing
[13] D [29] B D:Disabled
[14] D [30] B
[15] D [31] B
W. Write Settings
E. Exit
Enter Option [B,I,O,D,W,E]:

B Configure bidirectional time slot.

I Configure incoming time slot.
O Configure outgoing time slot.
D Disable time slot for incoming and outgoing conversations.
W Write new settings in the flash-PROM and reset the board
E Return to previous menu.

Timer Configuration
The given values are default settings.
TNet Timer Configuration
————————
Time (Seconds)
————-
1. T302 15
2. T303 4
3. T304 60
4. T305 30
5. T308 3
6. T310 60
7. T313 30
8. T3AA 120

410 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

9. Edit
10. Exit
Enter Option [1..10]:
This menu allows the user to configure the TNet signalling software timer.
List of configurable timers:

Timer Start condition Stop condition

1 T302 Send SETUP ACK, restart Receive ALERT, CONN, Release with DISC
if INFO received CALL, SENT
2 T303 Send SETUP Receive ALERT, CONN, Release with DISC
CALL, SENT
3 T304 Receive SETUP ACK, Receive CALL SENT, Release with DISC
restart when INFO sent ALERT, CONN or INFO
4 T305 Send DISC Receive REL Release with REL
5 T308 Send REL Receive REL ACK Repeat REL and restart
from T308
6 T310 CALL SENT, receive INFO Receive ALERT, CONN Release with DISC
7 T313 Send CONN Receive CONN ACK Release with DISC
8 T3AA Send ALERT Send CONN Release with DISC

All timers can be configured from 0 to 255 seconds. Other available options:

9 Write new settings in the flash-PROM and reset the board. Return to previous menu.
10 Return to previous menu.

DPNSS Configuration
The following options are available:
DPNSS Configuration
——————-
1. Timeslots
2. Timers
3. Layer 2/layer 3 Configuration
4. Layer 1 Stats
5. Write Settings
6. Exit
Enter Option [1..6]:

1. Individual time slots can be configured as incoming, outgoing, bidirectional and disabled.
2. Signalling timer configuration.
3. DPNSS A/B and X/Y configuration
4. Time interval between layer 1 statistic reports, which are sent via the V.24 interface.
5. Write new settings and reset board.
6. Return to previous menu.

Time slots
The following options are available:

CSI55 LX 07/2006 411

8 Boards

1. Edit time slot configuration (as shown in next diagram).

2. Return to previous menu.

DPNSS Timeslot Configuration

—————————-
[01] B [17] B [33] B [49] B
[02] B [18] B [34] B [50] B
[03] B [19] B [35] B [51] B
[04] B [20] B [36] B [52] B
[05] B [21] B [37] B [53] B
[06] B [22] B [38] B [54] B
[07] B [23] B [39] B [55] B
[08] B [24] B [40] B [56] B
[09] B [25] B [41] B [57] B
[10] B [26] B [42] B [58] B
[11] B [27] B [43] B [59] B
[12] B [28] B [44] B [60] B
[13] B [29] B [45] B [61] B
[14] B [30] B [46] B [62] B
[15] B [31] B [47] B [63] B
1. Edit
2. Exit
Enter Option [1..2]:
All time slots are bidirectional set in terms of default.
Channels 1 to 31 are real channels. They are used as speech channels.
Channels 33 to 63 are virtual channels. They are required for features which do not need a speech channel
(e.g. callback at a free subscriber).
The time slots are selected using the numeric keypad. The user can select the following options:
DPNSS Timeslot Configuration
—————————-
[01] B [17] B [33] B [49] B Use Numeric
[02] B [18] B [34] B [50] B keypad to
[03] B [19] B [35] B [51] B select
[04] B [20] B [36] B [52] B timeslot-8:up
[05] B [21] B [37] B [53] B 2:down
[06] B [22] B [38] B [54] B 4:left
[07] B [23] B [39] B [55] B 6:right
[08] B [24] B [40] B [56] B
[09] B [25] B [41] B [57] B Timeslot Settings:
[10] B [26] B [42] B [58] B
[11] B [27] B [43] B [59] B B:Bidirectional
[12] B [28] B [44] B [60] B I:Incoming
[13] B [29] B [45] B [61] B O:Outgoing
[14] B [30] B [46] B [62] B D:Disabled
[15] B [31] B [47] B [63] B
W. Write Setting
E. Exit
Enter Option [B,I,O,D,W.E]:

B Configure bidirectional time slot.

412 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

I Configure incoming time slot.

O Configure outgoing time slot.
D Disable time slot for incoming and outgoing conversations.
W Write new settings in the flash-PROM and reset the board.
E Return to previous menu.

Timer Configuration
The following options are available:
DPNSS Timer Configuration
————————-
Time (Seconds)
————-
1. ISRM/SSRM Timer 60
2. CRM Timer 10
3. Write Settings
4. Exit
Enter Option [1..4]:

1. Configure ISRM/SSRM timer (0 to 255 seconds)

2. Configure CRM timer (0 to 255 seconds)
3. Write new settings in the flash-PROM and reset the board.
4. Return to previous menu.

The above values are default settings.

Layer 2/Layer 3 Configuration
The following options are available:
DPNSS Timer Layer2/Layer3 Configuration
————————————
Config.
——-
1. L2 Config A
2. L3 Config X
3. Write Settings
4. Exit
Enter Option [1..4]:

1. Configure layer 2 A/B end

2. Configure layer 3 X/Y end
3. Write new settings in the flash-PROM and reset the board.
4. Return to previous menu.

Configuration of layer 3 X/Y is necessary to eliminate call collisions. If a call collision occurs, the “Y”
conversation is reset and the “X” conversation continues.
Configuration of layer 2 A/B is necessary for layer 2 signalling. One end of the DPNSS connection must be

CSI55 LX 07/2006 413

8 Boards

specified as the A end and the other as the B end. If A/B end configuration is implemented incorrectly, layer 2
will not be initialized.
Layer 1 Statistics
DPNSS Layer 1 Stats. Configuration
————————————
Time (Seconds)
————-
1. Layer 1 Stats: Interval 120
2. Write Settings
3. Exit
Enter Option [1..4]:
The following options are available:

1. Time interval between DPNSS layer 1 statistic reports, which are sent via the V.24 interface (0 to
255 seconds). The layer 1 statistic reports are disabled, if the time interval is set to 0.
2. Write new settings in the flash-PROM and reset the board.
3. Return to previous menu.

Clock Source
The clock source is given as DPNSS or TNET. This parameter cannot be configured by the user interface.
Conversion System Clock
———————–
System Clock Source: DPNSS
Press Any Key To Continue:
software download
This option is used to download the board.
The user will be asked to connect a PC to the board. This connection is made using the same interface which
is being used for the user interface. If a PC with VT 100 emulation is already connected, this emulation can
be ended in order to arrive at MS-DOS.
The user can leave this status by resetting the board.
The following paragraph describes the software download.
Software Download
—————–
Connect PC and run download utility.
Software Download Program
The download program is used to load a new software version for the board. It will operate on every PC (IBM
compatible). It can use either the COM1 or COM2 interface. Connection is made as already described for the
user interface.
The download program is called up by the DOWNLOAD instruction. The program requires a default from
COM1. If the COM2 is also required, the DOWNLOAD COM2 instruction is entered. The baud rate is set to
19200.
The following display will appear when the program is called up:
– BOSCH Telecom TNet/DPNSS Conversation Down-
load Utility Vx.xx
– Opening COMx: at 19k2 baud

414 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

The following display will appear if the board is detected:

– DCON Card Detected
If the board is not detected, an error message will appear and the program is ended:
– DCON COM PORT NOT DETECTED
The flash-PROM will be erased once the board has been detected. The following display will appear:
– Erasing Flash PROM
– Erase Complete
The user can choose whether to preserve the existing parameter:
– Preserve existing configuration? (Y/N):
The user must enter Y or N. No other keys will be accepted.
The filename is then entered:
– Enter filename ()...
The following display will appear if the file is not found:
– Cannot open file, retry, or <ret> to quit
– Enter filename ()...
The following display will appear when download commences:
– Download started
The following display will appear after a download:
– Download complete
The program returns to MS-DOS.

8.7.13.5 MDF Connections

via CA1B from the DCON module

Cable end CA1B

Colours DCON
BK/BN A1/B1 (T)
BK/RD C1/D1 (R)

via CA4B from the DCON module

Coax 1 A1/B1 Transmit

Coax 2 C1/D1 Receive

8.7.14 DECT21 ICU for DECT-Applications 21

Short description
The DECT21 board is used to connect the Radio Base Station RM 588, material number 4.998.001.296, to
the CSI55.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 415

8 Boards

It carries out an automatic run time measurement. The manual measurement of the individual routes up to 1
km is not applicable as long as no repeater is connected between.

Other features
Country of application National and international
Power demand +5V 1100 mA
Interfaces 8 UPD interface for RBS
One UPD interface physically corresponds to 2 UPN
interfaces.
The ADPCM (Adaptive-Differential-Pulse-Code-Modulation, 32 kbit/s) conversion is carried out on the
board.
One of the two D channels is used for the transmission of synchronization information between the
DECT21 board and the RBS.
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Download board software
Board identification using board passport
Maintenance function

DECT21 board, component side

Line lengths
Installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,6 mm 1.0 km
Outdoor cable A-2YF(L)2Y Ø0,6 mm 2.8 km
Installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,6 mm and UPN repeater 2.0 km

416 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

8.7.14.1 LEDs and Switch Functions

DECT21 board, front side

Switch Function

S1 Right: Reset board

Middle: Normal position
Left: No function
S2 Right: Yet to be defined
Middle: Normal position
Left: Yet to be defined

Meanings of LEDs

L1 off: Board is not busy

on: Module is busy in terms of exchange functions
L2 on: Synch. Master
L3 Layer 1, active port 0
L4 Layer 1, active port 2
L5 Layer 1, active port 4
L6 Layer 1, active port 6
L7 Layer 1, active port 8
L8 Layer 1, active port 10
L9 Layer 1, active port 12
L10 Layer 1, active port 14
L11 flashing: FP download active

CSI55 LX 07/2006 417

8 Boards

L12 Yet to be defined

L13 off: Board in operation
on: Board reset in progress
flashing: Download in progress
L14 All 30 B-channels are busy
L15 Layer 1, active port 1
L16 Layer 1, active port 3
L17 Layer 1, active port 5
L18 Layer 1, active port 7
L19 Layer 1, active port 9
L20 Layer 1, active port 11
L21 Layer 1, active port 13
L22 Layer 1, active port 15
L23 flashing: SW IDM in ICU activated
L24 Yet to be defined

8.7.14.2 MDF Connections

MDF via CA1B from the DECT21

Colours 16x2 Patch panel for
four-wire
connection
RD/BU WE 1 1st Station A1/B1
WH/YE A2/B2
WH/GN WE 2 2nd Station A1/B1
WH/BN A2/B2
WH/BK WE 3 3rd Station A1/B1
WH/BU A2/B2
WH/YE WE 4 4th Station A1/B1
WH/GN A2/B2
WH/BN WE 5 5th Station A1/B1
WH/BK A2/B2
WH/BU WE 6 6th Station A1/B1
RD/YE A2/B2
WH/GN WE 7 7th station A1/B1
WH/BN A2/B2
WH/BK WE 8 8th Station A1/B1
WH/BU A2/B2

8.7.15 DS02 Digital Linecard S0 Variant 2

Short description

418 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

The DS02 board provides 16 supplied digital S0 subscriber ports.

Other features
Country of National and international
application
Power demand +5V 300 mA
Power supply 48 V/100 mA short-circuit-proof
Interfaces 16 supplied, digital S0 subscriber ports
four-wire
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Board software download
Board identification using board pass
Maintenance function
In conjunction with V24IA board debugging interface on board front
Debugger = program that helps to track down errors

8.7.15.1 LEDs and Switch Functions

DS02 board, front side

CSI55 LX 07/2006 419

8 Boards

1. RJ45 connector

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position

Switch Function

S1 Left: Preparatory disabling (VSP) for all connecting circuits

Middle: Operating status/release
Right: Reset board
Right, then Forced board download
left:

Meanings of LEDs

L1 on: Board is busy with switching functions

flashing: Board removable after preparatory disabling
off: Board is not busy
L2 on: Board reset in progress
flashing: Download in progress
off: Module has gone into operation
L3 free
L4 free
L5 on: Layer 1 of connecting circuit 0 active
off: Layer 1 of connecting circuit 0 inactive
L6- L19 on: Layer 1 of connecting circuit 1/14 active
off: Layer 1 of connecting circuit 1/14 inactive
L20 on: Layer 1 of connecting circuit 15 active
off: Layer 1 of connecting circuit 15 inactive

8.7.15.2 MDF Connections

MDF via CA2B from DS02/3

Colours 16x2 Patch panel for Cable 1 Cable 2
four-wire connection
RD/BU WE 1 A1/B1 (T) A9/B9 (T)
WH/YE C1/D1 (R) C9/D9 (R)
WH/GN WE 2 A2/B2 (T) A10/B10 (T)
WH/BN C2/D2 (R) C10/D10 (R)
WH/BK WE 3 A3/B3 (T) A11/B11 (T)
WH/BU C3/D3 (R) C11/D11 (R)
WH/YE WE 4 A4/B4 (T) A12/B12 (T)
WH/GN C4/D4 (R) C12/D12 (R)

420 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

WH/BN WE 5 A5/B5 (T) A13/B13 (T)

WH/BK C5/D5 (R) C13/D13 (R)
WH/BU WE 6 A6/B6 (T) A14/B14 (T)
RD/YE C6/D6 (R) C14/D14 (R)
WH/GN WE 7 A7/B7 (T) A15/B15 (T)
WH/BN C7/D7 (R) C15/D15 (R)
WH/BK WE 8 A8/B8 (T) A16/B16 (T)
WH/BU C8/D8 (R) C16/D16 (R)

8.7.16 DS03 Digital Linecard S0 Variant 3

Short description
The DS03 board replaces the DS02 board and provides also 16 supplied, digitale S0 subscriber ports.

Other features
Country of National and international
application
Power demand +5V 445 mA, no terminal connected
Power supply 48V/100mA, short-circuit-proof
Interfaces 16 supplied, digital S0 subscriber ports
four-wire
range: 150m Bus S0 (four-wire), short bus, installation cable Ø0,6 mm J-Y(ST)Y
500m Bus S0 (four-wire), extended bus, installation cable Ø0,6 mm
J-Y(ST)Y
1km S0 PTP (four-wire), installation cable Ø0,6 mm J-Y(ST)
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Board software download
Board identification using board pass
Maintenance function
In conjunction with V24IA board debugging interface on board front
Debugger = program that helps to track down errors

CSI55 LX 07/2006 421

8 Boards

8.7.16.1 LEDs and Switch Functions

DS03 board, front side

1. RJ45 connector

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position

Switch Function

S1 Left: Preparatory disabling (VSP) for all connecting circuits

Middle: Operating status/release
Right: Reset board
Right, then Forced board download
left:

Meanings of LEDs

422 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

L1 on: Board is busy with switching functions

flashing: Board removable after preparatory disabling
off: Board is not busy
L2 on: Board reset in progress
flashing: Download in progress
off: Board has gone into operation
L3 free
L4 free
L5 on: Layer 1 of connecting circuit 0 active
off: Layer 1 of connecting circuit 0 inactive
L6- L19 on: Layer 1 of connecting circuit 1/14 active
off: Layer 1 of connecting circuit 1/14 inactive
L20 on: Layer 1 of connecting circuit 15 active
off: Layer 1 of connecting circuit 15 inactive

8.7.16.2 MDF Connections

MDF via CA2B from DS02/3

Colours 16x2 Patch panel for Cable 1 Cable 2
four-wire connection
RD/BU WE 1 A1/B1 (T) A9/B9 (T)
WH/YE C1/D1 (R) C9/D9 (R)
WH/GN WE 2 A2/B2 (T) A10/B10 (T)
WH/BN C2/D2 (R) C10/D10 (R)
WH/BK WE 3 A3/B3 (T) A11/B11 (T)
WH/BU C3/D3 (R) C11/D11 (R)
WH/YE WE 4 A4/B4 (T) A12/B12 (T)
WH/GN C4/D4 (R) C12/D12 (R)
WH/BN WE 5 A5/B5 (T) A13/B13 (T)
WH/BK C5/D5 (R) C13/D13 (R)
WH/BU WE 6 A6/B6 (T) A14/B14 (T)
RD/YE C6/D6 (R) C14/D14 (R)
WH/GN WE 7 A7/B7 (T) A15/B15 (T)
WH/BN C7/D7 (R) C15/D15 (R)
WH/BK WE 8 A8/B8 (T) A16/B16 (T)
WH/BU C8/D8 (R) C16/D16 (R)

8.7.17 DT0 Digital Linecard T0

Short description

CSI55 LX 07/2006 423

8 Boards

This component is no longer manufactured (February 2002). It has been replaced by the
ADM Analog Digital Mixboard module. Please only use the ADM with the CS155.

The DT0 board provides 8-digit connections.

Other features
Country of National and international
application
Power demand +5V 610 mA
Interfaces 8 digital T0 interfaces (exchange line ports)
8 digital S0 interfaces (locally-fed terminals, e.g. VA93D, PC)
8 digital S0FV interfaces for permanent circuits (clock master or clock slave) in
private connections
Switchable digital attenuation for calls
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Board software download
Board identification using board pass
Maintenance function

The board contains the following additional features:

DT0 board, component side

424 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

8.7.17.1 LEDs and Switch Functions

DT0 board, front side

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position
S2-S10 Middle position

Switch Function

S1 Left: Preparatory disabling (of all connecting circuits)

Middle: Operating status/release
Right: Reset board
Right, then left: Forced board download
S2 Not used
S3 Right: AO 1 preparatory disabling
Middle: AO 1 release/operating status
S4 Right: AO 2 preparatory disabling
Middle: AO 2 release/operating status
S5 Right: AO 3 preparatory disabling
Middle: AO 3 release/operating status
S6 Right: AO 4 preparatory disabling
Middle: AO 4 release/operating status
S7 Right: AO 5 preparatory disabling
Middle: AO 5 release/operating status

CSI55 LX 07/2006 425

8 Boards

S8 Right: AO 6 preparatory disabling

Middle: AO 6 release/operating status
S9 Right: AO 7 preparatory disabling
Middle: AO 7 release/operating status
S10 Right: AO 8 preparatory disabling
Middle: AO 8 release/operating status

Meanings of LEDs

L1 on: Board is busy with switching functions

flashing: Board removable after preparatory disabling
off: Board is not busy
L2 on: Module is synchronous clock supplier
L7 on: Board reset in progress
flashing: Download in progress
off: Board in operation
L8 Unused
L3 on: Layer 1 of connecting circuit 1 active
L4, L5, L6, L9, on: Layer 1 of connecting circuit X active
L10, L11
L12 on: Layer 1 of connecting circuit 8 active

8.7.17.2 MDF connections DTD

MDF via CA1x from the DT0

Colours 16x2 Patch panel for
four-wire
connection
RD/BU WE 1 A1/B1 (T)
WH/YE C1/D1 (R)
WH/GN WE 2 A2/B2 (T)
WH/BN C2/D2 (R)
WH/BK WE 3 A3/B3 (T)
WH/BU C3/D3 (R)
WH/YE WE 4 A4/B4 (T)
WH/GN C4/D4 (R)
WH/BN WE 5 A5/B5 (T)
WH/BK C6/D5 (R)
WH/BU WE 6 A6/B6 (T)
RD/YE C6/D6 (R)
WH/GN WE 7 A7/B7 (T)
WH/BN C7/D7 (R)
WH/BK WE 8 A8/B8 (T)

426 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

WH/BU C8/D8 (R)

8.7.18 DT21 Digital Linecard T2 Variant 1

Short description
The DT21 board provides one configurable S2Minterface.

Other features
Country of application National and international
Power demand +5V 400 mA
Interfaces a S2Minterface (CO (T2) - or Tie (TIE)), 120 Ohm symmetric
or
75 Ohm asymmetric. ( not intended for use in I55C)
Driver for optical interface( not intended for use in I55C)
Switchable digital attenuation for speech connections (B-channels),
adjustable via the ICU Editor
2.048MHz pulse output ( not intended for use in I55C)
V.24 Test interface (front panel)
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Board software download
Board identification using board pass
Maintenance function

Cable adapter
if used in I55 Possible adapter boards: CA1B, CA4B, OFA2B, OFAS
Power supply NT via ESBx
if used in I55C none, direct connection on front side
Power supply NT via external plug power supply (material number
27.4402.1056).

Ranges

if used in I55
37 dB attenuation range
Wire interfaces (CA1B or CA4B)
120 Ohm symmetric 0.9 km Installation cable
1.8 km TF cable
75 Ohm coax 1.5 km
Optical interface (OFA1B) monomode cable 9/125 micrometer, 11 dB max. attenuation
for entire optical path (e.g. max. 20 km at 0.4 dB/km and 7
plug connections 0.4 dB/plug)

if used in I55C
37 dB attenuation range

CSI55 LX 07/2006 427

8 Boards

if used in I55C
Wire interfaces (direct connection on the front side)
120 Ohm symmetric 0.9 km Installation cable
1.8 km TF cable

8.7.18.1 LEDs and Switch Functions

DT21 board, front side

1. V.24 Test plug

1 = not assigned
2 = TXD
3 = RXD
4 = not assigned
5 = GND
6 = D channel data upstream
7 = D channel data downstream

428 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

8 = Clock burst 2.048 MHz

9 = +5V
Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Neutral position
S2 Neutral position

Switch Function

S1 links: Preparatory disabling

Mean: Operating status/release
Right: Reset board
Right, then left: Forced board download
S2 Left, then right: Report (fault statistic message to the system console) The
switch must be moved back to the middle position after use (2
MHz clock output off) or to the right (2 MHz clock output on).
Mean: Normal operating mode / 2 MHz clock output off
Right: 2 MHz clock output on

Meanings of LEDs

L1 On: Board is busy with switching functions

Flashing: Board removable after preparatory disabling
off: Board is not busy
L2 On: Module is synchronous clock supplier
L3 On: Remote Alarm Indication RAI (opposite side reporting fault
status)
L4 On: Alarm Indication Signal AIS (opposite side reporting ”Out of
Order”)
L5 On: Loss of Signal LOS (no receiving signal)
L6 On: Rx E bit errors
L7 On: Board reset in progress
Flashing: Download in progress
off: Board in operation
L8 On: Normal operation (layer 1 active, no alarm)
L9 On: Bit error rate > 10-6
L10 On: Bit error rate > 10-3
L11 On: Loss of Framing LOF (loss of frame synchronization)
L12 On: The LED signals an activated debug monitoring. LED 12 is
used as indicator as this debugging applies to the real time
function of the module. It is possible to activate the debugging
with a connected terminal and finally removing the terminal -
then the debugging remains on and unaffected.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 429

8 Boards

In order to connect an IDM to the front panel, an optional component must be inserted on the
DT21, reference number: 49.9801.4247.

8.7.18.2 MDF connections DT21

MDF Connection via CA1B from the DT21 Module

Cable end via CA1B from the DT21

Colours
BK/BN A1/B1 (T)
BK/RD C1/D1 (R)
BK/OR A2/B2 (2 MHz pulse to NT)
BK/YE free

MDF Connection via CA4B or OFA1B from the DT21 Module

Coax 1 A1/B1 Transmit

Coax 2 C1/D1 Receive

8.7.19 DUP03 Digital Subscriber UP0 HW Variant 3

Short description
The DUP03 board provides 16 UPNinterface.

Other features
Country of National and international
application
Power demand +5V 640 mA
Interfaces 16 UPN ports for digital UPNterminals e.g. terminals likeTK93 etc. as well as the
terminals of the T3 family
two-wire; transmission rate: 384 kbit/s
Two 64 kbit/s B channels and one 16 kbit/s D channel
16 dB attenuation range
Power supply -48 V/max. 60 mA short-circuit-proof for increased power consumption, e.g. T3
terminals
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Board software download
Board identification using board pass
Maintenance function
In conjunction with V24IA board debugging interface on board front
Debugger = program that helps to track down errors
Line lengths 1 km Installation cable (I-Y(ST)Y Ø0.6 mm

430 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

2.8 km Outdoor cable A-2YF(L)2Y Ø0,6 mm

1.8 km Outdoor cable A-2YF(L)2Y Ø0.4 mm

Using a UPN repeater enables the range of the UPN interface to be extended.

8.7.19.1 LEDs and Switch Functions

DUP03 board, front side

1. RJ45 connector with PIN assignment

1 = not seized
2 = +5 V (via 68 Ohm)
3 = DEB IN
4 = RXD
5 = TXD
6 = GND
7 = GND
8 = not seized
Switch Functions

S1 Left: Preparatory disabling (of all connecting circuits)

Middle: Operating status/release
Right: Reset board
Right, then left: Forced board download

CSI55 LX 07/2006 431

8 Boards

Meanings of LEDs

L1 on: Board is busy with switching functions

flashing: Board removable after preparatory disabling
off: Board is not busy
L2 on: Board reset in progress
flashing: Download in progress
off: Board in operation
L3 free
L4 free
L5 on: Layer 1 of connecting circuit 1 active
L6 on: Layer 1 of connecting circuit 2 active
L7- L19 on: Layer 1 of connecting circuit .. or .. active
L20 on: Layer 1 of connecting circuit 16 active

8.7.19.2 MDF Connections

MDF via CA1B from the DUP03

Colours 16x2 Patch panel
for the
two-wire
connection
RD/BU WE 1 A1/B1
WH/YE WE 2 A2/B2
WH/GN WE 3 A3/B3
WH/BN WE 4 A4/B4
WH/BK WE 5 A5/B5
WH/BU WE 6 A6/B6
WH/YE WE 7 A7/B7
WH/GN WE 8 A8/B8
WH/BN WE 9 A9/b9
WH/BK WE 10 A10/B10
WH/BU WE 11 A11/B11
RD/YE WE 12 A12/B12
WH/GN WE 13 A13/B13
WH/BN WE 14 A14/B14
WH/BK WE 15 A15/B15
WH/BU WE 16 A16/B16

8.7.20 DUPN Digital Subscriber UPN

Short description
The DUPN board provides 32 UPNinterfaces for digital terminals.

432 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Other features
Country of National and international
application
Power demand +5V 1100 mA
Interfaces 32 UPN ports for digital UPNterminals e.g. terminals likeTK93 etc. as well as the
terminals of the T3 family
Mode one B channel per interface
two B channels per interface
two-wire; transmission rate: 384 kbit/s
one or two 64 kbit/s B channels and one 16 kbit/s D channel
16 dB attenuation range
Power supply -48 V/max. 60 mA short-circuit-proof for increased power consumption, e.g. T3
terminals
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Board software download
Board identification using board pass
Maintenance function
In conjunction with V24IA board debugging interface on board front
Debugger = program that helps to track down errors
Line lengths 1 km Installation cable (I-Y(ST)Y Ø0.6 mm
2.8 km Outdoor cable A-2YF(L)2Y Ø0,6 mm

Using a UPN repeater enables the range of the UPN interface to be extended.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 433

8 Boards

8.7.20.1 LEDs and Switch Functions

DUPN board, front side

1. RJ45 connector with PIN assignment

1 = not seized
2 = +5 V (via 68 Ohm)
3 = DEB IN
4 = RXD
5 = TXD
6 = GND
7 = GND
8 = not seized
Switch Functions

S1 Left: Preparatory disabling (of all connecting circuits)

Middle: Operating status/release
Right: Reset board
Right, then left: Forced board download

S2 Left or middle: Status display of layer 1 of the AOs 1..0.16 activated

Right: Status display of layer 1 of the AOs 17...32 activated

Meanings of LEDs

L1 on: Board is busy with switching functions

434 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

flashing: Board removable after preparatory disabling

off: Board is not busy
L2 on: Board reset in progress
flashing: Download in progress
off: Board in operation
L3 free
L4 free
L5 on: Layer 1 of connecting circuit 1 or 17 active
L6 on: Layer 1 of connecting circuit 2 or 18 active
L7- L19 on: Layer 1 of connecting circuit .. or .. active
L20 on: Layer 1 of connecting circuit 16 or 32 active

8.7.20.2 MDF connections DUPN

MDF via CA2B from DUPN

Colours 16x2 Patch panel Cable 1 Cable 2
for the
two wire
connection
RD/BU WE 1 A1/B1 A1/B17
WH/YE WE 2 A2/B2 A18/B18
WH/GN WE 3 A3/B3 A19/B19
WH/BN WE 4 A4/B4 A20/B20
WH/BK WE 5 A5/B5 A21/B21
WH/BU WE 6 A6/B5 A22/B22
WH/YE WE 7 A7/B7 A23/B23
WH/GN WE 8 A8/B8 A24/B24
WH/BN WE 9 A9/B9 A25/B25
WH/BK WE 10 A10/B10 A26/B26
WH/BU WE 11 A11/B11 A27/B27
RD/YE WE 12 A12/B12 A28/B28
WH/GN WE 13 A13/B13 A29/B29
WH/BN WE 14 A14/B14 A30/B30
WH/BK WE 15 A15/B15 A31/B31
WH/BU WE 16 A16/B16 A32/B32

8.7.21 EEADM Emergency Extension Analog Digital Mixboard

Short description
On the ADM board the EEADM subboard is plugged on the X8 connector together with the STSM subboard,
if it is used with emergency switching (cable adapter EESS0). It serves to detect if the ADM is present.
Insert the EEADM subboard if required, see the following figure,

CSI55 LX 07/2006 435

8 Boards

onto the X8 connector of the ADM board.

ADM board, component side

In this case slot 3 (X5/X6) remains free.

8.7.22 EES0B Emergency Extension Switch S0 B Module

Short description
For special services, such as the police force, fire brigade or Red Cross, whose answering facilities must
always be available, the Emergency Extension Switch S0 for CSI55 is available. In the event of a power failure
or other malfunctions, this modules enables a switchover from the connecting line coming from the ISDN
network to sets that are powered by the ISDN network.

436 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

EES0B board

1. Cable 1 + 2, each 24-pair to external MDF

2. Champ plug
3. EES0B
4. Pl.1
5. Pl.2

Instructions
Connection to a DT0, i.e. 2 DAs are to be switched per port.
Switchover is implemented to a set that is only used when the switchover is active.
For this purpose, a switchover with 1 WP each for the analog voice documentation.
Two 50-pin plugs are available as external connectors.

Switch-over criteria
General power failure
PC Board DT0 removed
Manual actuation of an external potential-free switch

The number of ports is determined by the limited number of plug positions.

The port 1..6 contains the switchover option. Port 7 and 8 are directly switched through.
The switchover is implemented with 4 wires.
For each port, an additional 2 switchover contacts are brought out, via which, for example, lines to voice
recording devices are switched.
The power supply to the board is implemented with GND from the DT0. -48 V is fed via the connecting cable.
One wire is fed for the forced switchover via the connecting cable.
Connection cables required: 2 cables 24x2 I55-HVT (MDF) 29.9030.56xx (xx = cable length)
Block Diagram

CSI55 LX 07/2006 437

8 Boards

Emergency switchover facility for S0 lines

1. ISDN line
2. Answering with emergency set
3. Answering without emergency set
4. Answering
5. Emergency set
6. ZN
7. manual emergency switching
8. Documentation

8.7.22.1 Further Information

An NTBA with emergency supply is used as the NT, and the exchange dialling can be loaded with up to 380
mW in this case.
In normal operation, the emergency set has no function and therefore nothing appears in the display.
Facilities of this type are normally only to be handled by trained personnel. It can then be assumed that no
unqualified actions shall be initiated by the users.
Each cable adapter is provided with 125 mA semi-lag fuse protection.

8.7.22.2 MDF Connections

MDF Cable 1 Emergency Extension Switch S0 with DT0

Colours 24x2
RD/BU TA1/TB1 ISDN lines with emergency switching

438 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

WH/YE TC1/TD1
WH/GN TA2/TB2
WH/BN TC2/TD2
WH/BK TA3/TB3
WH/BU TC3/TD3
WH/YE TA4/TB4
WH/GN TC4/TD4
WH/BN TA5/TB5
WH/BK TC5/TD5
WH/BU TA6/TB6
WH/YE TC6/TD6
WH/GN TA7/TB7 ISDN lines without emergency switching
WH/BN TC7/TD7
WH/BK TA8/TB8
WH/BU TC8/TD8
WH/YE EA1/EB1 Emergency sets
WH/GN EC1/ED1
WH/BN EA2/EB2
WH/BK EC2/ED2
WH/BU EA3/EB3
WH/YE EC3/ED3
RD/GN EA4/EB4
WH/BN EC4/ED4

MDF Cable 2 Emergency Extension Switch S0with DT0

Colours 24x2
RD/BU EA5/EB5 Emergency sets
WH/YE EC5/ED5
WH/GN EA6/EB6
WH/BN EC6/ED6
WH/BK RA1/RB1 To analog voice recording
WH/BU ERA1/ERB1 from handset of emergency set
WH/YE EOA1/EOB1 From handset of answering facility
WH/GN RA2/RB2 To analog voice recording
WH/BN ERA2ERB2 from handset of emergency set
WH/BK EOA2/EOB2 From handset of answering facility
WH/BU RA3/RB3 To analog voice recording
WH/YE ERA3ERB3 from handset of emergency set
WH/GN EOA3/EOB3 From handset of answering facility
WH/BN RA4/RB4 To analog voice recording
WH/BK ERA4/ERB4 from handset of emergency set
WH/BU EOA4/EOB4 From handset of answering facility

CSI55 LX 07/2006 439

8 Boards

WH/YE RA5/RB5 To analog voice recording

WH/GN ERA5/ERB5 from handset of emergency set
WH/BN EOA5/EOB5 From handset of answering facility
WH/BK RA6/RB6 To analog voice recording
WH/BU ERA6/ERB6 from handset of emergency set
WH/YE EOA6/EOB6 From handset of answering facility
RD/GN -48 V/-48 V From power supply
WH/BN ZN/GND For the contingency of an emergency change-over

8.7.23 EESS0 Emergency Extension Switch S0

Short description
For special services, such as the police force, fire brigade or Red Cross, whose answering facilities must
always be available, the adapter board Emergency Extension Switch S0 for CSI55 is available. In the event
of a power failure or other malfunctions, this modules enables a switchover from the connecting line coming
from the ISDN network to S0 sets that are powered by the ISDN network.

EESS0 board

1. Cable 1 + 2, each 24-pair to external MDF

2. Champ plug

3. EESS0
4. Pl.1
5. Pl.2

Instructions
Connection to a DT0 or ADM, i.e. 2 wire paris are to be switched per port.
Switchover is implemented to a set that is only used when the switchover is active.
For this purpose, a switchover with 1 WP each for the analog voice documentation.
Two 50-pin plugs are available as external connectors.

440 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Switch-over criteria
General power failure
DT0/ADM board removed
Manual actuation of an external potential-free switch

Other features
Power demand -48V = 108mA
The number of ports is determined by the limited number of plug positions.
The port 1..6 contains the switchover option. Port 7 and 8 are directly switched through. Ports 9 to 16
cannot be used (only applies to ADM).
The switchover is implemented with 4 wires.
For each port, an additional 2 switchover contacts are brought out, via which, for example, lines to voice
recording devices are switched.
The detection ”Board removed” is implemented with GND from the DT0 or ADM.
-48 V is fed via the connecting cable.
One wire is fed for the forced switchover via the connecting cable.
Connection cables required: 2 cables 24x2 I55-HVT (MDF) 29.9030.56xx (xx = cable length)

The X8 connector of the ADM board requires the EEADM submodule.

The EESS0 board differs from the EES0B board only in as far as in the EESS0 it is possible
to prevent emergency switching of individual ports by means of jumpers.

Block Diagram

CSI55 LX 07/2006 441

8 Boards

Emergency switchover facility for S0 lines

1. ISDN line
2. Answering station
3. Manual emergency switching
4. Documentation
5. Emergency answer

8.7.23.1 Additional measures with ADM

If the ADM board is used with emergency switching (EESS0 cable adapter) submodule 3 is
not required. On the X8 connector (normally for submodule 4) you must insert the EEADM
submodule instead of submodule 4.

442 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

ADM board, location of EEADM on X8

If the EEADM board is inserted in the wrong place on the ADM board this will cause a defect
in the ADM board.

8.7.23.2 Jumper

The EESS0 features switching contacts with jumpers to prevent emergency switching of individual ports.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 443

8 Boards

EESS0 cable adapter, component side

Upon first delivery emergency switching is active for ports 0 to 5, i.e. the jumpers are on 2-3 and 5-6. For
special applications it is possible to exclude individual ports from emergency switching.

View of connectors X7, X8 and X9

Connector X7 Jumpers 1-2 Emergency switching for

port 0 inactive

444 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Jumpers 2-3 Emergency switching for

port 0 active
Jumpers 4-5 Emergency switching for
port 1 inactive
Jumpers 5-6 Emergency switching for
port 1 active

Connector X8 Jumpers 1-2 Emergency switching for

port 2 inactive
Jumpers 2-3 Emergency switching for
port 2 active
Jumpers 4-5 Emergency switching for
port 3 inactive
Jumpers 5-6 Emergency switching for
port 3 active

Connector X9 Jumpers 1-2 Emergency switching for

port 4 inactive
Jumpers 2-3 Emergency switching for
port 4 active
Jumpers 4-5 Emergency switching for
port 5 inactive
Jumpers 5-6 Emergency switching for
port 5 active

8.7.23.3 Further Information

The feedlines of the -48V should not be connected to the same fuse as those of the PBX because of the
current difference between them.
The failure criteria such as fuse failure, board removed or manual switchover trigger a message on the system
console so that monitoring from there is guaranteed.
An NTBA with emergency supply is used as the NT, and the exchange dialling can be loaded with up to 380
mW in this case.
In normal operation, the emergency set has no function and therefore nothing appears in the display.
Facilities of this type are normally only to be handled by trained personnel. It can then be assumed that no
unqualified actions shall be initiated by the users.

8.7.23.4 MDF Connections

MDF Cable 1 Emergency Extension Switch S0with DT0

Colours 24x2
RD/BU TA1/TB1 ISDN line 0
WH/YE TC1/TD1 ISDN line 0
WH/GN TA2/TB2 ISDN line 1

CSI55 LX 07/2006 445

8 Boards

WH/BN TC2/TD2 ISDN line 1

WH/BK TA3/TB3 ISDN line 2
WH/BU TC3/TD3 ISDN line 2
WH/YE TA4/TB4 ISDN line 3
WH/GN TC4/TD4 ISDN line 3
WH/BN TA5/TB5 ISDN line 4
WH/BK TC5/TD5 ISDN line 4
WH/BU TA6/TB6 ISDN line 5
WH/YE TC6/TD6 ISDN line 5
WH/GN TA7/TB7 ISDN line 6
WH/BN TC7/TD7 ISDN line 6
WH/BK TA8/TB8 ISDN line 7
WH/BU TC8/TD8 ISDN line 7
WH/YE EA1/EB1 Emergency set 0
WH/GN EC1/ED1 Emergency set 0
WH/BN EA2/EB2 Emergency set 1
WH/BK EC2/ED2 Emergency set 1
WH/BU EA3/EB3 Emergency set 2
WH/YE EC3/ED3 Emergency set 2
RD/GN EA4/EB4 Emergency set 3
WH/BN EC4/ED4 Emergency set 3

Complementary wire: GND

MDF Cable 2 Emergency Extension Switch S0with DT0

Colours 24x2
RD/BU EA5/EB5 Emergency set 4
WH/YE EC5/ED5 Emergency set 4
WH/GN EA6/EB6 Emergency set 5
WH/BN EC6/ED6 Emergency set 5
WH/BK RA1/RB1 to analogue voice recording
WH/BU ERA1/ERB1 from handset of emergency set
WH/YE EOA1/EOB1 from handset of answering facility
WH/GN RA2/RB2 to analogue voice recording
WH/BN ERA2ERB2 from handset of emergency set
WH/BK EOA2/EOB2 from handset of answering facility
WH/BU RA3/RB3 to analogue voice recording
WH/YE ERA3ERB3 from handset of emergency set
WH/GN EOA3/EOB3 from handset of answering facility
WH/BN RA4/RB4 to analogue voice recording
WH/BK ERA4/ERB4 from handset of emergency set
WH/BU EOA4/EOB4 from handset of answering facility
WH/YE RA5/RB5 to analogue voice recording
WH/GN ERA5/ERB5 from handset of emergency set

446 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

WH/BN EOA5/EOB5 from handset of answering facility

WH/BK RA6/RB6 to analogue voice recording
WH/BU ERA6/ERB6 from handset of emergency set
WH/YE EOA6/EOB6 from handset of answering facility
RD/GN -48 V/-48 V -48V from power supply
WH/BN ZN/GND Contact of forced emergency switching /
to contact of forced emergency switching

Complementary wire: GND

8.7.24 EMAC Extended Multi Access Circuit Board

Short description
The board EMAC module is a submodule of the MAC and is used for the extension of 2x2 MBit interfaces.

EMAC board, component side

8.7.25 HAMUX Home Agent Multiplexer

Short description

The following description provides a basic outline of the board HAMUX More detailed
information about module features, installation and configuration can be found in a separate
manual entitled HAMUX Home Agent Multiplexer.

The HAMUX board with the associated SPCU submodules is used for the integration of up to 8 “Home Agents”
in the Call Center and operates with software versions from E04.1 on.
It is a central board with line interfaces, but with a virtual short-circuit between the two connecting circuits,
and enables the simultaneous transmission of compressed speech, data and signalling to a home agent via a
B channel.

Included in shipment
ISDN exchange access (to home agent) via CS155 standard boards
Purchasable passive ISDN card for S0 bus interface with D-channel protocols

CSI55 LX 07/2006 447

8 Boards

Cable adapter with 2x 2 MBit interfaces

ISDN dial-up connection via S0interface with a B-channel and D-channel
Multiplexing of the B channel
Communication protocol of the data application/transmission
Speech compression
Within the CSI55xE connection of the HAMUX to the DP world is implemented via a 2 Mbit/s multiport
server

Principal overview of a Call Center with home agent

1. Customer

2. HOME Agent
3. Network analog or digital
4. ISDN
5. Home agent PC board

6. Digital or analog connector board

7. Database
8. Agent/Supervisor

9. PC Agent/Supervisor
10. BCC Server
11. Router
12. LAN

448 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

13. HOST

In order to implement the 8 home agents, the board must be logged in with 16 connecting circuits. Connecting
circuits AO0 - AO7 are responsible for the setup of the carrier connections to the home agents.
Connecting circuits AO8 - AO15 are subjected to tunnelled transmission and represent the actual agent con-
necting circuits.
Data transmission is implemented to a router via a 2 MBit/s data interface independently of startup and switch-
ing software. To enable better exploitation of the router capacity, it is possible to operate the data interfaces of
the HAMUX board in cascades.

HAMUX board

8.7.25.1 LEDs and Switch Functions

Meanings of LEDs

CSI55 LX 07/2006 449

8 Boards

HAMUX board, front side

L1 Total status of LEDs

on: 1 or more L3 ports active
flashing: All ports are blocked or not active
off: All ports are in idle condition
L2 Total status of LEDs
on: Reset
flashing: Failure of the configuration data received
off: Normal operation of ICU
L3 Port 0
on: L3 active
off: Idle state
flashing: Barred
L4 Port 8
on: L2 and L3 active
off: Idle state
flashing: Barred
L5 Port 1
on: L3 active
off: Idle state
flashing: Barred
L6 Port 9
on: L2 and L3 active
off: Idle state
flashing: Barred

450 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

L7 Port 2
on: L3 active
off: Idle state
flashing: Barred
L8 Port 10
on: L2 and L3 active
off: Idle state
flashing: Barred
L9 Port 3
on: L3 active
off: Idle state
flashing: Barred
L10 Port 11
on: L2 and L3 active
off: Idle state
flashing: Barred
L11 Port 4
on: L3 active
off: Idle state
flashing: Barred
L12 Port 12
on: L2 and L3 active
off: Idle state
flashing: Barred
L13 Port 5
on: L3 active
off: Idle state
flashing: Barred
L14 Port 13
on: L2 and L3 active
off: Idle state
flashing: Barred
L15 Port 6
on: L3 active
off: Idle state
flashing: Barred
L16 Port 14
on: L2 and L3 active
off: Idle state
flashing: Barred
L17 Port 7
on: L3 active
off: Idle state
flashing: Barred

CSI55 LX 07/2006 451

8 Boards

L18 Port 15
on: L2 and L3 active
off: Idle state
flashing: Barred
L19 Message
flashing: Message from C-bus
L20 TEST LED1
on: Fault in Direct Data Interface
off: Normal operation

Switch Functions

HAMUX board, front side

S1 Total block
Left: Hardware block of all 16 ports
Middle: Normal position
Right: Reset of ICU
S2 Test
Links Test procedure
Right: Normal position

452 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

8.7.25.2 Interfacing

Upgrading of the HAMUX module

1. to Router/Server
2. Cable
3. CA6B Cable Adapter
4. 50-pin Champ

The HAMUX board is connected to the I55 via cable adapter CA6B. At the same time, the interface to the
router/server is implemented via WE socket 1 of the cable adapter.
In the event that several HAMUX boards are to be integrated into the system, a cascading of the modules is
implemented via WE socket 2 of the respective cable adapter.

PIN assignment, socket 1

PIN 3 6 4 5
Function 1a (Rx) 1b (Rx) 2a (Tx) 2b (Tx)

PIN assignment, socket 2

PIN 3 6 4 5
Function 2a (Tx) 2b (Tx) 1a (Rx) 1b (Rx)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 453

8 Boards

8.7.25.3 Configuration of the Connecting Circuits

Carrier Connections AO0-A07

Connecting circuits 0-7 are responsible for the setup and release of the carrier connections to the home
agents. They each provide a transparent B channel between the HAMUX board and a home agent.
On the HAMUX board, this is implemented by the simulation of a digital subscriber.
The connecting circuit is designated the digital subscriber type. The second B channel is blocked and
assigned to the Data service function only.
A carrier connection connecting circuit is not able to setup a connection itself, but simply to seize the connec-
tion.
Agents AO8-AO15
Connecting circuits 8-15 are set up as agents in the Call Center. They are designated the digital position
type. The second B channel is blocked.
The telephony service function only is set up for the agent connecting circuit.
Virtual short-circuit
On the HAMUX board, a virtual short-circuit is created by each carrier connection connecting circuit and an
agent connecting circuit. The D channel of the agent connecting circuit is packed.
The status of a carrier connection connecting circuit (carrier connection present/not present) corresponds to
the status of the agent connecting circuit (active/deactive).
Configuration Overview

AO AO-type Log file Service B Channel B Channel

No. Status
00 Digital subscriber EDSS1 (EST1 Version 0) Data only 1 free
2 Barred
01 Digital subscriber EDSS1 (EST1 Version 0) Data only 1 free
2 Barred
02 Digital subscriber EDSS1 (EST1 Version 0) Data only 1 free
2 Barred
03 Digital subscriber EDSS1 (EST1 Version 0) Data only 1 free
2 Barred
04 Digital subscriber EDSS1 (EST1 Version 0) Data only 1 free
2 Barred
05 Digital subscriber EDSS1 (EST1 Version 0) Data only 1 free
2 Barred
06 Digital subscriber EDSS1 (EST1 Version 0) Data only 1 free
2 Barred
07 Digital subscriber EDSS1 (EST1 Version 0) Data only 1 free
2 Barred
08 Digital position TN1R6 (Version 0) TLP only 1 free
2 Barred
09 Digital position TN1R6 (Version 0) TLP only 1 free
2 Barred
10 Digital position TN1R6 (Version 0) TLP only 1 free

454 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

2 Barred
11 Digital position TN1R6 (Version 0) TLP only 1 free
2 Barred
12 Digital position TN1R6 (Version 0) TLP only 1 free
2 Barred
13 Digital position TN1R6 (Version 0) TLP only 1 free
2 Barred
14 Digital position TN1R6 (Version 0) TLP only 1 free
2 Barred
15 Digital position TN1R6 (Version 0) TLP only 1 free
2 Barred

8.7.25.4 Configuration example for a carrier connection conn. circ.

20.11.97 07:51:19
Connecting circuit
Call number :3300
Slot/HWA :01-01-05-00
AO-type :DITN

General ADS data

Name :
Accounting section :0000
Log files :
Log file Version defective busy2 error
ETSI 0 OFF OFF OFF
Overload priority :2
SPWKGR. Public :0
exchange access
SPWKGR. COLISEE :0
DISA group :0
Dealer group :0
CN alloc. HKZ & tie :
Category :-1
Waiting field max. :0
Reserved :
Connection memory :0
Service memory :1
AO state :In operation
Service block :sv-free

CSI55 LX 07/2006 455

8 Boards

Service data
DAT
Status Free
Dialling group 30
Traffic group 1
Switchover group 0
Code dialling group 0
LCR group 0
Dial retrieval DEACTIVE
Backward rel. DEACTIVE

B channel data
Allocation code :-
Deliberation code :-

B ch Bund Dir. Acc. State B ch Bund Dir. Acc. State

no. no. no. no.
1 - - - F 2 - - - S

Number of seizable B channels: 1

Seizure direction Status

G - Outgoing B - BUSY
K - Incoming D - DEFECTIVE
W - Bothway EB - EDSS1 BUSY
ER - EDSS1 RESERVED
F - FREE
G - FAULTY
R - RESERVED
Access Authorization S - BLOCKED
M - with T - DEFECTIVE/BLOCKED
O - without V - BUSY/BLOCKED

8.7.25.5 Configuration example for an agent conn. circ.

456 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

20.11.97 07:51:19
Connecting circuit
Call number :3700
Slot/HWA :01-01-05-08
AO-type :DIPL -log. position no.: 61

General ADS data

Name :
Accounting section :0000
Log files :
Log file Version defective busy2 error
TN1R6 0 OFF OFF OFF
Overload priority :2
SPWKGR. Public :0
exchange access
SPWKGR. COLISEE :0
DISA group :0
Dealer group :0
CN alloc. HKZ & tie :
Category :-1
Waiting field max. :0
Reserved :
Connection memory :0
Service memory :1
AO state :HW blocked
Service block :sv-free

Service data
DAT
Status Free
Dialling group 30
Traffic group 1
Switchover group 0
Code dialling group 0
LCR group 0
Dial retrieval DEACTIVE
Backward rel. DEACTIVE

B channel data

CSI55 LX 07/2006 457

8 Boards

Allocation code :-
Deliberation code :-

B ch Bund Dir. Acc. State B ch Bund Dir. Acc. State

no. no. no. no.
1 - - - F 2 - - - S

Number of seizable B channels: 1

Seizure direction Status

G - Outgoing B - BUSY
K - Incoming D - DEFECTIVE
W - Bothway EB - EDSS1 BUSY
ER - EDSS1 RESERVED
F - FREE
G - FAULTY
R - RESERVED
Access Authorization S - BLOCKED
M - with T - DEFECTIVE/BLOCKED
O - without V - BUSY/BLOCKED

8.7.26 IMUX Integrated Multiplexer

Short description
IMUX board is used to link CSI55 systems via permanent connections (FV).

Type
D64S (S interface with 1 x 64 KBit/s B channel)
DS01/DTS01 (S interface with 1 x 64 KBit/s B channel and 1 x 16 KBit/s D channel)
DS02/DTS02 (S interface with 2 x 64 KBit/s B channel and 1 x 16 KBit/s D channel)
International leased line as per X.21 (X.21 interface with a transmission rate of 64 KBit/s)

458 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

I55 with the IMUX board

Functions of the IMUX board:

• The IMUX board permits the transmission of several compressed speech channels in one B channel of
the permanent circuit. In the process, the band width per speech channel is reduced/compressed to 16
Kbit/s in accordance with G.728 LD-CELP. This process ensures very high speech quality despite the
compression of 4:1, and is better than ADPCM coding with the same band width, for example. They are
better, for example, than a ADPCM coding with the same band width.

Speech compression in the IMUX board

1. I55 with IMUX

2. Line
3. IMUX
4. Bandwidth

• Every speech channel is provided with identification and processing functions for fax group 3. Identifica-
tion of a group 3 fax is necessary, as fax connections must not be subjected to the speech compression.
The transmission is implemented at max. 9.6 KBit/s.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 459

8 Boards

• The line may also be used for data transmission via the direct data interface as per V.24/X.21.
The data is multiplexed from the direct data interface on the line separately from the speech channels,
demultiplexed at the remote side on the second IMUX of the line, and fed to the direct data interface.
This means that the data is fed neither via the decompression/compression units of the IMUX boards
nor via the switching matrixes of the systems.

• The data service is not supported by the IMUX, as data transport is not possible via compressed
channels of IMUX. The Integral 55 uses the service identification function to automatically check whether
it is dealing with the service type (DAT). If this is the case, the connection is not fed via the IMUX board,
but by means of alternate routing to another bundle. If the alternate routing is not activated, ”occupied”
is signaled. This procedure functions for a 3 call number plan types: common, hidden, open.

• Transit functions: If a connection is fed via several I55 systems, compression is performed in the orig-
inating node and decompression in the destination node. This ensures that repeated compression/
decompression is avoided.
The prerequisite for this is that all routes between the participating nodes are equipped with IMUX boards
and that the connection is fed via IMUX routes without exception.
The transit functions also apply when two compressed connections arriving at a transit node from a
system need to be routed in different directions.

Transit functions of the IMUX board

1. I55 with IMUX

2. Line
3. IMUX

4. Bandwidth

Data connections via the direct data interface cannot be set up via several transit nodes, but only as
point-to-point connections between 2 systems.

Other features
Country of National and international
application
Power demand +5V 650 mA
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Board software download.

460 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Board identification using board pass

Maintenance function

Hardware Requirements

• The number of IMUX boards used per module is not limited. Each IMUX board occupies one connecting
circuit slot.

Restrictions

• If a permanent circuit with 8 speech channels (DS02/DTS02) or two permanent circuits each with 4
speech channels (DS01/DTS01) is set up, the application of four SPCU speech compression units is
required. IMUX boards that are equipped in this way must not be installed in directly neighbouring slots.
In this case, one slot must remain free or be occupied by a board with low dissipated power (ASCEU,
DS0, DT0, DT2....).

Software Requirements
Software from E03.2 is required for operation of the IMUX boards.

8.7.26.1 Components and Cables

Components of the IMUX board:

The IMUX board is made up of one basic board and submodules:

ComponentsFunction Material
number
IMUX This board is the basic board and requires a connecting circuit slot. 28.5630.318x
SPCU Submodule of the IMUX for speech compression. Each SPCU can 28.7640.517x
process two (speech) channels. A maximum of 4 SPCUs can be inserted
onto the basic board.
S64LI Submodule of the IMUX for the implementation of the D64S (1xB), 28.7640.516x
DS01/DTS01 (1xB+D) and DS02/DTS02 (2xB+D) line interfaces. One
submodule is required for each of the mentioned interfaces.
X64LI Submodule of the IMUX, implements the line interface: International 28.7640.515x
leased line X.21 with a transmission rate of 64Kbit/s. One line interface is
implemented per submodule.
Max. 2 S64LI, 2 X64LI, or 1 S64LI and 1 X64LI can be inserted on the
basic board at any one time.
CA5B Adapter module for B modules 28.7640.366x

Cable:

• 6x2 Sub-D/open ext. Connection cable TC-MDF (material number 29.9030.5101 for 1 m up to 29.9030.5199
for 99 m).
• 1x15-pin D-sub (male)/D-sub (female) for X64LI (material numbers 27.5630.0541 to .0543) in lengths of
5, 20 and 50 m. This cable can also be used for connection between the direct X.21 data interface and
a data terminal.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 461

8 Boards

For the direct V.24 async./sync. interface, a conventional 25-pin D-sub (male)/D-sub (female) cable can be
used. The number of wires depends on the data terminal (HW handshake). For sync. transmission, the clock
lines must always be switched.

• The following line interfaces can be served:

Line interface type Structure maximum number of

speech channels
D64S 1xB 3
DS01/DTS01 1xB+D 4
DS02/DTS02 2xB+D 8
International leased line as per X.21 64 KBit/s 3

The data transmission as per X.21 allows a point-to-point data transmission only. Each line interface
requires its own D channel (one D channel for two identical line interfaces is not possible. The
number 3 for lines without dedicated D channel ensues due to the fact that D channel signalling also
needs to be transmitted inband within the B channel. This is why not the entire band width is available for user
data.

8.7.26.2 Inserting the Submodules

Remove the IMUX board from the I55 slot.

Note
The board may be removed and inserted during system operation.
Insert the S64LI and/or X64LI submodule onto Line-Interface A and/or Line-Interface B. One or more speech
compression units (SPCUs) can be inserted at random on one or more free SPCU1-SPCU4 slots.

462 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

IMUX board, component side

1. SPCU Speech Compression Unit 2*G728/G.711 Speech Compression/Decompression

2. Line-Interface A Either: S64LI (Structured 64 KBit/s Line Interface) or X64LI (X.21 64 KBit/s Line Inter-
face)
3. Line-Interface B Either: S64LI (Structured 64 KBit/s Line Interface) or X64LI (X.21 64 KBit/s Line Inter-
face)

In order to guarantee the error-free operation of the board, the type and number (max. 2) of inserted line
interfaces (S64LI and/or X64LI), as well as the number of speech compression units (2 speech compression
units per SPCU board –> max. 8 speech compression units), must be adapted to the customer application.
The configuration data must always be entered accordingly using the ICU Editor.
Insert the IMUX board into the I55 slot.

An installation that does not correspond to the diagram can lead to malfunctions in the board. For
better orientation, the material number (*) must be located on the left side of the SPCUs to ensure that they
are installed the right way around.

8.7.26.3 Synchronization

When networking I55 systems via the IMUX, it is unavoidable that the systems run synchronously, because:

• The speech compression algorithm reacts very sensitively to transmission faults through transmutation
processes.
• Error-free operation cannot be guaranteed for the data interface without synchronization.

When networking systems via the permanent circuit of the public network, the IMUX line interfaces are con-
figured as the “slave” on both sides of the permanent circuit (normal case). With direct connection, one side
is set as the “master” and the other side as the “slave”. This means that the same rules must be followed as,
for example, with a permanent circuit operated with the DT0 board.
For synchronization purposes, I55 systems exchange information via the networking permanent circuit. This
is carried out via the signalling channels of the logical ports. This means that synchronization can only be
present via IMUX lines to which ports are assigned (i.e. that are set up for transportation of one or more B
channels).
The IMUX board software will reject a configuration (configuration error) that results in a port number = 0 for
the entire board.
However, a port number = 0 (entire band width for data transmission) is possible for one of the individual IMUX
lines (A, B). These represent special cases that are to be observed with regard to synchronization.
Special case 1: 2 I55 systems network connected via two permanent circuits (FV) operated with IMUX

Special case 1 for synchronization

CSI55 LX 07/2006 463

8 Boards

1. FV1: only data

2. FV2: only B channels

Because no ports (no B channels) are configured for permanent circuit FV1, synchronization of the two I55xE
systems is only possible via FV2 (or via further permanent circuit lines that can be operated with IMUX or
other boards such as DT0 or DT2, for example).
Note:
With the appropriate configuration of the line interfaces, the permanent circuit (FV) lines in the above example
can also be connected to the line interfaces of the IMUX in a “crossed” pattern.
Special case 2: 3 I55 systems network connected via two permanent circuits (FV) operated with IMUX

Special case 2 for synchronization

1. FV1: only data

2. FV2: only B channels
3. FV3
4. FV4
5. FV5
6. FV6
7. Access to public network

The I55-1 and I55-2 cannot be synchronized via FV1 (no ports)! However, because synchronization must be
ensured (data transmission), it is necessary to provide further synchronization paths:

• Via further permanent circuits between I55-1 and I55-2 and operated with IMUX, e.g. FV3.
• Via further permanent circuits (operated with IMUX, DT0, DT2...) e.g. FV5.
• Via permanent circuits between I55-2 and I55-3, e.g. FV6.
• Via access of systems to the public network.

464 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

8.7.26.4 Configuration

ICU Editor
The module possesses 2 physical ports, the line interfaces A (upper line submodule) and B (lower line sub-
module).
The ICU Editor is used to select the interface type and a band width distribution for each line interface (A,
B). The distribution is made up of a B channel number (compressed speech channels of 16 KBit/s each) and
band width reservation for the transmission of data (see table below). The number of B channels provides the
quantity, numbering and type of logical ports (connecting circuits). This means that with the IMUX, the number
of logical ports represented for the switching software (MSU1 task) depends entirely on the configuration.
1. Example: Line A 3B chanels, slave (e.g. DS01)
Line B 5B channels, master (DS02)
results:

Port (AO) no. Port type Transmitted on physical line

0 BAVLN-2B-Slave A
1 BAVLN-1B-Slave A
2 BAVLN-2B-Master B
3 BAVLN-2B-Master B
4 BAVLN-1B-Master B

2. Example: Line A not installed

Line B 4B channels, slave
results:

Port (AO) no. Port type Transmitted on physical line

0 BAVLN-2B-Slave B
1 BAVLN-2B-Slave B

The ICU Editor checks whether the number of B channels on an IMUX board is greater/equal 8 and, if required,
returns an error message. If this does not occur, the ICU Editor provides information about the number of
speech compression units to be inserted (half the number = number of SPCUs).
When the IMUX module is started, the available band width of a physical line (e.g. 64 Kbit/s with type D64S) is
divided into subwidths by means of a “Mapping” algorithm. The input information for this process is as follows:

• The number of required B channels (ICU Editor).

• The reserved band width for transmission of the data channel (ICU Editor), see data interfaces.
• In some cases, the required band width for the D signalling channel (permanently set, [8 KBit/s] e.g. with
D64S) if the inteface type does not provide a separate D channel.

It must be ensured that the ’Mapping’ algorithm provides the same results on both sides of a permanent circuit
operated with IMUX (this means that the subbands have the same position throughout the entire band)! To
this end, the line interfaces on both sides of the FV must on all accounts have the same configuration
concerning B-channel numbers and reserved capacity for the data channel.
This requirement must be met for each line interface. This means, for example, that if line A of an IMUX in an
I55 system 1 is connected with line B of an IMUX in system 2 via a permanent circuit, the two line interfaces
A (system 1) and B (system 2) must be configured in the same way.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 465

8 Boards

Configuration checks
The ICU Editor carries out configuration checks for the IMUX board. This virtually rules out incorrect settings
being made:

• Check of whether the total number of B channels is 8 (max. possible number of speech compression
units).

• Check of whether the reserved band width on the line selected for transmission of the data channel is
sufficient for the current configuration of the ’direct data interface’.
• In addition, the number of required speech compression units is output (half the number = number of
SPCU submodules).

The above points are checked by the ICU software of the board. The hardware configuration data is also
checked. In the event of inconsistencies in the configuration, the IMUX will not be started and indicates a
configuration data error. This indication involves the top two LEDs flashing red and green on the front panel
and a message to MCOM.
An error occurs if:

• The configuration data structure is unknown. (Always switch off the “Type name from ICU.TAB” option in
the ICU Editor.)
• The total number of B channels is greater than 8.
• The reserved capacity for transmitting the data channel is insufficient.
• One or both inserted line submodules is not compatible with the type of the selected line interface.
• No B channel has been configured for the entire module (port number = 0).

If an insufficient number of SPCU submodules is inserted, some ports on the IMUX will not start up (traffic
restriction!). This status is indicated by a continuously flashing LED (see “LEDs and Switches”).
Customer data
When setting up the customer data, it must be ensured that enough ports of the BAV type are set up with port
addresses 0, 1, 2...
Because one speech compression unit must be present on the board for each B channel, and the maximum
number of speech compression units that can be inserted is 8 (2 per SPCU submodule), the maximum number
of ports is 5. This means that when setting up customer data for 5 ports of the BAV type with the addresses 0
to 4 on the IMUX slot, all configuration cases of the board are covered.
Networking via the TNET protocol
The switching control regards the channels of the IMUX board as channels to “link line networks” (basic
access vln) using the TNET protocol. The IMX feature must be enabled in order to implement switching of the
connecting circuits of the IMUX board, which are also set up with a “basic access vln” connecting circuit type.
All other customer data is subjected to the known regulations for basic access vln (TNET).
Prevention of ’non speech connections’
In ’non-speech connections’, e.g. in the data service, the switching controller recognizes, with the aid of the
customer data, during the connection setup that the desired service is not set up. The response to this is
either disconnection or alternate routing. In networks with open numbering plans (exchange line code for
each node), it is possible via the customer data to set up the exchange line code for IMUX connections only
in dial groups for the speech service.

466 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

8.7.26.5 LEDs and Switch Functions

IMUX board, front side

Switch Function

S1 Right: Reset board

Middle: Normal position
Left: Service disabling (preparatory) for all log. ports (AO) of the
board
S2 Left: Normal position
Right: Service disabling (preparatory) for line A
S3 Left: Normal position
Right: Service disabling (preparatory) for line B
S4 No function

Meanings of LEDs

L1 Summation display via all ports

off: No active layer 3 connections, all ports free
on: At least 1 layer 3 connection
flashing: All available ports have ’blocked’ status
L2 off: Normal
on: Board reset status
flashing: Startup or download in progress
L3 off: Layer 1 on line A active
on: Layer 1 on line A inactive (alarm)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 467

8 Boards

L4 off: Layer 1 on line B active

on: Layer 1 on line B inactive (alarm)
L5 Summation display via all ports allocated to line A
off: No active layer 3 connections on line A, all allocated ports free
L6 Summation display via all ports allocated to line B
off: No active layer 3 connections on line B, all allocated ports free
on: At least 1 layer 3 connection on line B
flashing: All ports allocated to the line have ’blocked’ status
on: At least 1 layer 3 connection on line A
flashing: All ports allocated to the line have ’blocked’ status
L7 off: Board is not supplying synchronous clock to I55xE central
clock supply
on: Board supplying synchronous clock
L8 Only valid if SYN LED (L7) is “on”!
off: Synchronous clock is being fed from line B
on: Synchronous clock is being fed from line A
L9 off: Normal
flashing: Insufficient number of compression units (too few SPCU’s)
L10 No function
L11 The LED lights up briefly when C-bus messages are received
L12 One-off fault states (IMUX internal buffer overflows) when transmitting data from the ”direct
data interface” result in the LED lighting up for 30 seconds. Such faults may occur if,

• The network connected I33 systems are not in sync with each other or with the
public network.
• Asynchronous data interfaces transmit data from the IMUX and the data terminal at
adversely differing rates. (IMUX corrects this fault automatically by slightly
increasing the data output rate to the data interface.)

During startup, the LEDs indicate various board statuses. The phase is indicated by LED 12
being continuously ON. When LED 12 has been switched off once, the LEDs resume their
normal functions. The simultaneous flashing of LEDs 1 and 7 indicates a configuration
fault (board will not operate).

8.7.26.6 Data Interfaces

Onedata interface exists for each IMUX which can be configured as an asynchronous type (V.24/V.28) or
synchronous type (V.24/V.28 or X.21/V.11) with various data rates.
These data connections are fed directly to the board via the switching matrix.

The data connections cannot be set up via transit nodes. The respective plug is on the cable
adapter CA5B that belongs to the board.

468 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

I55 with the IMUX board

The data is transported via one (configurable) of the permanent circuit (FV) lines. For this purpose, sufficient
capacity for the data channel must be reserved on the selected line.
The ICU Editor checks whether the reserved band width on the selected transmission line is sufficient for
the desired transmission rate. All data rates which fall below the reserved capacity are permissible but not
necessarily sensible, as band width may be left unused.
Example:
Data interface 1200 baud asynchronous, transmission on line A, 32 KBit/s reserved on line A. Because band
width can be reserved in increments of 8 KBit/s a capacity of 24 KBit/s remains unused, meaning that at least
1 other B channel could be set up.

Transmission rate (Bit/s) Line bandwidth to be reserved (KBit/s)

asynch. synch.
< 9600 < 8000 8
19200 16000 16
- 24000 24
38400 32000 32
- 48000 48
- 64000 64

As only one data channel can be transmitted, band width also only needs to be provided on one permanent
circuit line. Any additional capacity reserved on the second line would remain unused.
The data interfaces operate protocol-transparent in all operating modes.
An end-to-end data backup should generally be implemented through the connected data terminals.

For all synchronous operating modes, the data interface is the clock master for the data terminal.
The V.24 data interface involves unsymmetrical dual power lines that perform the following tasks:

Direction

CSI55 LX 07/2006 469

8 Boards

TxD (CT103): Transmit data DEE –> DÜE (IMUX)

RxD (CT104): Receive data <–
CTS (CT106): Transmit stand-by <–
DSR (CT107): Operational readiness <–
GND (CT102): Operational earth
DCD (CT109): Receive signal level <–

In a synchronous transmission, the two lines below supply the DEE with pulse timing information (no function
in asynchronous transmission):

TxC2 (CT114): Transmitting pulse <–

RxC2 (CT115): Receiving pulse <–

Subsequent to the activation of the interface, the CTS, DSR and DCD lines are permanently set to “ON” and
remain at this signal until the board is reset (the data interface of the IMUX signals permanent stand-by).

Signal on the lines V1 < -3 Volt V1 > +3 Volt

Data lines Binary 1 Binary 0
Control and clock lines OFF ON

The X.21 data interface involves symmetrical dual power lines that perform the following tasks:

Direction
T: Sending DEE –> DÜE (IMUX)
R: Receiving <–
C: Control –>
I: Report <–
S: Clock pulse <–
G: Earth or return conductor

Subsequent to the activation of the interface, the I line is permanently set to “ON” and remains at this signal
until the board is reset (the data interface of the IMUX signals permanent stand-by). Line C is not evaluated.
The ’Gnd1’ line can be set to ground irrespective of the country of application. The CA5B cable adapters
feature a breakpoint which can be used to disconnect this line from ground.

Breakpoints on the cable adapter

1. Breakpoints

Signal on the lines VA...VB VA...VB

470 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

< -0.3 Volt > +0.3 Volt

Data lines Binary 1 Binary 0
Control and clock lines OFF ON

The following bit rates are supported which can be configured using ISM or the ICU Editor:

V.24 synch. V.24 asynch. (1 start bit, 1 stop bit, parity bit X.21 synch.
is possible)
1000 Bit/s 300 Bit/s 1000 Bit/s
2000 Bit/s 600 Bit/s 2000 Bit/s
4000 Bit/s 1200 Bit/s 4000 Bit/s
8000 Bit/s 2400 Bit/s 8000 Bit/s
16000 Bit/s 4800 Bit/s 16000 Bit/s
24000 Bit/s 9600 Bit/s 24000 Bit/s
32000 Bit/s 19200 Bit/s 32000 Bit/s
38400 Bit/s 48000 Bit/s
64000 Bit/s

Assignment of the X3 plug

1. Assignment for V.24

2. Signal names on the backplane
3. female 25-pin Sub-D (ISO 2110)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 471

8 Boards

Assignment of the X4 plug

1. Assignment for X.21

2. Signal names on the backplane
3. female 15-pin Sub-D (ISO 4903)
4. 0 Ohm

8.7.26.7 MDF Connections

The connectors of the IMUX board are picked off with the corresponding cables on the adapter modules CA5B
and fed to the MDF, terminal adapter or data terminal.
When using S64LI as the line interface, the cable with material number 29.9030.51xx is used, whereby xx
represents the length of the cable in m (1 to 99).
The 15-pin Sub-D plug is connected to the X1 plug (line interface A) or X5 plug (line interface B) of the CA5B.
The open end of this cable is connected with 4 lines in the MDF (2 twisted pairs plus earth wire to ground).
Lines used:

Colours Pin on the Name Function

Sub-D
YE/WH 4/3 TDa/TDb Transmit Data
GN/WH 6/5 RDa/RDb Receive Data

When using X64LI as the line interface, the cable with material number 27.5630.054x is used, whereby x
represents the length of the cable in m: (x=1 for 5 m, x=2 for 20 m, x=3 for 50 m). This cable is connected
directly to a TA of the network operator.
Pinning of the X1 and X5 plugs (Sub-D 15 male)

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Name Gndb Ta Ca Ra Ia Sa Xa Gnda Tb Cb
Pin 11 12 13 14 15
Name Rb Ib Sb Xb NC

472 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

The X3 plug comprises a 25-pin Sub-D female plug that serves the connection of an external data terminal
with V.24 (synchronous/asynchronous) interface.
Pinning of the X3 plug

Pin 2 3 5 6 7 8 15 17 Rest
Name TxD RxD CTS DSR GND DCD TxC2 RxC2 NC

The X4 plug comprises a 15-pin Sub-D female plug that serves the connection of an external data terminal
with X.21 (synchronous) interface.
Pinning of the X4 plug

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Name Gnd1 Ta NC Ra Ia Sa NC Gnd Tb NC
Pin 11 12 13 14 15
Name Rb Ib Sb NC NC

CA5B with plugs

8.7.27 IPN Intelligent Private Network

Short description
The board IPN module enables the operation of intelligent private networks between systems (CSI55, I33) by
means of data transmission in the speech channel of a digital dial-up line.

Other features
Power demand +5V 710 mA
Up to 15 IPN connections are possible per board.
Board software download.
Board identification using board pass
Maintenance function

The board must operate in conjunction with an ISDN exchange board.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 473

8 Boards

8.7.27.1 Function of Switches and LEDs

IPN board, front side

Switch Position

S1 Left: Preparatory disabling

Right: Reset board
S2 Left: Board status display not possible at a terminal for testing
purposes, as Sub-D plug is not equipped
S3 Left: Test
S4 Left: Further status display of the board is not possible at a terminal
for testing purposes, as Sub-D plug is not equipped
S5 Left: Protocol output ’on’
S6 No function

Meanings of LEDs

L1 on: At least 1 connecting circuit is occupied

flashing: All connecting circuits are blocked
off: Operating status
L2 No function
L3 flashing: defective DSPA test
1x Reserved
2x Checksum failure
3x X-RAM defect
4x Y-RAM defect

474 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

5x SSI defect
6x Illegal instruction
7x Receive SSI with overflow
8x Transmit SSI with underrun
9x Stack overflow
10x Illegal host message received
11x Field 2 info has been received before
13x External RAM error
14x External ROM error
off: Operating status
L4 No function
L5 on: At least one occupancy is active (occupancy summation
display)
off: Operating status
L6 on: Reset status
flashing: Download in progress
off: Operating status
L7 on: Logging switched on
L8 flashing: See L3 function
off: Operating status
L9 No function
12x Main program runtime > 125 µs
L10 on: At least one channel blocked
flashing: At least one channel defective
off: Operating status

8.7.28 MAC Multi Access Circuit Board

Short description
The MAC board is required for the application of the I55 system as a dealer, special network, railway or master
terminal system. It is the connecting circuit module for the digital terminals (e.g. TH93M) and peripheral
devices (e.g. speech recording unit). It is also provides switching matrix and mixer functions for the application
of special dealer functions.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 475

8 Boards

Overview

1. 2 MB Interface
2. 2 MB Module Loop
3. Databus
4. Power supply

5. UP0 Interface
6. MAC module with submodule EMAC

The board is always required if multi connections (monitoring, OLD, extra handset, speech recording) are to
be used in conjunction with the dealer terminals. Without these multi connections, a dealer terminal may also
be connected to the UIP or DUP0 board.

Features
8 UP0 interfaces for the connection of TH93x terminals.
2 x 2 MBit interfaces for the connection TH93Zx modules or speech recording devices.
Expansion of the module by means of the EMAC submodule provides an additional two 2 MBit interfaces
for the connection of TH93Z modules and speech recording devices.

The 2 MBit interface of a MAC can only be assigned to the terminals and Z modules that are
located on the same MAC.

476 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Other features
Country of National and international
application
Power demand +5V 1500 mA
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Board software download.
Board identification using board pass
Maintenance function

System requirements
The MAC board can only be used in the R1 rack in each module. It can be connected with any of the eight
slots.

8.7.28.1 System Requirements

The MAC board can only be used in the R1 rack in each module. It can be connected with any of the eight
slots.

8.7.28.2 CA6B for mains connection

Cable adapter for connecting UP0 and S2M connections to the MAC board.

• 50-pin CHAMP plug as an output to the MDF

• 8-pin WE plugs

CA6B with connections

1. 16-paired cable to external MDF, AO 1-8

2. 8-pin WE plug for the 2MBit interfaces

Ranges
UP0 Interface
The interface ranges are comparable to those of other UP0 interfaces within the CSI55:

CSI55 LX 07/2006 477

8 Boards

Line length
3.5 km Earth cable Ø0.6 mm
2.1 km Earth cable Ø0.4 mm
1.8 km Installation cable Ø0.6 mm

2 MBit Interface
The interface range varies according to the cable attenuation.
When at 1 MHz, the wave attenuation must be no more than 6 dB.
Example 1:
The J-2Y (SST)Y 2x2x0.6 III Bd (28.9802.0151) installation cable has wave attenuation of 28 dB/1 km (2,8
dB/100 m) when at 1 MHz, resulting in a maximum range of 6 dB: 2,8 dB = 214 m.
Example 2:
The ECONET cable (category 5) has wave attenuation of 16 dB/ 1km (1,6 dB/100 m) when at 1 MHz, resulting
from a maximum range of 6 dB : 1,6 dB = 375 m.

8.7.28.3 Connections

Connection of the 2 MBit Interface

Connection of 2 MBit interface using WE6-WE4 module connecting cord

1. Patch cable:
0.8 m 27.9798.0231
2.0 m 27.9798.0232
3.0 m 27.9798.0233
to
10 m 27.9798.0230

478 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

2. ECONET Cable 4x2 27.9798.0016

3. 4-wire connecting cord WE4/WE6 (junction box 17.8761.1598)
4. MDF cable:
1m 29.9030.5301
2m 29.9030.5302
to
99m 29.9030.5399
5. Junction boxes

6. Z modules
7. Patch panel:
16-part 27.9798.2353
24-part 27.9798.2354
48-part 27.9798.2357

Connection of 2 MBit Interface, ECONET Standard

Connection of 2 MBit interface using WE8-WE4 module connecting cord in accordance with ECONET stan-
dard

1. Patch cable:
0.8 m 27.9798.0231
2.0 m 27.9798.0232
3.0 m 27.9798.0233
to
10 m 27.9798.0230
2. ECONET Cable 4x2 27.9798.0016
3. 4-wire connecting cord WE4/WE8 (junction box 17.8761.1598)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 479

8 Boards

4. MDF cable:
1m 29.9030.5301
2m 29.9030.5302
to
99m 29.9030.5399

5. Junction boxes
6. Z modules
7. Patch panel:
16-part 27.9798.2353
24-part 27.9798.2354
48-part 27.9798.2357

To be able to meet the requirements of the ECONET cabling standard (featuring standardized configuration of
connections), the extension modules now come supplied with a different connecting cord. Further information
about cabling can be found in the Installation Manual of the respective extension modules.

Connector Configuration

1. Old Connecting Cord (17.8761.1589)

2. New Connecting Cord (17.XXXX.XXXX)
3. Offering side
4. Z module side

This connecting cord is identifiable via the plug design (WE8 on the offering side).

480 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

8.7.28.4 Board

MAC board, component side

CSI55 LX 07/2006 481

8 Boards

8.7.28.5 LEDs and Switch Functions

MAC board, front side

1. V.24 plug

PIN 3 TXD
PIN 4 RXD
PIN 8 CTS
PIN 5 GND
PIN 4 +5V

Switch Function

S1 Middle: Idle position

Left: ICU data requires preparatory disabling after reset
Right: Reset
S2 Middle: Idle position

482 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Left: Yet to be defined

Right: Yet to be defined

Meanings of LEDs

L1 on: Busy
flashing: Preparatory disabling execution
off: Normal
L2 on: Reset
flashing: Downloading
off: Normal
L3 Yet to be defined
L4 Yet to be defined
L5 UP0 port 1, layer 1 active
L6 UP0 port 2, layer 1 active
L7 UP0 port 3, layer 1 active
L8 UP0 port 4, layer 1 active
L9 UP0 port 5, layer 1 active
L10 UP0 port 6, layer 1 active
L11 UP0 port 7, layer 1 active
L12 UP0 port 8, layer 1 active
L13 2 MB interface 1 active
L14 2 MB interface 2 active
L15 2 MB interface 3 active
L16 2 MB interface 4 active
L17 DSP1
L18 DSP1
L19 DSP2
L20 DSP2
L21 CBI LED RXTX active
L22 CBI LED FAIL or PCANCEL

8.7.28.6 Commissioning

When starting up the MAC, the individual stages of the initialization are indicated by means of the LEDs on
the front panel. LEDs 1 - 16 provide the following signalling:

1. RESET of module On LED 5-12 On

2. pre init interrupt adresses LED 5 Off
3. Init. of hardware register, end of module LED 6 Off
RESET
4. Initialization Interrupt Disable counter UP0 7 LED Off LED 13-16 On
5. Network initialization

CSI55 LX 07/2006 483

8 Boards

a. Initialization of switching modules (mtsl init) LED 13 Off

b. Initialization of mixer module (musac init) LED 14 Off
c. Initialization of mixer with level setting LED 15 Off
(musac a init)
d. S2M Initialization (falc init) LED 16 Off
e. Initialization of switching components LED 8 Off
between UP0 and highways (epic init)
6. init interrupt addresses LED 9 Off
7. initialize heap LED 10 Off
8. Initialization of layer 2 timer LED 11 Off
9. V24 Initialization All LEDs Off

The initialization of the MAC board is now complete.

Setting up the board using the ICU Configuration Editor
MAC board

Card Field designation active Effect or function

Gen. S2M UP0
X Country setting Selection of country
X EMAC present EMAC expansion level inserted,
yes/no
X DSP present DSM expansion level inserted,
yes/no
X Protocol version Specification of which protocol
the terminal is using

The installation of the MAC board requires the presence of CF2x modules and W1D, W2D or B1D
modules. Setting up the MAC also requires a MACS to be set up on slots 90 and 91.
Correlations

When using the DSPF board, the AUX-HYs can no longer be used. This means that the DSPF board
can now only be used for a maximum of 60 announcement channels and for this purpose uses only
the bus bar which is available for the module slot itself and the free slot located below.
MACS board

Card Field designation active Effect or function

Gen. S2M UP0
The pseudo module MACS
(MAC Slave) must always be set
X Country setting up on slot 90 and 91 if at least
one MAC is present within the
X EMAC present module.
The MACS enables the
X DSP present reservation of time slots, through
which the call progress tones are
connected to the MAC.

484 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

X Protocol version

8.7.28.7 Configuration Example for a Dealer Position on the MAC

20.11.97 07:51:19
Connecting circuit
Call number :520
Slot/HWA :01-01-03-00
AO-type :DIPL -log. position no.: 73

General ADS data

Name :MAC position 00
Accounting section :0000
Log files :
Protocol Version defective busy2 error
TN1R6 0 OFF OFF OFF
Overload priority :2
SPWKGR. Public exchange :1
access
SPWKGR. COLISEE :0
DISA group :0
Dealer group :0
CN alloc. HKZ & tie :
Category :-1
Waiting field max. :10
Reserved :
Connection memory :0
Service memory :2
AO state :IN OPERAT.
Service block :sv-free

Service data
TLP DAT
Status Free FREE
Dialling group 2 3
Traffic group 1 1
Switchover group 0 0

CSI55 LX 07/2006 485

8 Boards

Code dialling group 0 0

LCR group 0 0
Dial retrieval DEACTIVE DEACTIVE
Backward rel. DEACTIVE DEACTIVE

B channel data
Allocation code :-
Deliberation code :-

B ch no. Bund no. Dir. Acc. Status

Serves the signalling of 1 - - - F
extra handsets 2 - - - F
3 - - - F
4 - - - F
5 - - - F
6 - - - F
7 - - - F
8 - - - F
9 - - - F
10 - - - F
11 - - - F
12 - - - F
13 - - - F
14 - - - F
15 - - - F
B ch no. Bund no. Dir. Acc. Status
Serves the signalling of 16 - - - F
the seized monitor 17 - - - F
channels, max. 16
18 - - - F
channels
19 - - - F
20 - - - F
21 - - - F
22 - - - F
23 - - - F
24 - - - F
25 - - - F
26 - - - F
27 - - - F
28 - - - F
29 - - - F

486 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

30 - - - F

Number of seizable channels: 30

8.7.28.8 MDF Connections

The cable adapter CA6B must be used for the integration of the MAC into the I55 modules.

MDF via CA6B of the MAC

Colours Patch panel UP0
for two-wire
connection
RD/BU WE 1 A1/B1
WH/YE WE 2 A1/B1
WH/GN WE 3 A1/B1
WH/BN WE 4 A1/B1
WH/BK WE 5 A1/B1
WH/BU WE 6 A1/B1
WH/YE WE 7 A1/B1
WH/GN WE 8 A1/B1
WH/BN WE 9 free
WH/BK WE 10 free
WH/BU WE 11 free
RD/YE WE 12 free
WH/GN WE 13 free
WH/BN WE 14 free
WH/BK WE 15 free
WH/BK WE 16 free

8.7.29 MULI Multi-line

Short description

The following description provides a basic outline of the board MULI. More detailed information about
module features, installation and configuration can be found in a separate manual entitled MULI Multi-Line.
The MULI board is used for digital subscribers who have convenience features and who work together in a
team or department.
The principle of the multi-line function is a pool containing call numbers that are assigned to the multi-line
board. Each connected terminal is assigned call numbers which correspond to a B channel from this pool.

Features
Each subscriber has access to each line.
Access is gained directly via the keys of the terminal.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 487

8 Boards

Holding calls (for consultation).

Each subscriber may retrieve a call in hold status at his terminal and continue conversation.
Definition of individual multi-line group per subscriber.

Line display to the terminal

Own call number (Primary Directory Number –> PDN)
Call number of other subscribers (Secondary Directory Number –> SDN)
Virtual call number (Phantom Directory Number –> PhDN)

Other features
Country of National and international
application
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Board software download.
Board identification using board pass
Maintenance function

8.7.29.1 Functionality

MULI board
The MULI board serves to provide the multi-line functions.
There exist three different configuration options:

• Single multi-line:

488 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Board with 16 HWAs.

16 ports, each port with a maximum of two call numbers.
Multi-line pool with a maximum of 32 call numbers.

• Single multi-line:

Boards with 32 HWAs with a neighbouring slot for a replacement board.

16 ports, each port with a maximum of two call numbers.
Multi-line pool with a maximum of 64 call numbers.

• Twin multi-line: (for step 2)

Boards, each with 16 HWA

32 ports, each port with a maximum of two call numbers.
Multi-line pool with a maximum of 64 call numbers.

The entire process of signalling and message exchange is implemented by the MULI board.

8.7.29.2 LEDs and Switch Functions

MULI board, front side

LED Functions

CSI55 LX 07/2006 489

8 Boards

L1 on: Busy
flashing: Preparatory disabling execution
off: Idle position
L2 on: Reset
flashing: Download
off: Idle position
L3 on: Yet to be defined
L4 on: Yet to be defined
L5 on: MULI Port 0 (16) layer active
L6 on: MULI Port 1 (17) layer active
L7 on: MULI Port 2 (18) layer active
L8 on: MULI Port 3 (19) layer active
L9 on: MULI Port 4 (20) layer active
L10 on: MULI Port 5 (21) layer active
L11 on: MULI Port 6 (22) layer active
L12 on: MULI Port 7 (23) layer active
L13 on: MULI Port 8 (24) layer active
L14 on: MULI Port 9 (25) layer active
L15 on: MULI Port 10 (26) layer active
L16 on: MULI Port 11 (27) layer active
L17 on: MULI Port 12 (28) layer active
L18 on: MULI Port 13 (29) layer active
L19 on: MULI Port 14 (30) layer active
L20 on: MULI Port 15 (31) layer active
L21 on: Yet to be defined
L22 on: Yet to be defined
L23 on: Yet to be defined
L24 on: Yet to be defined

The numbers in brackets apply to the multi-line group for step 2, which can be implemented using two
boards.
Switch Functions

S1 Left: Preparatory disabling call from ICU data after a reset

Middle: Idle position
Right: Reset
S2 Links Not used
Middle: Idle position
Right: Not used

8.7.29.3 MDF Connections

490 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

MDF via CA1B from

Colours 16x2 Patch panel MULI (UP0)
for the
two wire
connection
RD/BU WE 1 A1/B1
WH/YE WE 2 A2/B2
WH/GN WE 3 A3/B3
WH/BN WE 4 A4/B4
WH/BK WE 5 A5/B5
WH/BU WE 6 A6/B6
WH/YE WE 7 A7/B7
WH/GN WE 8 A8/B8
WH/BN WE 9 A9/B9
WH/BK WE 10 A10/B10
WH/BU WE 11 A11/B11
RD/YE WE 12 A12/B12
WH/GN WE 13 A13/B13
WH/BN WE 14 A14/B14
WH/BK WE 15 A15/B15
WH/BU WE 16 A16/B16

8.7.30 OFA2B/OFAS Optical Fibre Adapter

Short description
The OFA2B Optical Fibre Adapter 2 B modules and OFAS Optical Fibre Adapter single mode are for connect-
ing the optical waveguides when DT21 boards are used and the optical interfaces are employed.
The boards are used for various optical fibre types:

OFA2B OFAS
Graded-index fibres Mono-mode fibres
Ready-made cable types Coreصm Ready-made cable types Coreصm
29.9030.6101-6199* 62,5 29.9030.6201-6299* 9,5

*The last two characters of the material number indicate the length of the pre-prepared cable in metres.
Cable lengths >99m are handled by the project division.
Common data for OFA2B and OFAS boards

Interfaces Number and form Wavelength

Optical transmitters 1 SC socket 1300nm
Optical receivers 1 SC socket 1300nm

electrical values
Supply voltage 5V

CSI55 LX 07/2006 491

8 Boards

Supply current 250mA typical

Power consumption 1.25W

Depending on the optical fibre used and cross-section area of the optical cable, different maximum cable
lengths can be achieved:

Maximum distances
Type of fibre Optical fibre maximum
core صm length km
Graded-index 62,5 10
fibre 50 6,2
Mono mode 9,5 15

Basic construction of OFA2B and OFAS

OFA2B and OFAS boards are designed for connecting to SC plugs. Neither board is thus
compatible with the previous OFA1B board type, which was designed for mono-mode fibre
and ST connectors.

8.7.31 S64LI Structured 64 KBit Line Interface

Short description
The S64LI is a submodule of the IMUX for connection to digital permanent connections. The maximum
transmission rate is 64 kBit/s.

492 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

S64LI submodule on the IMUX board

1. S64LI submodule
2. Connecting circuit slot
3. IMUX board

Other features
Country of National and international
application
Power demand +5V 40 mA
Configurable for standard digital permanent connections.
PCM coupling and layer 1 function
Can be combined with the X64LI submodule on the IMUX board

8.7.32 SPCU Speech Compression Unit

Short description
SPCU is an submodule of the IMUX which aids compression of the bit rate from 64 kBit/s to 16 kBit/s on rapid
signal processors with digital speech signals.
Implementation occurs here of the

CSI55 LX 07/2006 493

8 Boards

SPCU submodule on the IMUX board

1. SPCU Submodule
2. Connecting circuit slot
3. IMUX board

Other features
Country of National and international
application
Power demand +5V 300 mA
Transmission of FAX signals with 9,6 kBit/s

8.7.33 STSM S0/T0 Submodule

Short description
The submodule STSM is plugged into the ADM board. It provides four S0- or T0interface. It contains layer 1
and layer 2 HW ports.

Configurable interfaces
Subscriber connection (S0 powered); Layer 1 master (standard)
or
layer 1 slave (outlying extension)
Exchange line (T0, unpowered)
Exchange line simulation (T0, unpowered)
Permanent connection (T0, unpowered, master clock or clock slave, layer 2 master or slave)

494 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

STSM submodule, component side

1. Plug connector to the ADM (internal ADM interface)

2. Plug connector to the ADM (line interface)

Other features
Country of Application in all countries
application
Power demand +5V 10 mA
Selection free configuration of each individual connection
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Download board software
Board identification using board pass
Maintenance function

8.7.34 UIP Universal Interface Platform

Short description
The UIP board is a basic board which accomodates up to 4 submodules.

Submodules
V24M with a V.24 interface.
CL2M for the reception and transmission of external synchronous clock signals.
CL2ME for receiving an external high-precision reference clock by means of a clock normal (TAREF).

CSI55 LX 07/2006 495

8 Boards

UIP board, component side

1. Slot 1
2. Slot 2
3. Slot 3
4. Slot 4

The following signals are available for the V.24:

RXD
TXD
DTR (unsupported)
GND
DSR (unsupported)
RTS (unsupported)
CTS (unsupported)

The V24M submodule may only be inserted in the first two (upper) slots. The others are
freely configurable.

When using the CL2ME in the first slot the cable adapter CA3B/T must be used for
connecting the TAREF.

Other features
Country of application Application in all countries

496 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Power demand +5V 500 mA

Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Download board software
Board identification using board pass
Maintenance function

8.7.34.1 LEDs and Switch Functions

UIP board, front side

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1-S10 Middle position

Switch Function

S1 Left: Preparatory disabling of all connecting circuits

Middle: Normal mode
Right: Reset board
Right, then left: Forced board download
S2 Not used
S3 Right: Connecting circuit 1 preparatory disabling
Middle: Connecting circuit 1 release
Left: No function

CSI55 LX 07/2006 497

8 Boards

S4 Right: Connecting circuit 2 preparatory disabling

Middle: Connecting circuit 2 release
Left: No function
S5 Right: Connecting circuit 3 preparatory disabling
Middle: Connecting circuit 3 release
Left: No function
S6 Right: Connecting circuit 4 preparatory disabling
Middle: Connecting circuit 4 release
Left: No function
S7 Right: Connecting circuit 5 preparatory disabling
Middle: Connecting circuit 5 release
Left: No function
S8 Right: Connecting circuit 6 preparatory disabling
Middle: Connecting circuit 6 release
Left: No function
S9 Right: Connecting circuit 7 preparatory disabling
Middle: Connecting circuit 7 release
Left: No function
S10 Right: Connecting circuit 8 preparatory disabling
Middle: Connecting circuit 8 release
Left: No function

Meanings of LEDs

L1 on: Board is busy with switching functions

flashing: Board removable after preparatory disabling
off: Board is not busy
L7 on: Board reset in progress
flashing: Download in progress
off: Board in operation
L2, L8 Not busy
L3 on: Layer 1 of connecting circuit 1 active
L4, L5, L6, on: Layer 1 of connecting circuit x active
L9, L10, L11
L12 on: Layer 1 of connecting circuit 8 active

8.7.34.2 MDF Connections

MDF UIP slot via via

CA1B/3B CA1B/3B
from the from the
UIP with UIP with
four CL2M four
CL2ME

498 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Colours 16x2 Patch panel Patch panel

for the for the
two wire four-wire
connection connection
RD/BU WE 1 WE 1 1 A1/B1 (T) A1/B1 (R)
WH/YE WE 2 C1/D1 (R) free
WH/GN WE 3 WE 2 free free
WH/BN WE 4 free free
WH/BK WE 5 WE 3 2 A2/B2 (T) A2/B2 (R)
WH/BU WE 6 C2/D2 (R) free
WH/YE WE 7 WE 4 free free
WH/GN WE 8 free free
WH/BN WE 9 WE 5 3 A3/B3 (T) A3/B3 (R)
WH/BK WE 10 C3/D3 (R) free
WH/BU WE 11 WE 6 free free
RD/YE WE 12 free free
WH/GN WE 13 WE 7 4 A4/B4 (T) A4/B4 (R)
WH/BN WE 14 C4/D4 (R) free
WH/BK WE 15 WE 8 free free
WH/BU WE 16 free free

MDF Connection via CA3B from UIP

The V24M submodules used on slots 1 and 2 can be connected directly to the Sub-D plug of the cable adapter.
In the case of mixed combination, slots 1 and 2 with CL2M, CL2ME and V24M, see table above.

8.7.35 UKSM UK0 Submodule

Short description
The UKSM submodule is inserted on the ADM board. It provides two UK0master interfaces. It contains layer
1 and layer 2 HW ports.

UKSM submodule, component side

1. Plug connector to the ADM (internal ADM interface)

2. Plug connector to the ADM (line interface)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 499

8 Boards

Other features
Country of Application in all countries
application
Power demand +5V 400 mA
Interface description UK0interface; two-wire; transmission rate: 384 kbit/s
Coding 2B1Q
Line lengths 4,5 km installation cable (I-Y(ST)Y Ø0.6 mm
8 km outdoor cable A-2YF(L)2Y Ø0.6 mm
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Download board software
Board identification using board pass
Maintenance function

8.7.36 UPSM UPN submodule

Short description
The UPSM submodule is inserted on the ADM board. It provides four UPNinterfaces for digital terminals or
permanent connection.

UPSM submodule, component side

1. Plug connector to the ADM (internal ADM interface)

2. Plug connector to the ADM (line interface)

Other features
Country of Application in all countries
application
Power demand +5V 35 mA
Interface description four UPN interfaces; two-wire
Transmission rate: 384 kbit/s
16 dB attenuation range
-48 V/max. 60 mA short-circuit-proof supply for increased power consumption, e.g. T3 terminals
Line lengths 1 km installation cable (I-Y(ST)Y Ø0.6 mm
2.8 km outdoor cable A-2YF(L)2Y Ø0.6 mm
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Download board software

500 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Board identification using board pass

Maintenance function

Using a UPN-Repeater the range of the UPNinterface can be extended.

8.7.37 V24M Module

Short description
V24M is a sub-board for the UIP board. It comprises the layer 1 functions for a V.24 interface.
A maximum of two V24 modules can be inserted on slots 1 and 2 of the UIP board. This requires the
connection of the connecting circuit line to be implemented via the CA3B board.

Other features
Application for further V.24 ports on the system
Power demand +5V 100 mA

8.7.38 X64LI kBit Line Interface

Short description
The S64LI is a submodule of the IMUX for connection to international digital leased lines.

X64LI submodule on the IMUX board

1. X64LI submodule
2. Connecting circuit slot
3. IMUX board

Other features

CSI55 LX 07/2006 501

8 Boards

Country of Application in all countries

application
Power demand +5V 220 mA
Maximum 64 kBit/s
transmission rate
Use only as permanent connection or leased line
PCM coupling and layer 1 function
Can be combined with the S64LI submodule on the IMUX board.

8.8 IP Telephoning Gateways

Board Submodule Connection

board

Board/ IPGW → 502 DSP → 506 CAIB → 247

Rack/ S0 → 506
Backplane
VoIP → 513 SOM-2 → 576 AEV24B → 230

8.8.1 IPGW Internet Protocol Gateway

This board is no longer available. It has been replaced by VOIP board, see VoIP Voice over IP Board → 513
Short description
Besides excellent conformance to the relevant standards, the IPGW board offers a variety of new features.

Features
High voice quality
Up to 30 parallel calls per device
All relevant speech codings (G.711, G.723.1, G.726, G.729A)
Full telephone convenience with single-digit and block dialling, local and remote dialling tone, local noise
generation in call intervals.
Flexible voice routing options IP-IP, ISDN-ISDN and IP-ISDN (any to any dialling)
Flexible configuration options, connection as a subscriber or exchange to the PABX, ISDN network or by
looping into the existing exchange line.
Remote maintenance capability
Preconfiguration option
Built-in gatekeeper
Interoperability with other VoIP products

It consists of a gateway with integrated gatekeeper and two S2M interfaces (QSIG or DSS1 protocol) for
connection to the CSI55.
The gateway can be coupled with the CSI55 and an existing S2M exchange line via the two S2M interfaces.
An additional DT2 board is not required for the purpose. Calls from the public port are then transferred
transparently through the gateway. Connection to the IP network is via an Ethernet interface.

502 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

The IP interface offers the H.323 Media Stream protocol for speech and enables IP telephony on up to 30
channels (equippment option: 10, 20, 30 channels). Either H.323 terminals or other gateways for IP network-
ing of PABXs can be connected.
Support with tools (KAD, CAT, ISM) is not currently possible.
Until our own IP phone is available, the IP phone manufactured by Tiptel will be used as a terminal for direct
connection to the IP world.

H.323 environment

1. IP network (IP Network H.323 LM)

2. IP phone (NTP IP phone; H.323)

3. H.323 terminal

8.8.1.1 Configurations

Exchange line
Own DT2 board for each IPGW

CSI55 LX 07/2006 503

8 Boards

1. Public network

Exchange line
IPGW looped in

1. Public network

504 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Permanent connection
Own DT2 board for each IPGW

Permanent connection
IPGW looped in

CSI55 LX 07/2006 505

8 Boards

Example of a connection

1. Public network
2. MDF

8.8.1.2 Submodules on IPGW

The IPGW board is equipped with a S0submodule and a Digital Signal Processor (DSP) submodule. Depend-
ing on the configuration of IP channels on the IPGW, the board is additionaly equipped with a maximum of two
additional DSP submodules.

506 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Component side of the IPGW board

1. Slot for submodule S0

2. submodule slot for submodule DSP for the following equipment option: 10 channels (IP network connec-
tions)
3. submodule slot for submodule DSP for the following equipment option: 20 channels
4. submodule slot for submodule DSP for the following equipment option: 30 channels
5. free (currently not used)

6. LEDs and switches

7. PRI1
8. PRI2
9. S0

CSI55 LX 07/2006 507

8 Boards

10. 10/100 Base T

11. V.24 interface
12. V.24

8.8.1.3 LEDs and Switch Functions

IPGW board, front side

Switch Position in Normal Operation
S1 center
S2 left
Middle position
Switch Function

S1 Left: No function
Middle: Operating status/release
Right: Reset board *
* Reset duration

508 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

greater Standard configuration and special reset mode

5s
smaller Normal operating status with activated DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server
5s mode

S2 Left: Prepare the board for the connection to a hub

Middle: Configure the board for the connection to a PC

Meanings of LEDs

L1 5V on: 5V present/available
off: 5V not present/available
L2 PRI1 on: Layer 1 of transmission path is established
TE
L3 S/T on: Layer 1 of transmission path is established
L4 ACT on: Ethernet receives or sends data
off: Idle state
L5 Ready on: Board in operation, configuration in order
Flashing 1 time, then 1s pause. The DSP error
process starts once more from the
beginning.
Flashing 2 times, aprox. 0.5s pauses, then S0 error
1s pause. The process starts once more
from the beginning.
Flashing 4 times, aprox. 0.5s pauses, then S2M error
1s pause. The process starts once more
from the beginning
Flashing 6 times, aprox. 0.5s pauses, then Enet error (Enet = Ethernet)
1s pause. The process starts once more
from the beginning
Flashing 7 times, aprox. 0.5s pauses, then Uart error (Uart = V.24)
1s pause. The process starts once more
from the beginning
off: Board not ready
L6 PRI2 on: Layer 1 of transmission path is established
NT
L7 LINK on: Ethernet connection is running
off: Ethernet connection is not running
L8 Speed on: 100 Mbps
off: 10 Mbps

Assignment of the V.24 interface (male DSub 9) on the front panel

Signal name Description DSub 9 pin

CSI55 LX 07/2006 509

8 Boards

TXD Transmit Data (send data) 3

RXD Receive Data (reception data) 2
RTS Request To Send (switch on the transmitter) 7
CTS Clear To Send (readiness for sending) 8
DTR Data Terminal Ready (terminal ready for operation) 4
DSR Data Set Ready (operational readiness) 6
GND 5
DCD Data Carrier Detect (receive signal level) NC

The V.24 interface (console port) can be used for the first configuration of the IPGW.
Set the RS232 interface of your PC as follows:

Adjustments of the console port

Bits per second 9600
Data bits 8
Parity None
Stop bits 1
Protocol / flow control None

8.8.1.4 MDF Connections

The CAIB cable adapter serves for the connection of the cable network.

CAIB cable adapter

1. Connection cable CAIB - MDF

510 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Cable adapter CAIB, component side

1. Cable 6x2 to the main distribution frame

2. RJ45 socket for the Ethernet connection
3. V.24 connection (free)
4. Plug for backplane
5. Fixation

Two cables are available for the connection to the main distributor:

• ext. connection cable IPGW, 10m: 49.9903.4483

• ext. connection cable IPGW, 40m: 49.9903.4485

Through these cables the:

• Exchange line or permanent connections (S2M)

• Service, synchronization (S0)

are connected.

MDF Cable Adapter CAIB

Colours 6x2 IPWG
WH (white) / BN (brown) PRI1 A1/B1 (TX+/TX-)
GN (green) / YE (yellow) A2/B2 (RX+/RX-)
GY (grey) / PK (pink) PRI2 A1/B1 (TX+/TX-)
BU (blue) / RD (red) A2/B2 (RX+/RX-)
BK (black) / VT (violet) BRI A1/B1 (TX+/TX-)
GY PK (grey/pink) / RD BU A2/B2 (RX+/RX-)
(red/blue)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 511

8 Boards

PRI=Primary Rate Interface (S2M)

BRI=Basic Rate Interface (S0 /T0)
PRI1=TE
PRI2=NT
BRI=S0 (service, synchronization input)

8.8.1.5 Connection of the Ethernet Interface

The Ethernet connection located on thecable adapter is connected to the Ethernet 10/100 base T-connection
using a CAt5 structure cable with RJ45 plug.
The total length of the connection to the switch must not exceed 100 m.
Seizure of the Ethernet connection (RJ45)

Signal name Description RJ45 pin

TX+ Transmit 1
TX- Transmit 2
RX+ Receive 3
4
5
RX- Receive 6
7
8

8.8.1.6 Administration

The board mentioned above cannot be managed in CSI55 and in the tools. In order to avoid mistakes when
altering or retrofitting communication servers Integral 55 in the field due to the lack of tool administration to
the greatest possible extent, please proceed as follows:

1. • In the event of supply via KSPA, set up a ”T1CCS” as a pseudo-module (digital AO, country selec-
tion USA) in the KAD/CAT on the IPGW slot. The corresponding lines belonging to the DT2 board
are to be labelled Fxx01 - Fxx30 and named VoIP line
• When retrofitting in the field, set up a ”T1CCS” as a pseudo-module (digital AO, country selection
USA) in the KAD/CAT on the IPGW slot. The corresponding lines belonging to the DT2 board are
to be labelled Fxx01 - Fxx30 and named VoIP line
2. The register the system with ZOLS or change with the ”Comment”: Please register in the customer
data: Attention! IPGW board on the T1CSS slot (pseudo-board)

8.8.1.7 Technical Data

Log files

Internet: IP, TCP, UDP, RTP, DHCP, TFTP, ICMP

512 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

Configuration: Telnet, HTTP, Java

ISDN: ETSI DSS1, Q.SIG
Voice-over-IP: H.323, H.225, H.245, RTP, RTCP, RAS
Voice: Speech pause recognition (VAD)
Comfort noise generation (CNG),
dynamic jitter buffer,
G.711 A-law
G.711 µ-law
G.723.1 5.3 and 6.3 kbps
G.729A
G0.165

Special Features ”Overlapped” und ”non-overlapped sending”

Direct dialing-in (DDI)
Display caller and
called number (CLI, CPN)
Generate dial tones
Integrated gatekeeper
Optional operation to external gatekeeper
(RAS protocol)
Optional looping in the TC system
Public exchange
Upgradable for a greater number of ports

8.8.1.8 Description of software functions

The enclosed descriptionHBIP400 refers to IP400. All procedures correspond with those of the IPGW board.

8.8.2 VOIP Voice over IP Board

Short description
For the VOIP board and all additional information for setup, dimensioning etc. you can find a detailed descrip-
tion under Notes concerning VoIP.
It is shown once again in the figure below.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 513

8 Boards

VOIP board, component side

1. Speech compression / packetizing

2. Echo cancellation

The basic board VOIP (material number: 49.9903.7976) has 6 slots for SOM-2 submodules, with two DSP
chips each(Digital Signal Processing Small Outline Module 2, material number: 49.9903.7980) in order to
increase the number of DSP chips used in the system. These DSP chips have two functions:

• Voice compression, in order to pack voice information from the highway into data packets and thus to
compress the speech data when desired (from G.711 64 kbit/s to G.729A 8kbit/s)
• Echo cancellation for the voice connection from the IP terminal to the ISDN/analog terminals

The upper three slots (in the centre of the board) are used for voice compression and packetizing, while the
lower three slots are used for echo cancellation.
Due to the very high cost of DSP chips, the number of SOM-2 submodules must be selected in accordance
with the customer configuration (see calculation of the number of SOM-2 submodules).

514 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 8 Boards

In addition, 4 DSP chips are soldered on the VoIP board. These are responsible for central functions such as
announcements, mixers, and tone input, and support a fixed number of channels for voice compression and
echo cancellation.
The VOIP board connection to the peripherals is done via the AEV24B cable adapter.

Other features
Application Integration of the CSI55 extensions into the existing IP-based data network
environment of the customer (LAN, WAN, Corporate Network)
Power demand +5V 1800 mA additionally per SOM-2: 240 mA

Notes to VolP → 576

8.8.2.1 LEDs and Switch Functions

In the figure below the view of the front panel and the funktions of the switches and LEDs.

View of the front panel

Switch Functions

S1 Left: Preparatory disabling (VSP)

Middle: Operating status/release
Right: Reset
Right, then left: Forced board download

Meanings of LEDs

CSI55 LX 07/2006 515

8 Boards

L1 on: Module is busy in terms of exchange functions (active layer

3 connection)
flashing: Board removable after preparatory disabling
off: Board is not busy
L2 POWER on: All voltages (5V, 3.3V, DSP on-board VCC 1.8V and
GOOD) PQUICC Vcore currently 2.5V) are within their permitted
ranges of tolerance
L3 (ETH Link) on: Ethernet Link has been established
L4 (ETH on: 100Mbit transmission is in process (SPEED)
10/100)
L5 (ETH flashing: Activity on the Ethernet (transmitting and receiving ends)
active)
L6 on: Board reset in progress
flashing: Download in progress
off: Board in operation
L7 on: Status LED 2/3
L8 on: Status LED 2/2
L9 on: Status LED 2/1
L10 on: Status LED 2/0

516 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 9 BS Confidata:

9 BS Confidata:

Operating System – Configuration Data from E050

The distribution of software components and / or tasks in the 9030 system among the single GCU controls
is determined by the operating system configuration data. Like the 8030 system, each customer system is
not separately configured, instead certain configurations are specified by means of package-formation, which
each cover an area of the system. The slot allocation of the GCU is an exception, this occurs in the 9030
individually as per customer data.
From version E06 onwards, the OMSF task in the packages S2, I1...I4 is doubled (no primary function).

9.1 Packages

A configuration data package determines the operating system configuration data for a specific system exten-
sion. The packages are produced in the operating system development.
For the 9030 there are currently six packages.

• Package S1 for a single module

• package S2 for a twin-module and
• Packages I1,I2,I3 and I4 for various multi-module configurations.

9.2 GCU configuration

Each package defines the minimum and maximum number of GCUs in a system. The minimum number is
dependent on the imperative functions (e.g. central switching functions), the maximum number is dependent
on the GCUs defined in the package. The package defines which software (operating system/tasks) are
loaded on each GCU.
Each GCU is assigned to a logical group number (LGN - logical group number) The LGN must be defined for a
physical slot address on the module by TIP/PC-KAD. The LGNs, a function name (abbreviation of the control
function, e.g. CSF) and a ”mandatory/optional” code are supplied into TIP/PC-KAD/CAT in a data file.

9.2.1 Package S1

For single modules

LGN 1
mandatory/ m
optional

MSF1

MSF
CSF
LCF
MML

CSI55 LX 07/2006 517

9 BS Confidata:

PRST
CCC
AIC
O+M
CCU
ACT
TKOM
HOKO
FHS

9.2.1.1 Abbreviations

ACOM Asynchronous Communication (Protocol)

ACT Access Control Task
AIC Automatic Information Call
CCC Central Call Charge
CCU CSTA Control Unit
CCU’ Standby CCU
CSF Central Switching Functions
CSF’ Standby CSF
FHS File Handling System
GCU Generic Control Unit
ICU Interface Control Unit
LCF Loading Central Function (IVL)
MML Man Machine Language (management)
MSF Module Switching Functions (IVG)
PRST Protocol stack
UIP Universal Interface Platform
OMSF Operation and Maintenance Switching Functions
OMSF’ Standby OMSF
OMCF Operation and Maintenance Configuration Functions
OMAD Operation and Maintenance Access Data
OMBT Operation and Maintenance Backup Terminal
O+M Operation and Maintenance Function Package (OMSF, OMCF, OMAD, OMBT, ...)
HOKO Server task (Hotel communication)
TKOM Server task (text communication)

9.2.2 Package S2

For twin-modules

LGN 1 2

518 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 9 BS Confidata:

mandatory/ m m
optional

MSF1 MSF2

MSF MSF
CSF CSF’
LCF CCC
MML CCU’
AIC OMSF’
O+M PRST
CCU
ACT
TKOM
HOKO
PRST
FHS FHS

9.2.2.1 Abbreviations

ACOM Asynchronous Communication (Protocol)

ACT Access Control Task
AIC Automatic Information Call
CCC Central Call Charge
CCU CSTA Control Unit
CCU’ Standby CCU
CSF Central Switching Functions
CSF’ Standby CSF
FHS File Handling System
GCU Generic Control Unit
ICU Interface Control Unit
LCF Loading Central Function (IVL)
MML Man Machine Language (management)
MSF Module Switching Functions (IVG)
PRST Protocol stack
UIP Universal Interface Platform
OMSF Operation and Maintenance Switching Functions
OMSF’ Standby OMSF
OMCF Operation and Maintenance Configuration Functions
OMAD Operation and Maintenance Access Data
OMBT Operation and Maintenance Backup Terminal
O+M Operation and Maintenance Function Package (OMSF, OMCF, OMAD, OMBT, ...)
HOKO Server task (Hotel communication)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 519

9 BS Confidata:

TKOM Server task (text communication)

9.2.3 Package I1

for systems with up to 20 boards (use of 5ML board in the IMTU). In the first 3 modules of this package, central
and module-specific functions (CSF, LCF and MSF) are mixed.

LGN 1 2 3 4 5 6-20
mandatory/ m m o o o o

optional
MSF1 MSF2 MSF3 MSF4 MSF5 MSF6-20

MSF MSF MSF MSF MFS MSF

LCF CSF CSF’
CCC CCU CCU’
MML O+M OMSF’
AIC
TKOM
HOKO
PRST PRST
FHS FHS FHS FHS FHS
ACT

Remark:
If central functions are made available on separate GCU controls, it is possible to distribute these controls
freely in the system 1 (slots are alloted by TIP or KAD/CAT), but no slots are possible in the IMTU module.

1 GCU slots must be situated under a fan within the framework of the slots defined by the
GCU control.

9.2.3.1 Abbreviations

ACOM Asynchronous Communication (Protocol)

ACT Access Control Task
AIC Automatic Information Call
CCC Central Call Charge
CCU CSTA Control Unit
CCU’ Standby CCU
CSF Central Switching Functions
CSF’ Standby CSF
FHS File Handling System
GCU Generic Control Unit

520 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 9 BS Confidata:

ICU Interface Control Unit

LCF Loading Central Function (IVL)
MML Man Machine Language (management)
MSF Module Switching Functions (IVG)
PRST Protocol stack
UIP Universal Interface Platform
OMSF Operation and Maintenance Switching Functions
OMSF’ Standby OMSF
OMCF Operation and Maintenance Configuration Functions
OMAD Operation and Maintenance Access Data
OMBT Operation and Maintenance Backup Terminal
O+M Operation and Maintenance Function Package (OMSF, OMCF, OMAD, OMBT, ...)
HOKO Server task (Hotel communication)
TKOM Server task (text communication)

9.2.4 I2 Package

for customers, who want to see central functions in the hardware, and for large systems due to load. 2
additional controls are made available for the central switching functions (CSF and CSF’).

LGN 81 82 1 2 3 4 5 6-32
mandatory/ m m m o o o o o
optional
LCFA CSFP MSF1 MSF2 MSF3 MSF4 MSF5 MSF6-
32

CFS CFS’ MSF MSF MSF MSF MFS MSF

LCF CCC
MML CCU’
AIC OMSF’
ACT
O+M
CCU
TKOM
HOKO
PRST PRST
FHS FHS FHS FHS FHS

Remark:
If central functions are made available on separate GCU controls, it is possible to distribute these controls
freely in the system 1 (slots are alloted by TIP or KAD/CAT), but no slots are possible in the IMTU module.

1 GCU slots must be situated under a fan within the framework of the slots defined by the
GCU control.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 521

9 BS Confidata:

9.2.4.1 Abbreviations

ACOM Asynchronous Communication (Protocol)

ACT Access Control Task
AIC Automatic Information Call
CCC Central Call Charge
CCU CSTA Control Unit
CCU’ Standby CCU
CSF Central Switching Functions
CSF’ Standby CSF
FHS File Handling System
GCU Generic Control Unit
ICU Interface Control Unit
LCF Loading Central Function (IVL)
MML Man Machine Language (management)
MSF Module Switching Functions (IVG)
PRST Protocol stack
UIP Universal Interface Platform
OMSF Operation and Maintenance Switching Functions
OMSF’ Standby OMSF
OMCF Operation and Maintenance Configuration Functions
OMAD Operation and Maintenance Access Data
OMBT Operation and Maintenance Backup Terminal
O+M Operation and Maintenance Function Package (OMSF, OMCF, OMAD, OMBT, ...)
HOKO Server task (Hotel communication)
TKOM Server task (text communication)

9.2.5 I3 Package

for customers, who want to see central functions in the hardware, and for large systems due to load. 2
additional controls are made available for the central switching functions (CSF and CSF’). Furthermore, the
LCF and CCC functions are evacuated.

LGN 81 82 91 92 1 2 3 4-32
mandatory/ m o m m m o o o
optional
CSFA CSFP LCFA CCC MSF1 MSF2 MSF3 MSF4-
32

CFS CFS’ LCF CCC MSF MSF MFS MSF

CCU CCU’ MML OSMF’
AIC
ACT
O+M
TKOM
HOKO

522 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 9 BS Confidata:

PRST PRST
FHS FHS FHS FHS FHS

Remark:
If central functions are made available on separate GCU controls, it is possible to distribute these controls
freely in the system 1 (slots are alloted by TIP or KAD/CAT), but no slots are possible in the IMTU module.

1 GCU slots must be situated under a fan within the framework of the slots defined by the
GCU control.

9.2.5.1 Abbreviations

ACOM Asynchronous Communication (Protocol)

ACT Access Control Task
AIC Automatic Information Call
CCC Central Call Charge
CCU CSTA Control Unit
CCU’ Standby CCU
CSF Central Switching Functions
CSF’ Standby CSF
FHS File Handling System
GCU Generic Control Unit
ICU Interface Control Unit
LCF Loading Central Function (IVL)
MML Man Machine Language (management)
MSF Module Switching Functions (IVG)
PRST Protocol stack
UIP Universal Interface Platform
OMSF Operation and Maintenance Switching Functions
OMSF’ Standby OMSF
OMCF Operation and Maintenance Configuration Functions
OMAD Operation and Maintenance Access Data
OMBT Operation and Maintenance Backup Terminal
O+M Operation and Maintenance Function Package (OMSF, OMCF, OMAD, OMBT, ...)
HOKO Server task (Hotel communication)
TKOM Server task (text communication)

9.2.6 Package I4

for customers, who want to see central functions in the hardware, and for large systems due to load. 2
additional controls are made available for the central switching functions (CSF and CSF’), 2 controls for the

CSI55 LX 07/2006 523

9 BS Confidata:

CCU functions and 2 controls for the LCF and CCC functions. .

LGN 81 82 91 92 71 72 1 2-32
mandatory/ m m m m m o m o
optional
CSFA CSFP LCFA CCC CCUA CCUP MSF1 MSF2-
32

CFS CFS’ LCF CCC CCU CCU’ MFS MSF

MML OSMF’
AIC
ACT
O+M
TKOM
HOKO

PRST PRST PRST PRST

FHS FHS FHS FHS FHS

Remark:
If central functions are made available on separate GCU controls, it is possible to distribute these controls
freely in the system 1 (slots are alloted by TIP or KAD/CAT), but no slots are possible in the IMTU module.

1 GCU slots must be situated under a fan within the framework of the slots defined by the
GCU control.

9.2.6.1 Abbreviations

ACOM Asynchronous Communication (Protocol)

ACT Access Control Task
AIC Automatic Information Call
CCC Central Call Charge
CCU CSTA Control Unit
CCU’ Standby CCU
CSF Central Switching Functions
CSF’ Standby CSF
FHS File Handling System
GCU Generic Control Unit
ICU Interface Control Unit
LCF Loading Central Function (IVL)
MML Man Machine Language (management)
MSF Module Switching Functions (IVG)
PRST Protocol stack

524 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 9 BS Confidata:

UIP Universal Interface Platform

OMSF Operation and Maintenance Switching Functions
OMSF’ Standby OMSF
OMCF Operation and Maintenance Configuration Functions
OMAD Operation and Maintenance Access Data
OMBT Operation and Maintenance Backup Terminal
O+M Operation and Maintenance Function Package (OMSF, OMCF, OMAD, OMBT, ...)
HOKO Server task (Hotel communication)
TKOM Server task (text communication)

9.3 Interface Configuration

Each package also determines, among other things, the number and designation of hard disks and V.24
interfaces in the system. In this context, a distinction should be made between V.24 interfaces on GCU and
V.24 interfaces on UIP.
Each GCU is equipped with two V.24 interfaces, which are configured in the configuration data of the operating
system. The interfaces are addressed via the device name. The device names are allocated to a certain
interface by the physical device numbers (PDN = physical device number). The device names, PDN, the
interface type (console, ACOM) and the physical parameters can be changed within the system by operating
system configuration task.
Two V.24 interfaces can be connected to one UIP board. Configuration data and device names are pre-
configured in each package for V.24 interfaces on UIP. The allocation between an interface and a device name
is once more managed by PDN. The PDN must be allocated to an interface by ICU configuration data.
In each package there are currently 2 possible UIPs with V.24 in the system, each of which is partly operated
by the LCF.
Each configuration package contains

• a default configuration for the devices on GCU (online devices)

• an alternative configuration for the devices on GCU (offline devices)
• a predefined configuration for the devices on UIP

The main console (CO-01) is normally not connected to the system. The main console and console 2 (CO-02)
are configured on the same interface; when necessary, the main console is activated by a switch (only applies
to LCFs).
The following must be taken into account concerning the use of the consoles by the text output task S01:
In view of the fact that the S01 issues an extremely sizeable volume of reports on the console, a LCF console
should always be used for output. This means it is not necessary for these reports to be rerouted from the
S01 to the LCF via the CBus system, thus generating a longer processing time.
The following interfaces are currently defined in the operating system configuration data:

9.3.1 Single Modules S1

Single Module - Configuration Package S1

CSI55 LX 07/2006 525

9 BS Confidata:

Device LGN Device PDN State GCU/ Device Type Inter

name number ICU driver face
CO-01 173 1/2/3 101 ON1 GCU DVZT/ System console ASS2
DHZT Port A
CO-02 173 4/5/6 102 ON1 GCU DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port A
CO-03 173 7/8/9 103 OFF GCU DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port B
CO-04 181 19/20/ 105 2 ICU ICZT Console Port 03
21
CO-05 182 22/23/ 106 2 ICU ICZT Console Port 23
24
ZG-01 173 12 104 ON GCU DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
VC-01 173 14 108 OFF GCU DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
HS-01 171 16 301 ON GCU DVZH/ Harddisk SCS0
DHZP
HS-02 171 17 302 OFF GCU DVZH/ Harddisk SCS0
DHZP
TC-01- 173 28 700 ON GCU - S01 output to S0
01 ISM
TC-01- 173 29 700 ON GCU - Transparent S0
02 console
TC-01- 173 30 700 ON GCU - Transparent S0
03 console
TC-02- 173 31 700 ON GCU - S01 output to S0
01 ISM
TC-02- 173 32 700 ON GCU - Transparent S0
02 console
TC-02- 173 33 700 ON GCU - Transparent S0
03 console
TC-03- 173 34 700 ON GCU - S01 output to S0
01 ISM
TC-03- 173 35 700 ON GCU - Transparent S0
02 console
TC-03- 173 36 700 ON GCU - Transparent S0
03 console
ZG-02 183 13 109 2 ICU ICZT ACOM Port 03
VC-02 184 25 10A 2 ICU ICZT ACOM Port 23
DC-01 173 38 10B OFF GCU DVZT/ DCF77 ASS2
DHZT Port B

1 dependent on the ”System Console Connected” switch on the computer board (GCU)
2 dependent on the ICU customer data
3 The allocation of the PDN to a port on the ICU is defined in the ICU customer data, the given
values are only suggestions.

526 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 9 BS Confidata:

9.3.1.1 Abbreviations

ACOM Asynchronous Communication (Protocol)

ACT Access Control Task
AIC Automatic Information Call
CCC Central Call Charge
CCU CSTA Control Unit
CCU’ Standby CCU
CSF Central Switching Functions
CSF’ Standby CSF
FHS File Handling System
GCU Generic Control Unit
ICU Interface Control Unit
LCF Loading Central Function (IVL)
MML Man Machine Language (management)
MSF Module Switching Functions (IVG)
PRST Protocol stack
UIP Universal Interface Platform
OMSF Operation and Maintenance Switching Functions
OMSF’ Standby OMSF
OMCF Operation and Maintenance Configuration Functions
OMAD Operation and Maintenance Access Data
OMBT Operation and Maintenance Backup Terminal
O+M Operation and Maintenance Function Package (OMSF, OMCF, OMAD, OMBT, ...)
HOKO Server task (Hotel communication)
TKOM Server task (text communication)

9.3.2 Twin module S2

Twin-Module - Configuration Package S2

Device LGN Device PDN State GCU/ Device Type Inter

name number ICU driver face
CO-01 173 1/2/3 101 ON1 GCU1 DVZT/ System console ASS2
DHZT Port A
CO-02 173 4/5/6 102 ON1 GCU1 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port A
CO-03 173 7/8/9 103 ON GCU1 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port B
CO-04 181 19/20/ 105 2 ICU ICZT Console 2
21
CO-05 182 22/23/ 106 2 ICU ICZT Console 2
24
ZG-01 173 12 104 OFF GCU1 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B

CSI55 LX 07/2006 527

9 BS Confidata:

Device LGN Device PDN State GCU/ Device Type Inter

name number ICU driver face
VC-01 173 14 108 OFF GCU1 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
HS-01 171 16 301 ON GCU1 DVZH/ Harddisk SCS0
DHZP
HS-02 171 17 302 OFF GCU1 DVZH/ Harddisk SCS0
DHZP
TC-01- 173 28 700 ON GCU1 - S01 output to S0
01 ISM
TC-01- 173 29 700 ON GCU1 - Transparent S0
02 console
TC-01- 173 30 700 ON GCU1 - Transparent S0
03 console
TC-02- 173 31 700 ON GCU1 - S01 output to S0
01 ISM
TC-02- 173 32 700 ON GCU1 - Transparent S0
02 console
TC-02- 173 33 700 ON GCU1 - Transparent S0
03 console
TC-03- 173 34 700 ON GCU1 - S01 output to S0
01 ISM
TC-03- 173 35 700 ON GCU1 - Transparent S0
02 console
TC-03- 173 36 700 ON GCU1 - Transparent S0
03 console
ZG-02 173 13 109 2 ICU ICZT ACOM 2
VC-02 173 25 10A 2 ICU ICZT ACOM 2
DC-01 173 38 10B OFF GCU1 DVZT/ DCF77 ASS2
DHZT Port B
CO-12 176 4/5/6 102 OFF GCU2 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port A
CO-13 176 7/8/9 103 OFF GCU2 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port B
ZG-11 176 12 104 ON GCU2 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
VC-11 176 14 108 OFF GCU2 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
ZG-12 176 13 109 OFF GCU2 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port A
VC-12 176 25 10A ON GCU2 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port A

1 dependent on the ”System Console Connected” switch on the computer board (GCU)
2 dependent on the ICU customer data
3 The allocation of the PDN to a port on the ICU is defined in the ICU customer data, the given
values are only suggestions.

528 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 9 BS Confidata:

9.3.2.1 Abbreviations

ACOM Asynchronous Communication (Protocol)

ACT Access Control Task
AIC Automatic Information Call
CCC Central Call Charge
CCU CSTA Control Unit
CCU’ Standby CCU
CSF Central Switching Functions
CSF’ Standby CSF
FHS File Handling System
GCU Generic Control Unit
ICU Interface Control Unit
LCF Loading Central Function (IVL)
MML Man Machine Language (management)
MSF Module Switching Functions (IVG)
PRST Protocol stack
UIP Universal Interface Platform
OMSF Operation and Maintenance Switching Functions
OMSF’ Standby OMSF
OMCF Operation and Maintenance Configuration Functions
OMAD Operation and Maintenance Access Data
OMBT Operation and Maintenance Backup Terminal
O+M Operation and Maintenance Function Package (OMSF, OMCF, OMAD, OMBT, ...)
HOKO Server task (Hotel communication)
TKOM Server task (text communication)

9.3.3 Multi-Module I1

Multi-Module (up to 20 Modules) - Configuration Package I1

Device LGN Device PDN State GCU/ Device Type Inter

name number ICU driver face
CO-01 173 1/2/3 101 ON1 GCU1 DVZT/ System console ASS2
DHZT Port A
CO-02 173 4/5/6 102 ON1 GCU1 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port A
CO-03 173 7/8/9 103 OFF GCU1 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port B
CO-04 181 19/20/ 105 2 ICU ICZT Console 2
21
CO-05 182 22/23/ 106 2 ICU ICZT Console 2
24
ZG-01 173 12 104 ON GCU1 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B

CSI55 LX 07/2006 529

9 BS Confidata:

Device LGN Device PDN State GCU/ Device Type Inter

name number ICU driver face
VC-01 173 14 108 OFF GCU1 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
HS-01 171 16 301 ON GCU1 DVZH/ Harddisk SCS0
DHZP
HS-02 171 17 302 OFF GCU1 DVZH/ Harddisk SCS0
DHZP
TC-01- 173 28 700 ON GCU1 - S01 output to S0
01 ISM
TC-01- 173 29 700 ON GCU1 - Transparent S0
02 console
TC-01- 173 30 700 ON GCU1 - Transparent S0
03 console
TC-02- 173 31 700 ON GCU1 - S01 output to S0
01 ISM
TC-02- 173 32 700 ON GCU1 - Transparent S0
02 console
TC-02- 173 33 700 ON GCU1 - Transparent S0
03 console
TC-03- 173 34 700 ON GCU1 - S01 output to S0
01 ISM
TC-03- 173 35 700 ON GCU1 - Transparent S0
02 console
TC-03- 173 36 700 ON GCU1 - Transparent S0
03 console
ZG-02 183 13 109 2 ICU ICZT ACOM 2
VC-02 184 25 10A 2 ICU ICZT ACOM 2
DC-01 173 38 10B OFF GCU1 DVZT/ DCF77 ASS2
DHZT Port B
CO-12 176 4/5/6 102 ON GCU2 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port A
CO-13 176 7/8/9 103 OFF GCU2 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port B
ZG-11 176 12 104 OFF GCU2 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
VC-11 176 14 108 ON GCU2 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
ZG-12 176 13 109 OFF GCU2 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port A
VC-12 176 25 10A OFF GCU2 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port A

1 dependent on the ”System Console Connected” switch on the computer board (GCU)
2 dependent on the ICU customer data
3 The allocation of the PDN to a port on the ICU is defined in the ICU customer data, the given
values are only suggestions.

530 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 9 BS Confidata:

9.3.3.1 Abbreviations

ACOM Asynchronous Communication (Protocol)

ACT Access Control Task
AIC Automatic Information Call
CCC Central Call Charge
CCU CSTA Control Unit
CCU’ Standby CCU
CSF Central Switching Functions
CSF’ Standby CSF
FHS File Handling System
GCU Generic Control Unit
ICU Interface Control Unit
LCF Loading Central Function (IVL)
MML Man Machine Language (management)
MSF Module Switching Functions (IVG)
PRST Protocol stack
UIP Universal Interface Platform
OMSF Operation and Maintenance Switching Functions
OMSF’ Standby OMSF
OMCF Operation and Maintenance Configuration Functions
OMAD Operation and Maintenance Access Data
OMBT Operation and Maintenance Backup Terminal
O+M Operation and Maintenance Function Package (OMSF, OMCF, OMAD, OMBT, ...)
HOKO Server task (Hotel communication)
TKOM Server task (text communication)

9.3.4 Multi-Module I1 (continued)

Multi-Module (up to 20 Modules) - Configuration Package I1 ... continued

Device LGN Device PDN State GCU/ Device Type Interface

name number ICU driver
CO-22 177 4/5/6 102 ON GCU3 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port A
CO-23 177 7/8/9 103 ON GCU3 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port B
ZG-21 177 12 104 OFF GCU3 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
VC-21 177 14 108 OFF GCU3 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
ZG-22 177 13 109 OFF GCU3 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port A
VC-22 177 25 10A OFF GCU3 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port A

CSI55 LX 07/2006 531

9 BS Confidata:

Device LGN Device PDN State GCU/ Device Type Interface

name number ICU driver
CO-32 178 4/5/6 102 ON GCU4 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port A
CO-33 178 7/8/9 103 ON GCU4 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port B
ZG-31 178 12 104 OFF GCU4 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
VC-31 178 14 108 OFF GCU4 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
ZG-32 178 13 109 OFF GCU4 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port A
VC-32 178 25 10A OFF GCU4 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port A
CO-42 179 4/5/6 102 ON GCU5 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port A
CO-43 179 7/8/9 103 ON GCU5 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port B
ZG-41 179 12 104 OFF GCU5 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
VC-41 179 14 108 OFF GCU5 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
ZG-42 179 13 109 OFF GCU5 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port A
VC-42 179 25 10A OFF GCU5 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port A

1 dependent on the ”System Console Connected” switch on the computer board (GCU)
2 dependent on the ICU customer data
3 The allocation of the PDN to a port on the ICU is defined in the ICU customer data, the given
values are only suggestions.

9.3.4.1 Abbreviations

ACOM Asynchronous Communication (Protocol)

ACT Access Control Task
AIC Automatic Information Call
CCC Central Call Charge
CCU CSTA Control Unit
CCU’ Standby CCU
CSF Central Switching Functions
CSF’ Standby CSF
FHS File Handling System
GCU Generic Control Unit

532 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 9 BS Confidata:

ICU Interface Control Unit

LCF Loading Central Function (IVL)
MML Man Machine Language (management)
MSF Module Switching Functions (IVG)
PRST Protocol stack
UIP Universal Interface Platform
OMSF Operation and Maintenance Switching Functions
OMSF’ Standby OMSF
OMCF Operation and Maintenance Configuration Functions
OMAD Operation and Maintenance Access Data
OMBT Operation and Maintenance Backup Terminal
O+M Operation and Maintenance Function Package (OMSF, OMCF, OMAD, OMBT, ...)
HOKO Server task (Hotel communication)
TKOM Server task (text communication)

9.3.5 Multi-Modules I2

Multi-Module (up to 32 Modules) - Configuration Package I1

Device LGN Device PDN State GCU/ Device Type Interface

name number ICU driver
CO-01 173 1/2/3 101 ON1 GCU81 DVZT/ System console ASS2
DHZT Port A
CO-02 173 4/5/6 102 ON1 GCU81 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port A
CO-03 173 7/8/9 103 OFF GCU81 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port B
CO-04 181 19/20/ 105 2 ICU ICZT Console 2
21
CO-05 182 22/23/ 106 2 ICU ICZT Console 2
24
ZG-01 173 12 104 ON GCU81 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
VC-01 173 14 108 OFF GCU81 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
HS-01 171 16 301 ON GCU81 DVZH/ Harddisk SCS0
DHZP
HS-02 171 17 302 OFF GCU81 DVZH/ Harddisk SCS0
DHZP
TC-01- 173 28 700 ON GCU81 - S01 output to S0
01 ISM
TC-01- 173 29 700 ON GCU81 - Transparent S0
02 console
TC-01- 173 30 700 ON GCU81 - Transparent S0
03 console
TC-02- 173 31 700 ON GCU81 - S01 output to S0
01 ISM

CSI55 LX 07/2006 533

9 BS Confidata:

Device LGN Device PDN State GCU/ Device Type Interface

name number ICU driver
TC-02- 173 32 700 ON GCU81 - Transparent S0
02 console
TC-02- 173 33 700 ON GCU81 - Transparent S0
03 console
TC-03- 173 34 700 ON GCU81 - S01 output to S0
01 ISM
TC-03- 173 35 700 ON GCU81 - Transparent S0
02 console
TC-03- 173 36 700 ON GCU81 - Transparent S0
03 console
ZG-02 183 13 109 2 ICU ICZT ACOM 2
VC-02 184 25 10A 2 ICU ICZT ACOM 2
DC-01 173 38 10B OFF GCU81 DVZT/ DCF77 ASS2
DHZT Port B
CO-12 174 4/5/6 102 ON GCU82 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port A
CO-13 174 7/8/9 103 OFF GCU82 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port B
ZG-11 174 12 104 OFF GCU82 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
VC-11 174 14 108 ON GCU82 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
ZG-12 174 13 109 OFF GCU82 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port A
VC-12 174 25 10A OFF GCU82 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port A

1 dependent on the ”System Console Connected” switch on the computer board (GCU)
2 dependent on the ICU customer data
3 The allocation of the PDN to a port on the ICU is defined in the ICU customer data, the given
values are only suggestions.

9.3.5.1 Abbreviations

ACOM Asynchronous Communication (Protocol)

ACT Access Control Task
AIC Automatic Information Call
CCC Central Call Charge
CCU CSTA Control Unit
CCU’ Standby CCU
CSF Central Switching Functions
CSF’ Standby CSF

534 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 9 BS Confidata:

FHS File Handling System

GCU Generic Control Unit
ICU Interface Control Unit
LCF Loading Central Function (IVL)
MML Man Machine Language (management)
MSF Module Switching Functions (IVG)
PRST Protocol stack
UIP Universal Interface Platform
OMSF Operation and Maintenance Switching Functions
OMSF’ Standby OMSF
OMCF Operation and Maintenance Configuration Functions
OMAD Operation and Maintenance Access Data
OMBT Operation and Maintenance Backup Terminal
O+M Operation and Maintenance Function Package (OMSF, OMCF, OMAD, OMBT, ...)
HOKO Server task (Hotel communication)
TKOM Server task (text communication)

9.3.6 Multi-Module I2 (continued)

Multi-Module (up to 32 Modules) - Configuration Package I2 ... continued

Device LGN Device PDN State GCU/ Device Type Interface

name number ICU driver
CO-22 177 4/5/6 102 ON GCU3 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port A
CO-23 177 7/8/9 103 ON GCU3 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port B
ZG-21 177 12 104 OFF GCU3 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
VC-21 177 14 108 OFF GCU3 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
ZG-22 177 13 109 OFF GCU3 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port A
VC-22 177 25 10A OFF GCU3 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port A
CO-32 178 4/5/6 102 ON GCU4 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port A
CO-33 178 7/8/9 103 ON GCU4 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port B
ZG-31 178 12 104 OFF GCU4 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
VC-31 178 14 108 OFF GCU4 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
ZG-32 178 13 109 OFF GCU4 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port A
VC-32 178 25 10A OFF GCU4 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port A

CSI55 LX 07/2006 535

9 BS Confidata:

Device LGN Device PDN State GCU/ Device Type Interface

name number ICU driver
CO-42 179 4/5/6 102 ON GCU5 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port A
CO-43 179 7/8/9 103 ON GCU5 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port B
ZG-41 179 12 104 OFF GCU5 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
VC-41 179 14 108 OFF GCU5 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
ZG-42 179 13 109 OFF GCU5 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port A
VC-42 179 25 10A OFF GCU5 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port A

1 dependent on the ”System Console Connected” switch on the computer board (GCU)
2 dependent on the ICU customer data
3 The allocation of the PDN to a port on the ICU is defined in the ICU customer data, the given
values are only suggestions.

9.3.6.1 Abbreviations

ACOM Asynchronous Communication (Protocol)

ACT Access Control Task
AIC Automatic Information Call
CCC Central Call Charge
CCU CSTA Control Unit
CCU’ Standby CCU
CSF Central Switching Functions
CSF’ Standby CSF
FHS File Handling System
GCU Generic Control Unit
ICU Interface Control Unit
LCF Loading Central Function (IVL)
MML Man Machine Language (management)
MSF Module Switching Functions (IVG)
PRST Protocol stack
UIP Universal Interface Platform
OMSF Operation and Maintenance Switching Functions
OMSF’ Standby OMSF
OMCF Operation and Maintenance Configuration Functions
OMAD Operation and Maintenance Access Data
OMBT Operation and Maintenance Backup Terminal

536 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 9 BS Confidata:

O+M Operation and Maintenance Function Package (OMSF, OMCF, OMAD, OMBT, ...)
HOKO Server task (Hotel communication)
TKOM Server task (text communication)

9.3.7 Multi-Modules I3

Multi-Module (up to 32 Modules) - Configuration Package I3

Device LGN Device PDN State GCU/ Device Type Interface

name number ICU driver
CO-01 173 1/2/3 101 ON1 GCU91 DVZT/ System console ASS2
DHZT Port A
CO-02 173 4/5/6 102 ON1 GCU91 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port A
CO-03 173 7/8/9 103 OFF GCU91 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port B
CO-04 181 19/20/ 105 2 ICU ICZT Console 2
21
CO-05 182 22/23/ 106 2 ICU ICZT Console 2
24
ZG-01 173 12 104 OFF GCU91 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
VC-01 173 14 108 ON GCU91 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
HS-01 171 16 301 ON GCU91 DVZH/ Harddisk SCS0
DHZP
HS-02 171 17 302 OFF GCU91 DVZH/ Harddisk SCS0
DHZP
TC-01- 173 28 700 ON GCU91 - S01 output to S0
01 ISM
TC-01- 173 29 700 ON GCU91 - Transparent S0
02 console
TC-01- 173 30 700 ON GCU91 - Transparent S0
03 console
TC-02- 173 31 700 ON GCU91 - S01 output to S0
01 ISM
TC-02- 173 32 700 ON GCU91 - Transparent S0
02 console
TC-02- 173 33 700 ON GCU91 - Transparent S0
03 console
TC-03- 173 34 700 ON GCU91 - S01 output to S0
01 ISM
TC-03- 173 35 700 ON GCU91 - Transparent S0
02 console
TC-03- 173 36 700 ON GCU91 - Transparent S0
03 console
ZG-02 183 13 109 2 ICU ICZT ACOM 2
VC-02 184 25 10A 2 ICU ICZT ACOM 2

CSI55 LX 07/2006 537

9 BS Confidata:

Device LGN Device PDN State GCU/ Device Type Interface

name number ICU driver
DC-01 173 38 10B OFF GCU91 DVZT/ DCF77 ASS2
DHZT Port B
CO-12 174 4/5/6 102 ON GCU92 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port A
CO-13 174 7/8/9 103 OFF GCU92 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port B
ZG-11 174 12 104 ON GCU92 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
VC-11 174 14 108 OFF GCU92 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
ZG-12 174 13 109 OFF GCU92 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port A
VC-12 174 25 10A OFF GCU92 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port A

1 dependent on the ”System Console Connected” switch on the computer board (GCU)
2 dependent on the ICU customer data
3 The allocation of the PDN to a port on the ICU is defined in the ICU customer data, the given
values are only suggestions.

9.3.7.1 Abbreviations

ACOM Asynchronous Communication (Protocol)

ACT Access Control Task
AIC Automatic Information Call
CCC Central Call Charge
CCU CSTA Control Unit
CCU’ Standby CCU
CSF Central Switching Functions
CSF’ Standby CSF
FHS File Handling System
GCU Generic Control Unit
ICU Interface Control Unit
LCF Loading Central Function (IVL)
MML Man Machine Language (management)
MSF Module Switching Functions (IVG)
PRST Protocol stack
UIP Universal Interface Platform
OMSF Operation and Maintenance Switching Functions
OMSF’ Standby OMSF
OMCF Operation and Maintenance Configuration Functions

538 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 9 BS Confidata:

OMAD Operation and Maintenance Access Data

OMBT Operation and Maintenance Backup Terminal
O+M Operation and Maintenance Function Package (OMSF, OMCF, OMAD, OMBT, ...)
HOKO Server task (Hotel communication)
TKOM Server task (text communication)

9.3.8 Multi-Module I3 (continued)

Multi-Module (up to 32 Modules) - Configuration Package I3 ... continued

Device LGN Device PDN State GCU/ Device Type Interface

name number ICU driver
CO-22 177 4/5/6 102 ON GCU81 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port A
CO-23 177 7/8/9 103 ON GCU81 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port B
ZG-21 177 12 104 OFF GCU81 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
VC-21 177 14 108 OFF GCU81 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
ZG-22 177 13 109 OFF GCU81 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port A
VC-22 177 25 10A OFF GCU81 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port A
CO-32 178 4/5/6 102 ON GCU82 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port A
CO-33 178 7/8/9 103 ON GCU82 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port B
ZG-31 178 12 104 OFF GCU82 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
VC-31 178 14 108 OFF GCU82 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
ZG-32 178 13 109 OFF GCU82 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port A
VC-32 178 25 10A OFF GCU82 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port A
CO-42 179 4/5/6 102 ON GCU1 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port A
CO-43 179 7/8/9 103 ON GCU1 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port B
ZG-41 179 12 104 OFF GCU1 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
VC-41 179 14 108 OFF GCU1 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
ZG-42 179 13 109 OFF GCU1 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port A
VC-42 179 25 10A OFF GCU1 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port A

CSI55 LX 07/2006 539

9 BS Confidata:

1 dependent on the ”System Console Connected” switch on the computer board (GCU)
2 dependent on the ICU customer data
3 The allocation of the PDN to a port on the ICU is defined in the ICU customer data, the given
values are only suggestions.

9.3.8.1 Abbreviations

ACOM Asynchronous Communication (Protocol)

ACT Access Control Task
AIC Automatic Information Call
CCC Central Call Charge
CCU CSTA Control Unit
CCU’ Standby CCU
CSF Central Switching Functions
CSF’ Standby CSF
FHS File Handling System
GCU Generic Control Unit
ICU Interface Control Unit
LCF Loading Central Function (IVL)
MML Man Machine Language (management)
MSF Module Switching Functions (IVG)
PRST Protocol stack
UIP Universal Interface Platform
OMSF Operation and Maintenance Switching Functions
OMSF’ Standby OMSF
OMCF Operation and Maintenance Configuration Functions
OMAD Operation and Maintenance Access Data
OMBT Operation and Maintenance Backup Terminal
O+M Operation and Maintenance Function Package (OMSF, OMCF, OMAD, OMBT, ...)
HOKO Server task (Hotel communication)
TKOM Server task (text communication)

9.3.9 Multi-Modules I4

Multi-Module (up to 32 Modules) - Configuration Package I4

Device LGN Device PDN State GCU/ Device Type Interface

name number ICU driver
CO-01 173 1/2/3 101 ON1 GCU91 DVZT/ System console ASS2
DHZT Port A
CO-02 173 4/5/6 102 ON1 GCU91 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port A

540 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 9 BS Confidata:

Device LGN Device PDN State GCU/ Device Type Interface

name number ICU driver
CO-03 173 7/8/9 103 OFF GCU91 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port B
CO-04 181 19/20/ 105 2 ICU ICZT Console 2
21
CO-05 182 22/23/ 106 2 ICU ICZT Console 2
24
ZG-01 173 12 104 OFF GCU91 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
VC-01 173 14 108 ON GCU91 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
HS-01 171 16 301 ON GCU91 DVZH/ Harddisk SCS0
DHZP
HS-02 171 17 302 OFF GCU91 DVZH/ Harddisk SCS0
DHZP
TC-01- 173 28 700 ON GCU91 - S01 output to S0
01 ISM
TC-01- 173 29 700 ON GCU91 - Transparent S0
02 console
TC-01- 173 30 700 ON GCU91 - Transparent S0
03 console
TC-02- 173 31 700 ON GCU91 - S01 output to S0
01 ISM
TC-02- 173 32 700 ON GCU91 - Transparent S0
02 console
TC-02- 173 33 700 ON GCU91 - Transparent S0
03 console
TC-03- 173 34 700 ON GCU91 - S01 output to S0
01 ISM
TC-03- 173 35 700 ON GCU91 - Transparent S0
02 console
TC-03- 173 36 700 ON GCU91 - Transparent S0
03 console
ZG-02 183 13 109 2 ICU ICZT ACOM 2
VC-02 184 25 10A 2 ICU ICZT ACOM 2
DC-01 173 38 10B OFF GCU91 DVZT/ DCF77 ASS2
DHZT Port B
CO-12 174 4/5/6 102 ON GCU92 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port A
CO-13 174 7/8/9 103 OFF GCU92 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port B
ZG-11 174 12 104 ON GCU92 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
VC-11 174 14 108 OFF GCU92 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
ZG-12 174 13 109 OFF GCU92 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port A

CSI55 LX 07/2006 541

9 BS Confidata:

Device LGN Device PDN State GCU/ Device Type Interface

name number ICU driver
VC-12 174 25 10A OFF GCU92 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port A

1 dependent on the ”System Console Connected” switch on the computer board (GCU)
2 dependent on the ICU customer data
3 The allocation of the PDN to a port on the ICU is defined in the ICU customer data, the given
values are only suggestions.

9.3.9.1 Abbreviations

ACOM Asynchronous Communication (Protocol)

ACT Access Control Task
AIC Automatic Information Call
CCC Central Call Charge
CCU CSTA Control Unit
CCU’ Standby CCU
CSF Central Switching Functions
CSF’ Standby CSF
FHS File Handling System
GCU Generic Control Unit
ICU Interface Control Unit
LCF Loading Central Function (IVL)
MML Man Machine Language (management)
MSF Module Switching Functions (IVG)
PRST Protocol stack
UIP Universal Interface Platform
OMSF Operation and Maintenance Switching Functions
OMSF’ Standby OMSF
OMCF Operation and Maintenance Configuration Functions
OMAD Operation and Maintenance Access Data
OMBT Operation and Maintenance Backup Terminal
O+M Operation and Maintenance Function Package (OMSF, OMCF, OMAD, OMBT, ...)
HOKO Server task (Hotel communication)
TKOM Server task (text communication)

9.3.10 Multi-Module I4 (continued)

Mult-Module (up to 32 Modules) - Configuration Package I2 ... continued

542 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 9 BS Confidata:

Device LGN Device PDN State GCU/ Device Type Interface

name number ICU driver
CO-22 177 4/5/6 102 ON GCU81 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port A
CO-23 177 7/8/9 103 ON GCU81 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port B
ZG-21 177 12 104 OFF GCU81 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
VC-21 177 14 108 OFF GCU81 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
ZG-22 177 13 109 OFF GCU81 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port A
VC-22 177 25 10A OFF GCU81 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port A
CO-32 178 4/5/6 102 ON GCU82 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port A
CO-33 178 7/8/9 103 ON GCU82 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port B
ZG-31 178 12 104 OFF GCU82 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
VC-31 178 14 108 OFF GCU82 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
ZG-32 178 13 109 OFF GCU82 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port A
VC-32 178 25 10A OFF GCU82 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port A
CO-42 179 4/5/6 102 ON GCU1 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port A
CO-43 179 7/8/9 103 ON GCU1 DVZT/ Console ASS2
DHZT Port B
ZG-41 179 12 104 OFF GCU1 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
VC-41 179 14 108 OFF GCU1 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port B
ZG-42 179 13 109 OFF GCU1 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port A
VC-42 179 25 10A OFF GCU1 DVZA/ ACOM ASS2
DHZA Port A

1 dependent on the ”System Console Connected” switch on the computer board (GCU)
2 dependent on the ICU customer data
3 The allocation of the PDN to a port on the ICU is defined in the ICU customer data, the given
values are only suggestions.

For consoles (CO-xx), three devices have been mapped onto each interface:

• CO-xx-1 Fault output level

CSI55 LX 07/2006 543

9 BS Confidata:

• CO-xx-2 Control level (for prologue)

• CO-xx-3 Input/Output level (for dialogue)

9.3.10.1 Abbreviations

ACOM Asynchronous Communication (Protocol)

ACT Access Control Task
AIC Automatic Information Call
CCC Central Call Charge
CCU CSTA Control Unit
CCU’ Standby CCU
CSF Central Switching Functions
CSF’ Standby CSF
FHS File Handling System
GCU Generic Control Unit
ICU Interface Control Unit
LCF Loading Central Function (IVL)
MML Man Machine Language (management)
MSF Module Switching Functions (IVG)
PRST Protocol stack
UIP Universal Interface Platform
OMSF Operation and Maintenance Switching Functions
OMSF’ Standby OMSF
OMCF Operation and Maintenance Configuration Functions
OMAD Operation and Maintenance Access Data
OMBT Operation and Maintenance Backup Terminal
O+M Operation and Maintenance Function Package (OMSF, OMCF, OMAD, OMBT, ...)
HOKO Server task (Hotel communication)
TKOM Server task (text communication)

544 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 10 Cable network

10 Cable network

10.1 Connections from CSI

The connections of the connecting circuit boards and test connections are conducted through prefabricated
cables in

• Main distributor
• Network Termination
• Service panel

10.1.1 Main Distribution Frame or Network Termination

The cables running from the cable adapters to the main distributor can be supplied in two variants:

• Open end on the main distributor frame

• With champ connector for the patch panel

Cable with open end

Connect the sheath wires of the connecting cables with the open end to the ground clamps.

Cable for patch panels

The following patch panel variants can be mounted in the cabinets:

Patch panel 24 part (3x8 WE, Material number: 4.999.046.814

4-wire)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 545

10 Cable network

Champ-PIN
WE-PIN WE 1 WE 2 WE 3 WE 4 WE 5 WE 6 WE 7 WE 8
1
2
3 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
4 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
5 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40
6 27 29 31 33 35 37 39 41
7
8

1. Champ 1
2. Champ 2
3. Champ 3
4. WE1

This patch panel is designed for the four-wire connection. These may be the connections for the following
boards:

ADM → 551
DECT21 → 552
DS02/3 → 553
DT0 → 553
UIP → 554

Patch panel 48 ports (3x16 WE, Material number: 4.999.046.813

2-wire)

546 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 10 Cable network

Champ-PIN
WE-PIN WE WE WE WE WE WE WE WE WE WE WE WE WE WE WE WE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1
2
3
4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
5 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
6
7
8

1. Champ 1
2. Champ 2
3. Champ 3
4. WE1
5. WE2

This patch panel is designed for the two-wire connection. These may be the connections for the following
boards:

ADM → 551 ATB → 557 DUP03 → 548

ASC2 → 554 ATC → 557 DUPN → 548
ASC21 → 550 ATLC → 558 MAC → 549
ASCEU → 555 DDID → 561 MULI → 549
ATA → 556 JPAT → 560 UIP → 554
ATA2 → 556

CSI55 LX 07/2006 547

10 Cable network

Take note that if appropriate you may have to use two cables for each connecting circuit
board.

For the service the

Service patch panel → 562 Material number: 49.9904.8477

is available.

10.1.1.1 MDF connections of DUP03

MDF via CA1B from the DUP03

Colours 16x2 Patch panel
for the
two-wire
connection
RD/BU WE 1 A1/B1
WH/YE WE 2 A2/B2
WH/GN WE 3 A3/B3
WH/BN WE 4 A4/B4
WH/BK WE 5 A5/B5
WH/BU WE 6 A6/B6
WH/YE WE 7 A7/B7
WH/GN WE 8 A8/B8
WH/BN WE 9 A9/b9
WH/BK WE 10 A10/B10
WH/BU WE 11 A11/B11
RD/YE WE 12 A12/B12
WH/GN WE 13 A13/B13
WH/BN WE 14 A14/B14
WH/BK WE 15 A15/B15
WH/BU WE 16 A16/B16

10.1.1.2 MDF connections DUPN

MDF via CA2B from DUPN

Colours 16x2 Patch panel Cable 1 Cable 2
for the
two wire
connection
RD/BU WE 1 A1/B1 A1/B17
WH/YE WE 2 A2/B2 A18/B18
WH/GN WE 3 A3/B3 A19/B19
WH/BN WE 4 A4/B4 A20/B20

548 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 10 Cable network

WH/BK WE 5 A5/B5 A21/B21

WH/BU WE 6 A6/B5 A22/B22
WH/YE WE 7 A7/B7 A23/B23
WH/GN WE 8 A8/B8 A24/B24
WH/BN WE 9 A9/B9 A25/B25
WH/BK WE 10 A10/B10 A26/B26
WH/BU WE 11 A11/B11 A27/B27
RD/YE WE 12 A12/B12 A28/B28
WH/GN WE 13 A13/B13 A29/B29
WH/BN WE 14 A14/B14 A30/B30
WH/BK WE 15 A15/B15 A31/B31
WH/BU WE 16 A16/B16 A32/B32

10.1.1.3 MDF connections MAC

The cable adapter CA6B must be used for the integration of the MAC into the I55 modules.

MDF via CA6B of the MAC

Colours Patch panel UP0
for two-wire
connection
RD/BU WE 1 A1/B1
WH/YE WE 2 A1/B1
WH/GN WE 3 A1/B1
WH/BN WE 4 A1/B1
WH/BK WE 5 A1/B1
WH/BU WE 6 A1/B1
WH/YE WE 7 A1/B1
WH/GN WE 8 A1/B1
WH/BN WE 9 free
WH/BK WE 10 free
WH/BU WE 11 free
RD/YE WE 12 free
WH/GN WE 13 free
WH/BN WE 14 free
WH/BK WE 15 free
WH/BK WE 16 free

10.1.1.4 MDF connections of MULI

MDF via CA1B from

MULI (UP0)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 549

10 Cable network

Colours 16x2 Patch panel

for the
two wire
connection
RD/BU WE 1 A1/B1
WH/YE WE 2 A2/B2
WH/GN WE 3 A3/B3
WH/BN WE 4 A4/B4
WH/BK WE 5 A5/B5
WH/BU WE 6 A6/B6
WH/YE WE 7 A7/B7
WH/GN WE 8 A8/B8
WH/BN WE 9 A9/B9
WH/BK WE 10 A10/B10
WH/BU WE 11 A11/B11
RD/YE WE 12 A12/B12
WH/GN WE 13 A13/B13
WH/BN WE 14 A14/B14
WH/BK WE 15 A15/B15
WH/BU WE 16 A16/B16

10.1.1.5 MDF connections of ASC21

MDF Cable Adapter CA2B or CARUB for

ASC21
Colours 16x2 Patch Cable 1 Cable 2
panel
for
two-wire
connection
RD/BU WE 1 a1/b1 a17/b17
WH/YE WE 2 a2/b2 a18/b18
WH/GN WE 3 a3/b3 a19/b19
WH/BN WE 4 a4/b4 a20/b20
WH/BK WE 5 a5/b5 a21/b21
WH/BU WE 6 a6/b6 a22/b22
WH/YE WE 7 a7/b7 a23/b23
WH/GN WE 8 a8/b8 a24/b24
WH/BN WE 9 a9/b9 a25/b25
WH/BK WE 10 a10/b10 a26/b26
WH/BU WE 11 a11/b11 a27/b27
RD/YE WE 12 a12/b12 a28/b28
WH/GN WE 13 a13/b13 a29/b29
WH/BN WE 14 a14/b14 a30/b30
WH/BK WE 15 a15/b15 a31/b31

550 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 10 Cable network

WH/BU WE 16 a16/b16 a32/b32

10.1.1.6 MDF connections of ADM

MDF, Cable 1 via CA2B from

Colours 16x2 Patch panel Patch panel ADM ADM ADM ADM with
for the for the with with with ABSM/
two wire four-wire STSM UPSM UKSM ABSM1
connection connection
RD/BU WE 1 WE 1 1st slot A1/B1 A1/B1 A1/B1 a1/b1
(T)
WH/YE WE 2 C1/D1 free free free
(R)
WH/GN WE 3 WE 2 A2/B2 A2/B2 A2/B2 a2/b2
(T)
WH/BN WE 4 C2/D2 free free free
(R)
WH/BK WE 5 WE 3 A3/B3 A3/B3 free a3/b3
(T)
WH/BU WE 6 C3/D3 free free free
(R)
WH/YE WE 7 WE 4 A4/B4 A4/B4 free a4/b4
(T)
WH/GN WE 8 C4/D4 free free free
(R)
WH/BN WE 9 WE 5 2nd slot A5/B5 A5/B5 A3/B3 a5/b5
(T)
WH/BK WE 10 C5/D5 free free free
(R)
WH/BU WE 11 WE 6 A6/B6 A6/B6 A4/B4 a6/b6
(T)
RD/YE WE 12 C6/D6 free free free
(R)
WH/GN WE 13 WE 7 A7/B7 A7/B7 free a7/b7
(T)
WH/BN WE 14 C7/D7 free free free
(R)
WH/BK WE 15 WE 8 A8/B8 A8/B8 free a8/b8
(T)
WH/BU WE 16 C8/D8 free free free
(R)

MDF Cable 2 via CA2B from

CSI55 LX 07/2006 551

10 Cable network

Colours 16x2 Patch panel Patch panel ADM ADM ADM ADM with
for the for the with with with ABSM/
two wire four-wire STSM UPSM UKSM ABSM1
connection connection
RD/BU WE 1 WE 1 3rd slot A9/B9 A9/B9 A5/B5 a9/b9
(T)
WH/YE WE 2 C9/D9 free free free
(R)
WH/GN WE 3 WE 2 A10/ A10/ A6/B6 a10/b10
B10 (T) B10
WH/BN WE 4 C10/ free free free
D10 (R)
WH/BK WE 5 WE 3 A11/ A11/ free a11/b11
B11 (T) B11
WH/BU WE 6 C11/ free free free
D11 (R)
WH/YE WE 7 WE 4 A12/ A12/ free a12/b12
B12 (T) B12
WH/GN WE 8 C12/ free free free
D12 (R)
WH/BN WE 9 WE 5 4th slot A13/ A13/ A7/B7 a13/b13
B13 (T) B13
WH/BK WE 10 C13/ free free free
D13 (R)
WH/BU WE 11 WE 6 A14/ A14/ A8/B8 a14/b14
B14 (T) B14
RD/YE WE 12 C14/ free free free
D14 (R)
WH/GN WE 13 WE 7 A15/ A15/ free a15/b15
B15 (T) B15
WH/BN WE 14 C15/ free free free
D15 (R)
WH/BK WE 15 WE 8 A16/ A16/ free a16/b16
B16 (T) B16
WH/BU WE 16 C16/ free free free
D16 (R)

10.1.1.7 MDF connections of DECT21

MDF via CA1B from the DECT21

Colours 16x2 Patch panel for
four-wire
connection
RD/BU WE 1 1st Station A1/B1
WH/YE A2/B2
WH/GN WE 2 2nd Station A1/B1

552 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 10 Cable network

WH/BN A2/B2
WH/BK WE 3 3rd Station A1/B1
WH/BU A2/B2
WH/YE WE 4 4th Station A1/B1
WH/GN A2/B2
WH/BN WE 5 5th Station A1/B1
WH/BK A2/B2
WH/BU WE 6 6th Station A1/B1
RD/YE A2/B2
WH/GN WE 7 7th station A1/B1
WH/BN A2/B2
WH/BK WE 8 8th Station A1/B1
WH/BU A2/B2

10.1.1.8 MDF connections of DS02

MDF via CA2B from DS02/3

Colours 16x2 Patch panel for Cable 1 Cable 2
four-wire connection
RD/BU WE 1 A1/B1 (T) A9/B9 (T)
WH/YE C1/D1 (R) C9/D9 (R)
WH/GN WE 2 A2/B2 (T) A10/B10 (T)
WH/BN C2/D2 (R) C10/D10 (R)
WH/BK WE 3 A3/B3 (T) A11/B11 (T)
WH/BU C3/D3 (R) C11/D11 (R)
WH/YE WE 4 A4/B4 (T) A12/B12 (T)
WH/GN C4/D4 (R) C12/D12 (R)
WH/BN WE 5 A5/B5 (T) A13/B13 (T)
WH/BK C5/D5 (R) C13/D13 (R)
WH/BU WE 6 A6/B6 (T) A14/B14 (T)
RD/YE C6/D6 (R) C14/D14 (R)
WH/GN WE 7 A7/B7 (T) A15/B15 (T)
WH/BN C7/D7 (R) C15/D15 (R)
WH/BK WE 8 A8/B8 (T) A16/B16 (T)
WH/BU C8/D8 (R) C16/D16 (R)

10.1.1.9 MDF connections of DT0

MDF via CA1x from the DT0

Colours 16x2 Patch panel for
four-wire
connection
RD/BU WE 1 A1/B1 (T)
WH/YE C1/D1 (R)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 553

10 Cable network

WH/GN WE 2 A2/B2 (T)

WH/BN C2/D2 (R)
WH/BK WE 3 A3/B3 (T)
WH/BU C3/D3 (R)
WH/YE WE 4 A4/B4 (T)
WH/GN C4/D4 (R)
WH/BN WE 5 A5/B5 (T)
WH/BK C6/D5 (R)
WH/BU WE 6 A6/B6 (T)
RD/YE C6/D6 (R)
WH/GN WE 7 A7/B7 (T)
WH/BN C7/D7 (R)
WH/BK WE 8 A8/B8 (T)
WH/BU C8/D8 (R)

10.1.1.10 MDF connections of UIP

MDF UIP slot via via

CA1B/3B CA1B/3B
from the from the
Colours 16x2 Patch panel Patch panel UIP with UIP with
for the for the four CL2M four
two wire four-wire CL2ME
connection connection
RD/BU WE 1 WE 1 1 A1/B1 (T) A1/B1 (R)
WH/YE WE 2 C1/D1 (R) free
WH/GN WE 3 WE 2 free free
WH/BN WE 4 free free
WH/BK WE 5 WE 3 2 A2/B2 (T) A2/B2 (R)
WH/BU WE 6 C2/D2 (R) free
WH/YE WE 7 WE 4 free free
WH/GN WE 8 free free
WH/BN WE 9 WE 5 3 A3/B3 (T) A3/B3 (R)
WH/BK WE 10 C3/D3 (R) free
WH/BU WE 11 WE 6 free free
RD/YE WE 12 free free
WH/GN WE 13 WE 7 4 A4/B4 (T) A4/B4 (R)
WH/BN WE 14 C4/D4 (R) free
WH/BK WE 15 WE 8 free free
WH/BU WE 16 free free

MDF Connection via CA3B from UIP

The V24M submodules used on slots 1 and 2 can be connected directly to the Sub-D plug of the cable adapter.
In the case of mixed combination, slots 1 and 2 with CL2M, CL2ME and V24M, see table above.

554 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 10 Cable network

10.1.1.11 MDF connections of ASC2

MDF Cable Adapter CA2B or CARUB for ASC2

Colours 16x2 Patch Cable 1 Cable 2
panel
for
two-wire
connection
RD/BU WE 1 a1/b1 a17/b17
WH/YE WE 2 a2/b2 a18/b18
WH/GN WE 3 a3/b3 a19/b19
WH/BN WE 4 a4/b4 a20/b20
WH/BK WE 5 a5/b5 a21/b21
WH/BU WE 6 a6/b6 a22/b22
WH/YE WE 7 a7/b7 a23/b23
WH/GN WE 8 a8/b8 a24/b24
WH/BN WE 9 a9/b9 a25/b25
WH/BK WE 10 a10/b10 a26/b26
WH/BU WE 11 a11/b11 a27/b27
RD/YE WE 12 a12/b12 a28/b28
WH/GN WE 13 a13/b13 a29/b29
WH/BN WE 14 a14/b14 a30/b30
WH/BK WE 15 a15/b15 a31/b31
WH/BU WE 16 a16/b16 a32/b32

10.1.1.12 MDF connections of ASCxx

MDF Cable Adapter

CA1B/CARUB
Colours 16x2 Patch panel for
from ASCxx
two-wire
connection
RD/BU WE 1 a1/b1
WH/YE WE 2 a2/b2
WH/GN WE 3 a3/b3
WH/BN WE 4 a4/b4
WH/BK WE 5 a5/b5
WH/BU WE 6 a6/b6
WH/YE WE 7 a7/b7
WH/GN WE 8 a8/b8
WH/BN WE 9 a9/b9
WH/BK WE 10 a10/b10
WH/BU WE 11 a11/b11
RD/YE WE 12 a12/b12
WH/GN WE 13 a13/b13
WH/BN WE 14 a14/b14

CSI55 LX 07/2006 555

10 Cable network

WH/BK WE 15 a15/b15
WH/BU WE 16 a16/b16

10.1.1.13 MDF connections from ATA

MDF Cable Adapter

Colours 16x2 Patch panel for CA1B for ATA
two-wire
connection
RD/BU WE 1 a1/b1
WH/YE WE 2 a2/b2
WH/GN WE 3 a3/b3
WH/BN WE 4 a4/b4
WH/BK WE 5 a5/b5
WH/BU WE 6 a6/b6
WH/YE WE 7 a7/b7
WH/GN WE 8 a8/b8
WH/BN WE 9 free
WH/BK WE 10 free
WH/BU WE 11 free
RD/YE WE 12 free
WH/GN WE 13 free
WH/BN WE 14 free
WH/BK WE 15 free
WH/BU WE 16 free

10.1.1.14 MDF connections from ATA2

MDF Cable Adapter

Colours 16x2 Patch panel for CA1B from ATA2
two-wire
connection
RD/BU WE 1 a1/b1
WH/YE WE 2 a2/b2
WH/GN WE 3 a3/b3
WH/BN WE 4 a4/b4
WH/BK WE 5 a5/b5
WH/BU WE 6 a6/b6
WH/YE WE 7 a7/b7
WH/GN WE 8 a8/b8
WH/BN WE 9 free
WH/BK WE 10 free
WH/BU WE 11 free
RD/YE WE 12 free

556 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 10 Cable network

WH/GN WE 13 free
WH/BN WE 14 free
WH/BK WE 15 free
WH/BU WE 16 free

10.1.1.15 MDF connections from ATB

MDF Cable Adapter

Colours 16x2 Patch panel for CA1B from ATB
two-wire connection
RD/BU WE 1 a1/b1
WH/YE WE 2 a2/b2
WH/GN WE 3 a3/b3
WH/BN WE 4 a4/b4
WH/BK WE 5 a5/b5
WH/BU WE 6 a6/b6
WH/YE WE 7 a7/b7
WH/GN WE 8 a8/b8
WH/BN WE 9 free
WH/BK WE 10 free
WH/BU WE 11 free
RD/YE WE 12 free
WH/GN WE 13 free
WH/BN WE 14 free
WH/BK WE 15 free
WH/BU WE 16 free

10.1.1.16 MDF connections from ATC

MDF Cable Adapter

Colours 16x2 Patch panel for CA1B from ATC
two-wire
connection
RD/BU WE 1 a1/b1
WH/YE WE 2 a2/b2
WH/GN WE 3 a3/b3
WH/BN WE 4 a4/b4
WH/BK WE 5 a5/b5
WH/BU WE 6 a6/b6
WH/YE WE 7 a7/b7
WH/GN WE 8 a8/b8
WH/BN WE 9 free
WH/BK WE 10 free
WH/BU WE 11 free

CSI55 LX 07/2006 557

10 Cable network

RD/YE WE 12 free
WH/GN WE 13 free
WH/BN WE 14 free
WH/BK WE 15 free
WH/BU WE 16 free

10.1.1.17 MDF connections from ATLC

Main distributor
If necessary, connect the sheath wires of the connecting cable (open end and WP plug) with the ground
clamps.
Connect the connectors of the connecting cable from the I55 with the line network (wiring blocks).
Mark the cable at both ends using the supplied labels.
Connections from the ATLC

Variants Port Interfaces/procedures Connections

ATLC without submodules 8 (1 per line) 2-wire speech path, a/b
E+M signalling Sin/Sout
ATLC without submodules 8 (1 per line) 4-wire speech path, a/b
E+M signalling Ka/Kb
Sin/Sout
ATLC without submodules 8 (1 per line) 4-wire speech path, a/b
E+M and S3an/S3ab- Ka/Kb
signalling Sin/Sout
S3in/S3out

ATLC with SSSM submodules 8 (1 per SSSM) a/b earth a/b

ATLC with ACSM submodules 8 (1 per ACSM) 50 Hz alternating current a/b

ATLC with ALSM/ALSMF 8 (1 per Special facility (e.g. speech a/b

submodules ALSM/ALSMF) memory)
or ALSMH (1 per ALSMH) Analog DID Hong Kong a/b

ATLC with PLSM submodules 8 (1 per PLSM) Special facility (e.g. door a/b
handsfree device) c/d
e/f

MDF connection via CA2x or CARUx from the ATLC board without submodules

MDF Cable Adapter CA2B or CARUB

Colours 16x2 Patch panel for Cable 1 Cable 2
two-wire
connection
RD/BU WE 1 1a/1b 1Sin/1Sout
WH/YE WE 2 1Ka/1Kb 1S3in/1S3out

558 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 10 Cable network

WH/GN WE 3 2a/2b 2Sin/2Sout

WH/BN WE 4 2Ka/2Kb 2S3in/2S3out
WH/BK WE 5 3a/3b 3Sin/3Sout
WH/BU WE 6 3Ka/3Kb 3S3in/3S3out
WH/YE WE 7 4a/4b 4Sin/4Sout
WH/GN WE 8 4Ka/4Kb 4S3in/4S3out
WH/BN WE 9 5a/5b 5Sin/5Sout
WH/BK WE 10 5Ka/5Kb 5S3in/5S3out
WH/BU WE 11 6a/6b 6Sin/6Sout
RD/YE WE 12 6Ka/6Kb 6S3in/6S3out
WH/GN WE 13 7a/7b 7Sin/7Sout
WH/BN WE 14 7Ka/7Kb 7S3in/7S3out
WH/BK WE 15 8a/8b 8Sin/8Sout
WH/BU WE 16 8Ka/8Kb 8S3in/8S3out

MDF connection via CA2x or CARUx from the ATLC board with ACSM or ALSM/ALSMF/ALSMH or
SSSM submodules

MDF Cable Adapter CA2B or CARUB

Colours 16x2 Patch panel for Cable 1 Cable 2
two-wire
connection
RD/BU WE 1 1a/1b free/free
WH/YE WE 2 free/free free/free
WH/GN WE 3 2a/2b free/free
WH/BN WE 4 free/free free/free
WH/BK WE 5 3a/3b free/free
WH/BU WE 6 free/free free/free
WH/YE WE 7 4a/4b free/free
WH/GN WE 8 free/free free/free
WH/BN WE 9 5a/5b free/free
WH/BK WE 10 free/free free/free
WH/BU WE 11 6a/6b free/free
RD/YE WE 12 free/free free/free
WH/GN WE 13 7a/7b free/free
WH/BN WE 14 free/free free/free
WH/BK WE 15 8a/8b free/free
WH/BU WE 16 free/free free/free

MDF connection via CA2x or CARUx from the ATLC board with PLSM submodules

MDF Cable Adapter CA2B or CARUB

Colours 16x2 Patch panel for Cable 1 Cable 2
two-wire
connection

CSI55 LX 07/2006 559

10 Cable network

RD/BU WE 1 1a/1b 1c/1d

WH/YE WE 2 free/free 1f/1e
WH/GN WE 3 2a/2b 2c/2d
WH/BN WE 4 free/free 2f/2e
WH/BK WE 5 3a/3b 3c/3d
WH/BU WE 6 free/free 3f/3e
WH/YE WE 7 4a/4b 4c/4d
WH/GN WE 8 free/free 4f/4e
WH/BN WE 9 5a/5b 5c/5d
WH/BK WE 10 free/free 5f/5e
WH/BU WE 11 6a/6b 6c/6d
RD/YE WE 12 free/free 6f/6e
WH/GN WE 13 7a/7b 7c/7d
WH/BN WE 14 free/free 7f/7e
WH/BK WE 15 8a/8b 8c/8d
WH/BU WE 16 free/free 8f/8e

10.1.1.18 MDF connections from JPAT

MDF Cable Adapter CARUB from JPAT

Colours 16x2 Patch panel for Cable 1 Cable 2
two-wire
connection
RD/BU WE 1 a1/b1 c1/free
WH/YE WE 2 free/free free/free
WH/GN WE 3 a2/b2 c2/free
WH/BN WE 4 free/free free/free
WH/BK WE 5 a3/b3 c3/free
WH/BU WE 6 free/free free/free
WH/YE WE 7 a4/b4 c4/free
WH/GN WE 8 free/free free/free
WH/BN WE 9 a5/b5 c5/free
WH/BK WE 10 free/free free/free
WH/BU WE 11 a6/b6 c6/free
RD/YE WE 12 free/free free/free
WH/GN WE 13 a7/b7 c7/free
WH/BN WE 14 free/free free/free
WH/BK WE 15 a8/b8 c8/free
WH/BU WE 16 free/free free/free

MDF Cable Adapter CARUB from JPAT

560 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 10 Cable network

Colours 16x2 Patch panel for Cable 1 Cable 2

two-wire
connection
RD/BU WE 1 a1/b1 c1/free
WH/YE WE 2 free/free free/free
WH/GN WE 3 a2/b2 c2/free
WH/BN WE 4 free/free free/free
WH/BK WE 5 a3/b3 c3/free
WH/BU WE 6 free/free free/free
WH/YE WE 7 a4/b4 c4/free
WH/GN WE 8 free/free free/free
WH/BN WE 9 a5/b5 c5/free
WH/BK WE 10 free/free free/free
WH/BU WE 11 a6/b6 c6/free
RD/YE WE 12 free/free free/free
WH/GN WE 13 a7/b7 c7/free
WH/BN WE 14 free/free free/free
WH/BK WE 15 a8/b8 c8/free
WH/BU WE 16 free/free free/free

10.1.1.19 MDF connections from DDID

MDF Cable Adapter

Colours 16x2 Patch panel for CA1B from DDID
two-wire connection
RD/BU WE 1 a1/b1
WH/YE WE 2 a2/b2
WH/GN WE 3 a3/b3
WH/BN WE 4 a4/b4
WH/BK WE 5 a5/b5
WH/BU WE 6 a6/b6
WH/YE WE 7 a7/b7
WH/GN WE 8 a8/b8
WH/BN WE 9 free
WH/BK WE 10 free
WH/BU WE 11 free
RD/YE WE 12 free
WH/GN WE 13 free
WH/BN WE 14 free
WH/BK WE 15 free
WH/BU WE 16 free

CSI55 LX 07/2006 561

10 Cable network

10.1.2 Service panel

10.1.2.1 General Points

The service panel provides all connections required for service purposes. It must be installed above or below
the rack with the boards ACB/HSCB and CF22/CF2E.
The service panel requires a height unit.
As a standard, the two V.24 interface connections on the AEV24B/AV24B are offered for the first two RJ45
couplings, viewed from the left side. The last (tenth) RJ45 coupling is reserved for the S0 connection for the
service PC (variant main distributor with patch cable).
There are eight RJ45 located in the middle of the panel, which are fitted at the rear with 8 LSA Plus connections
each on a circuit board. This means that project-specific connections can be brought to the panel from the
main distributor frame. This may also be the S0 connection for the service PC (main distributor frame for cable
with open end).
There is an opening on the right hand side to install the error display unit (EDU). This installation is optional.

Service panel I55

1. 10 RJ 45 couplings
2. 8 RJ45 with LSA Plus connections (freely wirable)
3. Opening for EDU board

10.1.2.2 V.24 Interfaces

The connections of the V.24 interfaces (GCU Generic Control Unit, ACB/HSCB) are adapted on the adapter
module AEV24B/AV24B with the adapters V.24/RJ45 (connect adapter V.24/RJ45 to 9-pin D-sub-connector).
Then connect the adapter RJ45 with the service panel RJ45 using coupling 1 or 2 to 8-wire panel cables.

562 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 10 Cable network

V.24 Interfaces to the service panel

1. Adapter module AEV24B/AV24B

2. Adapter V.24 RJ45
3. Service panel

10.1.2.3 S0 connection

There are two possibilities, depending on the type of main distributor frame:

• Connection via patch cable

In this variant, you must make a connection between the patch panel on the main distributor frame and
the service panel
(right RJ45 coupling).
• Connection with installation cable via the LSA Plus connections
This is where the appropriate jumpering must be carried out on the main distributor frame.

10.1.2.4 Installing the EDU

Optionally, the service panel can be retro-fitted with the submodule EDU.
A ribbon cable us used to connect the EDU.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 563

10 Cable network

Connect the EDU to the EDB

1. ESB Adapter
2. Ribbon cable ESB-EDU
3. Sub-module EDU

The EDU is fastened to the service panel using two screws.

10.2 Line lengths

When planning the network, it is necessary to take into account the fact that the Ranges of the interfaces (S0,
UP0etc.) are different.
When connecting the line network, the following instructions must be adhered to:

• The two transmission and receiving line pairs (S0) and the double wire for UP0, UPN and UK0 must be
executed as a twisted wire pair.
• When dealing with cables with four twisted wires, use a four for the joint transmission and reception line
of a S0 interface.
• The naked wires of the cable used must be connected to ground potential.

The following diagrams explain the correlations of:

• Ranges
• Interfaces

• Cable types

564 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 10 Cable network

Cable type Wire Range of the interfaces in metres

diameter S0bus S0PTP UP0 UPN UPD UK0
short extended
Installation cable J- 0.6 mm 150 500 1000 1800 1000 1000 4500
Y(ST)Y
J- 0.6 mm
2Y(St)Y
St III
BD
Outdoor cable A- 0.4 mm 2100
2YF(L)2Y 0.6 mm 3500 2800 2800 8000

Cabling Cable type Wire Range of the interfaces in metres

systems diameter S0bus S0PTP UP0 UPN UPD UK0
short extended
CAT.5 Li-2YCH 0.48 mm 150 500 650 2000 2000 2000 4000
4x2x0,48L
CAT.5 J-2YY 0.51 mm 150 500 800 2500 2500 2500 4500
4x2x0,51
CAT.6 J- 0.52 mm 150 500 800 2500 2500 2500 5000
02YS(St)CY
4x2x0,52
CAT.6 J-2YY 0.52 mm 150 500 800 2500 2500 2500 5000
4x2x0,52
CAT.6 J-02YSCY 0.56 mm 150 500 1000 3000 2500 2500 6000
4x2x0,56
PiMF
CAT.7 J-02YSCY 0.56 mm 150 500 1000 3000 2500 2500 6000
4x2x0,56
PiMF
CAT.7 J-02YSCY 0.645 mm 150 500 1000 3500 2800 2800 8000
4x2x0,56
PiMF

10.3 Configuration Examples

Examples of configuration (installation cable J-Y(ST)Y, wire diameter 0.6 mm)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 565

10 Cable network

Short bus

1. e.g. UIP, DS0

or PCM 2 TD
or private termination (PT)
2. Last junction box (install the terminating resistors here)
3. 1. Terminal with S0 interface
4. 2. Terminal with S0 interface
5. 4. Terminal with S0 interface

Examples of configuration (installation cable J-Y(ST)Y, wire diameter 0.6 mm)

extended bus

1. e.g. UIP, DS0

or PCM 2 TD
or private network termination (PT)
2. Last junction box (install the terminating resistors here)
3. 1. Terminal with S0 interface
4. 2. Terminal with S0 interface
5. 4. Terminal with S0 interface

Examples of configuration (installation cable J-Y(ST)Y, wire diameter 0.6 mm)

566 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 10 Cable network

Passive bus, Y configuration

1. e.g. UIP, DS0

or PCM 2 TD
or private network termination (PT)
2. Last junction box (install the terminating resistors here)
3. 1. Terminal with S0 interface
4. 2. Terminal with S0 interface
5. 3. Terminal with S0 interface
6. 4. Terminal with S0 interface

The difference of the cable lengths l1 and l2 may not exceed 50 m

10.4 Contact occupation of the modular plug connection

The cabling systems structured for the application incoming language or data services generally do not use
all the contacts of the modular plug connections. The interfaces of the individual services are assigned to the
contacts as follows.

Contacts Analogue ISDN ISDN Ethernet Token TP- AS400 3270 ATM
telephone S0 UP0/ 10/100 Ring PMD
UPN/ Base T
UK0
1 TX+ TX+ X
2 TX- TX- X
3 RX+ RX+ RX+ RX+
4 a TX+ A TX- TX+ TX+
5 b TX- B TX+ TX- TX-
6 RX- RX- RX- RX-
7 RX+ X
8 RX- X
Adaptation- X X - X X X X -

CSI55 LX 07/2006 567

10 Cable network

TX = Transmitting direction
RX = Receiving direction
Adaptation = device specific in dependence of jumpering distributor components

10.5 LWL-specifications

The characteristics of the LWL cable are available from the relevant documents.
LWL twin cable SC 29.9030.6100-6199
LWL twin cable SC 29.9030.6200-6299
LWL plastic cable 49.9801.3759-3764

568 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 11 Note on DECT:

11 Note on DECT:

11.1 Intermodule Handover

The new capacity feature Intermodule Handover (IMHO) for the CS155 denotes the consideration of a se-
quence of important things for the installation and operation. These are to be found in the hardware side
as well as the software side. The following instructions contain component and software requirements, the
observation of which will ensure the orderly operation of the IMHO. Applies to single, twin or multi-module in
principle:

• IMHO is supported first from E06 system software.

• For the central function a CF22 (ref. no: 49.9906.5748) or CF2E (ref. no.: 49.9903.4968) should be
used.
• Use DECT or DECT21 boards as connecting circuit board instead of DECT2.
• IMHO and doubling of CF22/CF2E boards are generally only possible with T1 devices. The use of TC93
devices is not possible.
• For the intermodule central function (only for multi-group) aICF with the ref. no.: 28.5630.1321 or .1331
or 49.9905.9146 is required. In doing so, make sure that the software on the ICF is doubling-compatible.
• For this ICF, the CL2ME (material number: 49.9904.2214) should be used.

It is important to take note when planning the radio hops that the base stations of a module represent a
cohesive radio hop. The radio hops formed by various modules should meet as infrequently as possible. This
will prevent unnecessary handovers between the modules. These would only generate superfluous load for
the system switching matrix.

11.1.1 Application in the Multi-Module

The hardware side

An external high precision reference clock is to be connected. See: Connection of the external high preci-
sion reference clock to the CSI55. This connection is to be connected to the ICF board in the multi-module
via the function unit CL2ME. In multi-module with doubling, both ICF boards under application of the CL2ME
are to be connected to the high precision reference clock.
The other modules in the multi-group system are supplied with clocks in the usual manner via the LWL paths.
The individual modules may be connected to the multi-module via differing length LWL paths. This length
difference results in that the 160 ms frame signal arrives in the individual modules asynchronous. This asyn-
chronous condition is balanced out in that, in the RBS stations, correction values have been entered. These
correction values arrive at the radio base stations (RBS) by means of customer data via the DECT boards.
The length input of the LWL path in meters is carried out by means of the aid CAT (Customer Administration
Tool SW E06 and up). The equalization of the phase positions of the 160 ms frame signal is achieved with the
aid of the RBS.
In order to measure the optical waveguide length, refer to the regional network service as it has the necessary
know-how.
In the event of doubling the multi-module, ensure that the two optical waveguides that lead to the same module
also have the same length. This also applies even if the optical waveguides have different line routes. If this is
not the case, handover will not be possible following a switchover.
On the boards CF22/CF2E, only switch 1 of the 4 dip switches is to be set to ON, all others remain at OFF.
When the CF22/CF2E become synchronous with the incoming 160 ms clock, LED 3 in the front panel lights
up.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 569

11 Note on DECT:

The software side

Upon startup, the software sets the clock source of the ICF in the multi-module with the address 7D (Hex) as
highest priority. In doubling, the ICF in the module with the address 7E (Hex) follows with the same priority
level. After startup the clock sources at 7D and 7E are switched on as clock master.
In the event of failure of the input clock on the ICF in the multi-module 7D, the ICF in multi-module 7E will
be switched on as clock master. This then leads the clock supply of the ICF in the module 7D via the LWL
path of the alternate route. The clock supply is implemented via the active paths which are connected on the
module’s 7D for all connected modules.
During this switchover, however, each of the multi-modules resynchronises to the new clock source. This may
lead to a separation of calls in DECT connections.
After an alternative route switchover, a module is no longer IMHO-compatible after the switchover, as it is the
only module to be supplied with clock information from another multi-module as a single module. A system
half switchover will take place if the module then receives another switchover request. After this, all modules
will receive clock information from one B3 module, and IMHO-compatibility is restored.

Multi-module

1. GPS receiver (GPS = Global Positioning System)

2. Clock master in the CL2M mode

Production of the frame and DECT pulse

570 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 11 Note on DECT:

3. Master clock from doubling clock master after clock switchover

4. Production of the frame and DECT pulse
clock slave B3 in the IML mode

11.1.2 Application in the Twin module

The hardware side

An external high precision reference clock is to be connected. See: Connection of the external high preci-
sion reference clock to the CSI55.
In module no. 1, this connection is to be brought about via the CL2ME function unit on the UIP board. If
greater safety is desired, a second connection is to be brought about via a CL2ME and another UIP in module
no. 1
The module no: 2 remains the clock slave The intermodule handover function is no longer relevant in the event
of failure of one of the twin modules.
On the boards CF22/CF2E, only switch 1 of the 4 dip switches is to be set to ON, all others remain at OFF.
When the CF22/CF2E become synchronous with the incoming 160 ms clock, LED 3 in the front panel lights
up.
The software side
Upon startup, the software sets a UIP module in module no. 1 as clock source with the highest priority. In
doubling and failure of one UIP, the other UIP follows in module no.:. 1 as a clock source.
Here also applies that module no. 2, connected via a LWL path, receives a delayed frame signal in relation to
module no. 1. This asynchronicity is balanced out in that, in the RBS stations, correction values have been
entered. These correction values arrive at the radio base stations (RBS) by means of customer data via the
DECT boards. The length input of the LWL path to the module no.” 2 , in meters, occurs with the CAT auxiliary
item.
The same here applies with regard to the measurement and length of the optical waveguide, see Application
in Multi-Module - The Hardware Side

CSI55 LX 07/2006 571

11 Note on DECT:

Twin module

1. GPS receiver (GPS = Global Positioning System)

2. Clock master in the CL2M mode
Production of the frame and DECT pulse

11.1.3 Configurations not allowed

Comments on the inadmissible connection or operation forms and their reasons by which no orderly operation
of the Intermodule Handover are ensured.
Application in the Multi-Module

• The hardware side:

Connection via CL2ME and UIP in another module than B3 module.
• The software side:
After startup, this module with its clock source is selected as clock master and drives all other modules
via the B3 module.

The module specific delay times may no longer be active in the clock derived module because it would result
in a displacement of the edges of the 160 ms frame signal.
In the other modules, the delay for the path from the clock derived module to the B3 module would have to
be added to their own delay times. This would all have to occur therewith all modules work with equal phase
positions of the frame signal and is not carried out in the software.
Calls will be separated in the event of switchovers, active/passive switch of the CF22/CF2E. The IMHO function
is enabled once more once the switchover has taken place.
Application in the Twin Module

572 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 11 Note on DECT:

• The hardware side:

Connection of another CL2ME via UIP in the module no.: 2.
• The software side:
Up commissioning, a module UIP from the software in module no.: 1 should be used a clock source with
the highest priority. In the event of doubling and failure of one UIP, there is a switch-over to the other UIP
in the module no.:. 2 as a clock source.
It also applies here that the module no. 2 receives a delayed frame signal in relation to module 1. This
asynchronicity is balanced out in that, in the RBS stations, correction values have been entered. These
correction values arrive at the radio base stations (RBS) by means of customer data via the DECT
boards.

Now model no.: 2 clock master receives module no.: 1 receives a delayed frame signal in relation to module
no. 1. Now the RBS stations in module no.: 2 does not require input of the correction value but that in module
no.: 1. The would be treated by software and it is not implemented in the SW.
Calls will be separated in the event of switchovers, active/passive switch of the CF22/CF2E. The IMHO function
is enabled once more once the switchover has taken place.
It is important to emphasise once more that the system can be switched to an offered exchange line clock
with the aid of synchro management in the event of a total failure of the TAREF or upon separation of the
connection to the CL2ME: Due to the ”quality” of the exchange line clock, it is not possible to guarantee that
continued operations will be absolutely smooth. However, should a longer period of ”only exchange line clock”
operation be unavoidable, the switch 1 of the 4 Dip switches must be set to OFF on all boards of the type
CF22/CF2E.
Failure of TAREF and switchover to a different clock source
It is important to emphasise once more that the system can be switched to an offered exchange line clock
with the aid of synchro management in the event of a total failure of the TAREF or upon separation of the
connection to the CL2ME: Due to the ”quality” of the exchange line clock, it is not possible to guarantee that
continued operations will be absolutely smooth. However, should a longer period of ”only exchange line clock”
operation be unavoidable, the switch 1 of the 4 Dip switches must be set to OFF on all boards of the type
CF22/CF2E.

11.1.4 Connection of the external high precision reference clock to the CSI55

A device from the firm R.A.M. with the designation TAREF is used as external high precision reference clock.
A coax socket is located on the back of this device for the 2MHz output, which serves as the connection for
the CL2ME line. This connect is supplied by the R.A.M. company together with the TAREF, including all of
the required ”mini-transmitters” for the implementation of the coax connection on a symmetrical transmission
with a 120 Ohm termination according to CCITT G703. The maximum length of these connecting cables is 10
metres. Only connect the braid screen of the cable with the casing of the ICS module. A screened sub-D-plug
in 9-pin design is used as a plug connection to the CS155, connection to the adapter module and therefore to
the CL2ME. This enables ”plug and play” functions.

The device will be fitted with a second output for 2MHz within the framework of a redesign
(supply starts in June 2001). This means that only one TAREF device is required for a
doubled multi-module (ICS or B3 module). The system transmitter will also be integrated in
the system. This coax connection to TAREF will then also be modified by R.A.M and the
cable is adapted.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 573

11 Note on DECT:

11.2 Supply of the DECT-Net Base Station to the Integral 55

The introduction of the Bosch DECT-base station and the PSL55 provides a new and extended calculation
basis for the Integral 55.
A PSL55 in one rack can feed a maximum of 5 DECT21 boards. The three vacant slots can be equipped with
boards that do not require 48 V.

*CB = ACB/HSCB
CF* = CF22/CF2E
AO* = Connecting circuit (only boards without 48V-requirement)
A second PSL55 provides a redundant power supply for this expansion.

In cases which necessitate up to 8 DECT21 boards per rack, the rack must be fitted with two
PLS55s. PS redundancy is not possible with this configuration.

*CB = ACB/HSCB
CF* = CF22/CF2E

There is also an adaption module - seePS350 Adaption → 94 available.

Up to 7 DECT21 boards can be operated with it. However, with an additional PSL55 no 48V
redundance was reached with this configuration.

11.3 Suitable cable types used to connect DECT RBS

General requirements

• A RBS has two UPN-interfaces. The wire pairs of both Un-interfaces must run in the same cable.
• The opposite wires of star-quad cables form a pair.
• No branch lines may be laid out.

• Non-connected connections to UPO-end devices in its cable must be avoided.

• The maximum allowed loop resistance of the cables is 130 Ohm/km.

Minimum cable requirements

574 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 11 Note on DECT:

J-Y(ST)Y, St III 2x2x0.6 static shielded cable with 2 wire-pairs (twisted quad cable, opposing
wires form a pair, to be ensured upon installation!) according to VDE
0815.
or
2x2xAWG22 S/UTP category 3 according to DIN EN 50173 and ISO/IEC 11801
(or higher)

Wiring to Multiple RBS

J-Y(ST)Y nx2x0.6 Lg static shielded cable with n wire-pair (wire-pairs stranded in positions)
according to VDE 0815. n = 4, 6, 8, ...
or
nx2xAWG22 S/UTP category 3 according to DIN EN 50173 and ISO/IEC 11801. n = 4, 6, 8, ...
(or higher)

Recomendation:
For new installations it is generally recommended the use of twisted pair cables (e. g. J-Y(ST)Y 2x2x0,6 GR,
CU 13 or more pairs) or the use of Cat 3 cables (or higher). With these cables the best experiences could be
achieved in the field.
Note:
The laying of parallel wire pairs to different terminals within the same cable may under certain circumstances
cause problems if the near-end cross talk level (NEXT) is too high. Cable types of higher quality should
therefore be used in the event of problems, e.g. S/STP types.
When using twisted pair cables such problems are not known to us.
Remarks on data cables according to DIN EN 50173 and ISO/IEC 11081:

• AWG (american wire gauge) must be 22 or smaller. 22 corresponds to an wire diameter of >0.643 mm.
The smaller the AWG, the larger the wire diameter.

• S/UTP screened/unshielded twisted pair; cable shielded but the individual wire-pairs are not.
• S/STP screened / unshielded twisted pair; cable and individual wire pairs are electro-statically shielded.
• Category
1. for analog transmissions
2. up to 4 Mbit/s
3. up to 10 Mbit/s.

11.4 The structure of the cables

The wires of the cable are star quad twisted. The wires of the star qued have always the same colour. Five
star quads form a basic bundle with all colours.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 575

11 Note on DECT:

1. A-wire : without marks

2. B-wire : with a ring
3. 2A-wire : with two rings, long distance
4. 2B-wire : with two rings, short distance

another example of star-quad:

Abbr. Meaning Application

UTP ”Unshielded Twisted Pair” Local networks in the close workplace
unshielded, twisted in pairs, symmetrical area, connection or installation cable
copper cable for data with 2 or 4 wire pairs
S/ ”Screened Unshielded Twisted Pair” Installation cable for horizontal cabling
UTP 2 or 4 wire pairs, twisted in pairs,
symmetrical copper cable for data with an
additional outer shield
FTP ”Foll Twisted Pair” Installation cable for horizontal cabling
shielded by foil, twisted in pairs,
symmetrical copper cable for data
S/ ”Screened Foll Twisted Pair” Installation cable for horizontal cabling
FTP screened in layers and shielded by foil,
twisted in pairs, symmetrical copper cable
for data
STP ”Shielded Twisted Pair” for data transmission up to100 MBit/s
2 or 4 wire pairs, symmetrical cooper cable or
for data with individually shielded wire pairs for the close workplace area, e. g.
between floor distributor and data
connection
S/ ”Screened Shielded Twisted Pair” Installation cable for horizontal cabling
STP 2 or 4 wire pairs cooper cable for data with
individually shielded pairs and additional
outer shield
PiMf ”Pair in Metallfoil” for wiring of large systems or
shielded with metal foil, twisted pair of a for transmission of high bit-rates
copper cable for data with high close or installation cable for horizontal
crosstalk attenuation cabling
ViMf ”Vierer in Metallfolie” Installation cable for horizontal cabling
quad shielded with matal foil, four wires,
copper cable for data

576 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 12 Notes to VolP

12 Notes to VolP

Starting with software E07, the communication server Integral 55 offers the integration of voice over IP (VoIP).
Here Integral 55 outlying extensions are integrated into the customer’s existing IP-based data network environ-
ment (LAN, WAN, corporate network). In addition, the networking of Integral 55 systems to different locations
via the IP infrastructure is possible.
The performance characteristic description as well as the set-up are shown in the relevant documents.
VoIP in Integral 55 (1)
VoIP in Integral 55 (2)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 577

13 Operator sets

13 Operator sets

Notes on the installation and service of the OS13 are available in the service and installation manual 0S13,
OSM and OSPC - see OS13.
Notes on the installation and for the service of the OS33 are available in the service and installation manual
0S33, OSM and OSPC - see: OS33.

578 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 14 Measuring and Testing Tools

14 Measuring and Testing Tools

14.1 BA Board Adapter

Short description
The board adapter is used for service purposes. The modules to be processed must be inserted in the board
adapter, so that it can be subsequently inserted into the PBX.

Board Adapter

1. PIN 1-2 Current reading, PIN 3 Voltage reading

2. Meas. points
3. see table
4. Clock meas. points
5. CBI speed setting
6. Selection of the adapted board (GCU/ICU or CFx)
7. BA chip submodule
8. not clock supplied (only with adapted ICU)

9. clock supplied (only with adapted ICU)

10. Measuring points for C-bus clock

Connectors for C-bus data test pins (3.):

1 GND
2 GND
3 GND
4 GND

CSI55 LX 07/2006 579

14 Measuring and Testing Tools

5 PF 1
6 PF 2
7 ERRV
8 FCPS
9 WSYN
10 ERLINE 1
11 ERLINE 2
12 ERBAT
13 ERDPS 2
14 REMCNTR 1
15 ERDPS 1

14.2 CBT C-Bus Tester

Short description
The C-bus tester serves as a testing tool for the CS155.
The C-bus tester has two applications:

• Lists the message transfer in the system.

• Tests the other printed circuit boards in the laboratory.

Using this program, it is possible to control two different functions:

• Edit messages and send them to the system via the C-bus tester.
• Save messages from the telephone system on the PC hard disc, and display them on the PC screen.

The C-bus tester is made up of two parts:

• A printed circuit board, which is inserted into the CS155 system.

• A DOS program, named CBTPC.

580 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 14 Measuring and Testing Tools

CBT board, component side

1. Memory
2. HGS Slot
3. Battery

The CBTPC program does not perform an analysis of the messages. The MPA (Message Protocol Analysis)
program is required for this purpose. However, if the protocol is recorded in ASCII format, it can be viewed in
any text program.
Packets which are to be dispatched within only one control cannot be recorded.

14.2.1 Hardware and Software Conditions

You require an AT-compatible PC with a free serial interface (COM1: or COM2:) and at least 512 kB free RAM.
A mouse and colour monitor are recommended.
In order to save the protocol data of a C-bus test, the PC’s hard disc should have at least 20 MB of free
memory.
The CBTPC program is a DOS program. It will not function in Windows.

14.2.2 Installing the Printed Circuit Board

Before a C-bus protocol can be recorded, the printed circuit board for the C-bus tester must be installed in the
I55. The following printed circuit boards can be used:

• CBI1T
• CBI1A (Using this CBI may result in a data loss when recording!)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 581

14 Measuring and Testing Tools

14.2.3 Conditions

The following components are needed to make a connection to the system:

• Printed circuit board for the C-bus tester with at least 4 MB RAM. In the event of several memory modules
being installed, they must be on top of each other in the main memory area.
• AV24B adapter module
• Connection cable for connection of two PC-AT’s (9-pin, hand shake via RTS/CTS).

14.2.4 Procedure

Insert the printed circuit board in a free slot in the system. The B3 module contains a slot specifically for the
CBT.

You should not used the following slots under any circumstances: 0E and 0F reserved slots

14.2.5 Connection cable between CBT and PC

The CBT board and the PC with CBTPc must be connected by a cable.
Insert the AV24B printed circuit board on the back side of the system. Connect the COM 1 or COM 2 interface
on the PC to the 1st V.24 interface on the AV24B printed circuit board.

In AV24B, the 1st interface is marked V.24

The cable connects two serial interfaces and must be configured as follows (zero modem):

Signal designation PC 25-pin socket PC 9-pin socket CBT 9-pin socket

TxD 2 3 2
RxD 3 2 3
CTS 4 7 8
RTS 5 8 7
DSR 6 6 4
GND 7 5 5
DTR 20 4 6

582 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 14 Measuring and Testing Tools

14.2.6 LEDs and Switch Functions

CBT board, front side

Meanings of LEDs
The LEDs signal the different phases of the reset process (the bottom two LED’s are missing on the old CBTs).
If a module locates a fault, the red LED flashes whilst in the corresponding test, and then lights up again once
the reset has been completed.

O O -Resets-tests CPU
O X
O X
O X
O X
O O -Resets-tests memory
O O
O O
O O
O O
X O -Resets-tests clock component timed interruptions. If this test fails, no
O O further tests are carried out.
O X
O O
O O
X O -Resets-tests CBI
O X (Master and slave reset, describes the Init register, transmits and
receives packets, etc.).
O O
O O
O O
X O -Reset-tests DUART (local transmission, buffer (FIFO) on the receiver
O X side).

CSI55 LX 07/2006 583

14 Measuring and Testing Tools

O X
O O
O O
X O Initializes the individual modules (clock, CBI, DUART ...) The LEDs on
O O the right side have the same denotations as above.
O O
O X
O O
O O Logging active
O O Recording messages
O O
O O
O X

X = LED on
O = LED off
Switch Function

S1 Reset switch
Middle: Operating status
Left: Reset board, locking, restart
Right: Warm start
S2 Memory test switch
Left: Big memory test
Right: Small memory test
S3 No function
S4 No function

14.2.7 Removing and Inserting the board

The CBT board may be removed or inserted during system operation, if the S1 switch handle has been moved
to the left.

Further information can be found in the C-Bus Tester Manual, material number 20.0003.0950, re-
lease: 04/95.

14.3 MAHC Measuring Adapter Half Channel

Short description
The MAHC (Measuring Adapter Half Channel) provides the measuring interface for transmission-technical half
channel measurements on analogue and digital peripheral connectors for the CS155.

584 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 14 Measuring and Testing Tools

For use in the CS155, the front panel plus lever must be removed. It is possible to use the board lever of the
CS155, material number: 4.999.017.193, in conjunction with screw BGH, material number: 4.999.017.192
and axis BGH, material number: 4,999,017,191 is to be used. These parts are required twice per board.

Operation is virtually identical to that of the MAH board for the I33x (8030). See I33x manual
DSV, material number 20.0003.0013.

The measuring adapter is located on a pc board which is inserted into the slot on an ASCxx analogue line
circuit in order to carry out the half channel measurements in a I55 system.

MAHC module, component side

The board is divided into five function groups:

• Adaptation part for the control and the analog interfaces.

• Line circuit for the connection of the testing device for connection setup.

• Digital measuring interface for the connection of measuring devices with digital access.
• Analog measuring interface for the connection of analog measuring devices.
• Control elements and display board for setting and displaying the operating functions.

14.3.1 Line Circuit

The line circuit function group is provided for connection setup (switch S3 in ’Test’ position). The test connec-
tion is set up using a DTMF or pulse dialling test telephone instrument which is inserted onto the connector
studs. These are located on the component side of the pc board. For test connections in an incoming seizure
direction, the test telephone instrument must be called. The test telephone instrument maintains the test con-
nection while the measurement is being taken. Because the receiving direction remains through-connected
during the measurement, the measuring signals can be overheard.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 585

14 Measuring and Testing Tools

14.3.2 Digital Measuring Interface

This interface is a 64kBit/s codirectional interface in accordance with CCITT. For purposes of function control
and correct setting of the measuring device, a digital short-circuit connection has also been implemented
(switch S3 in ’Test’ position).

14.3.3 Analog Measuring Interface

This interface is a 600 ohm, 4-wire measuring interface that can be switched to ZR. The following features are
relevant for the interface:

• The relative input and output level is 0 dBr

• Deviations of the relative level and the frequency response are up to +/-0.2 dB

• Input or output impedance (measured as deflection attenuation) >20 dB

If the analog interface is to be used for exact measurements, the respective deviation must be established
(second MAHC) and the measuring result corrected accordingly.
In order to check the analog measuring interface (switch S3 in ’Test’ position), a short-circuit connection has
been provided on the digital side. In doing this, the deviations of the input and output are added.

14.3.4 LEDs and Switch Functions

MAHC board, front side

1. red
2. green

586 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 14 Measuring and Testing Tools

3. yellow

Meanings of LEDs

L1 Seizure
L2 ZR
L3 Measuring
L4 Digital
L5 Digital
L6 Fault
L7 500 Ohm
L8 Measuring
L9 Analogue
L10 Analogue

Switch Function

S1 Middle:
Left: Reset board
Right: Micro-Module
S2 Left: Digital measurement
Right: Analog measurement
S3 Left: Test/connection setup
Right: Measuring

14.4 SP1 Spy Probe 1 (SP1)

What is Spy and how can I use this tool?

Spy is designed in such a way because it can record as many system events as possible. The Sky predeces-
sor, the CBus Tester (CBT), only recorded CBus packets. The SKy concept permits simultaneous recording,
display and decoding of:

• CBus packets
messages which run over the CBus. Packets are recorded in separate modules.
• CBus special events
This includes: Packet losses, blocking times of µPs, packet transmission repetition times, CBus load etc.
• Ethernet packets
Ethernet packets can be recorded via a network card of the PC card to be recorded at the same time as
the CBus recording.
• CBT recording
Event type which results when reading in BIN files (recordings of CBT)
• Console messages
event type S01, HGS, FRP-events on the system console. The corresponding capture files can be import
and mixed with a recording and therefore can be brought into a temporal relationship.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 587

14 Measuring and Testing Tools

• Conversion
The SPY-generated .frec files can be converted to.bin-files. As a result, further use of this is possible
through MAT (MessageAnalysesTool).
• IDM (planned)
messages between system and terminals or other systems
• Local highways (planned)
recording of which highway is occupied, number of the occupied highways
• I2C-Bus (planned)
I2C-Bus signalling in the backplane

For further information on SP1 see SPY1.

14.5 V24IA V24 Interface Adapter

Short description
The V24IA is used as a debugging interface in connection with the DS02, ADM, DUPN or ASC2 boards.

Note: The use of the V24IA board in the Integral 55 Compact is not necessary, because the
requirements already have been implemented.

It is connected as an interface between a terminal or PC and the board. The 9-pin Cannon socket is inserted
directly onto the terminal or PC. Between the board and the adapter, an 8-pin RJ45-RJ45 cable required (
S0-cable, patch cable).

V24IA board, component side

1. Terminal or PC
2. via cable to DS02/ADM/DUPN or ASC2 board
3. Shrink pipe

The activation of the display at the terminal or PC is carried out via the space key.
The displayed menu items may now be selected.
The following controls may be carried out (DEBUG MENU):

• D channel monitor
• C-BUS monitor

• Layer 1 monitor (crc/abort)

588 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 14 Measuring and Testing Tools

• resource monitor
• show error counters (Bit errorr)
• ci monitor

The reaction times of the board may be increased by activating the controls.
Removing and Inserting the board
The board may be removed and inserted during system operation.
All debugging tasks should be switched off before removing the cable from the board.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 589

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

15.1 About this Manual

This manual contains information for sales personnel, service technicians and installers for the acquisition,
installation, service, maintenance and expansion of the Communication Server Integral 55 Compact.

A separate manual is available for each individual application.

590 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

15.2 Important notes

Safety Information
Prior to completing the connection of the system to the mains power, all wiring of the Integral 55 Compact
must be completed and checked!
System service and repairs are the exclusive domain of an authorised specialist!
During installation of the Integral 55 Compact in 19” cabinets, desktop, standing or wall mounting, enough
strain relief for all cables and accesses must be ensured.
When connecting circuits to the V.24 interfaces, only use the supplied shielded cables.
The Integral 55 Compact must be connected to the potential equalization!
The presence of strong magnetic fields in the vicinity of the Integral 55 Compact must be avoided!
The Integral 55 Compact must not be exposed to shock, impact or vibrations!
For EMC and conformity reasons, in the Integral 55 Compact only boards may be used that are approved and
equipped with metal front panels!
ESD-measures must be accomplished when working with boards susceptible to electrostatic shock.
For reasons of EMC, vacant slots should be covered with frontplates.
In case of wall mounting, a minimum distance for extracting/inserting the boards must be kept.
The following regulations or guidelines must be considered during system installation, commissioning and
operation:

• DIN VDE 0100 Setting up heavy current systems

• DIN VDE 0105 Operating heavy current systems
• DIN VDE 0132 Fire countermeasures in electrical systems
• DIN VDE 0298 Use of cables and insulated wiring for heavy current systems
• DIN VDE 0800 Telecommunications engineering

• DIN VDE 0891 Use of cables and insulated wiring for telecommunication and information processing
systems
• DIN 4102 Combustive properties of building materials and components
• DIN 5035 Interior lighting with artificial light

• VDI 2054 Air conditioning systems for data processing environments

Additional regulations or guidelines may apply in special or individual circumstances.

Transport
The Integral 55 Compact may be transported only in the original packing or installed in a 19” cabinet.
Check that the system is complete by referring to the delivery note and the accompanying installation docu-
ments.
Connections to V.24 Interfaces
To prevent the destruction of the V.24 interface driver and receiver components when connecting devices, it is
imperative, to use the following cables:

CSI55 LX 07/2006 591

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

Cable for logging (PK HAL Length Material number

Cat5, grey, 1:1) 1m 4.999.045.210
3m 4.999.045.212
5m 4.999.045.214
10m 4.998.045.215

Additionally, the adapter plug RJ45/D-Sub, material number: 4.999.059.171, is available.

15.2.1 Environmental Conditions

The following placement guidelines must be considered in order to ensure trouble free operation of the Integral
55 Compact:

• The room must be dry and provide options for ventilation.

• Weight in the case of full capacity, see Technical data.
• The floor covering should possess antistatic properties. It should be easy to clean and abrasion resistant.
• The Integral 55 Compact should not be exposed to heat (e.g. radiator).
• An additional number of earthed mains sockets must be provided for service purposes.

Climatic conditions for operation, storage and transportation - see Tecnical data.

The access to the Integral 55 Compact must be guaranteed from the front and the back.
In the case of wall mounting, a minimum distance for extracting/inserting the boards must be
kept.

Technical Data → 596

15.2.2 Required Servicing Procedures

If servicing is required the Helpdesk has been called by:

• the customer,
• the technician/service technician,
• Remote alarm signalling
• TNS (off hours)

.
In most cases, the Helpdesk will already have located the fault through the use of remote diagnostics. If this is
the case, if necesary, simply replacing the faulty module will suffice. It should be stated, however, that remote
diagnostics are not capable of locating every fault.
You must then:

• Condense the available information

592 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

• Interpret fault returns/indications or displays

• Locate the fault using the service PC
• Carry out diagnostics with the aid of the Helpdesk.

15.3 Product description

The Integral 55 Compact is the ideal platform in modern business communication for medium-sized and large
companies with branch offices. It is designed primarily for linking branch structures to the headquarter. It
supports the standard interfaces of conventional technology as well as VoIP solutions and IP network connec-
tions. The integrated VoIP - interface can be configured for subscribers as well as for network connections.
Furthermore, this technology converts the Integral 55 Compact into an ideal supplement of already existing
Integral systems.

15.3.1 Comparison Integral 55/Integral 55 Compact

Overview of the most important differences (details in the text!)

Integral 55 Integral 55 Compact
Construction 19” 19”
Installation In the cabinet In the cabinet, wall-mounted,
free-standing device
Cable adapter required not required
Multigroup capability yes no, only single module
Expandability yes possible
Errorsignaling yes no, no ESB/EDU
Potential-free switching yes no
contacts:
ISDN emergency yes no
telephone

CSI55 LX 07/2006 593

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

Overview of the most important differences (details in the text!)

Blower not redundant redundant
V.24 insulated or not insulated not insulated
Harddisk PCMCIA only Compact Flash
UK0 yes no
Slots for boards 32 4
Expansion boards arbitrarily ATA, CAS, DECT21, DT21, DSPF,
IPN and VOIP
Use of the ATLC and yes no
IMUX boards
Free selection of slots yes conditional
Power supply redundant not redundant
CF22 redundant not redundant
S2M power supply NT via ESB board external plug-in power supply unit

As a member of the Integral 55 family in a new, compact 19” housing, Integral 55 Compact offers virtually the
same features as the other Integral 55 systems. The main purpose of the Integral 55 Compact was to achieve
a cost reduction in minor expansion options.

• The integration of central components and subscriber/line interfaces on a HW platform (given configura-
tion),
• a cost- and function-optimized power supply unit,
• relinquishment of the rarely used HW interfaces,
• and a new, optimized design,

made it feasible to offer the Integral 55 with a variety of features at a competitive price, even in the under 50
subscriber segment.
The Integral 55 Compact runs on the same system software as the other Integral 55 systems. The same
service and network administration applications (ISM, ICU-Editor, CAT, ADN, etc.) are also employed for the
administration and monitoring of the Integral 55 Compact.
The following differences exist between the Integral 55 Compact system and the Integral 55 system:
General

• 19” mounting system with 3 vertical modules With the appropriate mounting attachments it can be wall-
mounted or used as a table or upright unit.
• No rear cable adaptors (boards) with champ plugs are used for wiring the interfaces. The interfaces are
all accessible from the front and are installed with RJ-45 cabling.
• Only single module configuration is possible. Integral 55 Compact has no IML (inter module link) inter-
face; twin- and multi-module configurations are therefore not possible with the I55 Compact.
• Module type is O1, Integral 55 Compact is currently not upgradeable.
• CF doubling is not possible.

• Integral 55 Compact has no error signalling LEDs, relay contacts or optocoupler inputs. An ESB/EDU
cannot be equipped.

594 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

• Integral 55 Compact has no free switching points.

• No connection of ISDN emergency phones is necessary (no EES0B board).
• In comparison to the I55 with its standard single fan, the I55 Compact has a redundant double fan
system. If one of the blowers fails, the system continues to work in the permissible temperature range.

Integrated components

• The functions of the HSCB/ACB, CF22, ADM and DUPN boards are firmly integrated into the base unit
(BU). CBI addresses / slot assignment are predetermined:
– Slot 3 / CBI address 08: ADM
– Slot 5 / CBI address 0A: DUPN
– Slot 9 / CBI address 0E: HSCB/ACB
– Slot 10 / CBI address 0F: CF22
• Only the non-isolated V.24 interface is located on the HSCBO and ACBO boards. An isolated V.24
interface is not possible.
• The MI switch function has not been implemented on the HSCBO.
• The HSCBO uses only CompactFlash as a medium for the backup memory. Other media such as hard
disks may not be used!
• The DUPN built into the motherboard (MBO) supports only 24 subscribers instead of 32.
• The ADM is also integrated into the motherboard (MBO) of the base unit (BU).
– ADM submodule 1 is an ABSM (ports 0 to 3): It is built-in (4 analog subscriber interfaces).
– ADM submodule 4 is an STSM (ports 12 to 15) and also built-in (four S0 or T0 interfaces).
– ADM submodules 2 and 3 can be configured as UPSM, STSM or ABSM. Submodule UKSM cannot
be used in the BU.
• Integral 55 Compact has no single port occupation LEDs for the integral ADM/DUPN functions.

Expansion slots

• Integral 55 Compact has two slots for boards. These are only to a limited extent selectable.
• The following rules apply to board slots:
– Slot 1 / CBI address 06 (upper slot on BU):
Only the VoIP, DSPF or IPN boards may be inserted into this slot.
– Slot 7 / CBI address 0C (lower slot on BU):
Boards ATA, CAS, DECT21, DT21, DSPF or IPN may be inserted into this slot.
– When using the DT21 module, the optical 2 Mbit/s interface (submodule OFAS) and coax connec-
tion (CA4x) cannot be connected.
– When using the DECT21 board a maximum of 8 base stations may be configured.

• No auxiliary highways are present at these two slots. The DSPF board may therefore only be equipped
with a maximum of two ASN3 submodules. i.e. DSPF has access to 64 channels, which is sufficient for
the configuration of the Integral 55 Compact.
• When using the DT21 board for connection to an S2M NT, voltage must be supplied to the network
terminator (NT) via an external plug-in power supply (material number 27.4402.1056).

CSI55 LX 07/2006 595

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

Power supply unit

• The Integral 55 Compact power supply unit PSO is built-in. The PSU cannot be doubled.
• No 110V network supply.

• No -60V partial voltage generation in the BU.

Therefore the -72V supply voltage of the UKO interfaces on the UKSM submodule cannot be generated
for the integrated ADM.
• No external -48V battery supply.

• No 25 Hz ringing voltage.

15.3.2 Technical Data

Connection options
up to 52 voice or data channels in the basic configuration
up to 240 VoIP voice channels
up to 8 radio base stations (DECT) or 1x S2M

Network interfaces
4 wire ISDN basic BRI T0 B+B+D channel
access structure
ISDN Primary Rate Access (if required) PRI S2M 30xB+D channel
structure

Basic configuration
S0-Interfaces 4
UPN-(B+B+D) interfaces 24
a/b interface 4

Expansions
a/b or max. 1 x per system
S0 or max. 1 x per system
UPN max. 1 x per system
VoIP 240 channels for networking and subscribers
DECT 8 RBS
DT21 one S2M-Interface (exchange line (T2) - or FV(TIE,
tie line)), 120 Ohm symm.
ATA 8 analog exchange accesses (PSTN)
CAS one S2M-Interface (exchange interface, connection
line or special interface)

* If DT21 is used, DECT is not possible. In this case DECT over IP!

596 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

Dimensions
Integral 55 Compact (WxHxD) 482x132x483,5 mm (3 U)
Wall-mounted device (wall mount bracket and Integral 55 510x530x135,1 mm
Compact, WxHxD)
Floor-mounted device (wall mount bracket, pedestal and 510x574x444,8 mm
Integral 55 Compact, WxHxD)

Weights
Integral 55 Compact 11.00 kg
Wall-mounted device (wall mount bracket and Integral 55 16.25 kg
Compact)
Floor-mounted device (wall mount bracket, pedestal and 20.50 kg
Integral 55 Compact)

Colour
Wall mount bracket, pedestal and Integral 55 Compact RAL 7016 (anthracite grey)

Network connection
Mains voltage 230V ± 10%
Mains frequency 50 Hz -6% +26%
Maximum power consumption 0.6A
Electrical circuit protection 16A automatic circuit breaker C type

Additional data
Heat output at full configuration 75 W
Sound pressure level (at 1m distance to EN ISO <45 dB(A)
3744)

Telephones/terminals
Al the telephones available for the Communication Server Integral 55 can be connected:

• IP telephones
• ISDN telephones
• Analogue telephones

Ambient conditions/air conditioning

DIN ETS Temperature Relative humidity Comments
range
Storage: 300.019-Kl.1.1 -5◦ C to +45◦ C
Transport: 300.019-Kl.2.2 -25◦ C to +70◦ C
Operation: 300.019-Kl.232 -5◦ C to +45◦ C stationary use,
weather protected

CSI55 LX 07/2006 597

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

Reliability
In all of the values stated herein, the power supply device was also taken into consideration. However, the
failure of power supply devices is less frequent than the failure of mains voltage due to the the power plant. If
UPS (uninterrupted power supply) is not used, this will lead to total system failure in both cases. This must be
taken into account during the use of the values.

Reliability
MTBF for the whole system >/= 35 years
Fault rate of individual boards </= 0.75% in the 1st year
</= 0.5% in the 2nd year

Traffic capacity
The term traffic capacity subdivides itself into the dynamic one and the static traffic capacity.
The dynamic traffic capacity is the one provided by the system. It is given by the unity BHCA, i.e. Busy Hour
Call Attempts and identifies the number of processed call attempts per main traffic hour. It is given by the unity
BHCA, i.e. Busy Hour Call Attempts and identifies the number of processed call attempts per main traffic hour.
The static traffic capacity describes the performance of the switching matrix. It is shown in the unit Erlang
(Erl).
The basis for the dimensioning of telephone systems is the FTZ Guideline 12TR3. For digital subscribers
(2B+D) it results in a traffic intensity value of 0,3 Erlang (see BAPT - Bundesamt fuer Post- und Telekom-
Angelegenheiten regulations for traffic intensity values).
The values listed below in the table apply for the Integral 55 Compact:

Traffic capacity
Dynamic 8000 BHCA
Static Non-blocking (1 Erlang/B channel)

15.4 Base Unit

Die Base Unit integriert die zentralen Komponenten, Teilnehmer- / Leitungsschnittstellen sowie die Stromver-
sorgung.
Es stehen nur zwei Steckplätze zur Verfügung. Grundsätzlich wurde die BU für die VOIP und DECT Bau-
gruppen konzipiert. Dennoch können diese im Bedarfsfall mit folgenden Baugruppen ersetzt oder kombiniert
werden:

• ATA
• CAS
• DSPF (nur 32 Kanäle stehen zur Verfügung)
• DT21
• IPN

Peripherie-Baugruppen der Base Unit (BU) und die Lage ihrer Anschlussorgane

598 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

CSI55 LX 07/2006 599

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

1. je nach gesteckter AO-Baugruppe

Die Tabelle zeigt die Kombinationsmöglichkeiten aller einsetzbaren Baugruppen in einer Matrix dargestellt.

VoIP DECT21 DT21 DSPF ATA IPN CAS

VoIP - X X X X X X
DECT21 X - - X - X -
DT21 X - - X - X -
DSPF X X X - X X X
ATA X - - X - X -
IPN X X X X X - X
CAS X - - X - X -
X = possible combinations

15.4.1 Layout

The base unit (BU) is accommodated in a universal housing. It is intended for mounting in a 19” cabinet (three
vertical modules) and can be used as a wall, floor or table-top housing.

• The rack is installed in the 19” cabinet with the aid of two simple mounting brackets and sliding rails.
• As a table-top unit with rubber feet in the base.
• The rack is mounted on the wall by means of a simple enamelled wall holder.
• The basic housing can be used as an upright unit with simple accessories.

All interfaces and control/display elements can be accessed from the front. The blowers can be replaced from
the outside during operation.

600 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

Interior view of the Integral 55 Compact (motherboard as a board solution lying in housing), seen from above.

1. Blower
2. Socket for third submodule of the ADM (S0, T0, UPN or a/b)

3. Socket for second submodule of the ADM (S0, T0, UPN or a/b)
4. RJ45 connector strips

CSI55 LX 07/2006 601

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

15.4.2 Front

Front view of the Integral 55 Compact

1. 2x HGS
• top = HGS1
• bottom = HGS2
2. LEDs and control elements HSCBO/ACBO
3. RJ45 jack and 2x USB jacks for ACBO
• top = CU Eth (Ethernet interface for ACBO control unit)
• centre = USB/1 (universal serial bus interface 1)
• bottom = USB/2 (universal serial bus interface 2)
4. RJ45 jacks for HSCBO/ACBO
• top = CU V.24/1 (first V.24 interface for HSCBO/ACBO control unit)
• bottom = CU V.24/2 (second V.24 interface for HSCBO/ACBO control unit)
5. Slot for additional VOIP/DSPF or IPN board
6. Slot for additional ATA/CAS/DECT21/DT21/DSPF or IPN board
7. RJ45 jacks
• top = EU (extension unit port, R1RG/1)
• bottom = SPY (R1RG/2 SPY)
These two ports are reserved for future applications and are not yet usable.
8. LEDs and control elements of the MBO board
9. RJ45 jacks for AO ports

602 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

15.4.3 Housing open

If the housing must be opened (e.g. for retro-fitting submodules), proceed as follows:

• Loosen the five Torx screws with several rotations (1.)

• Pull the housing cover towards you.

• Lift the housing cover over the screw heads.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 603

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

• Now the cover can be removed by pulling it away.

Use the reverse procedure to close the housing.

15.4.4 Table unit

If the base unit is set on a table, it must be fitted with four rubber feet (included in the mounting set) on the
underside of the housing.

604 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

15.4.5 Install in the cabinet

When installing in a cabinet the base unit must be mounted on sliding rails.

Fit the sliding rails in the cabinet for the base unit.
Provide the appropriate holes in the mounting channels with M6 cage nuts.
The base unit is supplied with mounting brackets already fitted. Place the unit into the proposed verticle
module. Secure it in the cabinet by means of four torx screws.
The following illustration shows an installed base unit of the Integral 55 Compact.

15.4.6 Mounting on the wall.

The Integral 55 Compact base unit must be placed in the wall-mounting bracket so that the
LED and switch block are always on top.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 605

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

The base unit must be If the access is on the

assembled in the right, the cable should
preferred state, i.e. be long enough to
left-hand access to permit the boards to be
boards and patch field. pulled out for servicing.
The excess cable after
commissioning can be
stored in the rear.

Three points (1.) for the drillholes can be marked

on the wall with the aid of the drilling jig (packaging
with punched drillhole diagram).
Drill the holes and insert the enclosed plugs.

The wall bracket should be mounted to suit the given circumstances!

Observe: Wall spacing
Sufficient space must be provided for plugging and unplugging the boards.

606 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

The holder should then be hung on the upper two

screws and locked in place with the lower screw.
Tighten up all three screws.
The connecting cables of the Integral 55 Compact
must be secured on the pull-throughs (2.) and
strain relief bars (3.) on the left and right side with
cable fasteners.

Set the Integral 55 Compact base unit on the lower plate of the wall-mounting bracket. Push the unit inside.
The springy bracket and mounting bracket at the front will determine the full depth and positioning in the
wall-mounting bracket.
Secure the unit on the wall-mounting bracket with four torx screws.
Plug the connecting cable into the corresponding RJ45 jacks on the front of the base unit.

15.4.7 Setting up in the room

Place the holder in the foot with rubber studs.

Foot (from above)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 607

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

Wall-mounting bracket

1. Connect the holder to the foot with the four torx screws.

The connecting cables of the base unit must be secured with cable fasteners on the pull-throughs at the left
and right of the wall-mounting bracket (see illustrations).
Push the Integral 55 Compact base unit into the holder from the side shown in the following illustration.

1. Secure the unit on the wall-mounting bracket with four torx screws.
2. Plug the connecting cable into the corresponding RJ45 jacks on the front of the base unit.

608 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

1. Fastening for cables with fast binders (strain relief).

2. Strain relief lug for earthing wire
3. Clamp for earthing wire
4. IEC power plug

Mounting on the wall. → 605

15.5 Boards

The boards inserted in the front side may be removed and inserted during system operation. The ESD
measures must be followed

For EMC and conformity reasons in the Integral 55 Compact are used only released boards
equipped with metalic front strips!
For reasons of EMC, vacant slots should be covered with frontplates.

Board Base Unit

ACBO → 610 X
ASC2
ASC21
ASCxx

CSI55 LX 07/2006 609

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

Board Base Unit

ATA → 628 X
ATA2
ATB
ATC and
CAS → 632 X
DDID
DECT21 → 638 X
DS02
DS03
DSPF → 642 X
DT21 → 646 X
DUP03
DUPN
HSCBO → 651 X
IPN → 654 X
MBO → 656 X
SBAO → 664 X
VOIP → 664 X

15.5.1 ACBO Advanced Computer Board Office

Short description
The ACBO board is the basic equipment in the Integral 55 Compact LX. They are located in the Base Unit
(BU). This computer board is used when the software IEEx (Linux operating sistem) is used.

Features
ETX-PC 512 MByte of main memory, (only one SO DIMM
The ETX-Board is a complet PC-System. All Modul)
functions the current PCs offer are realized on this Boot flash PROM with Phoenix Bios
Board. Performance same as Pentium III/400MHz
or higher. Voltage generation
Real-time clock (RTC)
Hardware watchdog
RTC battery (8 years buffer operation)
Ethernet interface 10/100 Base T
two V.24 interfaces (not isolated)
Interface to the PCM highway (4 independent B channel accesses)
PCI Bus (5V tolerant) 32Bit/33MHz
Two CBus interfaces (ISA Bus)
on for system control reasons
one as SPY-remote Interface (SPY = System Protocoller and Analyser)
IDE interface for Compact Flash (HGS)
USB1/2 for more V.24 interfaces

610 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

The hardware prerequisites for remote logging with SPY are contained on the board.

As the software for the logging from remote is currently not implemented, it must be made
locally using a SP1 board (reference number: 49.9902.8112) and a PC.

ACBO board, component side

1. HGS, Compact Flash (component side); boot flash, Compact Flash, (conductor side)
2. Ethernet USB 1.1

3. 2 x V.24
4. Battery

CSI55 LX 07/2006 611

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

5. Transformer 10/100 Base T

6. ETX-PC
7. CBI

8. PCM highway controller

9. CBT
10. PCM highway controller
11. SEPL

12. Ribbon cable

13. ISA Bus testconnector
14. Power supply plug

Other features
Power demand +5V 2200 mA with 2 * Compact Flash

15.5.1.1 LEDs and Switch Functions

1. Position of the control elements and LEDs (Control Unit)

LEDs and switches of the ACBO

ACBO board, front side

Switch Position in Normal Operation

612 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

S1 Middle:
S2 Below

Switch Function

S1 Reset switch
Middle: Operating status
Below: Hardware reset of the board, locking
Above: ACB is shut down (by the operating system), keying
S2 Hard Disk Change Request (HDCHR)
Below: Operating status: IDE Hard Disk in operation
Above: Service position: Removing and Inserting the IDE Hard Disk

Meanings of LEDs

L3 on: CBI access

L4 on: Access to Compact Flash 1/2
L5 on: Compact Flash (HSG) can be removed/inserted
L2 on: Power OK
L7- L10 These LEDs indicate the statuses from reset to operation. After the voltage supply has been
switched on a functional check is carried out (LEDs light up briefly).

The commissioning status is divided into four groups:

1. ACBO loading from flash software

2. ACBO loading from HGS to operating system level
3. ACBO loading from HGS to application level

4. ACBO loading in special status (APS change) during operation.

No. L7 L8 L9 L10 Gr. Status Phase name

15 1 1 1 1 0 Commissioning starts BIOS is running; LED test.
14 1 1 1 0 0 Operating system takes up Linux-Kernel has been
work loaded.
GRUB finished and
initialization RAM Disc
started.
13 1 1 0 1 0 Load operating system via ACB board without HGS is
CBI loaded as slave via C bus.
Status 11 and 12 skipped.
12 1 1 0 0 0 Load operating system via ACB board without HGS is
Ethernet loaded as master via
Ethernet.
Status 11 and 13 skipped.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 613

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

No. L7 L8 L9 L10 Gr. Status Phase name

11 1 0 1 1 0 Load operating system via ACB board with HGS is
local bus loaded as master directly.
Status 11 to 13 are not
processed in the normal
order.
10 1 0 1 0 0 Flash software update ACB flash software in
progress.
9 1 0 0 1 1 PAL starts The PAL server is ready.
All known Pascal tasks are
started.
8 1 0 0 0 1 Download of the application Download of applications files
files in progress.
7 0 1 1 1 3 Start of the platform Start of the platform
applications applications such as PFSP,
PAL, L4AD.
6 0 1 1 0 3
5 0 1 0 1 3
4 0 1 0 0 3 APS change in progress (only ACB with IVL function is
displayed on the IVL) preparing an APS change.
3 0 0 1 1 2 Conversion of customer data Conversion of customer data
(only displayed on the IVL) (CKDT started with MML
command is not displayed).
2 0 0 1 0 2 Load APS customer data DMS of the module signales
the loading customer data
phase
1 0 0 0 1 2 ICU commissioning All customer data loaded.
Start commissioning of
module(s)
0 0 0 0 0 2 Normal operation Module(s) in operation

1 = LED on
0 = LED off
On the component side of the ACBO there are two pin strips X11 and X12.

614 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

Section of the component side ACBO board

Jumper functions

Jumper on X11
1-2 Adress bit A9 = 1
2 - 3 (default) Adress bit A9 = 0
4-5 Board passport protected
5 - 6 (default) Board passport not protected
Jumper on X12
1 - 2 (default) Watchdog enable
2-3 Watchdog disable
4-5 SCOCON fulfilled (Service entry)
5 - 6 (default) SCOCON not fulfilled

15.5.2 ASC21 Analog Subscriber Circuit 21

Short description
The ASC21 board provides 32 a/b connections for analog terminals, according to country-specific require-
ments with the following features:

Country-specific Germany, Austria, Switzerland, Netherlands, Great Britain, Italy, Spain, Belgium,
variants are Venezuela, Hungary, Czech Republic, Slovakian Republic, Mexico, Hong Kong,
configurable using USA, Russia and France
board software for
the following
countries:

CSI55 LX 07/2006 615

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

Power demand +5V 600 mA

Interfaces 32 × a/b
Constant current 22 mA convertible to 30 mA
supply Line resistance 2 x 235 Ohm
range: 1.7 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,4 mm
4.0 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,6 mm
7.5 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,8 mm
DTMF/pulse dialling
25/50 Hz ringing current (convertible)
Short and long flash time (end device dependent)
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Board software download
Board identification using board pass
Maintenance function
Polarity reversion for “message waiting” signalling
Connection of external announcement devices

The connection on the MDF is carried out via the CA2B or CARUB boards.

15.5.2.1 Changing the Supply Current

The supply current on the board can be set between 22mA (standard) and 30mA per connecting circuit.
The following steps must be taken:
The number of the AO for which the current changeover can be made is stated on the conductor path side
and on the component side.
Example:
The power supply component for AO 01 is located on the component side. The soldering points for setting the
higher loop current are located on the conductor path side. For this reason the 01 marking is also located on
the conductor path side.
The marking *3 is to be found in each AO area, close to which are four mounting spots for two not equipped
resistors (0 ohm).
These mounting spots must be connected in pairs by wire jumpers. It is important to solder two wire jumpers
per AO.

616 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

ASC21 board

1. Power supply component per AO

2. jointly for four AOs

3. Connector to backplane of I55

For better orientation, please turn the board so that the connector (3) is facing you and the numbers of the
AOs are legible.
The following is a section from the component side on which you can see the position of the mounting spots
to be bridged.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 617

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

1 on component or soldering side, depending on port

The mounting spots must be vertically connected to each other.
The marking *3 relates to the mounting spots marked with an arrow.
The current increase can be set on the component side for the following AOs:

AO number
Number for xx Number for yy
02 04
05 07
10 12
13 15

618 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

18 20
21 23
26 28
29 31

The components are arranged in the same way in all AOs marked with xx or yy.
The following is an section from the conductor side on which you can see the position of the mounting spots
to be bridged.
A different arrangement applies to AO 01 and the remaining AOs. First of all, the component arrangement for
AOs 01 and 03:

CSI55 LX 07/2006 619

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

1 on component or soldering side, depending on port

In AO 01 the two bridges to be vertically soldered lie side by side.
The marking *3 relates to the mounting spots marked with an arrow.
The components arrangement is the same for the remaining AOs on which the current increase can be set on
the conductor side:

620 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

1 on component or soldering side, depending on port

The marking *3 relates to the mounting spots marked with an arrow.
The current increase can be set on the conductor side for the following AOs:

AO number
Number for xx Number for yy
01 #1 03
06 08
09 11
14 16

CSI55 LX 07/2006 621

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

17 19
22 24
25 27
30 32

#1 The component arrangement is different on AO 01.

The components are arranged in the same way in all AOs marked with xx or yy.

Please connect (vertically) only the mounting spots which are marked accordingly!
Bridges which are soldered differently may result in serious malfunctioning.

15.5.2.2 LEDs and Switch Functions

ASC21 board, front side

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position

Switch Function

S1 Left: Preparatory disabling (VSP) for all connecting circuits

Middle: Operating status/release

622 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

Right: Reset board

Right, then Forced board download
left:

Meanings of LEDs

L1 on: Board is busy with switching functions

flashing: Board removable after preparatory disabling
off: Board is not busy
L2 on: Board reset in progress
flashing: Download in progress
off: Board has gone into operation

15.5.3 ASCxx Analogue Subscriber Circuit

Short description
The ASC board is available in the following variants:
ASCEU: Europe with the following characteristics:

Country-specific variants Germany, Spain, Netherlands, Switzerland, Italy, Belgium, Austria, Greece,
are configurable using Mexico and Venezuela
board software for the
following countries:
Power demand +5V 620 mA
Interfaces 16 a/b (connectors for analog terminals in accordance with country-specific
guidelines)
Constant current supply 24 mA, switchable to 30 mA (mounting of a 0 Ohm resistance)
Line resistance 2 x 475 Ohm
Range 4 km installation cable (J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,4 mm
9 km installation cable (J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,6 mm
15 km installation cable (J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,8 mm
Line lengths for Message waiting
DTMF/pulse dialling, flash and earth button detection, Telecom-specific (dependent on terminals)
Short and long flash time, Telecom-specific (dependent on terminals)
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Board software download
Board identification using board pass
Maintenance function
Polarity reversion for “message waiting” signalling
Connection of external announcement devices

ASCF: France with the following characteristics:

Power demand +5V 620 mA

CSI55 LX 07/2006 623

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

Interfaces 16 a/b (connectors for analog terminals in accordance with French guidelines
and voice terminals)
Resistance feed (const. 2 x 400 Ohm
voltage)
DTMF/pulse dialling, polarity reversal and button detection
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Board software download
Board identification using board pass
Maintenance function
Symmetric call supply
Polarity reversion for “message waiting” signalling
Connection of external announcement devices

ASCGB: Great Britain

Power demand +5V 620 mA

Interfaces 16 a/b (connectors for analog terminals in accordance with British guidelines)
Constant current supply 30 mA
Loop range 900 Ohm
DTMF/pulse dialling, flash and earth button detection
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Board software download
Board identification using board pass
Maintenance function
Polarity reversion for “message waiting” signalling

15.5.3.1 Line lengths for Message waiting

The range for Message waiting signaling for analogue subscribers of the ASCEU board with the ICU pro-
gramme ASCEU018.ICP in connection with the various apparatus types and seizure (pick up on call) and
outgoing seizure (pick up) with the installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,4 mm is:

Outgoing seizure (pick up) Incoming seizure (pick up in call)

Apparatus types Line length [m] Line length [W ] Line length [m] Line length [W ]
Tel. T40 1400 379 1400 379
Tel. TE51 1000 272 1000 272
Tel. TE91 1000 272 1000 272
Tel. TC91 1100 298 1100 298
Tel. TB510LED 1100 298 600 163
DE
Tel. TB519D 900 245 900 245
Tel. TK40-20-2 300 83 300 83

Recommendation

624 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

The line length with which the performance feature Message waiting is to be operated with conventional
signaling (permanently illuminated LED signal), should not exceed

600 m (Installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0.4 mm)

1.3 km (Installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0.6 mm)
2.4 km (Installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,8 mm)

Malfunctions may occur when establishing a connection if the lines are any longer.
The tel. TK40-20-2 should only be operated with a 300 m (83W ) line length.
Deviations from the recommended line length are possible.
If the lines are any longer, a different Message waiting signal (signal LED blinks) should be selected. Signalling
is implemented in the ICU programme ASCEU019.ICP for the ASCEU board.

15.5.3.2 Bridge positions

The power supply can be increased from 24 mA (standard) to 30 mA per line in this board: The increase in
the supply current is implemented by inserted 0 Ohm resistors or bridges at the following coordinate points:

AO1 197 077

AO2 199 128
AO3 173 069
AO4 179 116
AO5 155 077
AO6 157 128
AO7 131 069
AO8 137 116
AO9 113 077
AO10 115 128
AO11 089 069
AO12 095 116
AO13 071 077
AO14 073 128
AO15 047 069
AO16 053 116

CSI55 LX 07/2006 625

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

626 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

15.5.3.3 LEDs and Switch Functions

ASCxx board, front side

1. LED red
2. LED green

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position

Switch Function

S1 Left: Preparatory disabling (of all connecting circuits)

Middle: Neutral/release/ operating status
Right: Reset board
Right, then left: Forced board download

Meanings of LEDs

L1 on: Board is busy with switching functions

flashing: Module can be removed after preparatory disabling (VSP) or
blocked in terms of software
off: Board is not busy
L2 on: Board reset in progress
flashing: Download in progress

CSI55 LX 07/2006 627

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

off: Board in operation

15.5.4 ATA Analog Trunk Interface A

Short description
The ATA board provides the interface for up to 8 analog exchange accesses (PSTN) in accordance with
country-specific guidelines. It is a universal Euro-based trunk module and can be adapted to individual coun-
tries by means of the corresponding submodule and software (level, impedances etc.).

Submodule Countries of application

SIGA Signalling Unit A Germany, Russia
SIGB Signalling Unit B Switzerland
SIGC Signalling Unit C Luxemburg
SIGD Signalling Unit D: Austria
SIGE Signalling Unit E Austria
SIGF Signalling Unit F Belgium
SIGG Signalling Unit G Hungary

A mixed combination of ATA boards and submodules is not possible.

The board can accommodate a maximum of 4 two-part submodules.

ATA board, slots

Other features
Power demand +5V 530 mA with eight occupied connecting circuits
Interfaces 8 × a/b
DTMF/pulse dialling
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV

628 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

Other features
Dial tone identification, charge count
Board software download
Board identification using board pass
Maintenance function

In the Integral55, an emergency operation switchover can be set up by inserting an EES1B (EES8B) board
behind the ATA board; this is not possible in the Integral55 Compact.

15.5.4.1 Installation

Base Unit
The ATA board must be inserted into the slot shown below.

1. Slot for the ATA board

Details
Use on the ATA slot

Slot address: 01-01-07-xx

CBI address: 0C hex.
xx = port number

CSI55 LX 07/2006 629

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

Connections ATA to contact strip 1

Connections see: Connections from the BU → 680.

630 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

15.5.4.2 LEDs and Switch Functions

ATA board, front side

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position
S2-S9 Left position

Switch Function

S1 Left: Preparatory disabling (of all connecting circuits)

Middle: Operating status/release
Right: Reset board
Right, then left: Forced board download
S2 Right: AO1 preparatory disabling
Left: Approve, operation status
S3-S8 Right: AOx preparatory disabling;
Left: Approve, operation status
S9 Right: AO8 preparatory disabling
Left: Approve, operation status

Meanings of LEDs

L1 on: Board is busy with switching functions

flashing: Board removable after preparatory disabling
off: Board is not busy

CSI55 LX 07/2006 631

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

L6 on: Board reset in progress

flashing: Download in progress or blocked by software
off: Board in operation
L2 on: AO1 busy
off: AO1 not busy
L3, L4, L5, on: AOx busy
L7, L8, L9 off: AOx not busy
L10 on: AO8 busy
off: AO8 not busy

15.5.5 CAS Channel Associated Signalling

Short description
The CAS board is a PCM30 interface for up to 30 B channels in accordance with CCITT. The board contains
the following features:

Other features
Country of National and international
application
Power demand +5V 930 mA
Line signalling in channel 16 (CAS) in accordance with CCITT or country/customer specifications.
Register signalling in 30 B channels (inband) in accordance with CCITT or country/customer
specifications.
Can be used as an exchange interface, connection line or special interface.
Incoming, outgoing and bothway traffic direction, can also be mixed as required
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Board software download.
PCM30 interface configuration via board software.
Board identification using board pass
Maintenance functions

15.5.5.1 Installation

Base Unit
The CAS board can be plugged into the slot shown below.

632 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

1. Slot of the CAS board

Details

Slot address: 01-01-07-xx

CBI address: 0C hex.
xx = port number

CSI55 LX 07/2006 633

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

Connections CAS to contact strip 1

Connections see: Connections from the BU → 680.

15.5.5.2 CAS-TIELINE User Program

Introduction
The CAS-TIELINE user program was developed for the I55 system on the CAS hardware platform, and is a
tie-line transmission program. The 16 different tie-line transmission variants are designated E1 to E10/2.
The user data is adapted to individual requirements by means of the ICU mask.
Hardware
The CAS board (channel associated signalling) is used here. Depending on the application, the 2 MBit/s
interface can be configured using the confidata (see Section “ICU mask and confidata”) with impedance of 75
W (unsymmetrical) or 120 W (symmetrical).
Depending on that, for the line connection one of the following adapter boards (only Integral 55) is then
required:

• CA1B for 75 W

634 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

• CA4B for 120 W

Further general information about the CAS board, in particular about the controls and denotations of the front
panel, can be gathered from the appropriate paragraphs.
SoftWare
The CAS board is set up with KAD (customer specific user data) for TIELINE application. This requires the
corresponding load list name for the accompanying slot address to be entered.
The necessary parameters (confidata) are then set up using the ICU editor. The corresponding ICP files and
the confidata subsequently end up on the CAS board by means of a download.
Short description of Applications
The TIELINE user program supports inband signalling (DTMF dial codes, call progress tones) and line sig-
nalling (signalling channel bit a). The following applies to line bits b, c and d: bcd = 101. Only changes to bit
’a’ will be processed by the user program. Changes to the bcd bits will be ignored.
16 different signalling plans are produced from the available signal stock. These plans can be selected using
the confidata and always apply to all 30 connecting circuits (AO).
In principle all the AOs are set up for both-way throughput.
Line signalling will not be carried out if all the signals appear as pulsed signals.
DTMF (dual tone multi-frequency dialling) and pulse dialling are suitable dialling systems.
The suffix dialling facility is guaranteed for the entire duration of an outgoing call, and for a predefined period
of an incoming call.
If the criterion “message” is identified, an active call will be cancelled and the digits memory will be deleted.
The elegibility or inelegibility of a line can be set up by the confidata seperately for incoming and outgoing
AOs.
In the same way, a 425 Hz continuous tone can be connected to the switching matrix as a proceed-to-select
signal for outgoing traffic, or a 425 Hz busy tone to the line for incoming traffic according to configuration.
Up to 10 digits can be programmed for a destination number in outgoing traffic. The destination number will
be chosen automatically according to the preset timeout when “elegible” or “inelegible” in the absence of the
“dialling” message.
If “elegible”; incoming “dialling” messages are ignored once the timeout has ended. If “inelegible”; they will
always be ignored. The suffix dialling facility is also guaranteed for the previous destination number when in
call status.
Outgoing DTMF signals which are “called through” will be identified, and incoming “dialling” messages are
subsequently ignored.
An area code may be programmed, which will be relayed to the GCU global control unit during incoming
seizure once the proceed-to-select criterion (signal, time) has been met.
Where ”dial” or ”message” information is absent, the release which has been initialized by the user program’s
watchdog exists neither for incoming nor for outgoing traffic.
If a fault occurs, trouble signalling to the opposite side can be activated using confidata.
In the same way, an unblocking function can be set up for each connecting circuit: When active (blocking-n =
on), and with the front panel switches TBS (total blocking switch) and TBS-N (total blocking switch minus n)
switched on, the corresponding connecting circuit will not be blocked.
Specification of Inband Signals
The available DTMF transmitters and receivers are set out in accordance with CEPT recommendation T/CS
46-02.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 635

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

The tone identifier will certainly operate in the range of 350 to 500 Hz with -30 dBm0.
The tone generator supplies a 425 Hz frequency with a transmission level of -3 dBm0. In outgoing traffic, it
can be sent to the switching matrix as a proceed-to-select signal (continuous tone). In incoming traffic, it can
be connected to the line as a busy tone (German rhythm).
Synchronization
The CAS board can generally be used as the synchronous clock supplier for synchronization purposes. In the
TIELINE application, however, this is only meaningful if no digital exchange interfaces or tie lines are present.
. This is the reason for the default setting of “No synchronous clock”. This setting can be changed via the
configuration data.

15.5.5.3 Identifying the Operation Phase

As described above, the boot software controls

• initialization,
• test and download procedures after a reset and
• indicates various statuses and possible faults by means of the LED’s on the front panel.

If no faults are found and all GCU messages (test messages, “startup ready” etc) have been received, L1
will flash eleven times and L9, L7, L8, L15 and L16 will go out, indicating that the operation phase has been
reached.

15.5.5.4 LED and Switch Functions

The functions of the switches and LED’s on the front panel differ in boot phase from those in operation phase.
Following a reset, the boot software carries out initialization, test and download procedures, and indicates
various statuses as well as possible faults via the LEDs on the front panel.
If no faults are found and all necessary GCU messages (test messages, “ready for startup” etc.) have been
received, the CAS board will reach the operation phase, where user software is put into effect.

636 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Middle position
S2 Middle position
S3 Middle position

Switch Function

S1 Left: Preparatory disabling (TBS) *

Middle: Neutral/release
Right: Reset board
Right, Forced board download
then left:
S2 Left: Preparatory disabling (TBS-N) *
Middle: Neutral
Right: No function
S3 Left: No function
Middle: No function
Right: No function

* With S1 (TBS) in the left position and S2 (TBS-N) in the middle position, all 30 ports will be blocked.
With S1 (TBS) and S2 (TBS-N) in the left position, all ports outlined in the configuration data will not
be blocked.
If S1 (TBS) is in the middle position, all 30 ports will not be blocked, irrespective of the position of S2
(TBS-N).

CSI55 LX 07/2006 637

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

Meanings of LEDs

L1 TSL Total status LED

L2 ESY External synchronization
L3 LOS No signal
L4 LOF Frame failure
L5 CRC CRC4 test fault
L6 RFR Frame failure at remote side
L7 ISU1 **
L8 ISU3 **
L9 RDL LED reset/download
L10 MSG C-bus message
L11 AIS Alarm identification signal
L12 LMF Superframe failure
L13 BIT Increased bit error ratio
L14 RMF Superframe failure at remote side
L15 ISU2 **
L16 ISU4 **

** The denotation of the LEDs depends on the application (display of R2 register, DTMF
receiver/transmitter, tone transmitter/receiver)

15.5.6 DECT21 ICU for DECT-Applications 21

Short description
The DECT21 board is used to connect the Radio Base Station RM 588, material number 4.998.001.296, to
the CSI55.
It carries out an automatic run time measurement. The manual measurement of the individual routes up to 1
km is not applicable as long as no repeater is connected between.

Other features
Country of application National and international
Power demand +5V 1100 mA
Interfaces 8 UPD interface for RBS
One UPD interface physically corresponds to 2 UPN
interfaces.
The ADPCM (Adaptive-Differential-Pulse-Code-Modulation, 32 kbit/s) conversion is carried out on the
board.
One of the two D channels is used for the transmission of synchronization information between the
DECT21 board and the RBS.
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Download board software
Board identification using board passport
Maintenance function

638 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

DECT21 board, component side

Line lengths
Installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,6 mm 1.0 km
Outdoor cable A-2YF(L)2Y Ø0,6 mm 2.8 km
Installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,6 mm and UPN repeater 2.0 km

15.5.6.1 Installation

Base Unit
The DECT21 board must be inserted into the slot shown below.

1. Slot for the DECT21 board

Details
Use on the slot of the DECT21

CSI55 LX 07/2006 639

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

Slot address: 01-01-07-xx

CBI address: 0C hex.
xx = port number

Connections DECT21 to contact strip 1

The RBSs are connected physically via ports 00 to 07.

Connections see: Connections from the BU → 680.

640 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

15.5.6.2 LEDs and Switch Functions

DECT21 board, front side

Switch Function

S1 Right: Reset board

Middle: Normal position
Left: No function
S2 Right: Yet to be defined
Middle: Normal position
Left: Yet to be defined

Meanings of LEDs

L1 off: Board is not busy

on: Module is busy in terms of exchange functions
L2 on: Synch. Master
L3 Layer 1, active port 0
L4 Layer 1, active port 2
L5 Layer 1, active port 4
L6 Layer 1, active port 6
L7 Layer 1, active port 8
L8 Layer 1, active port 10
L9 Layer 1, active port 12
L10 Layer 1, active port 14
L11 flashing: FP download active

CSI55 LX 07/2006 641

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

L12 Yet to be defined

L13 off: Board in operation
on: Board reset in progress
flashing: Download in progress
L14 All 30 B-channels are busy
L15 Layer 1, active port 1
L16 Layer 1, active port 3
L17 Layer 1, active port 5
L18 Layer 1, active port 7
L19 Layer 1, active port 9
L20 Layer 1, active port 11
L21 Layer 1, active port 13
L22 Layer 1, active port 15
L23 flashing: SW IDM in ICU activated
L24 Yet to be defined

15.5.7 DSPF Digital Signal Processing Function

Short description
The DSPF as the basic board accommodates the ASM3 announcement module. The announcement module
serves for recording and playback of ACD spoken announcements and for hotel applications. Depending on
the application the DSPF can be equipped with up to:

4 ASM3 for access to 128 time slots in I55

2 ASM3 for access to 64 time slots in I55C

Other features
Country of application National and international
Power demand +5V 850 mA

For more detailed information about configuration with ASM3 please refer to the service manual.

15.5.7.1 Inserting the submodule

The used ASM3 modules are inserted in the submodule slots “submodule 1” - “submodule 2” of the DSPF.

642 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

DSPF board, component side

1. Submodule 1
2. Submodule 2

The position must correspond to the setting in the confidata. The following allocation must be observed:

“Submodule number” Labelling Labelling on the DSPF board

parameter in the ICU Editor
0 Submodule 1 SUB1
1 Submodule 2 SUB2

15.5.7.2 Installation

Base Unit
The DSPF board can be inserted in the slots shown below.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 643

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

1. Slots of the DSPF board

15.5.7.3 Time slot management

The Integral 55 Compact is designed so that the DSPF can only be plugged into an uneven slot.
Each ASM3 submodule represents an ICU. The DSPF has access to a total of 64 time slots in the Integral 55
Compact. It can realize a maximum of two ICUs. The ICU of the board’s physical slot of the (time slots 0-31)
logs on with ICU type DSFM (DSPF master). The further ICU is realized on the same hardware by logical
address entries (time slots 32-63) in the CBI. These log on with the ICU type DSFS (DSPF slave).
The configuration of a second DSPF in the same module is not expedient.
Allowing for the above conditions, the two submodule slots and thus each of the two ICUs can be assigned to
an application (ACD or HOTCOM).
Prior to operation of the PABX the DSFM and DSFS ICUs are assigned with the CAT application and during
operation with the service and administration programs with ICU editor.
This module has no external connections.

644 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

15.5.7.4 LEDs and Switch Functions

DSPF board, front panel

Meaning of the switch on the front panel of the DSPF board
Up to 4 ICUs (1* DSFM and 3 * DSFS) can be implemented on the DSPF board. The common status of the
ICUs can be controlled via the S1 front panel switch as follows:

S1 Reset and blocking switch

Middle position All ICUs in operating status
Left position All ICUs in preparatory disabling
Right position All ICUs in reset
Left position after board Master ICU DSMF (DSPF board) receives a forced ICU
reset download. After commencing the loading process, the
switch must be returned to the middle position.

Meaning of the LEDs on the front panel of the DSPF board

Up to 4 ICUs (1* DSFM and 3 * DSFS) can be implemented on the DSPF board. The common status of the
ICUs is displayed via the two front panel LEDs L1 and L10 according to the following pattern:
The display appears according to priority, i.e., if several functions of the scheme are represented by one LED,
the one with the highest priority is implemented. Prio 1 is the highest priority, and prio 5 the lowest. In the
cases with priority 1, the board is still in the reset or download phase, whereby the additional ICUs (DSFS)
are not yet active.

L1 flashing 5Hz At least 1 ICU is still in startup, waiting for “Switching On” Prio 2
message
flashing 1 All ICUs are preparatory disabled, the board is removeable Prio 3
Hz

CSI55 LX 07/2006 645

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

an (in) At least 1 ICU has a seizure in terms of switching technology Prio 4

in at least one channel. Prio 1
All ICUs (entire board) are in reset processing (if L10 is also
on)
off All ICUs are in a resting state with their ports, the board is not Prio 5
occupied
L2 flashing 5Hz At least 1 ICU is still waiting for commissioning Prio 2
Master ICU DSFM (DSPF board) ICU Download in progress Prio 1
flashing 1 / Prio 3
Hz
an (in) Master ICU DSFM (DSPF board) in reset processing (if L1 is Prio 1
also on) Prio 1
Master ICU DSMF (DSPF board) Programming procedure in
ICU download
off All ICUs in operation Prio 4

15.5.8 DT21 Digital Linecard T2 Variant 1

Short description
The DT21 board provides one configurable S2Minterface.

Other features
Country of application National and international
Power demand +5V 400 mA
Interfaces a S2Minterface (CO (T2) - or Tie (TIE)), 120 Ohm symmetric
or
75 Ohm asymmetric. ( not intended for use in I55C)
Driver for optical interface( not intended for use in I55C)
Switchable digital attenuation for speech connections (B-channels),
adjustable via the ICU Editor
2.048MHz pulse output ( not intended for use in I55C)
V.24 Test interface (front panel)
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Board software download
Board identification using board pass
Maintenance function

Cable adapter
if used in I55 Possible adapter boards: CA1B, CA4B, OFA2B, OFAS
Power supply NT via ESBx
if used in I55C none, direct connection on front side
Power supply NT via external plug power supply (material number
27.4402.1056).

646 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

Ranges

if used in I55
37 dB attenuation range
Wire interfaces (CA1B or CA4B)
120 Ohm symmetric 0.9 km Installation cable
1.8 km TF cable
75 Ohm coax 1.5 km
Optical interface (OFA1B) monomode cable 9/125 micrometer, 11 dB max. attenuation
for entire optical path (e.g. max. 20 km at 0.4 dB/km and 7
plug connections 0.4 dB/plug)

if used in I55C
37 dB attenuation range
Wire interfaces (direct connection on the front side)
120 Ohm symmetric 0.9 km Installation cable
1.8 km TF cable

15.5.8.1 Installation

Base Unit
The DT21 board can be plugged into the slot shown below.

1. Slot for the DT21 board

Details

Slot address: 01-01-07-xx

CBI address: 0C hex.
xx = port number

CSI55 LX 07/2006 647

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

Connections DT21 (slot for DECT21) to contact strip 1

The connections for DECT21 are located in the first 16 block of the Western socket (RJ45) Thus the trunk line
interface of the DT21 is also there.
Illustration of a 16 block:

648 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

Front view of 16 x RJ45 jacks

The two DECT21 connections for the first RBS stations are in jack 8.

Connection of jack 8
Wire DECT A1 leads to contact no.: 4 (shown in green)
Wire DECT B1 leads to contact no.: 5 (shown in green)
This corresponds to lines TX+ and TX- when a DT21 is used
Wire DECT A2 leads to contact no.: 6 (shown in yellow)
Wire DECT B2 leads to contact no.: 3 (shown in yellow)
That corresponds to wires RX+ and RX- when using a DT21

CSI55 LX 07/2006 649

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

15.5.8.2 LEDs and Switch Functions

DT21 board, front side

1. V.24 Test plug

1 = not assigned
2 = TXD
3 = RXD
4 = not assigned
5 = GND
6 = D channel data upstream
7 = D channel data downstream
8 = Clock burst 2.048 MHz
9 = +5V
Switch Position in Normal Operation

S1 Neutral position
S2 Neutral position

650 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

Switch Function

S1 links: Preparatory disabling

Mean: Operating status/release
Right: Reset board
Right, then left: Forced board download
S2 Left, then right: Report (fault statistic message to the system console) The
switch must be moved back to the middle position after use (2
MHz clock output off) or to the right (2 MHz clock output on).
Mean: Normal operating mode / 2 MHz clock output off
Right: 2 MHz clock output on

Meanings of LEDs

L1 On: Board is busy with switching functions

Flashing: Board removable after preparatory disabling
off: Board is not busy
L2 On: Module is synchronous clock supplier
L3 On: Remote Alarm Indication RAI (opposite side reporting fault
status)
L4 On: Alarm Indication Signal AIS (opposite side reporting ”Out of
Order”)
L5 On: Loss of Signal LOS (no receiving signal)
L6 On: Rx E bit errors
L7 On: Board reset in progress
Flashing: Download in progress
off: Board in operation
L8 On: Normal operation (layer 1 active, no alarm)
L9 On: Bit error rate > 10-6
L10 On: Bit error rate > 10-3
L11 On: Loss of Framing LOF (loss of frame synchronization)
L12 On: The LED signals an activated debug monitoring. LED 12 is
used as indicator as this debugging applies to the real time
function of the module. It is possible to activate the debugging
with a connected terminal and finally removing the terminal -
then the debugging remains on and unaffected.

In order to connect an IDM to the front panel, an optional component must be inserted on the
DT21, reference number: 49.9801.4247.

15.5.9 HSCBO High Speed Computer Board Office

Short description
HSCBO (High Speed Computer Board Office) is a computer board (central system control) with dynamic RAM.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 651

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

Features
Optionally with parity
128 kByte ERROR flash-PROM
512 kByte Boot flash-PROM
Buffered real time clock
Two-level hardware watchdog
Hardware status register
C-bus interface
4 B channel accesses
2x V.24 interfaces (not insulated)
Downloadable
2x interfaces for Compactflash memory cards

Other features
Power demand +5V 1900 mA with 1 * Compact Flash (HGS)
The Compact Flash can be replaced during operation.

15.5.9.1 LEDs and Switch Functions

1. Position of the control elements and LEDs

Control elements and LEDs of the HSCBO

HSCBO board, front side

Switch Position in Normal Operation

652 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

S1 Middle position
S3 lower position

Switch Function

S1 Reset switch and MI button

Middle: Operating status
Left: Reset of the board, locking
Right: Monitor interruption (TENOBUG start), keying
S3 Hard Disk Change Request (HDCHR)
below: Operating status: PC-CARD-ATA-interfaces in operation
above: Service position: Removing and inserting the HGS(s)

Meanings of LEDs

L2 Indicates module data transfer via the C-bus (e.g. call at subcriber)
L3 Indicates access to the inserted background memory
L4 Indicates that the HGS(s) can be removed
L5 Indicates that the system terminal can be connected to the first V.24 interface (service)
L7- L10 The LEDs flash to indicate the status from reset to operation. The display remains lit for
about 5 seconds if a fault is found in the loading phases 15 to 7 (see following table). If a
fatal fault occurs, the reset process is repeated from the beginning (loading phase 15).

No. L7 L8 L9 L10 Phase name

15 1 1 1 1 Start reset phase
14 1 1 1 0 Test flash-PROM
13 1 1 0 1 Test QUICC
12 1 1 0 0 Test real time clock
11 1 0 1 1 Test C-bus interface
10 1 0 1 0 Test DUART (V.24 ports)
9 1 0 0 1 Test dynamic RAM
8 1 0 0 0 Output hardware image
7 0 1 1 1 End reset phase
6 0 1 1 0 Initial program loading (IPL)/IPL ready flag
5 0 1 0 1 STIN program loader is loaded and started
4 0 1 0 0 Operating system has been loaded and started (restart)
3 0 0 1 1 User programs (have been dispatched) have been loaded
2 0 0 1 0 Start of customer data loading in the user programs
1 0 0 0 1 All customer data loaded Start commissioning of module(s)
0 0 0 0 0 Module(s) in operation

CSI55 LX 07/2006 653

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

1 = LED on
0 = LED off

15.5.10 IPN Intelligent Private Network

Short description
The board IPN module enables the operation of intelligent private networks between systems (CSI55, I33) by
means of data transmission in the speech channel of a digital dial-up line.

Other features
Power demand +5V 710 mA
Up to 15 IPN connections are possible per board.
Board software download.
Board identification using board pass
Maintenance function

The board must operate in conjunction with an ISDN exchange board.

15.5.10.1 Installation

Base Unit
The IPN board can be inserted in the slots shown below.

1. Slots of the IPN board

Details:
The IPN board has no connection via the Western socket.

654 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

15.5.10.2 LEDs and Switch Functions

IPN board, front side

Switch Position

S1 Left: Preparatory disabling

Right: Reset board
S2 Left: Board status display not possible at a terminal for testing
purposes, as Sub-D plug is not equipped
S3 Left: Test
S4 Left: Further status display of the board is not possible at a terminal
for testing purposes, as Sub-D plug is not equipped
S5 Left: Protocol output ’on’
S6 No function

Meanings of LEDs

L1 on: At least 1 connecting circuit is occupied

flashing: All connecting circuits are blocked
off: Operating status
L2 No function
L3 flashing: defective DSPA test
1x Reserved
2x Checksum failure
3x X-RAM defect
4x Y-RAM defect

CSI55 LX 07/2006 655

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

5x SSI defect
6x Illegal instruction
7x Receive SSI with overflow
8x Transmit SSI with underrun
9x Stack overflow
10x Illegal host message received
11x Field 2 info has been received before
13x External RAM error
14x External ROM error
off: Operating status
L4 No function
L5 on: At least one occupancy is active (occupancy summation
display)
off: Operating status
L6 on: Reset status
flashing: Download in progress
off: Operating status
L7 on: Logging switched on
L8 flashing: See L3 function
off: Operating status
L9 No function
12x Main program runtime > 125 µs
L10 on: At least one channel blocked
flashing: At least one channel defective
off: Operating status

15.5.11 MBO Motherboard Office

Short description
The MBO board (Motherboard Office) combines in the BU the functional units of the central functions (CF22)
and part of the analogue and digital interfaces (max. 40 port). For cost reduction of the MBO (number of
layers), the digital signalling processors that belong to the CF22 have been passed to the DSPO submodule.
Together with the HSCBO board and the PSO they constitute the fundamental components of the I55-Compact
system. Via the adapter module SBAO the VOIP and DECT21 boards can be connected to the system.

Features

Clock Supply and Module Synchronization

External synchronization via network nodes (S0, S2M)
Master free-run clock mode (internal clocking)

656 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

Module Switching Matrix

Bit rate 4,096 MBit/s
Module internal non-blocking

11 DTMF receiver sets, 4 DTMF transmitters (only for dialling)

Call Progress Tones

A maximum of 16 call progress tones can be generated as customer-specific or country-specific and can
be cyclically repeated. At the same time unrestricted supply is possible.
In addition, a maximum of 3 tones with burst character can be supplied.

Short Voice Messages

Up to 8 voice messages or “music on holds” can be used. The total duration of all brief voice messages
must be no longer than 64 sec.

Long Voice Messages

2 voice messages with unspecified time limits and confidata can be set up (connecting message devices
via analogue subscriber line circuits). At the same time unrestricted supply is possible.

Tone Injection in Two-Party Conversations

Up to 3 various cyclic tones can be generated which may be fed into a maximum of 15 two-party
conversations (e.g. call waiting tone, rolling tone etc.).

Conferences
The system software only allows three-party conferences.

Call number ID
8 DTMF transmitters for CLIP (call number indication on analogue terminals for incoming calls)

With basic equipment, the circuit of the analogue digital Mixboards ADM contains the function of:

• 24 digital UPN interfaces as subscriber poarts

• four ports for S0 or T0 for subscribers or exchange lines (ADM submodule 4, STSM, built in, port 12
through 15)
• four ports for analogue subscribers, a/b (ADM submodule 1, ABSM, built in, port 0 to 3)

In addition, two ADM submodules, from the following list, can be plugged on this port, according to the re-
quirements or configuration (see the following figure).

CSI55 LX 07/2006 657

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

Submodule Features
STSM four S0/T0 interfaces as exchange, permanent connection or subscriber
connection
UPSM four UPN interfaces as subscriber ports
ABSM four analogue subscriber ports (a/b)

2nd slot for subboard 2 (SUB2, port 4-7)

3rd slot for submodule 3 (SUB3, port 8-11)

For the ADM board the ”Call Reference Length - (CRL)” can be set to a length of one or two
bytes for the whole board by means of the ICU editor. The call reference length of 2 bytes is
required for QSIG network connection with some third-party PBX. If this setting is used, all
ports have CRL=2 bytes no matter which protocol is selected. This led to the fact that it was
not possible to connect subscribers / lines with the protocols TN1R6, 1TR6, DKZN, VN3, NI2
and ETSI with CRL=1 to this ADM board.
As of software version ADM0900.ICL / ADM00009.ICP of the ICU, the behaviour of the ADM
board and of the Integral 55 Compact-ADM port has changed. The CRL setting is only
adopted for the ports of the board which uses the ”QSIG” protocol. For all other protocolos
the call reference length will always be CRL=1.
This makes it possible to configure QSIG ports with CRL=2 for networks with third-party
systems, while on other ports with the protocols TN1R6, 1TR6, DKZN, VN3, NI2 and ETSI
the CRL=1 is used.

Other features
Countries of application Application in all countries
Power demand +5V 6000 mA
Interfaces Standard 24 times UPN

658 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

Other features
4 times a/b
4 times S0
Optional (max. 2 4 times UPN
submodules) 4 times a/b
4 times S0
Overvoltage protection up to 4 kV
Download board software
Board identification using board passport
In case of logging adapter plug RJ45/D-Sub, material number: 49.9905.9171, has to be used.
In conjunction with ports of the ADM and DUPN protocol interfaces for boards on the PBX front side.

15.5.11.1 Details

ADM on MBO

Slot address: 03.01.01-xx

CBI address: 08 hex.
xx = port number

Connections port ADM on MB0 to contact strip 3

CSI55 LX 07/2006 659

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

DUPN on MBO

Slot address: 05.01.01-xx

CBI address: 0A hex.
xx = port number

Connections port DUPN on MB0 to contact strip 1 (port) and contact strip 2

15.5.11.2 Current setting

Changes on the MBO are to be executed carefully and using suitable tools because work on
a fundamental component is performed.

660 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

The circuit of the analog/digital Mixboards ADM includes the ABSM, which realises four ports for analogue
subscribers a/b, with a constant power supply of 24 mA. A current changeover to 30 mA is possible. It is
implemented per port, connecting the soldering points shown under 1.

Section of the MBO, position of the ports for analogue subscribers

CSI55 LX 07/2006 661

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

1. Per port (AO) in case of current changeover to 30 mA, insert bridge.

Section of the MBO, soldering points for one port (AO)

Other features
Line resistance 2 x 475 Ohm
range: 4 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,4 mm
9 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,6 mm
15 km installation cable J-Y(ST)Y Ø0,8 mm

662 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

15.5.11.3 LEDs and Switch Functions

1. Position of the control elements and LEDs

Control elements and LEDs of the MBO

Switch block and LED block of the CF22

Switch Functions

S1 Reset switch
Middle: Operating status
Below (left): Reset of the board, locking
Above (right): Reset of the board, keying
On the HSCBO board the switch for the memory test does not
exist. In order to be able to execute a restart by means of the
switch, the S1 switch of the MBO must be turned upwards
(reset of the CF22). As a result, the HSCBO also executes a
restart.

Meanings of LEDs

L1 (green) Power Good

on: All required operating voltages are present
off: Failure of one operating voltage

CSI55 LX 07/2006 663

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

L2 (green) CLKUSYN Clock unit synchronization

on: Module clock system is synchronized
L3 (red) MSMC MSMC active/inactive
on: MSMC (switching matrix processor unit) resetting/inactive
flashing: MSMC downloading or waiting for commissioning
off: MSMC active
L4 (yellow) MANK Master network node
on: External synchronous clock switched on for synchronization by
the system software

LED block of the DUPN

L1 (green) on: Board is busy with switching functions

flashing: All AOs blocked after preparatory disabling (VSP)
off: Board is not busy
L2 (red) on: Board reset in progress
flashing: Download in progress
off: Board in operation

LED block of the ADM

L1 (green) on: Board is busy with switching functions

flashing: All AOs blocked after preparatory disabling (VSP)
off: Board is not busy
L2 (red) on: Board reset in progress
flashing: Download in progress
off: Board in operation

LED block of the EU (Extension Unit)

Not yet implemented
LED block of the SPY
Not yet implemented

15.5.12 SBAO System Board Adapter Office

Short description
The SBAO board (System Board Adapter Office) is a small backplane which provides two connecting circuit
slots with most signals and tensions used in the I55. It is built in the BU.

15.5.13 VOIP Voice over IP Board

Short description

664 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

For the VOIP board and all additional information for setup, dimensioning etc. you can find a detailed descrip-
tion under Notes concerning VoIP.
It is shown once again in the figure below.

VOIP board, component side

1. Speech compression / packetizing

2. Echo cancellation

The basic board VOIP (material number: 49.9903.7976) has 6 slots for SOM-2 submodules, with two DSP
chips each(Digital Signal Processing Small Outline Module 2, material number: 49.9903.7980) in order to
increase the number of DSP chips used in the system. These DSP chips have two functions:

• Voice compression, in order to pack voice information from the highway into data packets and thus to
compress the speech data when desired (from G.711 64 kbit/s to G.729A 8kbit/s)
• Echo cancellation for the voice connection from the IP terminal to the ISDN/analog terminals

The upper three slots (in the centre of the board) are used for voice compression and packetizing, while the
lower three slots are used for echo cancellation.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 665

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

Due to the very high cost of DSP chips, the number of SOM-2 submodules must be selected in accordance
with the customer configuration (see calculation of the number of SOM-2 submodules).
In addition, 4 DSP chips are soldered on the VoIP board. These are responsible for central functions such as
announcements, mixers, and tone input, and support a fixed number of channels for voice compression and
echo cancellation.
The VOIP board connection to the peripherals is done via the AEV24B cable adapter.

Other features
Application Integration of the CSI55 extensions into the existing IP-based data network
environment of the customer (LAN, WAN, Corporate Network)
Power demand +5V 1800 mA additionally per SOM-2: 240 mA

15.5.13.1 Installation

Base Unit
The VOIP board is always inserted into the upper slot (slot 01).

1. Slot for the VoIP board

In the Integral 55 Compact the slots are addressed in such a way that the neighbouring slots always remain
free. Therefore, the VOIP board can occupy 64 channels if required.
Details

Slot address: 01.01.01-11 to 01.01.01-62

01.01.01-00-S to 01.01.01-62-S
02.01.01-00 to 02.01.01-62
02.01.01-00-S to 02.01.01-62-S
CBI address: 06 hex.

666 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

1. V24. Console of the VOIP board

Connections VOIP to contact strip 1

Connections see: Connections from the BU → 680.

15.5.13.2 LEDs and Switch Functions

In the figure below the view of the front panel and the funktions of the switches and LEDs.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 667

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

View of the front panel

Switch Functions

S1 Left: Preparatory disabling (VSP)

Middle: Operating status/release
Right: Reset
Right, then left: Forced board download

Meanings of LEDs

L1 on: Module is busy in terms of exchange functions (active layer

3 connection)
flashing: Board removable after preparatory disabling
off: Board is not busy
L2 POWER on: All voltages (5V, 3.3V, DSP on-board VCC 1.8V and
GOOD) PQUICC Vcore currently 2.5V) are within their permitted
ranges of tolerance
L3 (ETH Link) on: Ethernet Link has been established
L4 (ETH on: 100Mbit transmission is in process (SPEED)
10/100)
L5 (ETH flashing: Activity on the Ethernet (transmitting and receiving ends)
active)
L6 on: Board reset in progress
flashing: Download in progress
off: Board in operation
L7 on: Status LED 2/3

668 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

L8 on: Status LED 2/2

L9 on: Status LED 2/1
L10 on: Status LED 2/0

15.6 Power supply

In principle, the Integral 55 Compact can be connected to the mains voltage 230 V, 50 Hz and 60 Hz. The
fuse protection for every electric circuit consists of a C Type 16 A slow acting automatic circuit breaker. It is a
separate electric circuit (phase and fuse).
As power supply module the PSO is available. This device is designed for direct supply.

15.6.1 PSO Power Supply Office

Short description
The PSO board (Power Supply Office) provides the required voltages for the Integral 55 Compact. Additionally,
two module fans are connected to it.
It has the following features:

• Harmonics as per EN 61000 (PFC).

• Jamming immunity input 4 kV (1.2/50).
• Delayed disconnection of the -48V output in the case of overload/short-circuit
• Delayed disconnection of device during overload/short-circuit of +5 V output.
• Board passport
• I2C-bus connection

Technical data

Voltages and Frequencies

Mains voltage 230V; ±10 % (single-phase alternating current)
Mains frequency 47 - 63Hz
Reduced voltage +5,1V, -5V, -48V
AC ringing voltage 72 V
Ringing voltage frequency 47 - 63Hz
Protection class 1 (in accordance with VDE 0100)
Radio interference Limit class B (in accordance with EN 55022 and VDE 878)
suppression

Device Input Side, power and currents

Pprim 138W
Iprim 0.6A

CSI55 LX 07/2006 669

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

Device Output Side, power and currents

P 102W
+5.1V 10A
-5V 0.2A
-48V 1A, included fan
72V 0,04A

All outputs are short-circuit-proof.

In the embedded document on
PSO
you can find more information about the product.

15.6.1.1 Replacement

If necessary, the power supply module is replaced on site.

Proceed as follows:

1. Withdraw the power cable on the IEC power plug.

2. Remove the IEC power plug from the rear side of the housing (two screws).
3. Open the unit (refer to openingof housing).
4. Remove the cover plate from the PSO (1 screw).
5. Pull the connecting cable from the PSO (two blower- and 1 connecting cable).

6. Loosen fixing screws (five screws).

7. Loosen earthing screw (one screw marked with the earthing symbol).

670 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

8. Remove PSO and replace.

9. To reassemble, follow this procedure in reverse.
Ensure good contact between the housing floor and the PSO circuit board by means of the earth-
ing screw, so that the requirements of EN 60950 have been fulfilled (earth conductor to housing
</= 0.1 ohm).

Housing open → 602

15.6.2 PE or FPE

The Integral 55 Compact can be connected with either a PE or an FPE.

PE
The Integral 55 Compact can be protected by fixed earthing conductor (PE) with lockable plug and cable:

• Length 3m, part no. 4,998,045,750

• Length 5m, part no. 4,998,069,828

By this alternative, connection of the Integral 55 Compact to the equipotential bonding strip via a separate
copper wire is not necessary. The main application is likely to be in the form of table and upright units.
FPE
If an FPE is available, this can be used. The main application in this case will be wall and cabinet mounting,
althought this does not rule out the table and upright unit.
For connecting the Integral 55 Compact to the mains supply use the power cable with cut off PE:

• Length 3m, material number: 4.999.079.215

• Length 5m, material number: 4.999.079.453

The Integral 55 Compact may only be connected with a variant (PE or FPE).
Loop formation!

15.6.2.1 Connection of the PE

Insert the earthing pin plug of the connecting cable into the Integral 55 Compact.
If you insert the earth plug into the receptacle and press the black lock, the plug will be locked.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 671

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

1. Wall socket
2. Lock (black)

3. Earth plug, lockable with cable

Putting the system into operation.

Unlocking and pulling the earth plug
Shut down the system.
Use a screwdriver to pull out the black lock approx. 10 mm.
The plug is unlocked and can be removed.

672 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

1. Wall socket
2. Lock (black)
3. Screwdriver

15.6.2.2 Connection of the FPE

Secure the earthing wire with a cable fastener onto the lug of the housing (1.).

CSI55 LX 07/2006 673

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

Clamp the insulated end of the stripped copper wire (FPE=green/yellow, >/= 4 mm2) in the terminal (2.) at
the back of the housing.

Check that the FPE on the equipotential bonding strip and PABX has been properly
connected!

When you place the Integral 55 Compact into the cabinet, a 2,5 mm earth conductor2 with wire sleeves on
both ends is available. The earth conductor is a delivered together with the cabinets.

15.7 View of module in the ISM

The module view shows a sample configuration with VoIP and DECT21 boards.

674 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

15.8 Commissioning

Make sure that all cables have been secured.

Cover the free slots of the front AO boards with slot covers.
Insert the safety plug of the power supply cord into the earthing contact socket provided for the purpose.

1. Position of the control elements and LEDs

Switching on with ACBO module (= Advanced Computer Board Office)

The module is switched on and loads the programs in less than 15 minutes. It is ready for operation when

• the yellow LEDs L7 to L10 are off,

• the green LED L3 flashes and
• the green LED L2 is lit.

CSI55 LX 07/2006 675

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

Switching on with HSCBO module (= High Speed Computer Board Office)

The module is switched on and loads the programs in less than 10 minutes. It is ready for operation when

• the yellow LEDs L7 to L10 are off and

• the green LED L2 is flashing.

15.9 Cable network

Join the cables from the connecting devices at the front side(s) of the Integral 55 Compact with the patch field
or main distribution frame using the cable set.

15.9.1 Cross-connect cable

Two cable versions are available for connecting the AO ports on the front side(s) of the Integral 55 Compact
with the main distribution frame and a Y adapter for the RBS port:

15.9.1.1 Cable with open end

Cable with solid copper wires, like installation cable J-Y(ST)Y, must be used for connecting the Integral 55
Compact to a conventional main distribution frame (e.g. plug-and-cut method).
8x WE8/4 cable with open end
The cable with material number 4.999.020.564 conforms to requirements and fits all connecting devices. This
also applies to an S2M interface when a DT21 is plugged into the BU instead of the DECT21.

676 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

External ring (1.)

1. RD/BL
2. WH/YE
3. WH/GN
4. WH/BN
5. WH/BK
6. WH/BL
7. WH/YE
8. WH/GN
9. WH/BN
10. WH/BK
11. WH/BL

Internal ring (2.)

12. RD/YE
13. WH/GN
14. WH/BN
15. WH/BL
16. WH/BL

Cable 8xWE8/4 (16x2x0,6) 5m, material number: 4.999.020.564, with assignment

CSI55 LX 07/2006 677

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

W 1 free W 1 free W 1 free W 1 free

E1 2 free E2 2 free E3 2 free E4 2 free
3 WH (P2) 3 WH (P4) 3 WH (P6) 3 WH (P8)
4 RD (P1) 4 WH (P3) 4 WH (P5) 4 WH (P7)
5 BL (P1) 5 GN (P3) 5 BK (P5) 5 YE (P7)
6 YE (P2) 6 BN (P4) 6 BL (P6) 6 GN (P8)
7 free 7 free 7 free 7 free
8 free 8 free 8 free 8 free

W 1 free W 1 free W 1 free W 1 free

E5 2 free E6 2 free E7 2 free E8 2 free
3 WH (P10) 3 WH (P12) 3 WH (P14) 3 WH (P16)
4 WH (P9) 4 WH (P11) 4 WH (P13) 4 WH (P15)
5 BN (P9) 5 BL (P11) 5 GN (P13) 5 BK (P15)
6 BK (P10) 6 YE (P12) 6 BN (P14) 6 BL (P16)
7 free 7 free 7 free 7 free
8 free 8 free 8 free 8 free

e.g. P11 = pair 11

Assignment of the WE plugs
Cable WE8/8, with open end
The cable with material number 4.999.089.690 (length 10m) is used when

• a T0exchange line (ADM board with STSM) at a NTBA

or
• the ATA board with eight exchange lines is inserted in the BU

must be connected.

678 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

Ring (1.)
1. RD/BL
2. WH/YE
3. WH/GN
4. WH/BN

Cable WE8/8 (10m) with assignment, material number: 4.999.089.690

W 1 WH (P4)
E1 2 BN (P4)
3 WH (P2)
4 RD (P1)
5 BL (P1)
6 YE (P2)
7 WH (P3)
8 GN (P3)

e.g. P4 = pair 4
Assignment of the WE plug
Connection of the RBS
For the DECT connections in the BU are required (see RBS connection → 680). It splits the two connections.
Alternately, in the BU it is also possible to use the WE8/8 cable with open end for wiring the DECT connections.

15.9.1.2 Patch Cable

The following connecting cables are used for the connection of the connecting circuits (RJ45 sockets on the
front side(s) of the Integral 55 Compact) to an main distributor made up of patch panels:

Patch cords Length Material number

1m 4.998.051.621
3m 4.999.045.218
5m 4.999.048.490

CSI55 LX 07/2006 679

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

10m 4.998.055.426

Y adapters are required for the DECT connections (see RBS connection → 680). It splits the two connections.

Exception!
When a T0 exchange line must be wired, the WE8/8 cable with open end (length 10m),
material number 4.999.089.690 must be used and connected to the NTBA.

15.9.1.3 RBS connection

Note that at the DECT21 sockets, in case of direct connection of the cable, only 1 RBS can be operated per
plug. If both RBS connections of one socket are to be used, between cable plug and connection socket, the
Y-adapter 8/8 to 2x 4/8, material number: 4,999,028,515 is to be used.
The adapter splits the two connections.
The pinning of the RJ45 sockets for the RBSs on the front side results in the pinning of the RJ45-Y-adapter
8/8 to 2x 4/8.

15.9.2 Connections from the BU

The connections of the connecting circuits are located on the front side of the Integral 55 Compact

680 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

1. Contact strip 1
2. Contact strip 2
3. Contact strip 3

RJ45 socket pin assignment

On the contact strip 1 are present:

• Protocol interface of the ADM board

• Protocol interface of the DUPN board
• Protocol interface of the VOIP board
• Ethernet connection of the VOIP board
• Connections for eight Radio Base Stations
1. RBS 0/1
2. RBS 2/3
3. RBS 4/5
4. RBS 6/7
or
at 1st the S2Mconnection for the DT21 board
or
at 1st and 2nd eight analog exchange lines of the ATA board
or
at 1st S2Mconnection of the CAS board
• Connections for the last eight UPN subscribers

CSI55 LX 07/2006 681

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

• Connections of DECT21 (RBS/S2M) or DT21

Connections of DECT21 (RBS0) or DT21
Wire DECT A1 leads to contact no.: 4
Wire DECT B1 leads to contact no.: 5
This corresponds to lines TX+ and TX- when a DT21 is used
wire DECT A2 leads to contact no.: 6
Wire DECT B2 leads to contact no.: 3
This corresponds to lines RX+ and RX- when a DT21 is used
Connections of DECT21 (RBS1)
Wire DECT A3 leads to contact no.: 7
Wire DECT B3 leads to contact no.: 8
Wire DECT A4 leads to contact no.: 1
Wire DECT B4 leads to contact no.: 2

On the contact strip 2 are present:

• Connections for the first 16 UPN subscribers

On the contact strip 3 are present:

• Connections for four analogue a/b subscribers

• Connections for four S0 or T0 for subscribers or exchange lines

and optionally (depending on the equipment of the two slots of the ADM with submodules UPSM, ABSM or
STSM)

• Connections for four UPN subscribers

• Connections for four analogue a/b subscribers

or

• Connections for four S0 or T0 for subscribers or exchange lines

682 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

Front views
RJ45 sockets
Front view of RJ45 sockets from above

Front view of RJ45 sockets from below

Signal assignment

Board Signal at RJ45 pin Remarks

(Submodule)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ADM GND a b
(ABSM)

ADM A2 A1 B1 B2 A1/B1 = S0 Tx, A2/B2 = S0 Rx

(STSM)

CSI55 LX 07/2006 683

15 Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX

Board Signal at RJ45 pin Remarks

(Submodule)

ADM GND A B GND

(UPSM)

DUPN A B

DECT21 A4 B4 B2 A1 B1 A2 A3 B3 4 x UP0 per RJ45 for 2 x RBS

DT21 B2 A1 B1 A2 A1/B1 = TX+/TX- (S2M), A2/B2=

RX+/RX- (S2M)

ATA a4 b4 b2 a1 b1 a2 a3 b3 2 x 4 AOs per RJ45

CAS B2 A1 B1 A2 A1/B1 = TX+/TX- (S2M), A2/B2=

RX+/RX- (S2M)

VOIP [ETH] Tx P Tx M Rx P *1 *1 Rx M *1 *1 *1 Configuration see below

VOIP [V24] TxD RxD GND V24 signal level (no TTL)

ADM [V24] TxD RxD GND V24 signal level (no TTL)

DUPN TxD RxD GND V24 signal level (no TTL)

[V24]

HSCBO TxD RxD DSR GND DTR CTS RTS V24 signal level (no TTL)
[V24]
ACBO TxD RxD DSR GND DTR CTS RTS V24 signal level (no TTL)
[V24]

*1

684 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 16 Index

16 Index

33HU, 61 Block diagram of R1 rack, 160

42HU 500mm, 64 Board overview, 220, 292, 380, 502
42HU 730mm, 65 Boards, 156, 609
42HU-can be disassembled, 66 BS Confidata:, 517
BVT2, 387
19, 59, 94
CA, 240
About this Manual, 14, 590
CA1B, 242, 391
ABSM, 293
CA2B, 243, 392
ABSM1, 294
CA3B, 243, 393
ACB, 162, 221
CA3B/T, 244, 394
ACBO, 610
CA4B, 245, 395
ACSM, 298
CA5B, 245, 395
ADM, 301, 381
CA6B, 246, 396
AEV24B, 230
Cable network, 545, 676
Air conditioning, 82
CARUB, 248
ALSM, 307
CAS, 397, 632
ALSMF, 308
CBI, 172
ALSMH, 309
CBT, 580
Analog interfaces, 292
CBT C-Bus Tester, 580
ASC2, 310
CF22, 173, 248
ASC21, 314, 615
CF2E, 180, 256
ASCxx, 233, 324, 623
CL2M, 188, 401
ASM3, 171
Commissioning, 675
ATA, 330, 628
Configuration Examples, 565
ATA2, 333
Configurations, 158
ATB, 336
Connections from CSI, 545
ATC, 338
Connections to V.24 Interfaces, 18
ATLC, 341
Connector technology and signaling, 220
AV24B, 239
Contact occupation of the modular plug connection,
567
B3 module, 116
Control, Central Functions and Transport, 161
B3 module (multi-module), 48
BA, 579 DCON, 403
BA Board Adapter, 579 DDID, 355
Base Unit, 598 Delivery and transportation, 16

CSI55 LX 07/2006 685

16 Index

Digital interfaces, 380 Integral- Com- Center- ICC- V 33 F, 92

DS02, 418 Interface Configuration, 525
DS03, 421 Intermodule Handover, 569
DSPF, 190, 642 IP Telephoning Gateways, 502
DT0, 424 IPN, 473, 654
DUP03, 430 ISMx, 206
DUPN, 432 ISPS, 125, 126
ISPS (IMTU Supplementary Power Supply), 125
Earthing concept, 136
EDU, 263 JPAT, 357
EES0B, 266, 270, 436, 441
Line, 119
EESS0, 269, 440
Line lengths, 564
EESxB, 275
LWL-specifications, 568
EMAC, 447
Environmental Conditions, 16 MAC, 475
EOCMM, 195 MAHC, 584
EOCPF, 194 MAHC Measuring Adapter Half Channel, 584
EOCSM, 195 Measuring and Testing Tools, 579
ESB, 276 MLB, 43, 53, 209
EU Declaration of Conformity, 19 MLBIML, 212
Expansion options, 26 Module summary, 161
Modules, 32
Front, 602
MULI, 487
Fuse Panel, 117
Multi-module, 148
Fuse panels, 116
Note on DECT:, 569
GCU configuration, 517 Notes to VolP, 577

HAMUX, 447 OFA2B, 290, 491

HSCB, 197, 281 OFAS, 290, 491
Operator sets, 578
ICF, 202, 285
Overview of components (1), 67
ICS (multi-module), 41
Overview of components (2), 73
Important notes, 591
IMUX, 458 Packages, 517
Index, 685 PLSM, 359
Integral 55 Compact / Integral 55 Compact LX, 590 Power consumption, 142
Integral- Com- Center- ICC- V 01, 92 Power supply, 94, 669
Integral- Com- Center- ICC- V 02, 93 Power supply for DECT, 574

686 CSI55 LX 07/2006

 16 Index

Product description, 593 SUTC, 373

Product overview, 20 SUTD, 379
Protective earthing, 16
Technical Data, 27
PS280A, 123
TER, 292
PS350A, 124
The structure of the cables, 575
PSL55, 122
Twin module, 146
Ranges, 564
UIP, 495
Required Servicing Procedures, 17
Uninterrupted Power Supply, 126
S64LI, 492
Universal installation aids, 91
Safety Information, 15
UPS, 126, 127, 130
Selection of cabinets for installation of the Integral 55,
80 V24I, 220
SIGA, 361 V24IA V24 Interface Adapter, 588
SIGB, 362 V24M, 220, 501
SIGC, 363 V24NI, 220
SIGD, 363 View of module in the ISM, 674
SIGE, 364
SIGF, 365 W modules, 380

SIGG, 366
SIGH, 366
Single and twin module, 32
Single module, 143
SP1 Spy Probe 1 (SP1), 587
SPCU, 493
SSBA, 367
SSBB, 368
SSBC, 369
SSBD, 369
SSSM, 370
Standing casing, 59
Structure, 20
STSM, 494
Suitable cable types used to connect DECT RBS, 574
SUPA, 371
SUPB, 372
Supply of the DECT-Net Base Station to the Integral
55, 574

CSI55 LX 07/2006 687

 IP Telephony

Contact Centers

Mobility

Services
Blindtext Blindtext Blindtext –
Blindtext Blindtext Blindtext Blindtext

Bedienungsanleitung
Operating instructions
Avaya-Tenovis GmbH & Co. KG Manual de manejo
Kleyerstraße 94
60326 Frankfurt am Main Notice d’utilisation
Telefon 0 800 266 - 10 00
Fax 0 800 266 - 12 19 Istruzioni d’uso
[email protected]
© 2005 All rights reserved for Avaya Inc. and Tenovis GmbH & Co. KG.
4.999.000.000 · 07/06 · CSI55 / CSI55LX · gb · avaya.tenovis.de Gebruiksaanwijzing